project manual - Genesee County

Transcription

IFB #12-003 Construction of a Food
Preparation Kitchen for GCCARD
Project No. 11002300
PROJECT MANUAL
IFB #12-003 CONSTRUCTION OF A FOOD
PREPARATION KITCHEN FOR
GENESEE COUNTY C.A.R.D.
2727 Lippincott Boulevard
Flint, Michigan 48507
Genesee County Purchasing Department
1101 Beach Street, Room 200
Issued for Bidding
January 24, 2012
CHMP, INC.
architecture ! engineering
planning ! interior design
landscape architecture
surveying
5198 Territorial Road
!
Grand Blanc, Michigan 48439
TABLE OF CONTENTS
!
810-695-591
DIVISION 0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
00 11 13 - INVITATION TO BID...............................................................................................................................02
00 21 13 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS...............................................................................................................06
00 41 13 - BID/TENDER FORM ................................................................................................................................04
00 43 13 - BID BOND.................................................................................................................................................02
00 43 25 - SUBSTITUTIONS PRIOR TO AWARD OF CONTRACT......................................................................03
00 52 13 - AGREEMENT ...........................................................................................................................................08
00 61 13 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND ................................................................................09
00 72 13 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT...................................................................................39
00 73 13 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS.........................................................................................................07
00 73 16 - INSURANCE .............................................................................................................................................02
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
01 11 13 - SUMMARY OF WORK ............................................................................................................................02
01 14 13 - CONTRACTOR’S USE OF THE PREMISES ..........................................................................................01
01 21 13 - CASH ALLOWANCES AND PERMIT FEES .........................................................................................01
01 23 00 – ALTERNATES..........................................................................................................................................02
01 25 13 - SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS PRIOR TO EXECUTION OF CONTRACT ...............01
01 25 16 - SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS AFTER EXECUTION OF CONTRACT.....................03
01 26 63 - FEES FOR CHANGES IN THE WORK ...................................................................................................01
01 29 73 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT...........................................................................................................03
01 29 76 - PAYMENT FOR DELIVERED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT .......................................................01
01 31 13 - COORDINATION OF WORK BY OTHERS ...........................................................................................01
01 31 19 - PROJECT MEETINGS ..............................................................................................................................02
01 32 26 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES .............................................................................................................03
01 32 29 - PROGRESS REPORT ...............................................................................................................................01
01 33 23 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES AND PROJECT DATA.......................................03
01 52 13 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES .....................................................................................................................02
01 65 13 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT: DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE ....................................02
01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING....................................................................................................................03
01 74 13 - CLEANING UP .........................................................................................................................................02
01 77 13 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT .............................................................................................................................03
01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA..........................................................................................02
01 78 25 - OWNER INSTRUCTION FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS.............................................................02
01 78 36 - WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES.....................................................................................................01
01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................................03
01 78 43 - SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS...........................................................................02
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
02 41 13 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION.....................................................................................................................06
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
03 30 00 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE................................................................................................................14
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
04 20 00 – CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY...............................................................................................................15
DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
05 12 00 – STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING.........................................................................................................08
05 50 00 – METAL FABRICATIONS........................................................................................................................09
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
06 10 00 – ROUGH CARPENTRY ............................................................................................................................07
06 40 23 – INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK .....................................................................................07
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION........................................................................................................................04
07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING ........................................................................................................................................09
07 92 13 - INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS................................................................................................................05
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
08 11 00 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES ...............................................................................................................10
08 33 00 – ROLLING SERVICE DOORS..................................................................................................................05
08 33 24 – ROLLING FIRE DOORS..........................................................................................................................05
08 36 13 – SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS........................................................................................................04
08 71 00 - FINISH HARDWARE ...............................................................................................................................18
08 71 13 – AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS.......................................................................................................08
08 81 00 - GLAZING 03
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
09 26 00 – GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES ..........................................................................................................12
09 31 16 – THIN SET QUARRY TILING..................................................................................................................07
09 51 13 – ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS .........................................................................................................06
09 65 13 – RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES ..................................................................................05
09 65 19 – RESILIENT TILE FLOORING ................................................................................................................05
09 67 16 – EPOXY FLOORING (ALTERNATE NO. ONE) .....................................................................................05
09 77 00 – SPECIAL WALL SURFACING ...............................................................................................................05
09 91 00 – PAINTING ...............................................................................................................................................14
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALITIES
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
10 14 00 – SIGNAGE 03
10 28 13 – TOILET ACCESSORIES..........................................................................................................................03
10 44 16 – PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS.....................................................................................................02
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
11 40 00 – FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT...............................................................................................................20
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
12 35 30 – MANUFACTURED CASEWORK...........................................................................................................06
SECTION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
NOT USED
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
NOT USED
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
21 05 29 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT .....................08
21 13 13 – WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM..........................................................................................................09
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
22 02 00 – PLUMBING EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................05
22 05 19 – METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING ...............................................................................02
22 05 23 – GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING........................................................................04
22 05 29 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ...................................08
22 05 53 – IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.....................................................03
22 07 00 – PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION........................................................................................................05
22 11 16 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING..................................................................................................................04
22 13 16 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING .............................................................................................04
22 13 19 – SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES .........................................................................................04
22 34 36 – COMMERCIAL GAS DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS ........................................................................02
22 42 00 – COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES...............................................................................................05
22 47 00 – DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS ............................................................................03
DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
23 02 00 – HVAC EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS .................................................................07
23 05 13 – COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT .....................................................04
23 05 29 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT..............................................08
23 05 53 – IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ...............................................................04
23 05 93 – TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC...................................................................04
23 07 00 – DUCTWORK INSULATION ...................................................................................................................06
23 11 23 – FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING ......................................................................................................03
23 31 13 – SHEET METAL DUCTWORK ................................................................................................................07
23 31 20 – DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS – SHEET METAL DUCTWORK ...............................................02
23 33 00 – DUCT ACCESSORIES.............................................................................................................................06
23 34 00 – HVAC FANS ..........................................................................................................................................04
23 37 13 – AIR INLETS/OUTLETS...........................................................................................................................03
23 74 13 – PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS .........................................08
23 74 23 – PACKAGED OUTDOOR HEATING ONLY MAKEUP-AIR UNITS....................................................05
23 83 26 – GAS-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS.........................................................................................................03
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
26 05 00 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL................................................................................09
26 05 19 – LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES ........................................04
26 05 26 – GROUNDNG AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS...........................................................02
26 05 29 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS .............................................................03
26 05 33 – RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS...................................................................07
26 05 53 – IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS...............................................................................03
26 24 00 – DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT ...............................................................................................................04
26 27 26 – WIRING DEVICES...................................................................................................................................03
26 51 00 – LIGHTING ................................................................................................................................................05
26 52 00 – LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM............................................................................................................04
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
27 05 29 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS GENERAL .................................................................................................02
DIVISION 28 – SECURITY SYSTEMS
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
28 05 13 – SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM................................................................................................................01
DIVISION 31 – EARTH WORK
SECTION
NUMBER
TITLE
# OF
PAGES
31 20 00 – EARTH MOVING.....................................................................................................................................09
31 50 00 – EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION ...................................................................................03
APPENDIX
# OF
PAGES
EXHIBIT A:
GENESEE COUNTY REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS...........................................................................04
EXHIBIT B:
GENESEE COUNTY MAJOR CONTRACT ADDENDUM .................................................10
SECTION 00 11 13 - INVITATION TO BID
The Genesee County Purchasing Department will receive and open sealed bids on Tuesday, February 14, 2012 from
General Contractors at the Genesee County Purchasing Department located at 1101 Beach Street, Room 200, Flint,
Michigan 48502, for Genesee County Card Food Preparation Kitchen located at 2727 Lippincott Boulevard Flint,
Michigan 48507. In general, the project shall consist of the following:
1.
The project consists of interior renovations/build out for a new 5,787 s.f. commercial kitchen and 2,347
s.f. pantry. The existing space is currently used as a parking garage and storage area. Work shall include
minor interior demolition; Construction of new gypsum board wall partitions; interior finishes including
floor (quarry, vinyl tile, & epoxy flooring), wall painting, FRP paneling, and acoustical suspended
ceilings; interior doors, frames, and hardware (including automatic powered doors); thermal insulation;
lighting and power; fire alarm devices; Plumbing fixtures and piping; modifications and additions to the
existing H.V.A.C. system; fire suppression system upgrades; and new kitchen equipment.
Bids will be received by the Genesee County Purchasing Department located at 1101 Beach Street, Room 200, Flint,
Michigan 48502 until 2:00 p.m., Tuesday, February 14, 2012, from General Contractors. Bids received will be
publicly opened and read aloud following receipt of bids. All bidders are invited to attend the bid opening. LATE
BIDS AND BIDS SENT BY FACSIMILE OR E-MAIL WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED.
Prospective bidders may obtain the Bid Documents after 1:00 p.m., Tuesday, January 24, 2012 at the Genesee
County Purchasing Department’s website (http://www.gc4me.com/departments/purchasing). Bid documents will be
available to General Contractors at no charge. Each set will consist of one electronic file with plans and
specifications in .PDF format. In addition, other arrangements for obtaining a set of bid documents can be made in
advance by contacting the Genesee County Purchasing Department located at 1101 Beach Street, Room 200, Flint,
Michigan 48502, Telephone: (810) 257-3030; Fax (810) 257-3380.
A mandatory pre-bid meeting will be held at the Genesee County Community Action Resource Department’s
Weatherization and Commodities Program, 2727 Lippincott Boulevard Flint, Michigan 48507, followed by a tour
of the target space on Monday, January 30, 2012 at 10:00 a.m. (ET). All bidders and sub-contractors are
encouraged to attend this pre-bid meeting. This will be the only opportunity for bidders to examine the target area
scheduled for the renovation work. At this meeting, the bid documents will be reviewed with the opportunity to
clarify any questions relative to the project scope.
Each bid shall be accompanied by a cashier’s check or a bid bond by an approved surety company in the amount of
five percent (5%) of the base bid payable to the Owner (Genesee County), and will be forfeited to the Owner on
failure to enter into a contract within ten (10) days after notice of acceptance of the Bid.
No bid may be withdrawn for a period of one hundred twenty (120) days after due date of bids. Bids offering less
than one hundred twenty (120) days for acceptance by the Owner from the date set for opening will be considered
non-responsive and will be rejected.
Evaluation and Award: The contract will be awarded to the lowest responsive and responsible bidder whose bid
(including unit pricing) is determined to be most advantageous to the County. Unless otherwise indicated in the
Invitation for Bids, Genesee County reserves the right to award the contract in whole or in part, by item, by group of
items, or by section where such action serves the best interests of Genesee County. Genesee County reserves the
right to reject any or all bids, to waive any informality or irregularity in any bid, and to negotiate with the apparent
successful bidder in the best interest of Genesee County.
Preparation of Bids and Cost: All costs incurred in the preparation of a bid in response to this invitation for bids will
be the responsibility of the bidder, and will not be reimbursed by Genesee County. Bids should be prepared simply
and economically, providing a straightforward, concise description of the bidder’s ability to meet the requirements
of this invitation for bids.
INVITATION TO BID
00 11 13 - 1
Conflicts of Interest: Each bidder, by submitting a bid, represents that the bidder has no knowledge that any
employee, representative or agent of the bidder is a County employee who has directly or indirectly participated on
behalf of the County in the contemplated procurement, or that any County employee who has so participated or any
member of such an employee’s immediate family has a financial interest pertaining to the contemplated procurement
from the bidder, and represents that the bidder reasonably believes that no employee, representative or agent of
bidder is a County employee who has so participated and that no County employee who has so participated or
member of that employee’s immediate family has a financial interest in the contemplated procurement from the
bidder.
Successful bidder will be required to furnish performance, and labor and material bonds in an amount equal to one
hundred percent (100%) of the contract amount.
Surety on such bonds shall be a duly authorized company satisfactory to the Owner.
Prevailing Wage Requirements: All contractors and subcontractors shall pay its laborers and mechanics not less
than the prevailing wage rates and fringe benefits for corresponding classes of laborers and mechanics employed on
similar projects in the area. For the purposes of this solicitation, a Contractor shall be in compliance if the
Contractor is in compliance with the Davis-Bacon Act, 40 U.S. C. §3141, et seq., and pays wages consistent with the
prevailing wage rates published by the United States Department of Labor. Genesee County shall, at a minimum,
take the following actions with regards to enforcement of the Prevailing Wage requirements:
1.
2.
3.
The County shall require the Contractor to submit a certified payroll record consistent with requirements
established by the Davis Bacon Act.
The County shall review the certified payroll record for compliance with this Section; and
The contract language shall reserve the right of the County to conduct on-site interviews with the
Contractor’s employees to ensure compliance with the prevailing wage requirements.
As indicated above, Prevailing Wage consists of two parts, hourly wage and fringes. Fringes include life insurance,
health, pension, vacation, holiday, and sick leave.
All inquiries should be directed to the office of the Architect: CHMP, Inc., 5198 Territorial Road, Grand Blanc,
Michigan 48439, ATTN: Gregory N. Mason, A.I.A., Telephone: (810) 695-5910; Fax: (810) 695-0680; email:
[email protected].
END OF SECTION 00 11 13
INVITATION TO BID
00 11 13 - 2
SECTION 00 21 13 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RECEIPT AND OPENING OF BIDS
A.
Genesee County (herein called the “Owner”) invites Bid/Tenders for construction.
B.
Bid/Tenders will be received by the Genesee County Purchasing Department located at 1101 Beach
Street, Room 200, Flint, Michigan 48502 until 2:00 p.m., Tuesday, February 14, 2012. LATE BIDS
AND BIDS SENT BY FACSIMILE OR E-MAIL WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED.
C.
Bid/Tenders will be publicly opened and read aloud immediately following the due date and time
designated for receipt of bids.
D.
Bidders should submit a sealed envelope containing Bid/Tender and addressed to: Genesee County
Purchasing Department – “IFB # 12-003 Genesee County CARD Food Preparation Kitchen – 2727
Lippincott Boulevard, Flint, Michigan 48507.
1.2
METHODS OF BIDDING
A.
Owner invites Bid/Tenders on General Construction work to be limited to trades associated with the
Building and Site Improvements.
B.
See Bid/Tender form for specific requirements regarding bids and cost breakdown.
C.
Bids shall be a lump sum amount for the entire project and bidders must agree to the project schedule
established for the project.
1.3
AVAILABILITY OF DOCUMENTS
A.
A set of Bid documents may be obtained from the Genesee County Purchasing Department’s website
(http://www.gc4me.com/departments/purchasing). In addition, the Bid Documents may be examined
after 2:00 p.m., January 24, 2012, at the following locations:
1.
1.4
Genesee County Purchasing Department
2.
1101 Beach Street, Room 200
Flint, MI 48502
Ph.: (810) 257-3030
Fax: (810) 257-3380
http://www.gc4me.com/departments/purchasing
CHMP, Inc.
Grand Blanc, MI 48439
(810) 695-5910
(810) 695-0680 - fax
ADDITIONAL PURCHASE
A.
Persons requiring documents other than as above may purchase them at reproduction costs from Arc
Michigan (Formerly Gwyer Reprographics), 8226 Embury Road, Grand Blanc, MI 48439; (810) 6959500; Fax (810) 695-9598; [email protected]. No refunds on purchased items. Bidder is
solely responsible for selection of drawing sheets and completeness of his bid. Applicable sales tax will
be charged on all purchases.
B.
Reproduction Costs:
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
00 21 13 - 1
1.
Contact Arc Michigan for pricing at (810) 695-9500.
C.
Addenda if issued will be made available for purchase on the same cost basis, less handling charge. Note
that it is the sole responsibility of the purchaser to determine if Addenda is issued and what, if any, part of
each is of interest to the purchaser.
D.
Pick-up of purchased documents may be made as previously noted for distribution to Bidders. Arrange in
advance for pick-up, to permit time for preparation of the required documents.
1.5
PREPARATION OF BID/TENDER
A.
Submit on forms furnished herein.
B.
Fill out in ink or typewritten, without erasure, interlineation or changes.
C.
Make Bid/Tender in name of principal and if co-partnership, give names of all parties. Give complete
address. If Bid/Tenders are submitted by an agent, provide satisfactory evidence of agency authority.
D.
The bidder will be obligated to comply with the Owners project schedule included under Section 01 11 13
“Summary of Work”. Contractor will be subject to liquidated damages in the amount of $250.00 per
day for each day the project has not been completed by the substantial completion date.
E.
Fill in all blank spaces for bid prices in both words and figures. Submit each Bid/Tender in sealed
envelope. Indicate on outside of envelope, name of bidder, bidders address, and name of project for
which bid is submitted. If forwarded by mail, enclose sealed envelope containing bid in another envelope
addressed as indicated.
F.
All Bid/Tenders shall consist of two copies of the following submittals to be deemed responsive:
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
1.6
Bid/Tender Form – See DOCUMENT 00 41 13- BID/TENDER FORM
Bid Bond - A cashier’s check or a bid bond by an approved surety company in the amount of five
percent (5%) of the base bid payable to the Owner (Genesee County)
Genesee County Insurance Checklist – See Appendix “A”
Genesee County - Major Contract Addendum – See Appendix “A”
Bid/Tenders must be received prior to bid due date and time.
WITHDRAWAL OR REVISION OF BID/TENDERS
A.
Bid/Tenders may be withdrawn or revised prior to scheduled time for opening, under the following terms:
1.
2.
B.
Bidders may, without prejudice to himself, withdraw Bid/Tender after it has been deposited,
provided request for such withdrawal is received in writing or by telegram, before time set for
opening. Telephonic communications not acceptable. After opening, no Bid/Tender may be
withdrawn for period indicated.
Bidder may modify his Bid/Tender by telegraphic communication at any time prior to scheduled
time for opening, provided such telegraphic communication is received prior to opening, and,
provided further, Owner is satisfied that written communication over signature of bidder was
received prior to opening.
Do not reveal bid price in telegraphic communication. Provide addition, subtraction or modification so
that final prices or terms will not be known until sealed Bid/Tender is opened. If written confirmation is
not received within two days after scheduled time for opening, no consideration will be given to
telegraphic modification.
00 21 13 - 2
1.7
IRREGULAR BID/TENDERS
A.
Bid/Tenders are considered irregular and may be rejected for the following reasons unless otherwise
provided by law:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
1.8
If form furnished is not used or is altered.
If there are unauthorized additions, conditional bids, or irregularities of any kind which may tend
to make Bid/Tender incomplete, indefinite, or ambiguous as to its meaning.
If bidder adds any provisions reserving right to accept or reject any award, or to enter into
Contract pursuant to an award.
If unit or lump sum prices contained in bid schedule are obviously unbalanced either in excess of,
or below, reasonable cost analysis values.
If bidder fails to insert alternate and unit prices for every item requested.
If bidder fails to complete Bid/Tender in any other particulars where information is requested so
Bid/Tender cannot be properly evaluated.
If the bidder fails to submit all required submittals with the Bid/Tender. A bid/tender that fails to
comply with Section 00 21 13 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Part 1.5 may be deemed nonresponsive and rejected.
Owner reserves right to reject any or all Bid/Tenders and to waive irregularities or informalities as may
be deemed in Owner’s interest.
QUALIFICATION OF BIDDER
A.
The Owner may make such investigations as deemed necessary to determine the ability of each Bidder to
perform the work, and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this
purpose as the Owner may request.
B.
The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such
Bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the
Contract and to complete the work contemplated therein.
C.
The Owner will require the bidder to whom a Contract may be awarded to submit any of the following
information before the award of the Contract:
1.
2.
1.9
A breakdown of the bid submitted by each trade (CSI format) including a listing of the
subcontractor’s names for each trade proposed to be used for this project. The Owner reserves the
right to reject any sub-contractor whom the Owner or the Owner’s Architect has experienced
poor performance on past projects.
Such additional information as will satisfy the Owner that the Bidder is adequately prepared to
fulfill the Contract.
INTERPRETATIONS
A.
If Bidder for proposed work is in doubt as to true meaning of any part of Bid Documents, submit written
request for interpretation by no later than Friday, January 27, 2012 by 5:00 p.m. (ET). Bidder
submitting request is responsible for its prompt and actual delivery. Interpretations will not be made
orally.
B.
Submit written request for interpretation to ATTN: Mr. Gregory N. Mason, A.I.A., 5198 Territorial Road,
Grand Blanc, MI
48439; Telephone:
(810) 695-5910; Fax: (810) 695-0680; email:
[email protected]. All interpretations or supplemental instructions will be in form of written
00 21 13 - 3
addenda released prior to the date fixed for opening of bids. Copy of such addenda will be posted to the
Genesee County Purchasing Department’s website (http://www.gc4me.com/departments/purchasing).
Failure of a prospective bidder to identify the release of an addendum does not relieve bidder from any
obligation under his bid as submitted. All addenda are part of the Contract/Bid Documents.
C.
1.10
Bidder desiring approval of material or equipment not specified must comply with Section 01 25 13.
METHOD OF AWARD
A.
If lowest base bid submitted by qualified bidder does not exceed amount of funds available to finance
Contract, Contract may be awarded on base bid.
B.
If base bid exceeds such amount, Owner may reject all bids.
C.
Owner may award Contract on base bid plus unit prices.
D.
Any other provision of the Contract Documents notwithstanding, notice of acceptance of a Bid/Tender
and execution of the Contract by the Owner are each conditioned as to their effectiveness upon the bidder
to whom notice of acceptance has been given executing the Contract, delivering properly executed
insurance documentation and performance and payment bonds to the Owner, and doing both of these
within 10 days of the notice of acceptance having been given. Immediately after these conditions are
satisfied, the Contract automatically becomes awarded.
E.
Evaluation and Award - The contract will be awarded to the lowest responsive and responsible bidder
whose bid is determined to be most advantageous to the County. Unless otherwise indicated in the
Invitation for Bids, Genesee County reserves the right to award the contract in whole or in part, by item,
by group of items, or by section where such action serves the best interests of Genesee County. Genesee
County reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive any informality or irregularity in any bid, and
to negotiate with the apparent successful bidder in the best interest of Genesee County.
1.11
EXAMINATION OF SITE
A.
Before submitting a bid, each Bidder shall inspect the site of the proposed work to arrive at a clear
understanding of the conditions under which the work is to be done. He will be held to have compared
the premises with the drawings and specifications, and to have satisfied himself as to all conditions
affecting the execution of the work.
B.
No allowance or extra compensation concerning any matter or thing about which the Bidder might have
fully informed himself will be allowed.
1.12
A.
1.13
A.
PRE-BID MEETING
A mandatory pre-bid meeting will be held on Monday, January 30, 2012 at 10:00 a.m., at the
Genesee County Community Action Resource Department’s Weatherization and Commodities Program,
2727 Lippincott Boulevard Flint, Michigan 48507, followed by a tour of the target space, for review of
the documents, inspection of the site, and responses to questions, which may arise. All prospective
Bidders are required to attend this meeting and sub-contractors are encouraged to attend.
BASE BID AND UNIT PRICES
General: Bid must include base bid and all unit prices. In the event alternate does not affect Bidder’s
work, enter “No Change”. Absence of any entry will be assumed to indicate zero price and time change.
00 21 13 - 4
Owner may award contract on base bid and unit prices.
1.14
SURETY
A.
Each bid shall be accompanied by a cashier’s check or a bid bond by an approved surety company in the
amount of five percent (5%) of the base bid payable to the Owner (Genesee County), and will be forfeited
to the Owner on failure to enter into a contract within ten (10) days after notice of acceptance of the Bid.
B.
Successful bidder shall be required to furnish performance, labor and material payment bonds in the
amount of 100% of the Contract sum.
C.
All required bonds must be issued by a company authorized to do business in the State of Michigan.
D.
Surety on such bonds shall be a duly authorized company satisfactory to the Owner.
1.15
INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
The County of Genesee requires a signed Insurance Checklist with each bid/tender submitted. Insurance
required per the specifications governing this work must be provided prior to the contract starting date
and kept in full effect and compliance during entire contract period. Failure to comply with these
provisions will cause termination of the contract.
B.
The contractor agrees to be responsible for any loss or damage to property or persons due to the
performance of services herein contracted and further agree to protect and defend the County of Genesee
against all claims or demands whatsoever, and to hold the County of Genesee harmless from any loss or
damage resulting therefrom.
1.16
A.
1.17
A.
1.18
A.
GENESEE COUNTY MAJOR CONTRACT ADDENDUM
The purpose of this contract addendum is to promote the utilization of a local work force, minority-,
woman-, and persons with a disability-owned business, as well as minority, female, and disabled
employees in County contracts for construction valued at $40,000 or more.
GENESEE COUNTY CONTRACTUAL/BID REQUIREMENTS AND SUBMITTALS
Refer to Appendix “A” for additional submittals by the Owner/Genesee County.
PREVAILING WAGE RATES
Prevailing Wage Requirements: All contractors and subcontractors shall pay its laborers and mechanics
not less than the prevailing wage rates and fringe benefits for corresponding classes of laborers and
mechanics employed on similar projects in the area. For the purposes of this solicitation, a Contractor
shall be in compliance if the Contractor is in compliance with the Davis-Bacon Act, 40 U.S. C. §3141, et
seq., and pays wages consistent with the prevailing wage rates published by the United States
Department of Labor. Genesee County shall, at a minimum, take the following actions with regards to
enforcement of the Prevailing Wage requirements:
1.
2.
3.
The County shall require the Contractor to submit a certified payroll record consistent with
requirements established by the Davis Bacon Act.
The County shall review the certified payroll record for compliance with this Section; and
The contract language shall reserve the right of the County to conduct on-site interviews with the
00 21 13 - 5
Contractor’s employees to ensure compliance with the prevailing wage requirements.
1.19
A.
GENESEE COUNTY - LOCAL PREFERENCE POLICY
Within 5 business days of bid opening, if the lowest responsive responsible bidder is not a Genesee
County Business, a Genesee County Business who has submitted a responsive bid that is no more than
5% higher than the lowest responsive bid may submit an amended bid to the Purchasing Director. A
Genesee County Business who is the lowest responsive responsible bidder may not amend their bid
pursuant to this section. Amended bids submitted by Genesee County Businesses in this manner shall be
considered along with other responsive bids submitted by responsible bidders.
00 21 13 - 6
DOCUMENT 00 41 13- BID/TENDER FORM
FOR:
Genesee County CARD
Food Preparation Kitchen
2727 Lippincott Boulevard
DATE:
NAME OF BIDDER:
ADDRESS
TELEPHONE:
TO:
(
)
Genesee County (hereinafter called “Owner”)
Gentlemen:
The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for work on the Genesee County CARD Food Preparation
Kitchen (IFB# 12-003 and CHMP Project No. 11002300) having examined the Contract Documents prepared by
CHMP, Inc., and other related documents and being familiar with site of proposed work, and with all conditions
surrounding construction of proposed project including availability of materials and labor, hereby propose to furnish
all labor, materials, tools, equipment, machinery, equipment rental, transportation, superintendence, perform all
work, provide all services, and to construct all work in accordance with Contract Documents, within time set forth
herein, at prices stated below. These prices are to cover all expenses incurred in performing work required under
Contract Documents, of which this Bid/Tender is a part.
Successful bidder agrees to provide performance and payment bonds written by surety acceptable to Owner. Made
in favor of Owner as oblige.
BASE BID – GENESEE COUNTY CARD FOOD PREPARATION KITCHEN:
Bidder agrees to perform all work as described in the Contract Documents, for Lump Sum of
($
).
(Show Base Bid amounts in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, amount shown in words will govern)
Bidder, if awarded a Contract, hereby agrees to commence and complete work under this contract in compliance
with the project schedule provided within Section 011113 - “Summary of Work”. Bidder also acknowledges that
non-compliance with the substantial completion date is subject to liquidated damages.
ALTERNATES:
The following Alternates shall be expressed in words and figures as an ADDITION or DEDUCTION to Base Bid as
indicted. Refer to Section 012300.
BID/TENDER FORM
00 41 13 - 1
Alternate No. 1, Provide Epoxy Floor Finish: ADD the sum of __________________________________________
($
)
Alternate No. 2, Provide Ice Maker: ADD the sum of ________________________________________________
($
)
Alternate No. 3, Provide floor reinforcement for Freezer/Cooler: ADD the sum of __________________________
($
)
Alternate No. 4, Provide Deep Fryer: ADD the sum of ______________________________________________
($
)
Alternate No. 5, Delete Staging Cooler & Provide (2) Coolers: DEDUCT the sum of ________________________
($
)
Alternate No. 6, Provide seven (7) precast concrete wheel stops: ADD the sum of ___________________________
($
)
FEES FOR CHANGE IN WORK
The undersigned agrees that if awarded the contract for this work, it will, upon request by the Owner, perform
additional work or omit specified work, or cause same to be performed or omitted by subcontractors, for the
following percentage fees which have been computed in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 26 63:
Additions
Work By Contractor’s Own Forces
Work By Subcontractor’s Forces
15 %
10 %
It is agreed that in this context a subcontractor shall be as specified in Article 5 of the General Conditions.
PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS
The undersigned submits for consideration by the Owner and/or the Architect-Engineer the Proposed Substitutions
as listed hereinafter, each item being offered as a substitute for the referenced specified item which was used in
compiling the Lump Sum Price of this Proposal and each price having been computed in accordance with the
requirements of Section 00440.
Proposal Item
Proposed Substitution
Add
Deduct
1.
$
$
2.
$
$
3.
$
$
4.
$
$
BID/TENDER FORM
00 41 13 - 2
The bidder agrees that the Owner may accept or reject any or all of the above Proposed Substitutions, and that the
work applicable to any items which are accepted will be performed in accordance with the requirements of the
drawings and specifications.
Bidder understands that the Owner reserves right to reject any or all Bid/Tenders and to waive any informalities or
irregularities herein.
Upon notice of acceptance of this Bid/Tender, bidder will execute Contract Agreement and deliver properly
executed Performance and Payment Bonds to Owner within 10 days.
Bid Security attached in sum of
($
), as required by Instruction to
Bidders, becomes property of Owner in event Contract Agreement is not executed and performance and payment
bonds are not delivered within time above set forth.
Bidder acknowledges receipt of following addenda:
If awarded a contract, bidder’s surety will be (name of Surety Company).
CERTIFICATION OF SITE VISIT
The undersigned hereby affirms that is has complied with the requirements for visiting the site as detailed in the
Instructions To Bidders.
ADDRESS, LEGAL STATUS, AND SIGNATURE OF BIDDER
The undersigned does hereby designate the address, given below, as the legal address to which all notices,
directions, or other communications may be served or mailed.
P.O. Box (if applicable)
Street
City
BID/TENDER FORM
State
Zip Code
00 41 13 - 3
The undersigned does hereby declare that it has the legal status checked below.
Individual
Co-Partnership
Corporation Incorporated under the laws and State of
The names and address of all persons indicated as partners in this Bid are as follows:
ADDRESS
NAME
This Bid is submitted in the name of:
(Name of Contractor)
By
Title
Day of
Signed and sealed this
INSTRUCTIONS:
, 20
.
Three (3) copies of this form are supplied for the use of Bidders. Submit two (2) copies to
Owner and retain one (1) copy.
BID/TENDER FORM
00 41 13 - 4
SECTION 00 43 13 - BID BOND (A.I.A. A310)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
Use of the following American Institute of Architects document: A310 Bid Bond February 1970 edition,
is hereby made a part of the Bidding Requirements.
BID BOND
00 43 13-1
SECTION 00 43 25 - SUBSTITUTIONS PRIOR TO AWARD OF CONTRACT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Address for submission:
1.
1.2
Furnish all work and services for furnishing, submitting, processing and handling of requests for
substitutions prior to award of contract. Any substitution must be in accord with provisions of
Contract Documents.
Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
See appropriate sections for specific items.
See General Conditions for additional information.
ATTN: Mr. Gregory N. Mason, A.I.A.
CHMP, INC.
PRODUCT SELECTION - GENERAL
A.
Base all bids on materials, equipment and procedures specified.
B.
Certain types of equipment and kinds of materials are described in specifications by means of trade
names, catalog numbers or manufacturer’s names. This is not intended to exclude from consideration
other items which may be capable of accomplishing purpose indicated.
C.
Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable to Owner and Architect.
1.
Genesee County is open to substitutions that will include cost effective energy efficiencies. Please
submit initial and future cost savings calculations along with required material documentation.
D.
Listing of a manufacturer implies acceptance of them only as supplier of a specified product.
E.
Equipment and materials, if not specifically indicated must be approved in writing by Architect ad be
agreed upon by Owner’s Representative/Construction Manager prior to letting of Contract.
F.
Architect reserves right to require substitutions to comply color and patter-wise with base specified items.
G.
No substitutions will be permitted between Bid/Tender opening and execution of the Contract.
H.
No substitution permitted after letting of Contract, except as indicated in Section 012500.
I.
Conditional bids and voluntary alternates will not be considered.
SUBSTITUTIONS PRIOR TO AWARD OF CONTRACT
00 43 25 - 1
1.3
REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Only written requests with complete submittal data will be considered.
B.
Sub requests in three (3) copies.
C.
Requests must be received by CHMP, INC. no later than Friday, January 27, 2012 by 5:00 p.m. No
responses will be provided after this date.
D.
In making request for substitutions, or in using an approved substitute item, Bidder represents:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
He has investigated proposed product of method, and has determined that it is equal or superior in
all respects to that specified, and that it will perform intended function.
He will provide same guarantee for substitute item as for product or method specified.
He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, to include building
modifications if necessary, making such changes as may be required for Work to be complete in
all respects.
He waives all claims for additional costs or time related to substitution which subsequently
become apparent.
Acknowledge acceptance of these provisions in request.
E.
Substitutions presented/submitted on the Bid/Tender Form which have not been pre-approved by the
Architect/Engineer will be considered only if the substitution benefits the Owner.
F.
Acceptable substitutions will be authorized by a Change Order.
G.
All proposed substitutions shall be subject to evaluation by the Construction Manager/Architect/Engineer
as to compliance with the Contract Document requirements. The Construction Manager/Architect/
Engineer’s decision shall be final.
H.
The burden of proof of equality shall rest entirely with the Contractor. All substitutions proposed shall be
accompanied by complete manufacturer’s product data, specifications, and other pertinent information.
Cost data shall reflect all modifications required to adjacent construction to accommodate the proposed
substitution.
Submit complete details of such modifications for Construction Manager/
Architect/Engineer’s approval.
1.4
SUBSTITUTION SUBMITTAL DATA
A.
Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents.
B.
For products:
1.
2.
Products identification, including manufacturer’s name.
Manufacturer literature, marked to indicate specific model, type, size, and options to be
considered:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Product description.
Performance and test data.
Reference standards.
Difference in power demand, air quantities, etc.
Dimensional differences from specified unit.
Full size samples if requested. Architect reserves right to impound sample until physical units are
installed on project for comparison purposes. Requester pay all costs of furnishing and return of
00 43 25 - 2
samples. Architect is not responsible for loss of, or damage to, samples.
4.
C.
Name and address of similar projects and name of Owner’s representative we can contact, to
discuss products, installation, and field performance data.
For construction methods:
1.
2.
Detail description of proposed method.
Illustrate on drawings.
D.
Itemized comparison of proposed substitute to specified item.
E.
Data relating to changes in construction schedule.
F.
Relation to separate contracts.
G.
Cost of proposed substitution in comparison with product or method specified.
1.5
REJECTION OF SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Substitutions will not be considered if:
1.
2.
3.
They are not submitted in accord with this section.
Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents, or building spaces.
Request for substitution does not indicate specific item for which request is submitted.
Acceptance of manufacturer only will not be made.
00 43 25 - 3
SECTION 00 52 13 - AGREEMENT (A.I.A. A101-2007)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
Use the following American Institute of Architects document: A101-2007 Standard Form of Agreement
Between Owner and Contractor - Stipulated Sum, is hereby made a requirement of the Contract
Documents.
AGREEMENT (A.I.A. A101)
00 52 13 - 1
SECTION 00 61 13 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide a specific Performance Bond in the amount of 100% of the accepted bid amount as required by
1956 PA 32 as amended 1963 PA 213, being MCL 129.201, for public work in the State of Michigan.
1.
2.
B.
Provide a Payment Bond in the amount of 100% of the accepted bid amount in compliance with Michigan
Statute 1963 PA 213.
1.
1.2
The Performance Bond shall contain no statute of limitations.
The Performance Bond shall contain a clause that if the Contractor performs as agreed in the
Contract, the bond is void, otherwise it remains in full force and effect.
Bond shall state on its face, that it is in compliance with the Michigan Statute 1963 PA 213.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Properly executed Performance and Payment Bond, prior to award of Contract and within 10 days of
notice acceptance of Bid/Tender.
PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
00 61 13 - 1
SECTION 00 72 13 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT (A.I.A. A201-2007)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
Use of the following American Institute of Architects document: A201-2007 General Conditions of the
Contract for Construction, is hereby made a requirement of the Contract Documents.
B.
See Sections 008000 for modifications.
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT (A.I.A. A201)
00 72 13 - 1
SECTION 00 73 13 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
Following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction, AIA document A201, 2007 Edition. Where any article of General Conditions is modified,
or any paragraph, subparagraph or clause thereof is modified or deleted, unaltered provisions of that
article, paragraph, subparagraph or clause remain in effect.
PART 2 - AMENDMENTS
2.1
ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
Add to subparagraph 1.1.3:
1.
B.
Add new clauses:
1.
2.
2.2
All Contractors and subcontractors are responsible for compliance with all applicable sections and
articles which pertain to their aspect of the Work, and for cleaning up as provided in subparagraph
3.15.1 and Section 017100.
1.2.1.1 In case of disagreement between drawings and specifications, or within either document
itself, better quality or greater quantity of work will be basis of contract.
1.2.2.1 Contractor is solely responsible for coordination of bidding and scope of Work of
subcontractors. Except as specifically provided in Subparagraphs 4.2.11 and 4.2.12, the Architect
will not act as arbiter as to which trade or subcontractor is to furnish and install various items
indicated or required to perform construction.
ARTICLE 2 - OWNER
A.
2.1.2 Owner as referred to in these documents is: Genesee County.
B.
1.
C.
Add new clause:
1.
D.
Information will be furnished only to extent it is readily available to Owner.
2.2.5.1 Architect will provide Contractor with revisions to drawings, and specifications as may be
required to show any authorized changes. Each Prime Contractor shall maintain, on work site, one
complete set of Contract Documents to include all drawings, specifications, addenda, approved
change orders and modifications during entire period of construction.
Add new subparagraphs:
1.
2.4.1 Owner may declare Contract in default for any one or more of the following reasons:
a.
Failure to complete the Work within Contract period or any extension thereof.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00 73 13 - 1
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
E.
Failure or refusal to comply with order of Architect within reasonable time.
Failure or refusal to remove rejected materials.
Failure or refusal to perform anew any defective or unacceptable work.
Bankruptcy or insolvency, or making of an assignment for benefit of creditors.
Failure to provide qualified superintendent, competent workmen or subcontractors to carry
on the Work in an acceptable manner.
Failure to prosecute the Work according to agreed schedule of completion.
Default by the Contractor in the performance of any provisions of the Contract Documents.
Add new subparagraph 2.4.2:
1.
2.3
2.4.2 Neither Owner nor his officers, agents, or employees are in any way liable or accountable to
Contractor or his surety for method by which completion of said work, or any portion thereof, is
accomplished or for price paid therefore. Contractor is responsible for all costs of completing the
Work including costs in excess of original Contract Price. Contractor will be paid the amount
saved if costs of completion is less than the original Contract Price. Owner does not forfeit right
to recover damages from Contractor or surety for failure to complete Contract by taking over the
Work or by declaring Contract in default. Maintenance of the Work remain Contractor’s
responsibility until the Completion Date.
ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.2.2.1 By entering into an Agreement with Owner, Contractor acknowledges that he has:
examined all documents pertaining to the Work, examined character of site and any existing
structures, and has satisfied himself as to nature of the Work, and all other matters, which can in
any way affect the Work.
Subparagraph 3.3.2 after word “Subcontractors” add: “or Sub-subcontractors”.
3.3.4 The Contractor shall employ a Licensed Surveyor to located and stake out the Work and
establish necessary reference and bench marks. Each Contractor, working from established bench
marks and reference points, shall lay out and correctly establish all lines, levels, grades and
locations of all parts of his own work and be responsible for their accuracy and proper correlation
with work of other Contractors and established data.
3.3.5 Acceptance of materials by or on behalf of the Owner does not bar future rejection if
subsequently found to be defective or inferior in quality or uniformity to material specified, or are
not as represented.
Add the following Subparagraph 3.6.1:
1.
The Contract Price includes (i) all taxes and other items required to be withheld from Contractor’s
employees and any Subcontractors of Contractor, (ii) all sales taxes imposed or levied in
connection with all materials, supplies and equipment supplied by Contractor in the performance
of the Work, (iii) all value added, use, consumer and similar taxes, and (iv) fees and taxes for the
issuance of all licenses and building permits for the performance of the Work (all of which are
called the “taxes”). All of the taxes shall be paid by Contractor directly to the applicable taxing
authority, and Contractor shall be solely responsible for payment of the same. Owner shall have
the right to require, as a condition to the making of any payment, satisfactory evidence of payment
of all the taxes by Contractor. Owner shall have the right to inspect all materials and supply
invoices and the books and records of Contractor shall be available for inspection by Owner to
verify such costs, and the payment of all the taxes. Prior to the final payment, Contractor shall
itemize on a sworn statement the cost of all materials, supplies and equipment utilized in the
performance of the Work.
00 73 13 - 2
C.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
2.4
3.10.4 Construction schedule: See Section 011000 and 013200.
3.10.5 Progress reports: See Section 013200.
3.11.2 Project record documents: See Section 017839.
3.12.11 Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Project Data in accord with Section
013400 and Subparagraphs 3.11 and 3.12.
3.12.12 Operating and maintenance data: See Section 017823.
3.13.2 Confine all operations to areas indicated on drawings or authorized in writing by Owner.
3.15.3 Cleaning up: See Section 017100 and Subparagraph 3.15.
Replace Section 3.18 - Indemnification with the following:
“To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or expenses are not
covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in
accordance with paragraph 11.3, the Contractor shall indemnify, and hold harmless, the Owner,
Architect, Architect’s consultants, agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,
damages, penalties, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees arising out of or
resulting from performance of the Work or entry onto the Property, provided that such claim, damages,
loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of
tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or
omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone
for whose acts them may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is
caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligations shall not be construed to negate,
abridge or reduce other rights or obligations or indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or
person described in the Paragraph 3.18.”
ARTICLE 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
A.
1.
2.5
The Owner reserves the right to maintain representatives, in addition to the Architect’s
representatives, for the purpose of examining and testing materials, and for the inspection of the
general character, methods, and progress of the work.
ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS
A.
1.
2.
3.
B.
5.1.3 Architect will not deal directly with any subcontractor, sub-subcontractor or materials
supplier. Contact will be made only through Contractor. Requests for information or clarification
must be routed through Contractor.
5.3.2 Contractor is fully responsible for acts and omissions of his subcontractors, and persons
either directly or indirectly employed by them, or under their control, as he is for his own
employees.
5.3.3 Nothing in Contract Documents creates any contractual relationship between any
subcontractor and Owner or Architect.
Amend subparagraph 5.2.1:
1.
Add to the end of subparagraph 5.2.1 the following: “After initial approval of the Contractor’s
sub-contractor list per the submitted schedule of values, the Contractor shall not be permitted to
change or add any sub-contractors without the Owner’s and Architect’s written approval nor shall
any approved sub-contractor be permitted to sub-contract the work without written approval of the
Owner and Architect.
00 73 13 - 3
2.6
ARTICLE 6 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
A.
No Change.
1.
2.7
Delete all references to Waiver of Subrogation.
ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK
A.
2.8
No Change.
ARTICLE 8 - TIME
A.
Add new clause:
1.
B.
Add new clause:
1.
2.9
8.1.2.1 Do not start work or store materials or equipment on site until Written notice to proceed is
issued, or upon execution of Contract. Commence work within 10 calendar days of written notice
to proceed or execution of Contract, whichever is earlier.
8.3.1.1 Owner may waive above requirements and grant extensions of time for any reason.
ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
A.
Add new subparagraph:
1.
2.
B.
1.
2.10
A.
Add to the end of article 9.10.4.1 the following: “and 3rd party claims”.
ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
1.
B.
Refer to Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Article 5.1.3 for provisions
covering payment procedures.
Delete the last two sentences of article 9.10.2.
Give notice in writing at least 48 hours before breaking ground, to all persons, Public Utility
Companies, Owners of property having structures or improvements in proximity to site of the
Work, Superintendents, inspectors, or those otherwise in charge of property, streets, water pipes,
gas pipes, sewer pipes, telephone cables, electric cables, railroads or otherwise, who may be
affected by Contractor’s operation, in order that they may remove any obstruction for which they
are responsible and have representative on site to see that their property is properly protected.
Such notice does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for any damages, claims, and defense of
all actions against Owner and Architect resulting from performance of such work in connection
with or arising out of Contract.
00 73 13 - 4
1.
C.
10.2.4 When wrecking, excavation work or other similar potentially dangerous work is necessary,
exercise utmost care so as not to endanger life or property. Contractor is fully responsible for any
and all damages, claims and for defense of all actions against Owner and Architect resulting from
prosecution of such work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
10.2.8 Duty of Architect to conduct construction review of Contractor’s performance does not
include review of adequacy of Contractor’s safety measures in, on, or near construction site.
10.2.9 Maintain utilities or other service, indicating to be abandoned, in service until new facilities
are provided, tested and ready for use.
10.2.10 Return all improvements on or about site and adjacent property which are not shown to be
altered, remove or otherwise changed to conditions which existed prior to starting work.
Add new paragraphs and subparagraphs:
a.
10.5 Water Precautions
1)
2)
b.
c.
2)
A.
A.
10.7.1 Do not erect signs, billboards, or advertisements on or about premises, except
as required by Contract.
10.7.2 Furnish and maintain all necessary signs required for prosecution of Work
and as required by law.
All references within articles 10.3.2 and 10.3.3 regarding hazardous materials “rendered harmless”
shall mean being in compliance with laws and standards of governing authorities having
jurisdiction over each particular hazardous material encountered.”
ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS
Add new paragraph:
1.
2.12
10.6.1 Replace all damaged or broken glass during and upon completion of project.
10.7 Signs
1)
6.
10.5.1 Keep all parts of site, including excavations, free from all accumulation of
water, no matter what source or cause.
10.5.2 Dispose of water in such manner as will not endanger public health or cause
damage or expense to property. Comply with requirements of any public agencies
having jurisdiction. If sewers and streets are allowed to be used for drainage or
disposal of water during construction, maintain and leave these satisfactorily clean
upon completion of work.
10.6 Protection of Glass
1)
2.11
11.6 Insurance: See Section 008100.
ARTICLE 12 - UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
Add to subparagraph 12.2.2.1:
1.
12.2.2.1 Contractor hereby agrees to keep all work constructed under Contract in good repair for
minimum period of one year, unless longer period is specified in Contract Documents, from date
of Substantial Completion of the Work. No provision of Contract Documents which limits
00 73 13 - 5
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
A.
Add subparagraph 13.8.1: CONTRACTOR’S IDENTIFICATION
A.
13.8.1 Upon execution of this Agreement, Contractor will furnish Owner with its (a) federal
employer’s identification number or social security number, (b) state unemployment compensation
number, (c) state builder’s license (d) all required state construction safety regulations, and (e)
certificates of insurance as required by this Agreement.
Paragraph 13.7 - COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD
1.
2.14
12.2.6 Cost of minor repairs to newly finished interior surfaces of building (not covered by
Property Insurance), will not be borne by Owner. If Owner must make repairs, cost will be
deducted from Contract Sum.
ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
1.
B.
maintenance period to less than one year from date of acceptance of the Work by Owner is valid.
Upon written notice by registered or certified mail from Owner or Owner’s representative to
Contractor of any defect, functional or structural deterioration of the Work or improvement or any
serious departure from standards of original construction described in Contract Documents, it must
be remedied by Contractor. Make sure remedy without further cost to Owner, including in part,
all damages, caused by such defect, deficiency, deterioration or departure, and by its repair,
replacement or correction.
12.2.2.2 For purpose of establishing beginning of one-year period, date of Substantial Completion
occurs when Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued for Project. In case of Owner
use and occupancy of portion of Work prior to completion of Project, one year period for said
portion of work commences upon date of Owner occupancy. Completion of future portions of
Project does not affect one year period for Work performed during this portion.
12.2.2.3 This provision applies whether or not bond is required, as personal obligation by
Contractor. If Contractor does not proceed to remedy such defects, deficiencies, deteriorations or
departures called to his attention in notice, within ten consecutive calendar days after mailing of
notice, Owner may cause repairs to be made as Owner deems best. Entire cost thereof will be paid
by Contractor.
12.2.2.4 Obligations of Contractor as herein provided are in addition to and not in limitation of
any obligations imposed upon him by special warranties required by Contract Documents or
otherwise prescribed by law.
12.2.2.5 Owner will give prompt notice to Contractor by registered or certified letter mailed to
Contractor’s last known address and sending copy of such notice to surety. Such notice is
mutually agreed to be sufficient and adequate.
12.2.2.6 Such additional specific warranties on various subdivisions of the Work, as are required,
shall be furnished by various subcontractors under each respective subdivision of the Work.
However, responsibility for furnishing such specific warranties rests with Contractor.
Add following subparagraph:
1.
2.13
Replace subparagraph 13.7.1 in its entirety with the following: “Causes of action between the
parties to this Agreement shall be subject to applicable statutes of limitations under Michigan
Law”.
ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
Subparagraph 14.1.1
1.
Add at the end:
00 73 13 - 6
a.
B.
Add at the end:
a.
2.
2.
A.
The previous provisions of the Paragraph 14.2.1 notwithstanding, the Owner’s right of
termination shall be limited to any extent required by the Federal Bankruptcy Act or any
other applicable law, regulation or court order.
Revise article 14.1.3 to indicate that the Contractor’s profit shall be limited to a percentage of
overall profit equal to the percentage of construction completed at time of termination.
1.
2.15
Provided, however, that the Contractor shall not have the right to terminate the Contract
under this paragraph 14.1.1 if, prior to expiration of the last referenced seven day notice
period, the amount the non-payment of which was the basis for stopping the Work under
paragraph 9.7 shall have been paid.
Subparagraph 14.2.1
1.
C.
14.2.5 In all cases of termination or Contractor default, Architect will bill Owner for cost of
additional services required in connection with reissuing documents or completing the Work.
Owner will deduct this sum from money due Contractor and pay it to the Architect.
14.2.6 In case of delays in completion of the Work due to actions or inactions of Contractor or his
subcontractors, which extend completion time for Contract, Architect will bill Owner for cost of
additional services required due to this delay. Owner will deduct this sum from money due
Contractor and pay it to Architect.
ARTICLE 15.4 - ARBITRATIONS
1.
Add to the end of subparagraph 4.6.2, the following: “The parties shall be granted ninety (90) days
to conduct discovery, which discovery will be guided by the Michigan Court Rules. The results of
that discovery may be utilized in the arbitration proceedings for all purposes that would be
permitted in the courts under the Michigan Court Rules. Issues of dispute involving discovery
will be resolved by the Arbitrator(s) who will have the final and binding authority to resolve such
disputes. A hearing date will be scheduled before the Arbitrator(s) in Oakland County, Michigan,
as soon as possible following the selection of the Arbitrator(s) and a hearing will commence
following the ninety (90) day discovery period. Each party shall select an arbitrator as
expeditiously as possible and the parties’ selected arbitrators shall select a third arbitrator who
shall be the chair person of the panel of arbitrators. The decision of two of the three arbitrators
shall be binding of the parties.”
00 73 13 - 7
SECTION 00 73 16 - INSURANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
Following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction, AIA document A201-1997. Where any article of General Conditions is modified, or any
paragraph, subparagraph, or clause thereof is modified or deleted, unaltered provisions of that article,
paragraph, subparagraph, or clause remain in effect.
PART 2 - MODIFICATIONS
A.
Refer to the Genesee County Insurance Checklist following this Section 00 73 16.
INSURANCE
00 73 16 - 1
GENESEE COUNTY INSURANCE CHECKLIST
BID Title:
CONSTRUCTION OF A FOOD PREPARATION KITCHEN FOR GENESEE COUNTY C.A.R.D.
BID Number: 12-003
Coverages Required
X 1. Workers' Compensation
X 2. Employers' Liability
X 3. General Liability
Limits (Figures denote minimums)
Statutory limits of Michigan
$100,000 accident/disease
$500,000 policy limit, disease
Including Premises/operations
$1,000,000 per occurrence with $2,000,000
aggregate
X 4. Products/Completed operations
$1,000,000 per occurrence with $2,000,000
Aggregate [If applicable]
X 5. Automobile liability
$1,000,000 combined single limit each accidentOwned, hired, non-owned
X 6. Best's rating: A VIII or better, or its equivalent (Retention Group Financial Statements)
X 7. The certificate must state Bid number and title
X 8. Genesee County named as an additional insured on other than workers' compensation via
endorsement. A copy of the endorsement must be included with the certificate. Evidence of
Addition Insured under Blanket coverage within the policy language is also acceptable. However,
a copy of the language applicable to this must be provided.
FAX THIS PAGE TO YOUR INSURANCE AGENT/BROKER
Insurance Agent's Statement
I have reviewed the requirements with Prospective Contractor named below. In addition:
_____ The above policies carry the following deductibles:
____________________________________________________________________________________
Liability policies are occurrence _____
claims made _____
_______________________________________
______________________________________
Insurance Agent
Signature
PLEASE NOTE #8 ABOVE. ADDING ADDITIONAL INSURED [AI] TO THE DESCRIPTION IS NOT
ACCEPTABLE. AN ENDORSEMENT OR COPY OF AI LANGUAGE IS REQUIRED
Prospective Contractor's Statement
I understand the insurance requirements and will comply in full if awarded the contract.
_______________________________________
Bidder
______________________________________
Signature
Required general insurance provisions are provided in the checklist above. These are based on the contract and exposures of the
work to be completed under the Contract. Modifications to this checklist may occur at any time prior to signing of the contract. Any
changes will require approval by the Prospective Contractor, the department and County Risk Manager. To the degree possible, all
changes will be made as soon as feasible.
REVISED 04/08/2010
SECTION 01 11 13 - SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
This project consists of interior renovation work on the Genesee County Card Food Preparation Kitchen
located at 2727 Lippincott Boulevard, Flint, Michigan 48507.
B.
Requirements of the work are contained in the Contract Documents, and include cross-references to
published information, which is not necessarily bound therewith.
C.
Without force and effect on requirements of Contract Documents, a description of the work of the
Contract can be summarized as follows:
1.
1.2
The project consists of interior renovations/build out for a new 5,787 s.f. commercial kitchen and
2,347 s.f. pantry. The existing space is currently used as a parking garage and storage area. Work
shall include minor interior demolition; Construction of new gypsum board wall partitions;
interior finishes including floor (quarry, vinyl tile, & epoxy flooring), wall painting, FRP paneling,
and acoustical suspended ceilings; interior doors, frames, and hardware (including automatic
powered doors); thermal insulation; lighting and power; fire alarm devices; Plumbing fixtures and
piping; modifications and additions to the existing H.V.A.C. system; fire suppression system
upgrades; and new kitchen equipment.
DESIGNATION OF ASSOCIATIONS, INSTITUTIONS, SOCIETIES AND STANDARDS
A.
Whenever these Specifications reference is made to Associations, Institutions, Societies, or Standards,
they will be designated as follows:
AA
AAMA
ACI
AIA
AISC
AISI
AMCA
ANSI
ARI
ASA
ASHRAE
ASME
ASTM
AWS
AWWA
BLS
CISPI
FS
I=B=R
IEEE
MBC
MDOT
NBS
NEC
NEMA
NFPA
Aluminum Association
Architectural Aluminum Manufactures Association
American Concrete Institute
American Institute of Architects
American Institute of Steel Construction
American Iron & Steel Institute
Air Moving and Conditioning Association
American National Standards Institute
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
American Standards Association
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
American Society for Testing Materials
American Welding Society
American Eater Works Association
Bureau of Labor Standards
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
Federal Specifications
Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
Michigan Building Code
Michigan Department of Transportation
National Bureau of Standards
National Electrical Code
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
National Fire Protection Association
SUMMARY OF WORK
01 11 13 - 1
OSHA
SJI
SMACNA
SSPC
UL
B.
1.3
Occupational Safety and Health Act
Steel Joist Institute
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.
Steel Structures Painting Council
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Wherever specific standard numbers are indicated, i.e., ASTM C-150, it shall be understood to mean the
latest edition thereof.
WORK SCHEDULE
A.
The project will be awarded no later than March 13, 2012 and the mandatory completion date shall be
July 24, 2012 (project must be substantially complete). Failure to meet with the mandatory
completion date specified will subject the General Contractor to liquidated damages in the amount
specified in Section 00 21 13 “Instructions to Bidders”.
B.
It is the collective intention of the Owner to have the proposed work completed in the most expeditious
manner without unduly compromising the quality of the project. In order to achieve the goals stated
above, the utmost cooperation of all trades involved with the work will be required.
1.4
ITEMS FURNISHED BY OTHERS
A.
The General Contractor shall include all items and work shown or called for on the drawings and in the
specifications, except those items and work marked specifically “N.I.C.” (Not In Contract), or listed as
“F.B.O.” (Furnished by Others, but requiring installation and coordinated items of work by the
Contractor).
B.
All items furnished and installed by others but requiring connection to the electrical or mechanical
systems shall be hooked up or connected by the General Contractor.
C.
The General Contractor shall cooperate in every respect with other Contractors performing work directly
for the Owner to the extent and intent that a complete operable and fully equipped building is produced.
1.5
CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A.
Confine operations to areas within Contract limits indicated. Portions of the site beyond areas in which
construction operations are indicated are not to be disturbed.
B.
Keep driveways and entrances clear during business hours. Do not use these areas for construction
parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize requirements for storage of materials
on-site.
SUMMARY OF WORK
01 11 13 - 2
SECTION 01 14 13 - CONTRACTOR’S USE OF THE PREMISES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
Work included: This section applies to situations in which the Contractor or his representatives including,
but not necessarily limited to, suppliers, subcontractors, employees, and field engineers, enter upon the
Owner’s property.
B.
Related Work:
1.
1.2
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Promptly upon award of the Contract, notify all pertinent personnel regarding requirements of this
Section.
B.
Require that all personnel who will enter upon the Owner’s property certify their awareness of familiarity
with the requirements of this Section.
1.3
USE OF PREMISES
A.
The Contractor shall confine his apparatus, storage of materials and operations of his workmen to limits
as required by the Contract Documents, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with his
materials.
B.
The Contractor shall maintain access to and egress from the project site in a safe manner, well marked
and in locations as required by the local authorities having jurisdiction over this work. They shall be
responsible for furnishing and maintaining in a safe condition all barricades, temporary enclosures,
railings and lights and removal of same at completion of job.
C.
At no time shall the structure be loaded beyond safe limits, and in no case shall any loads exceed the
design limits.
D.
All work shall be done during the regular work hours of the day. All work carried on outside of regular
working hours shall be done at the Contractor’s expense, no extras will be allowed. The use of
“overtime” shall be at the Contractor’s option.
E.
The Owner reserves the right to stop work if disrupting the Owners ongoing operations within the facility.
Contractor shall keep areas clean and unobstructed for Owners ongoing operations within the target
building.
CONTRACTOR’S USE OF THE PREMISES
01 14 13 - 1
SECTION 01 21 13 - CASH ALLOWANCES AND PERMIT FEES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
The following cash allowances shall be included in the Base Bid and shall be disbursed only upon written
authorization of the Architect. Any part of these allowances not so disbursed will be deducted from the
Contract Sum.
B.
The cash allowances do contain amounts for furnishing, sales taxes, and delivery to the job site.
C.
The cash allowances, except as otherwise noted, do not contain amounts for installation costs of the
above items when purchased, overhead, profit, fee, or other costs of the Contractor. The Contractor shall
include in the Base Bid such amounts for said expenses and profit, if any on account of cash allowances
as he deems proper.
D.
Description of allowances:
1.
Permits & Fees:
a.
2.
Provide a $15,000 building permit allowance for permit fees and municipal inspections.
Contingency Allowance
a.
Provide a $5,000 construction contingency allowance for the Owner’s discretionary use.
CASH ALLOWANCES AND PERMIT FEES
01 21 13 - 1
SECTION 01 23 00 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing Alternates.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain
work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid
amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of
construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation
methods described in the Contract Documents.
1.
1.4
The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the
Contract Sum.
PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully
integrate that Work into the Project.
1.
Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as
part of the Alternate.
B.
Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in
writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected,
or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to
alternates.
C.
Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other Work of this Contract.
D.
Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Specification
Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the
Work described under each alternate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
ALTERNATES
01 23 00 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A.
Alternate No. 1: Provide an epoxy floor finish in the Existing Parking Garage Rm. 118 as
indicated on drawing A2. Refer to Specification Section 09 67 12 – Epoxy Flooring. This is an
ADD alternate to the Base Bid of the project.
B.
Alternate No. 2: Provide Ice Maker & Bin. Refer to Item No. 48 on drawing A2A and
Specification Section 11 40 00 – Food Service Equipment. This is an ADD alternate to the Base
Bid of the project.
C.
Alternate No. 3: Provide reinforced floor for Walk-In Cooler/Freezer in Kitchen Rm. 101. Refer
to Item No. 1 on drawing A2A and Specification Section 11 40 00 – Food Service Equipment.
This is an ADD alternate to the Base Bid of the project.
D.
Alternate No. 4: Provide Fryer Maker & Bin in Kitchen R. 101. Refer to Item No. 20 on drawing
A2A and Specification Section 11 40 00 – Food Service Equipment. This is an ADD alternate to
the Base Bid of the project.
E.
Alternate No. 5: Provide (2) Coolers in lieu of Staging Cooler in Kitchen Rm. 101. Refer to Items
No. 40A; 40B, and No. 40 on drawing FSE-2, and Specification Section 11 40 00 – Food Service
Equipment. This is a DEDUCT alternate to the Base Bid of the project.
F.
Alternate No. 6: Provide and install seven (7) 8 ft. long precast concrete wheel stops as shown on
drawing A2 and paint bumpers “caution yellow”. This is an ADD alternate to the Base Bid of the
project.
ALTERNATES
01 23 00 - 2
DOCUMENT 01 25 13 - SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
PRIOR TO EXECUTION OF CONTRACT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
CHMP, INC.
Grand Blanc, Michigan 48439
1.2
A.
All bids are based on materials, equipment and procedures specified.
B.
names, catalog numbers and/or manufacturer's names.
C.
Listing of a manufacturer implies acceptance of them only as supplier of a product option items to
comply color and pattern-wise with base specified items.
D.
Architect reserves right to require substitutions or product option items to comply color and pattern-wise
with base specified items.
E.
No substitution permitted between bid opening and execution of Contract.
F.
Any brand name product that is notated within the Specifications provided for the construction of the
Genesee County CARD Food Preparation Kitchen should read: “Brand name or approved equal are to be
utilized to identify the required design specifications and salient characteristics. The Owner will accept
any submission for these products that meet the required design specifications.”
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
PRIOR TO EXECUTION OF CONTRACT
01 25 13-1
DOCUMENT 01 25 16 - SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
AFTER EXECUTION OF CONTRACT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Furnish all work and services for furnishing, submitting, processing and handling of requests for
substitutions and data for product options after execution of Contract. Any substitution or product
option must be in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
See appropriate sections for specific items.
See General Conditions for additional information.
Gregory N. Mason, Architect.
CHMP, Inc.
1.2
A.
All bids are based on materials, equipment and procedures specified.
B.
names, catalog numbers and/or manufacturer's names.
C.
Listing of a manufacturer implies acceptance of them only as supplier of a product option items to
comply color and pattern-wise with base specified items.
D.
Architect reserves right to require substitutions or product option items to comply color and pattern-wise
with base specified items.
E.
No substitution permitted between bid opening and execution of Contract.
F.
No substitution permitted after execution of Contract, except by change order.
1.3
CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS
A.
For products specified only by reference standards, use any product meeting standards.
B.
For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, use any product or manufacturer
named.
C.
For products specified by naming one manufacturer and product and several optional manufacturers or
products, select any named product and manufacturer which meets all specification criteria.
01 25 16-1
1.
2.
1.4
Contract Documents are based on use of specified manufacturer.
By using an optional manufacturer or product, Contractor represents that he will be responsible for
all adjustments to fit product to the work and for providing all additional work, equipment, and
services required by use of product, at no additional cost.
SUBSTITUTION AFTER EXECUTION OF CONTRACT
A.
No substitution will be considered after execution of Contract except for non-availability of specified
item due to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Strikes.
Lockouts.
Bankruptcy.
Discontinuance of production.
Proven shortage.
Similar occurrences.
B.
Notify Architect, in writing, with substantiating data as soon as non-availability becomes apparent.
C.
Notify in time to avoid delay in construction.
D.
Forward submittal data as required for substitutions.
1.5
REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION
A.
Only written requests with complete submittal data will be considered.
B.
Submit request in three copies.
C.
In making request for substitutions, or in using an approved substitute item, Contractor represents:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
1.6
He has investigated proposed product or method, and has determined that it is equal or superior in
all respects to that specified, and that it will perform intended function.
He will provide same guarantee for substitute item as for product or method specified.
He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, to include building
modifications if necessary, making such changes as may be required for Work to be complete in
all respects.
He waives all claims for additional costs or time related to substitution which subsequently
become apparent.
Acknowledge acceptance of these provisions in request.
No verbal, or written approvals other than by Change Order will be valid.
SUBSTITUTION SUBMITTAL DATA
A.
Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents.
B.
For products:
1.
2.
Products identification, including manufacturer's name.
Manufacturer literature, marked to indicate specific model, type, size, and options to be
considered:
01 25 16-2
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
4.
C.
Product description.
Performance and test data.
Reference standards.
Difference in power demand, air quantities, etc.
Dimensional differences from specified unit.
Full size samples if requested. Architect reserves right to impound sample until physical units are
installed on project for comparison purposes. Requester pay all costs of furnishing and return of
samples. Architect is not responsible for loss of, or damage to, samples.
Name and address of similar projects and name of Owner's representative we can contact, to
discuss products, installation, and field performance data.
For construction methods:
1.
2.
Detailed description of proposed method.
Illustrate on drawings.
D.
Itemized comparison of proposed substitute to specified item.
E.
Data relating to changes in construction schedule.
F.
Relation to separate contracts.
G.
Cost of proposed substitution in comparison with product or method specified.
1.7
REJECTION OF SUBSTITUTION
A.
Substitutions will not be considered if:
1.
2.
3.
1.8
They are indicated or implied on shop drawings, or project data submittals, without formal request
submitted in accord with this section.
Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents, or building spaces.
Request for substitution does not indicate specific item for which request is submitted.
Acceptance of manufacturer only will not be made.
REIMBURSEMENT OF ARCHITECT'S COSTS
A.
In the event substitutions are proposed to the Architect after the Contract has been awarded, the Architect
will record all time used by him and by his consultants in evaluation of each such proposed substitution.
B.
Whether or not the Architect approves a proposed substitution, the Contractor promptly upon receipt of
the Architect's billing shall reimburse the Architect at the rate of two and one-half times the direct cost to
the Architect and his consultants for all time spent by them in evaluating the proposed substitution.
01 25 16-3
SECTION 01 26 63 - FEES FOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this section. The General Requirements
apply to the work of this section.
REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fees shall be indicated in the bid as a percentage of the actual net cost to the Contractor of the following:
1.
2.
Changes in work performed by the Contractor’s own forces (15%).
Changes in work performed by a subcontractor’s forces (10%).
B.
Separate fee percentage is required for application to net increases or decreases in cost to the Contractor;
fees shall include all charges for supervision, coordination, overhead, administration, bonds and profit.
C.
Taxes, social security payments, insurance charges and similar assessments shall be computed separately
and shall not be included in the cost of the work to which the fee is applied.
D.
Fees shall not be applicable to adjustments made on the basis of “Unit Prices” stated in the Bid Tender
Form.
FEES FOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
01 26 63 - 1
SECTION 01 29 73 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
General:
1.
Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for application for payment as
indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install supplementary or
miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and
complete installation.
See General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions for additional general requirements.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Project data, include the following:
1.
Submittals: Prior to commencement of work.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Submittals: Monthly, following commencement of work.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Certificate of Insurance
Performance Bond (AIA Document A312).
Labor/Material Bond (AIA Document A312).
Schedule of Values (including names and contact telephone numbers for all sub-contractors).
Include with AIA Document A101 submittal.
Application for Payment (AIA Document G702/G703).
Sworn Statement, and Waivers of Liens (Submit originals only).
The Contractor may, at his option, submit rough drafts of each Application for Payment to the
Architect for review prior to originals being submitted.
Certified Payroll Records.
Submittals: Prior to final application for payment.
a.
All items required for project close-out including (but not limited to) the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
4.
Contractor’s written notice of substantial completion to Architect.
Certificates of governing authorities (including: inspection approvals and
certificates of occupancy).
All warranties, guarantees, equipment operation and maintenance manuals, asbuilt drawings, attic stock (extra materials).
Completed, initialed punch list.
Reference specifications, section 01700 - Project Close-out, for additional information.
Submittals: Final
a.
Application for Payment (AIA Document G702/G703).
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01 29 73-1
b.
c.
d.
5.
Sworn Statement (submit originals only).
Waivers of Liens - Conditional/Unconditional (submit originals only).
Consent of Surety Form (submit originals only).
Submittals: Architect’s Review
a.
b.
The Architect shall have seven (7) days to review and process each Application for
Payment correctly and completely submitted.
Applications for Payment submitted incorrectly or incompletely will be returned to the
Contractor for correction/completion and resubmittal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Submittal time schedule of Applications for Payment to be determined at Project Pre-Construction (“Kickoff”) Meeting. These submission dates will be coordinated with Owner/Committees meeting calendar.
B.
Notarize Application for Payment.
C.
Provide supporting data substantiating General Contractor's right to payment as Owner and Architect may
require.
D.
Submit Application for Payment on AIA Documents G702, Application and Certificate for Payment, and
G703, Continuation Sheet.
E.
Furnish in triplicate each document submitted.
F.
Applications for Payment to serve as certification of status of project.
G.
Signed by duly authorized agent of General Contractor.
H.
Base application for payment upon 100 percent of value of work installed and materials and equipment
suitably stored at site and materials and equipment suitably stored off site in insured and/or bonded
warehouse.
I.
Itemize Applications for Payment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.2
Work in place to date, broken down per schedule of values.
Materials and equipment stored on site.
Materials and equipment stored off site. (Provide copy of paid invoice and insurance certificate.)
Total amount due to date.
Amount of previous application.
Amount due for this period.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Subdivide the Schedule of Values items into defined areas of the building, the value of said subdivisions
shall be mutually agreeable to both the Contractor and Architect.
01 29 73-2
B.
Bond cost will be paid with 1st payment. The Contractor's overhead and profit shall be distributed into
each Schedule of Values item in proportion to the value of said item to the total value of this contract.
Equal monthly payment shall be made for General Conditions based upon the number of months the
Contractor is scheduled to be on-site.
C.
Where the Schedule of Values items are separated into a Labor Amount and a Material Amount, payments
shall be made for materials delivered and suitably stored. Where the Schedule of Values item is not
separated into a Labor Amount and a Material Amount, payments shall be made for materials upon
installation. The Labor Amount shall include all estimated on-site installation costs (including labor,
applicable taxes, insurance, fringe benefits, erection equipment, tools, and overhead/profit). The Material
Amount shall include all estimated material and manufactured equipment costs (including delivery costs,
applicable taxes, insurance and overhead/profit).
3.3
CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT
A.
3.4
Architect will, within 7 days after receipt of General Contractors Application for Payment, either issue
signed/certified Certificate for Payment to Owner, with copy to General Contractor, for such amount
Architect determines is properly due, or notify General Contractor of reasons for withholding Certificate,
and request re-submission with revisions.
PROGRESS PAYMENTS/RETAINAGE
A.
Owner will withhold 10 percent of each payment for all work in place until work is 50% in place (verified
by Architect).
B.
For all public projects subject to compliance with Michigan Compiled Laws P.A. 1980, no. 524, sections
125.1561 thru 125.1565: After the work is 50 percent in place, the retainage withheld may be lowered to 5
percent, provided project is on schedule with all work progressing in a satisfactory manner, and no other
outstanding, specific concerns relating to the Contractor’s performance under the contract. For all projects
not subject to compliance with MCL P.A. 1980, no 524, sections 125.1561 thru 125.1565: Retainage
withheld shall remain at 10 percent until project is “substantially complete” (refer to specifications,
section 01700 - Project Close-out for definition) at which time retainage withheld shall be reduced to 5
percent until completion of all Punch List items have been verified/certified by the Architect and Owner
as fully complete.
C.
Owner will make monthly payments to General Contractor within thirty (30) days after receipt of
Certificate for Payment from Architect.
3.5
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
3.6
Within 30 days after Certificate of Substantial Completion (AIA Document G704) has been issued,
General Contractor will be paid sum sufficient to increase total payments to 100 percent of Contract
Amount, less such retainage Architect deems necessary to protect Owner.
FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
A.
Final payment constituting entire unpaid balance of Contract amount will be paid by Owner to General
Contractor within 30 days after final Certificate for Payment has been issued by Architect.
01 29 73-3
SECTION 01 29 76 - PAYMENT FOR DELIVERED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PAYMENT FOR DELIVERED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A.
Owner may make payments to General Contractor for materials and equipment ready, but not yet
incorporated in the work, delivered and suitably stored at site or another location approved in writing by
Owner.
1.
B.
For purpose of above paragraph, "materials and equipment" eligible for payment are defined as
finished goods made specifically for subject job and requiring extensive time to be manufactured
or obtained. Raw materials or work-in-process at manufacturer's plant are not eligible for
payment. Items which are readily available for purchase will not be considered eligible.
Payment by Owner for such materials and equipment not yet incorporated in the Work will be made
provided following is accomplished:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Items must be listed separately on Application for Payment.
Provide receipted invoices as evidence that General Contractor is unconditional owner of
equipment or material with Application for Payment.
Execute transfer to title, attached with each request.
Describe method used to store off-site items.
Identify items in storage as property of Owner, and furnish description of identification method.
Provide written inventory of items and methods used to verify such inventory, including General
Contractor certification that all quantities have been received in good condition.
Owner must approve location of off-site storage, in writing.
Secure proof of insurance in Owner's name, at no additional cost to Owner.
Satisfactory proof of adequate transportation of items to site.
C.
Owner retains right to verify storage by physical inspection prior to invoice approval and at any time
thereafter. Such payment does not relieve responsibility for protecting, safeguarding, transporting and
proper installation of equipment or materials. Warranty and guarantee period does not commence until
installation and Substantial Completion of work.
D.
Payment will be treated same as "work-in-place" with payment due upon evidence of delivery to job site
or other location acceptable to Owner except that these payments will not be included in value of work in
place for payment of labor and mark-up. Each subsequent invoice will restate prior month's materials
and equipment not incorporated in the work and current month additions and deletions for materials and
equipment incorporated into the Work.
E.
Upon making of partial payments by Owner, all materials and equipment covered thereby become sole
property of Owner. Partial payments, however, do not constitute acceptance of work by Owner, nor be
construed as waiver of any right or claim by Owner.
PAYMENT FOR DELIVERED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
01 29 76-1
SECTION 01 31 13 - COORDINATION OF WORK BY OTHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
General:
1.
General Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating his work effort with the Owner for
installation of items and equipment to be purchased directly by the Owner.
2.
General Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating his work effort with the Owner’s
Contractor for telephone systems.
3.
Contractor for computer data systems.
4.
Contractor for interior furnishings.
COORDINATION OF WORK BY OTHERS
01 31 13 - 1
SECTION 01 31 19 - PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
General Contractor Schedule and Administer Project Meetings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.2
Prepare agendas.
Make physical arrangements for meetings.
Preside at meetings.
Record minutes; include significant proceedings and decisions.
Distribute copies of minutes to participants.
Architect representative attend meetings to ascertain that work is expedited consistent with construction
schedule and with Contract Documents.
PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A.
General Contractor schedule and hold pre-construction meeting prior to construction.
B.
Attendance:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Owner.
Architect and his consultants.
General Contractor.
Subcontractors.
Subcontractors must be prepared to discuss following items on minimum agenda prepared by General
Contractor:
1.
Distribute and discuss:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Critical work sequencing.
Relation and coordination of subcontractors.
Designation of responsible personnel.
Processing of field decisions and change orders.
Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents.
Submittal of shop drawings, project data and samples.
a.
8.
9.
List of Subcontractors.
Tentative Construction Schedule.
submittal log
- Itemized list of submittals (in CSI order)
- Date of Issue
- Date of Return
- Approved/Not Approved/Approved as Noted
Procedures for maintaining record documents.
Use of premises:
PROJECT MEETINGS
01 31 19-1
a.
b.
10.
1.3
Office and storage areas.
Owner's requirements.
Submission and processing of monthly application for payment forms and associated
requirements.
PROGRESS MEETINGS
A.
Attend regularly scheduled meetings; time, day and place determined by General Contractor.
B.
Hold called meetings as progress of work dictates. Generally, meetings will be held bi-weekly.
C.
Location of meetings, at job site or as indicated in notice.
D.
Attendance:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Owner.
Architect and his consultants.
General Contractor.
Minimum Agenda For Each Progress Meeting:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Review, approve minutes of previous meeting.
Review work progress since last meeting.
Note field observations, problems and decisions.
Identify problems which impede planned progress.
Review off site fabrication problems.
Review revised construction schedule.
Develop corrective measures and procedures to regain planned schedule, if required.
Plan progress during next work period.
Coordinate projected progress with other subcontractors.
Review submittal schedules and updated submittal log, expedite as required to maintain schedule.
Review RFI’s/outstanding issues.
PROJECT MEETINGS
01 31 19-2
SECTION 01 32 26 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
Immediately after Contract award, prepare and submit progress schedule of work consistent with Contract
Documents as herein specified.
B.
Coordinate Subcontractor’s schedules for entire project.
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Resolve conflicts among schedules of Subcontractors.
Revise as required by conditions and progress of work.
Furnish copy of schedule for entire project to each Subcontractor.
SUBMITTALS (See Section 01 33 29)
A.
Initial construction schedule to Owner and Architect prior to start of work, but not later than date set for
preconstruction conference.
B.
Revised construction schedule to Owner and Architect prior to start of work but not later than 15 days
after notice to proceed.
C.
Updated schedules accurately depicting progress to last day of each month with Progress Report.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FORMS OF SCHEDULES
A.
Prepare in form of computer generated CPM. (Critical Path Method)
1.
2.
Order: Table of contents from Project Manual or Chronological order or beginning and completion
of each item of work, whichever is most applicable.
Identify each task:
a.
b.
3.
4.
B.
3.2
By major specification number.
By distinct graphic delineation.
Horizontal time scale: Identify first week day of each week.
Scale and spacing: To allow space for updating.
Sheet size: Maximum 8-1/2 x 14 IN.
CONTENT OF SCHEDULES
A.
Provide complete sequence of construction by activity.
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01 32 26 - 1
1.
Shop drawings, product data and samples.
a.
b.
2.
Submittal dates.
Dates reviewed copies will be required.
Decision dates for:
a.
b.
3.
4.
Products specified by allowances.
Selection of finishes.
Product procurement and delivery dates.
Dates for beginning, and completion of each element of construction.
B.
Identify work separate phases, or other logically grouped activities.
C.
Show project percentage of completion for each item of work as of last day of every month.
D.
Provide separate sub-schedule showing submittals, review times, procurement schedules, and delivery
dates.
E.
Provide sub-schedule to define critical portions of entire schedule.
3.3
UPDATING
A.
Show all changes occurring since previous submission of updated schedules.
B.
Indicate progress of each activity, show completion dates.
C.
Include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Major change in scope.
Activities modified since previous updating.
Review projections due to changes.
Description of revision.
a.
b.
c.
D.
Provide narrative report including:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Discussion of problem areas including current and anticipated delay factors and their impact.
Corrective action taken or proposed and its effect.
Effect of change in schedule of subcontractors.
Description of revisions.
a.
b.
c.
3.4
Effect on schedule due to change in scope.
Revisions in duration of activities.
Other changes that may affect schedule.
Effect on schedule due to change of scope.
Revisions in duration of activities.
Other changes that may affect schedule.
DISTRIBUTION
A.
Distribute copies of revised schedules to:
01 32 26 - 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Owner.
Architect.
Subcontractors.
Job Site File.
Other Concerned Parties.
Instruct recipients to report any inability to comply and provide detailed explanation, with suggested
remedies.
01 32 26 - 3
SECTION 01 32 29 - PROGRESS REPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
Project Data:
1.
Progress reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Each subcontractor prepare comprehensive daily log and maintain it during entire project period.
B.
Each subcontractor present copy of daily log to General Contractor for compilation into monthly Progress
Reports.
C.
General Contractor present copies of Progress Reports with Application for Payment.
D.
Progress reports to include following data for each day of entire project period:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Manpower, by trade.
Work being performed, with location.
Weather.
Situations or circumstances liable to delay work or give cause for claims for time extension or
added cost.
List of visitor’s names, to include officials, Owner’s representatives, and other authorities. Record
their observation.
PROGRESS REPORTS
01 32 29 - 1
SECTION 01 33 23 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES AND PROJECT DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
General
1.
2.
3.
Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for furnishing, processing, delivery,
reproduction and other functions for scheduling and handling of shop drawings, product data,
samples and project data as indicated, in accord with Contract Documents.
Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or
miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for completion of work
under this section.
B.
See General Conditions for additional requirements.
C.
See technical sections for data required.
1.2
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES AND PROJECT DATA - GENERAL
A.
Submit all items to:
Attn: Richard Schlicht.
CHMP, Inc.
B.
Contractor is responsible for making all submissions.
1.
2.
Submit to address indicated.
Transmit all items with a transmittal form.
C.
Provide all information required for complete review of each item in one submittal.
D.
Make submittals sufficiently in advance of date required to allow Architect reasonable time for review,
and resubmission, if necessary.
1.
2.
1.3
Items not submitted in accord with provisions of this section will be returned, without action, for
resubmission.
Submissions on items not approved for use by specifications, addenda, or change order will be
rejected.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop drawing and product data submittals are required as called for by submittal paragraph
specification section.
B.
Identify drawings with manufacturer, item, use, type, project designation, specification section or
drawing detail reference.
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES AND PROJECT DATA
01 33 23-1
C.
Submit one reproducible transparency of each drawing until review is complete.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Submit in mailing tube.
Do not fold.
PRINTS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE.
Submit drawings not larger than 24 x 36 IN.
Allow clear space, approximately 40 SQ IN, for stamping on right hand side.
Submit 6 copies of standard items such as equipment brochures, cuts of fixtures, or standard catalog
items.
1.
2.
1.4
Indicate exact item or model and all proposed options.
Include scale details, sizes, dimensions, performance characteristics, and other pertinent data.
SAMPLE SUBMITTALS
A.
Identify samples with manufacturer's name, item, use, type, product designation, specification section or
drawing detail reference, color, range, texture, finish and other pertinent data.
B.
Submit samples to address indicated, or construction site if required.
1.
2.
C.
Architect may, at his option, retain samples for comparison purpose until completion of work.
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Include brochures, shop drawings and installation instructions, if required, with transmittal.
Submit transmittal for site-built samples to address listed above.
Samples will be returned or may be used in the work unless technical section specifically indicates
otherwise.
Remove samples when directed.
Pay all costs of furnishing, constructing, and removing samples.
PROJECT DATA SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit project data as indicated in individual sections.
B.
If submittal does not comply with Contract Documents, Architect will so inform the Contractor.
Contractor resubmit until no further objection is made.
C.
Use of transmittal form not required.
1.6
CONTRACTOR ACTION: SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
A.
Review, approve and stamp all items prior to submission to Architect.
B.
Stamp must indicate that Contractor has:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verified all field dimensions and quantities.
Verified all field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data.
Reviewed and coordinated all submittal data with requirements of the Work and Contract
Documents.
Certified that submittals comply with Contract Documents.
01 33 23-2
C.
Reproduce and distribute submittals receiving "approved" or "approved as corrected" stamp.
D.
Resubmit items stamped "revise and resubmit" or "not approved".
1.
2.
1.7
Provide print of previous drawings with resubmission for comparison.
Add letter suffix to previous transmittal number, to indicate resubmission.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Project data:
1.
Submittals: Prior to first application for payment.
a.
b.
1.8
Product list.
Schedule of submittals.
PRODUCT LIST
A.
Complete list of products and subcontractors proposed for use.
B.
Only products and manufacturers which have been specified or approved by addendum may be used.
C.
Partial payment request will not be processed until satisfactory project list has been received.
D.
Format for project list:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.9
Specification section.
Product.
Manufacturer.
Subcontractor.
SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS
A.
Complete schedule of all required submittals indicating proposed submittal dates for all items.
1. Include all shop drawings, project data, samples and project data.
B.
Schedule all submittals requiring Architect approval during first quarter of construction period.
C.
Partial payment request will not be processed until satisfactory schedule of submittals is received.
1.10
ARCHITECT APPROVAL: SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
A.
Approval is only for conformance with the design concept of the project and compliance with the intent
of the information given in the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be
confirmed and correlated at the job site; for information that pertains solely to the fabrication processes
or to techniques of construction and for coordination of the work of all trades.
B.
Approved samples, submitted or constructed, constitute criterion for judging completed work. Work or
items not equal to samples will be rejected.
C.
Start of work which requires submittals, prior to return of submittals with Architect's stamp indicating
approval is at Contractor's risk.
01 33 23-3
SECTION 01 52 13 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
General
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all temporary facilities and their
subsequent removal as indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
Completely coordinate with work specifically indicated.
TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY
A.
Use the existing power and lighting systems within the target building areas.
B.
Temporary electrical power used will be paid for by the Owner.
C.
Each Contractor provide his own extension cord.
D.
Each Contractor provide heavy duty electrical power, exceeding available power, required for his
operation.
1.3
TEMPORARY WATER
A.
Contractor shall be required to make all necessary arrangements to provide temporary water from the
existing building domestic water supply.
B.
The cost of the temporary water will be paid for by the Contractor.
1.4
TEMPORARY TOILETS
A.
Use the existing first floor public toilet facilities for workmen.
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Provide facilities complying with Local, State and Federal Sanitary Laws and Regulations.
Maintain in clean, sanitary condition.
Provide adequate supplies of toilet paper.
TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES
A.
Furnish and install temporary enclosures, doors, and transparent plastic windows required to protect
building from damage due to vandalism, or the elements, or to maintain suitable temperature during
installation or finishing work.
B.
Provide all items required in connection with safety program.
01 33 23-1
1.6
TEMPORARY STORAGE AND WORKING AREAS
A.
Prior to start of work, General Contractor shall meet with all contractors to arrange and prepare plot
plan defining working, storing and traffic areas.
1.
2.
B.
Within area designated for his use, each Contractor provide suitable and sufficient enclosed and covered
spaces, with raised flooring, to protect materials and equipment from damage by weather or
construction work.
1.
2.
1.7
Except as specifically provided, working and storing outside these areas will not be permitted.
Arrange and locate temporary structures and sheds to avoid interfering with construction.
Maintain storage and working areas in clean and orderly condition.
Upon completion of work, or sooner if directed by Architect, remove temporary structures and
leave in clean and orderly condition.
TEMPORARY FENCES AND BARRICADES
A.
1.8
Furnish, install and maintain all necessary sound temporary fences, barricades, trench and hole covers,
warning lights and all other safety devices necessary to prevent injury to persons and damages to
property.
TRASH REMOVAL
A.
1.9
Contractor shall be responsible for providing and paying for on-site dumpsters and maintaining trash
control.
ACCESS AND DELIVERIES
A.
Utilize existing loading dock and street access points for delivery.
B.
Clean up on debris, materials, etc., that fall from vehicles enroute to and from site.
1.10
A.
TRAFFIC CONTROL
Provide any traffic control deemed necessary to effect smooth Owner operations.
01 33 23-2
SECTION 01 65 13 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT: DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, work and services for delivery, receiving, handling,
storage and protection of materials and equipment.
See technical sections for additional requirements.
Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish all supplementary or miscellaneous
items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete
installation.
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with applicable codes.
B.
Accomplish work to avoid damage to property.
C.
Clean debris from streets and walks.
D.
Provide fire protection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PRODUCT DELIVERY
A.
By manufacturer's normal means.
B.
In original labeled containers.
C.
Where applicable, with U/L labeling on packages.
D.
Contractor responsible for acceptance at site.
E.
Schedule deliveries to avoid delaying work.
F.
Inspect items for damage upon delivery, reorder as required to avoid delays.
3.2
PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE
A.
Use methods to avoid damage to item or structure.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT: DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
01 65 13 - 1
B.
Protect weather fragile items from weather damage.
C.
Handle and store bulk aggregates to avoid contamination.
D.
Store to allow air circulation.
E.
Store only in authorized areas on site.
F.
Replace or repair damaged items.
G.
Protect installed items as required until acceptance of building.
H.
Uncrate, assemble, if required, and remove debris.
I.
When offsite storage is authorized, perform rehandling to move items to site at no added cost.
3.3
CLEANUP
A.
Remove excess materials from site.
B.
Turn over to Owner, excess materials scheduled to remain.
C.
Restore site storage areas as directed by Architect.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT: DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
01 65 13 - 2
SECTION 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for all cutting and patching as indicted,
in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
See Division 1 for additional General Requirements.
SUMMARY
A.
Install work in such a manner and sequence as to preclude or minimize cutting and patching of new work.
B.
Execute cutting (including excavation) fitting or patching of work required to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Make several parts fit properly.
Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.
Remove and replace defective work.
Remove and replace non-conforming work.
Remove samples of installed work for testing.
Install specified work in existing construction.
In addition to contract requirements, upon written instructions of Architect:
1.
2.
3.
Uncover work to provide for Architect’s observation of covered work in accord with Contract
Documents.
Remove samples of installed materials for testing in accord with Contract Documents.
Remove work to provide for alteration of work in place.
D.
Do not endanger any work or any work of other contractors, by cutting, excavating, or other wise altering
any work except with written consent of General Contractor subject to review by Architect.
E.
Do not cut into or cut away any structural members, no dig under any foundations or into walls or other
parts, or in any case allow same to be done without full knowledge and written consent of Architect. Be
responsible for damage resulting from violation of these provisions.
F.
Use only firms or individual trades qualified to perform work required under this section.
1.3
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Perform preliminary investigations as required to ascertain extent of work. Conditions which would be
apparent by such investigation will not be allowed as cause for claims for extra costs.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
01 73 29 - 1
B.
Before start of work, obtain and pay for all permits required by all authorities having jurisdiction and
notify all interested utility companies.
C.
Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction for work which affects existing exitways, exit stairs,
means of egress, or access to, or exit from, areas.
1.
2.
1.4
Review with and obtain approval of authorities for any temporary construction which affects such
areas.
Obtain approval of fire authorities.
PAYMENT FOR COSTS
A.
Costs caused by ill timed or defective work, or work not conforming to Contract Documents, paid by
subcontractor responsible for ill timed, rejected or non-conforming work.
B.
Owner will pay for cost of work done on instructions of Architect, other than defective or nonconforming work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
For patching of work provide matching items. Where applicable, comply with specifications for type of
work to be done.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Inspect existing conditions of work, including elements subject to movement or damage during:
1.
2.
B.
3.2
Cutting and patching.
Excavating and backfilling.
After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new products.
PREPARATION PRIOR TO CUTTING
A.
Provide shoring, bracing and support as required to maintain structural integrity of project.
B.
Provide protection for other portions of project which may be affected.
C.
Provide protection from elements when required.
3.3
CUTTING AND REMOVAL - GENERAL
A.
Execute fitting and adjustment to provide finished installation to comply with specified tolerances and
finishes.
01 73 29 - 2
B.
Execute cutting by methods which will prevent damage to other work and will provide proper surfaces to
receive installation of repairs to new work.
C.
Perform backfilling as specified in applicable sections.
D.
Neatly cut and remove materials, and prepare all opening to receive new work.
E.
Remove masonry or concrete in small sections.
F.
Provide shoring, bracing, and other supports to prevent movement, settlement or collapse of remaining or
adjacent wall areas, structure, or facilities. Arrange shoring, bracing, and supports to prevent overloading
of structure.
G.
Take all precautions necessary to prevent damage to existing remaining work or to adjacent facilities.
Execute work using methods which will prevent interference with use of remaining and adjacent facilities
by Owner.
H.
Remove existing work indicated to be removed, or as necessary for installation of new work.
3.4
MATCHING AND PATCHING
A.
Where items are removed from existing walls, ceilings, floors or partitions to remain, infill and repair
wall, ceiling, floor or partition disturbed by removal with materials matching adjacent condition.
Contractor will be responsible for reviewing demolition and new construction plans with existing
conditions for verification of patching work extent.
B.
Where walls, ceilings, floors or partitions are removed, repair abutting walls, ceilings or floors disturbed
by removal.
C.
Where existing construction is cut or otherwise disturbed to permit installation of new work, match and
patch existing disturbed construction.
D.
Use methods and materials similar in appearance, and equal in quality to areas or surfaces being repaired.
E.
Materials and finished work are subject to review and approval of Architect.
F.
Remove and replace areas, surfaces or items which cannot be satisfactorily matched and patched.
G.
Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accord
with requirements of Contract Documents. Patch work shall in every way possible match existing work
and/or adjacent surfaces.
H.
Finish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish.
1.
2.
3.5
Continuous surfaces; to nearest intersections.
Assembly - entire refinishing.
CLEAN UP
A.
Remove all debris, rubbish, and materials resulting from cutting demolition or patching operations.
B.
Transport materials and legally dispose of off site.
END
OF
SECTION
01
73
29
01 73 29 - 3
SECTION 01 74 13 - CLEANING UP
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for cleaning up required in conjunction
with work performed, as indicated or required, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
FIRE PROTECTION
A.
Store volatile waste in covered metal containers.
B.
Remove from premises daily.
1.3
POLLUTION CONTROL
A.
Conduct clean-up and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws.
B.
Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste on site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CLEANING MATERIALS
A.
Use materials recommended by manufacturers of surfaces to be cleaned.
B.
Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Clean all items installed under this Contract.
1.
2.
B.
Leave free of stains, damage, or other defects prior to final acceptance.
Include cleaning of all finished wall surfaces, floors, hardware, lighting fixtures and items of
Architect, to his satisfaction at no additional expenses to Owner.
See technical sections for additional cleaning requirements.
01 73 29 - 1
3.2
DURING CONSTRUCTION
A.
Clean up all waste materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from the work at such frequencies as required
by Owner.
B.
Ensure that building and grounds are maintained free from accumulations of debris.
C.
Sprinkle dusty debris with water.
D.
At reasonable intervals, minimum once a week, clean-up site and access and dispose of debris off site.
E.
Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from interior and
exterior surfaces of fixtures, hardware, and equipment.
F.
Repair, patch and touch-up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes damaged by his own operations.
G.
Comply with additional requirements defined in specifications.
H.
Vacuum interior areas when ready for painting.
I.
Schedule cleaning operations so that contaminants resulting from cleaning do not fall on wet painted
surfaces.
J.
Clean all glass and aluminum surfaces within work area.
K.
Leave the work "broom clean".
3.3
FINAL CLEANING
A.
Use experienced workmen or professional cleaners for final cleaning.
B.
At completion of construction, just prior to acceptance or occupancy, perform final cleaning.
C.
Remove dirt, stains, labels, and foreign materials.
D.
Repair and touch-up marred areas.
E.
Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds; vacuum, polish and mop floors.
01 73 29 - 2
SECTION 01 77 13 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
GENERAL:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for project closeout as indicated, in
accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
See General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions for additional general requirements.
See technical sections for specific submittal items.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Project data:
1.
For substantial completion:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
List of all items to be completed or corrected.
Written notice of substantial completion.
Certificates of governing authorities.
Initialed punch list.
For final completion:
a.
b.
Written certification that work is complete.
Evidence of payments and release or waiver of liens.
(1)
(2)
(3)
c.
d.
e.
1.3
Contractor's Affidavit of Payments of Debts and Claims.
Contractor's release or waiver of liens.
Separate releases or waivers of liens for subcontractor suppliers, and other with
lien rights against Owner, together with list of all such parties.
Final application for payment (AIA G702 and G703).
List of all sales and services taxes.
Letter of site conformance.
FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
Obtain evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities.
1.
Certificates of inspection of:
a.
b.
c.
Electrical
Mechanical
Plumbing
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01 77 13-1
2.
3.
Other authorities as required.
Certificate of occupancy.
B.
Submit written notice, including list of all items to be completed or corrected, which state that Project, or
designated portion thereof, is substantial complete.
C.
Architect will, within reasonable period after notification, review the work and list of items to be
completed or corrected, and revise or add to list if necessary.
D.
If Architect does not agree that Work is substantially complete:
1.
2.
3.
E.
He shall immediately notify Contractor in writing, stating reasons.
Contractor must substantially complete Work and submit second written notice, including list of
items to be completed or corrected, that Project, or designated portion thereof, is substantially
complete.
Architect will again review the Work is substantially complete.
If Architect agrees that work is substantially complete:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Architect will prepare punch list of project, or designated portion thereof, and will provide one
copy each to Contractor and Owner.
Architect will return revised list of items to be completed or corrected, and punch list to Contractor.
Architect will prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion, AIA G-704, accompanied by revised
list of items to be complete or corrected and punch list.
Owner may occupy Project, or designated portion thereof, at this time, under provisions stated in
Certificate of Substantial Completion.
F.
If Owner is going to occupy Project, or designated portion thereof, Contractor must perform final
cleaning.
G.
Contractor shall complete work listed for completion or correction and all punch list items, within
designated time, and return both lists with each item initialed and dated to indicate completion.
1.4
FOR FINAL COMPLETION
A.
Submit written certification that:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Contract Documents have been reviewed.
Project has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents.
Equipment and systems have been tested and are operational.
Project is complete in every respect.
B.
Architect will make final walk through within ten (10) days after receipt of certification.
C.
Contractor remedy any remaining deficiencies, and submit final closeout submittals.
D.
Should final completion be materially delayed through no fault of Contractor. Contractor may submit
application for payment for portion of work on punch list which has been completed, in accord with
provisions of General Conditions.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01 77 13-2
E.
Upon completion of project, before final payment, furnish Owner, in number of copies required by
Owner, certified list of all sales and services taxes paid by Contractor (and subcontractor) in execution of
the Contract.
F.
Upon completion of project, before final payment, furnish Owner all required warranties and guarantees.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01 77 13-3
SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all operating and maintenance
manuals as indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
See Division 1 for General Requirements.
PRESENTATION OF SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and maintenance manuals for each product, components and system indicated. Submit 3
copies at least 60 days prior to equipment instruction period. See Section 01735.
B.
Maintenance data to Owner for finish materials indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Assemble data indicated and other data required to completely describe operation and maintenance
procedures.
B.
Bind or assemble in ring-binders, completely indexed by specification section, with each item clearly
labeled.
C.
Identify each item in manner consistent with names and identification numbers used in Contract
Documents, not with manufacturer's catalog numbers.
D.
Neatly type or draft all data not furnished in printed form.
E.
Organize data for ease of reference.
2.2
DATA REQUIRED FOR EACH COMPONENT AND SYSTEM
A.
Sequence of operation:
1.
2.
3.
List valves, switches, etc., used to start, stop and adjust systems.
Provide flow diagrams, control sequences and valve directory.
Submit valve directory for review prior to inclusion in manual: Show valve number, location.
List equipment controlled.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 23-1
B.
Lubrication instruction:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Frequency of inspection and lubrication recommended.
Type of grease.
Lubrication recommended.
Maintenance and trouble-shooting data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
All manufacturer furnished data.
Project record wiring diagrams.
Name and address of manufacturer.
Name and address of local representatives who stock or distribute repair parts.
DATA REQUIRED FOR FINISH MATERIALS
A.
Maintenance data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Precautions necessary.
Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
Maintenance materials and tools required.
Repair and/or replacement instructions.
Name and address of manufacturer.
Name and address of local supplier of maintenance materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DELIVERY
A.
Deliver all items to Owner at time of final completion.
1.
2.
B.
Submit 3 copies at least 60 days prior to equipment instruction periods (See Section 017825).
Resubmit and/or submit additional data as directed by Architect.
Have copies of required manuals available during instruction of Owner's personnel.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 23-2
SECTION 01 78 25 - OWNER INSTRUCTION FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.2
Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all equipment demonstration and
Owner personnel instruction as indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
Although such work is not supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices
incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
Provide instruction for all equipment and systems for which operating and maintenance data is required.
See individual sections.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.3
Instructors: Member(s) of installers' staffs and authorized representative(s) of component, assembly, or
system manufacturer(s). See individual sections for additional requirements.
A.
Submit separate report for each system or type of equipment, subject to Owner's approval.
1.
2.
1.4
Submit report (form attached) with preliminary information indicated, to Owner at least 2 weeks
prior to first instruction period.
Submit completed report; one copy each to Owner and Architect.
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Complete all instructions prior to Substantial Completion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Do not begin instructions until component, assembly or system has been tested as specified and is in
satisfactory operating condition.
B.
Assemble instructional aids.
1.
Have operation and maintenance data available for use during instruction (See Section 017823).
OWNER INSTRUCTION FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
01 78 25 - 1
3.2
INSTRUCTION
A.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems.
1.
Provide all necessary instruction to satisfaction of Owner.
B.
Explain use of operating and maintenance manuals.
C.
Tour building areas involved and identify:
1.
2.
D.
Maintenance points and access.
Control locations and equipment.
Explain operating sequences.
1.
2.
3.
Identify location and show operation of switches, valves, etc., used to start, stop and adjust
systems.
Explain use of flow diagrams, operating sequence diagrams, etc.
Demonstrate operation through complete cycle(s) and full range of operation in all modes,
including testing and adjusting relevant to operation.
E.
Explain use of control equipment, including temperature settings, switch modes, available adjustments,
reading of gages, and functions that must be serviced only by authorized factory representatives.
F.
Explain trouble-shooting procedures.
1.
2.
G.
Explain maintenance procedures and requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
H.
Demonstrate commonly occurring problems.
Note procedures which must be performed by factory personnel.
Point out items requiring periodic maintenance.
Demonstrate typical preventive maintenance procedures and recommended typical maintenance
intervals.
Demonstrate other commonly occurring maintenance procedures not part of preventive
maintenance program.
Identify maintenance materials to be used.
Furnish all tools required.
OWNER INSTRUCTION FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
01 78 25 - 2
SECTION 01 78 36 - WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide written guarantees for products and installations indicated.
B.
See General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions.
C.
Provide guarantees for period(s) indicated.
D.
Provide manufacturer's guarantees for products.
1.
Where manufacturer's standard guarantees expire before expiration date required by Contract
Documents, obtain and pay for guarantee extensions, as part of Contract Price.
E.
Provide all guarantees prior to final acceptance.
F.
Submit guarantees indicated, to the Owner with copy of transmittal form to Architect.
WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES
01 78 36-1
SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services to provide record documents as
specified, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
See Division 1 for additional General Requirements.
Definitions:
1.
Documents required for construction: Complete set of all documents required by Contract
Documents, including but not limited to:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
Field documents: Complete set of all documents required for construction.
a.
b.
3.
Not used for construction of project.
Contract drawings in form of clean prints.
Project Record Documents: Complete set of all documents required for construction with
exception of samples and mock-ups.
a.
b.
1.2
Used for construction of project.
Contract drawings in form of prints.
Periodic Update Documents: Complete separate set of all documents required for construction
with exception of samples and mock-ups.
a.
b.
4.
Contract drawings.
Project manual/specifications.
Addenda.
Shop drawings.
Project data.
Samples and mock-ups.
Change orders.
Modifications.
Field test records.
Do not use for construction of project.
Provide contract drawings in form of correctable, reproducible sepia mylars.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Project data:
1.
Project record Documents, at completion of project, to Owner with letter of transmittal.
a.
Submit Project Record Documents in containers used for periodic Update Documents.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01 78 39 - 1
2.
Provide transmittal letter containing:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Date.
Project title.
Contractor's name and address.
Title and number of each Project Record Document.
Certification that Project Record Documents submitted is complete and accurate.
Copy of transmittal letter to Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
POSTING PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION
A.
After Contract is executed, but prior to start of construction, obtain Contract Drawings and Project
Manual/Specifications which will be used for Field Documents and Periodic Update Documents.
B.
Obtain copies of all addenda and post above documents.
3.2
MAINTENANCE OF FIELD DOCUMENTS
A.
Maintain minimum of one copy at project site.
B.
Label each document "FIELD".
C.
These documents will be used of construction of project.
D.
Make documents available at all times for review by Architect, Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3
MAINTENANCE OF PERIODIC UPDATE DOCUMENTS
A.
Maintain one copy at project site.
B.
Label each documents "PERIODIC UPDATE".
C.
Do not use these documents for construction purposes.
D.
Make documents available at all time for review by Architect, Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
E.
Maintain in clean, dry, legible condition.
F.
Maintain contract drawings in stackable, enclosed cardboard file drawers designed to hold drawings
horizontally.
1.
G.
Provide index of contents of each file drawer on outside of drawer.
Maintain all other Periodic Update Documents in stackable, enclosed file boxes designed to hold specific
type of documents.
1.
Provide index of contents of each box on outside of box.
01 78 39 - 2
3.4
POSTING AND UPDATING OF PERIODIC UPDATE DOCUMENTS
A.
Post and update on weekly basis.
B.
Contract drawings: Mark legibly to record actual construction including by not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Depths of various elements of foundations in relation to first floor level.
Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to
permanent surface improvements.
Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced to visible and
accessible features of structure.
Field changes of dimension and detail.
Changes made by change order or field order.
Project Manual/Specifications: Type on each section to record all changes including but not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Addenda.
Change order or field order.
Modifications to contract.
Bind added sections into Project Manual/Specifications.
Indicate manufacturer.
D.
Do not conceal work for which information must be recorded until all required information is recorded on
Periodic Update Documents.
E.
Any work concealed prior to recording of required information will be exposed. Once all required
information is recorded on Periodic Update Documents, work will be restored at Contractor's expense.
3.5
PRODUCTION OF PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
At substantial completion, obtain complete set of correctable, reproducible mylars for each contract
drawing.
B.
Label each document "PROJECT RECORD".
C.
Have skilled draftsman transfer all changes, corrections, entries, etc., from Periodic Update Documents to
Project Record Documents.
D.
All other Period Update Documents may be used for Project Record Documents provided they are in
satisfactory condition.
E.
Replace any Periodic Update Documents, found to be in unsatisfactory condition. Transfer all recorded
changes from original to replacement copy.
01 78 39 - 3
SECTION 01 78 43 - SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all spare parts and maintenance
materials as indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
See Division 1 for General Requirements.
See specification sections for items required.
A.
Spare parts: To Owner with letter of transmittal.
B.
Maintenance materials: To Owner with letter of transmittal.
C.
Extra materials: To Owner with letter of transmittal.
D.
Copies of all letters of transmittal: To Construction Manager.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS
A.
Package in clearly identified boxes.
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Indicate manufacturers name, part name and stock number.
Indicate piece of equipment part or tool is for.
Indicate name, address and phone number of closest supplier.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Package in clearly identified boxes.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Indicate trade name and stock number.
Indicate which item material is to be used with.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Package in clearly identified containers, or install where indicated.
SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
01 78 43-1
1.
2.
3.
Indicate trade name, stock number, size, color, etc.
Indicate where product is to be used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DELIVER
A.
Deliver to Owner at time of final completion unless Owner requests earlier delivery.
SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
01 78 43-2
SECTION 02 41 13 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.3
Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building.
Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
Patching and repairs.
Division 1 Section "Summary of Work" for use of the building and phasing requirements.
Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for selective
demolition operations.
Division 1 Section "Schedules and Reports" for selective demolition schedule requirements.
Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls" for temporary utilities,
temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and
environmental protection measures for selective demolition operations.
Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" for record document requirements.
Division 31 Section "Earthwork" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for material and construction requirements for temporary
enclosures.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for material and construction requirements for
temporary enclosures.
Division 15 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items.
Division 16 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, or to
remain the Owner's property.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner's property.
Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify contents of containers and
deliver to Owner's designated storage area.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare them for reuse;
store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations or in locations indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective
demolition. When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage
location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02 41 13 - 1
1.4
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
1.5
Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to
remain the Owner's property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall be
removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor's option.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, for information only, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Proposed dust-control measures.
C.
Proposed noise-control measures.
D.
Schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for
each activity.
Interruption of utility services.
Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of
Owner's on-site operations.
Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's
partial occupancy of completed Work.
Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.
E.
Inventory of items to be removed and salvaged.
F.
Inventory of items to be removed by Owner.
G.
Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site
improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations.
H.
Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
1.
I.
1.6
Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or
mechanical conditions.
Landfill records indicating receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to
accept hazardous wastes.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Demolition Firm Qualifications: Engage an experienced firm that has successfully completed selective
demolition Work similar to that indicated for this Project.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before starting selective
demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with preinstallation conference
requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
02 41 13 - 2
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of buildings to be selectively demolished.
1.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far
as practical.
B.
Asbestos: It is not expected that asbestos will be encountered in the Work. If any materials suspected of
containing asbestos are encountered, do not disturb the materials. Immediately notify the Architect and
the Owner.
C.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.
1.8
SCHEDULING
A.
1.9
Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations.
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Special Warranty: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
REPAIR MATERIALS
A.
Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
1.
2.
Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials
that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective
demolition required.
C.
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and
salvaged.
D.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the intended function
or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict. Promptly submit
a written report to the Architect.
E.
Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in
structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures during
02 41 13 - 3
selective demolition.
F.
3.2
Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.
UTILITY SERVICES
A.
Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective
1.
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when authorized
in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during
interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to governing authorities.
a.
B.
Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services serving
building to be selectively demolished.
1.
2.
3.
C.
3.3
Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during
changeover.
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. Coordinate with Owner.
Where utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide bypass
connections to maintain continuity of service to other parts of the building before proceeding with
selective demolition.
Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing,
and sealing or capping utility services. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting
and sealing have been completed and verified in writing.
PREPARATION
A.
Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids,
flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations.
B.
Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets,
walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
C.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without
permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed
or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.
Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities
to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways,
where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of
groups of trees to remain.
Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between demolition and removal of existing
construction, on exterior surfaces and new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage
occurs to structure or interior areas.
02 41 13 - 4
5.
6.
D.
Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain and are exposed
during selective demolition operations.
Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and
prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of building to be selectively demolished.
1.
3.4
Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
POLLUTION CONTROLS
A.
Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and dirt.
Comply with governing environmental protection regulations.
1.
B.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
1.
C.
3.5
Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable
conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey
debris to grade level.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition
operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition.
A.
Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as
indicated. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations and as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Proceed with selective demolition systematically.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting
methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. To minimize
disturbance of adjacent surfaces, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding,
not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing
finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces,
such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting
flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting
operations.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly
dispose of off-site.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and
to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
Locate selective demolition equipment throughout the structure and remove debris and materials
so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On-site storage or sale of removed items is
prohibited.
Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing before start of
selective demolition operations.
02 41 13 - 5
B.
Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with
construction to remain, using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power-driven impact
tools.
C.
Break up and remove concrete slabs on grade, unless otherwise shown to remain.
D.
Remove no more existing roofing than can be temporarily projected. See applicable Division 7 Section
for new roofing requirements.
3.6
PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A.
Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by selective
B.
Patching is specified in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
C.
Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials.
1.
Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls to remain with an approved
masonry patching material, applied according to manufacturer's printed recommendations.
D.
Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining construction to
remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
E.
Patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space where demolished walls or partitions extend one
finished area into another. Provide a flush and even surface of uniform color and appearance.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
3.7
Closely match texture and finish of existing adjacent surface.
Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances.
Where patching smooth painted surfaces, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface
containing the patch after the surface has received primer and second coat.
Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve
uniform color and appearance.
Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation, where feasible.
Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform
appearance.
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate
on-site.
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.8
CLEANING
A.
Sweep the building broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation.
B.
Change filters on air-handling equipment on completion of selective demolition operations.
END
OF
SECTION
02
41
13
02 41 13 - 6
SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement
procedures, and finishes.
B.
Cast-in-place concrete includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
1.
1.3
Foundation, walls & footings.
Slabs-on-grade.
Concrete hardeners/sealers.
Concrete reinforcing.
Concrete slab repairs.
Division 2 Section "Portland Cement Concrete Paving" for concrete paving and walks.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B.
Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories,
admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish
materials, and others if requested by Architect.
C.
Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards,
except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1.
2.
3.
B.
American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings."
ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice."
Concrete Testing Service: The General Contractor shall engage a testing agency acceptable to Architect
to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
02 41 13 - 1
C.
Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of Work.
Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed Work, shall be done at Contractor's expense.
D.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1
Section "Project Meetings" and the following:
1.
At least 35 days prior to submitting design mixes, conduct a meeting to review detailed
requirements for preparing concrete design mixes and to determine procedures for satisfactory
concrete operations. Review requirements for submittals, status of coordinating work, and
availability of materials. Establish preliminary work progress schedule and procedures for
materials inspection, testing, and certifications. Require representatives of each entity directly
concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend conference, including, but not limited to, the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Contractor's superintendent.
Agency responsible for concrete design mixes.
Agency responsible for field quality control.
Ready-mix concrete producer.
Concrete subcontractor.
Primary admixture manufacturers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FORM MATERIALS
A.
Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other acceptable
panel-type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest
practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings.
B.
Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another acceptable material. Provide
lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
2.2
REINFORCING MATERIALS
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 Grade 60 (ASTM A 615M Grade 420), deformed.
B.
Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel.
C.
Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.
D.
Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with
CRSI specifications.
1.
2.
2.3
For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will
not support chair legs.
For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide
supports with legs that are protected by plastic (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel (CRSI, Class 2).
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
02 41 13 - 2
1.
B.
Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for
exposed concrete.
1.
2.
For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances that
cause spalling.
Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce concrete of
adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used when acceptable to
Architect.
C.
Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330.
D.
Water: Potable.
E.
Admixtures, General: Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.
F.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required
admixtures.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
G.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
H.
Chemtard, ChemMasters Corp.
PSI N, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
Eucon WR-75, Euclid Chemical Co.
WRDA, W.R. Grace & Co.
Pozzolith Normal or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc.
Metco W.R., Metalcrete Industries.
Prokrete-N, Prokrete Industries.
Plastocrete 161, Sika Corp.
Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. Use when temperature is 90ΕF+.
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
I.
Air-Tite, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
Air-Mix or Perma-Air, Euclid Chemical Co.
Darex AEA or Daravair, W.R. Grace & Co.
MB-VR or Micro-Air, Master Builders, Inc.
Sealtight AEA, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
Sika AER, Sika Corp.
PSI-R Plus, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
Eucon Retarder 75, Euclid Chemical Co.
Daratard-17, W.R. Grace & Co.
Pozzolith R, Master Builders, Inc.
Protard, Prokrete Industries.
Plastiment, Sika Corporation.
High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G.
02 41 13 - 3
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.4
Super P, Anti-Hydro Co., Inc.
Cormix 200, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
Eucon 37, Euclid Chemical Co.
WRDA 19 or Daracem, W.R. Grace & Co.
Rheobuild or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc.
Superslump, Metalcrete Industries.
PSPL, Prokrete Industries.
Sikament 300, Sika Corp.
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Sand Cushion: Clean, manufactured or natural sand.
B.
Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder that is resistant to deterioration when tested according to
ASTM E 154, as follows:
1.
Polyethylene sheet not less than 8 mils thick.
C.
Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq.
m), complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.
D.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Waterproof paper.
Polyethylene film.
Polyethylene-coated burlap.
Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab surfaces
for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss.
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
F.
Liquid Hardener/Sealer Compound: Clear liquid type curing compound complying with ASTM C 309,
Type I, Class A.
1.
Products:
a.
G.
Aquafilm, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.
Eucobar, Euclid Chemical Co.
E-Con, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
Confilm, Master Builders, Inc.
Waterhold, Metalcrete Industries.
Concrete hardener/sealer: Where exposed, interior concrete floor slabs are indicated on the
Room Finish Schedule provide and install per manufacturers requirements; Ashford
Formula, manufactured by Curecrete Chemical Company and distributed by Michigan
Protective Coating Consultants, Inc., P.O. Box 39287, 15106 Beech Daly Road, Detroit,
MI 48239, (313) 538-7878.
Vinyl Expansion Material - Pro flex as manufactured by OSCODA Plastics Inc. 800/544-9538.
1.
Vinyl expansion material shall be standard concrete color.
02 41 13 - 4
2.
2.5
Vinyl Expansion material - pro flex as manufactured by OSCODA Plastics Inc. 800/ 544-9538.
Vinyl expansion material shall be standard concrete colon.
PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES
A.
Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field
experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use an independent testing
agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
1.
2.
Do not use the same testing agency for field quality control testing.
Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25 percent of cement content by weight.
B.
Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior
to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by
Architect.
C.
Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties as indicated on drawings
and schedules:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Water-Cement Ratio: Provide concrete for following conditions with maximum water-cement (W/C)
ratios as follows:
1.
2.
3.
E.
3.
4.
2.6
Subjected to freezing and thawing: W/C 0.45.
Subjected to deicers/watertight: W/C 0.40.
Subjected to brackish water, salt spray, or deicers: W/C 0.40.
Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows:
1.
2.
F.
4000 psi, 28-day compressive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.44 maximum (non-air-entrained),
0.35 maximum (air-entrained).
Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches (75 mm).
Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1 inch (25 mm) and not more than 3 inches (75
mm).
Concrete containing high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Not more than 8
inches (200 mm) after adding admixture to site-verified 2 - 3 inch (50 - 75 mm) slump concrete.
Other concrete: Not more than 4 inches (100 mm).
Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when
characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as
accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted
to and accepted by Architect before using in Work.
ADMIXTURES
A.
Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as
required, for placement and workability.
B.
Use high-range water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs,
architectural concrete, parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with
02 41 13 - 5
water-cement ratios below 0.50.
C.
Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated. Add air-entraining
admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air
content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent within the following limits:
1.
Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, deicer chemicals, or hydraulic
pressure:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
D.
2.7
4.5 percent (moderate exposure); 5.5 percent (severe exposure) for 1-1/2 inch (38
maximum aggregate.
4.5 percent (moderate exposure); 6.0 percent (severe exposure) for 1 inch (25
maximum aggregate.
5.0 percent (moderate exposure); 6.0 percent (severe exposure) for 3/4 inch (19
maximum aggregate.
5.5 percent (moderate exposure); 7.0 percent (severe exposure) for 1/2 inch (13
maximum aggregate.
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
Other concrete not exposed to freezing, thawing, or hydraulic pressure, or to receive a surface
hardener: 2 to 4 percent air.
Use admixtures for water reduction and set retarding in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions.
CONCRETE MIXING
A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified.
1.
When air temperature is between 85 deg F (29 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg
C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
3.2
Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarder/barrier, and other related materials with
placement of forms and reinforcing steel.
FORMS
A.
General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static, and
dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork
so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position.
Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following ACI
347 limits:
1.
2.
B.
Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surfaces exposed to view.
Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces.
Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location,
grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways,
recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts,
02 41 13 - 6
and other features required in the Work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt
joints and provide backup at joints to prevent cement paste from leaking.
C.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush
plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for
inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts
for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like for easy removal.
D.
Provide temporary openings for clean-outs and inspections where interior area of formwork is
inaccessible before and during concrete placement. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to
forms to prevent losing concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
E.
Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips
fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.
F.
Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other
trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items.
Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.
G.
Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove
chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing
before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
3.3
VAPOR RETARDER/BARRIER INSTALLATION
A.
General: Place vapor retarder/barrier sheeting in position with longest dimension parallel with direction
of pour.
B.
Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended mastic or pressure-sensitive
tape.
1.
3.4
Cover vapor retarder/barrier with sand cushion and compact to depth indicated.
PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing
Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as specified.
1.
Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during reinforcement placement and
concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy
bond with concrete.
C.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support
reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Architect.
D.
Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection. Arrange,
space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement
operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E.
Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh
and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
02 41 13 - 7
3.5
JOINTS
A.
Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair strength or appearance of
the structure, as acceptable to Architect.
B.
Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints except as indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip
placements.
C.
Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete.
D.
Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct contraction joints in slabs-on-grade to form
panels of patterns as shown. Use saw cuts 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide by one-fourth of slab depth or inserts
1/4 inch (6 mm) wide by one-fourth of slab depth, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.6
Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard, or fiberboard strip into fresh
concrete until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface. Tool slab edges round on each side of
insert. After concrete has cured, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris.
Contraction joints in floor slabs may be formed by saw cuts as soon as possible after slab finishing
as may be safely done without dislodging aggregate.
If joint pattern is not shown, provide joints not exceeding 15 ft. (4.5 m) in either direction and
located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column centerlines, half bays, third bays).
Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other
work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams,
instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached.
B.
Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using
strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
3.7
PREPARING FORM SURFACES
A.
General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form-coating
compound before placing reinforcement.
B.
Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with in-place
concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply according to manufacturer's
instructions.
1.
3.8
Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust-preventative material. Rust-stained steel formwork is not
acceptable.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and
items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.
B.
General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete,"
and as specified.
02 41 13 - 8
C
Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on
concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be
placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its
final location.
D.
Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches (600
mm) and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers,
place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.
1.
2.
E.
Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading,
rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete complying with
ACI 309.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at
uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place
vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do
not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit
duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of
reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate.
Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits
of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or section.
1.
2.
3.
Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around
reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners.
Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to
smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning
finishing operations.
Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement.
F.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work
from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
G.
When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water
and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg
C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.
1.
2.
H.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen
subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical
accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of
concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below 90
deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control
temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using
liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature
will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade
moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.
Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or
other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Architect.
02 41 13 - 9
3.9
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A.
Rough-Formed Finish: Provide a rough-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view
in the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture
imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins
and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) in height rubbed down or chipped off.
B.
Smooth-Formed Finish: Provide a smooth-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces exposed to view or
to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly
to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or another similar system.
This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and
symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other
projections completely removed and smoothed.
C.
Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth-rubbed finish on scheduled concrete surfaces that have received
smooth-formed finish treatment not later than 1 day after form removal.
1.
D.
Grout-Cleaned Finish: Provide grout-cleaned finish on scheduled concrete surfaces that have received
smooth-formed finish treatment.
1.
2.
E.
3.10
A.
Combine one part portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand by volume, and a 50:50
mixture of acrylic or styrene butadiene-based bonding admixture and water to form the
consistency of thick paint. Blend standard portland cement and white portland cement in amounts
determined by trial patches so that final color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces.
Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces, apply grout to coat surfaces, and fill small holes. Remove
excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36
hours after rubbing.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent
to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces.
Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless
otherwise indicated.
MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES
Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or
mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious finish
flooring material, and where indicated.
1.
B.
Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a
uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing
process.
After placing slabs, finish surface to tolerances of F(F) 15 (floor flatness) and F(L) 13 (floor
levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M). Slope surfaces uniformly to
drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes, brooms,
or rakes.
Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as
specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic
roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo; and where indicated.
02 41 13 - 10
1.
C.
After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for
floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has
disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven
floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 18 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15
(floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M). Cut down high spots
and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface
to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view and slab surfaces to be
covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or another thin film-finish coating
system.
1.
After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final
troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate
concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and
appearance, and finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 20 (floor flatness) and F(L) 17 (floor
levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M). Grind smooth any surface
defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system.
D.
Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-set mortar, apply
a trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow by slightly scarifying the surface with a fine broom.
E.
Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps,
and elsewhere as indicated.
1.
3.11
Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber-bristle
broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before
application.
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A.
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades,
unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete
as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or
required to complete Work.
B.
Steel Pan Stoops: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stoop and associated items.
broom-finish concrete surfaces.
3.12
Screed, tamp, and
CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.
In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing
operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after
screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling.
B.
Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing.
Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.
C.
Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover
curing, or by combining these methods, as specified.
D.
Provide moisture curing by the following methods:
02 41 13 - 11
1.
2.
3.
E.
Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.
Use continuous water-fog spray.
Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with water, and
keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and
edges, with a 4 inch (100 mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
Provide moisture-retaining cover curing as follows:
1.
F.
Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest
practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches (75 mm) and sealed by waterproof
tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material
and waterproof tape.
Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as follows:
1.
2.
Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete
(within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous
operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected
to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials
applied directly to concrete.
G.
Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs,
and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for the full curing period or until forms are
removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable.
H.
Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and other flat
surfaces, by applying the appropriate curing method.
1.
3.13
A.
3.14
Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture-retaining cover, unless
otherwise directed.
REMOVING FORMS
General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and
similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C)
for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by formremoval operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.
REUSING FORMS
A.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise
damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-coating
compound as specified for new formwork.
B.
When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and
laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use patched
forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Architect.
02 41 13 - 12
3.15
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A.
Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after
removing forms, when acceptable to Architect.
B.
Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No.
16 mesh (1.2 mm) sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing.
1.
2.
C.
Repairing Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be
repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and
other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes and fill with dry-pack
mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
1.
D.
Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect the concrete's
durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete.
Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as specified.
Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having
the required slope.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch (6 mm) in any dimension, and holes left by
tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth less than 1 inch (25 mm). Make
edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and
brush-coat the area to be patched with bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent
has dried.
For surfaces exposed to view, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that,
when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at inconspicuous
locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in
place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. Surface
defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to the
reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling,
popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.
Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days.
Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to
blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable
to Architect.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch (25 mm) in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,
square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) clearance all around.
Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix
patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete.
Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as
adjacent concrete.
Repair isolated random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter by dry-pack method.
Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles.
Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Place dry-pack before bonding agent
has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area
continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
02 41 13 - 13
F.
Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure, using specified
epoxy adhesive and mortar.
G.
Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect.
3.16
QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A.
General: The General Contractor shall employ a testing agency to perform tests and to submit test
reports.
B.
Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include the following, as directed
by Architect.
1.
Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of
concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.
Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete;
ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each
type of air-entrained concrete.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4
deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of
compressive-strength specimens.
Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each
compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for
laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yd.
(4 cu. m) plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) more than the first 25 cu. yd.
(19 cu. m) of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two
specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if
required.
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete,
conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five
are used.
When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m), Architect may
waive strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured
cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing
the in-place concrete.
Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive
strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test
result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).
C.
Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, ready-mix producer, and
Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project
identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete
type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete
mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and
28-day tests.
D.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted
but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.
02 41 13 - 14
E.
Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results
indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as
directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored
cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.
02 41 13 - 15
SECTION 04 22 00 – CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
1.
2.
C.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing joint in mockup.
Division 7 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim” for exposed sheet metal flashing.
Products installed but not furnished under this Section include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Concrete unit masonry.
Mortar and grout
Reinforcing steel.
Masonry joint reinforcement.
Ties and anchors.
Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
Steel shelf angles for unit masonry specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications."
Wood nailers and blocking built into unit masonry specified in Division 6 Section "Rough
Carpentry."
Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings specified in Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and
Frames."
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (f'm) at 28 days.
1.
For Concrete Unit Masonry: As follows, based on net area:
a.
1.4
f'm = 1500 psi (13.1 Mpa) for thee units.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Specification Sections.
B.
Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
04 22 00 - 1
C.
Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing
bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement" showing bar schedules,
stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of masonry reinforcement.
D.
Samples for initial selection of the following:
1.
E.
Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency, employed and paid by Contractor or
manufacturer, indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of the following proposed
masonry materials with requirements indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
1.5
Unit masonry samples in small-scale form showing the full range of colors and textures available
for each different exposed masonry unit required.
Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270.
Mortar complying with BIA M1.
Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients.
Masonry units.
Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The General Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified professional engineer to provide a survey and
inspection of foundations for compliance with dimensional tolerances.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency must
demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to
ASTM C 1093, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated
without delaying the Work.
C.
Preconstruction Testing: Employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform the
following preconstruction testing to establish compliance of proposed materials and construction with
specified requirements:
1.
Test grout compressive strength per ASTM C 1019.
D.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of
assemblies with fire resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency,
by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
E.
Single-Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one source and by a
single manufacturer for each different product required.
F.
Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from
one source or producer for each aggregate.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store masonry units on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their
04 22 00 - 2
deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other causes.
If units become wet, do not install until they are in an air-dried condition.
B.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination
avoided.
D.
Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof
sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in
progress.
1.
2.
Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in
place.
Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure
cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in
place.
B.
Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days
after building masonry walls or columns.
C.
Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or
painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground
and over wall surface.
Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral
finishes, from mortar droppings.
Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing
mortar and dirt on completed masonry.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost.
Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or
freezing conditions. Comply with the following requirements:
1.
Cold-Weather Construction: When the ambient temperature is within the limits indicated, use the
following procedures:
a.
b.
c.
40 to 32 deg F (4 to 0 deg C): Heat mixing water or sand to produce mortar temperatures
between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C).
32 to 25 deg F (0 to -4 deg C): Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar
temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Heat grout materials to produce
grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Maintain mortar and grout
above freezing until used in masonry.
25 to 20 deg F (-4 to -7 deg C): Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar
above freezing until used in masonry. Heat masonry units to 40 deg F (4 deg C) if
grouting. Use heat on both sides of walls under construction.
04 22 00 - 3
d.
2.
b.
c.
E.
20 deg F (-7 deg C) and Below: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar
above freezing until used in masonry. Heat masonry units to 40 deg F (4 deg C). Provide
enclosures and use heat on both sides of walls under construction to maintain temperatures
above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within the enclosures.
Cold-Weather Protection: When the mean daily temperature is within the limits indicated, provide
the following protection:
a.
3.
40 to 25 deg F (4 to -4 deg C): Cover masonry with a weather-resistant membrane for 48
hours after construction.
25 to 20 deg F (-4 to -7 deg C): Cover masonry with insulating blankets or provide
enclosure and heat for 48 hours after construction to prevent freezing. Install wind breaks
when wind velocity exceeds 15 mi./h (25 km/h).
20 deg F (-7 deg C) and Below: Provide enclosure and heat to maintain temperatures
above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within the enclosure for 48 hours after construction.
Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4
deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried out, but not less than 7 days after
completion of cleaning.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions
produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks
and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F
(38 deg C) and above.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
Concrete Masonry Units:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Grand Blanc Cement Products, Inc.
National Block Company
Van Poppelen Bros.
Brighton Block Company
Ferguson Block
Portland Cement, Mortar Cement, Masonry Cement, and Lime:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Essroc Materials, Inc.
Glen-Gery Corporation.
Lafarge Corporation.
Lehigh Portland Cement Co.
Riverton Corporation (The).
W.R. Grace & Co.
St. Mary’s Mortar Cement
04 22 00 - 4
3.
Joint Reinforcement, Ties, and Anchors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.2
Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
Heckman Building Products, Inc.
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America.
National Wire Products Industries.
Southern Construction Products.
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A.
General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of concrete masonry unit required.
1.
2.
B.
Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other
special conditions.
Provide bullnose units for outside corners and door openings, unless otherwise indicated.
Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows:
1.
Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength
indicated below:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Weight Classification: Medium weight.
Aggregates: Do not use aggregates made from pumice, scoria, or tuff.
Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units.
Size: Manufactured to the actual dimensions indicated on Drawings within tolerances specified in
the applicable referenced ASTM specification.
Size: Manufactured to the actual dimensions listed below (within tolerances specified in the
applicable referenced ASTM specification) for the corresponding nominal sizes indicated on
Drawings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
7.
2.3
1900 psi (13.1 MPa).
Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce concrete unit masonry
construction of compressive strength indicated.
4 inch (100 mm) nominal: 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) actual.
Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated.
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction.
Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.
B.
Masonry Cement: Type S Mortar: 1800 PSI (124 mpA) after 28 days.
C.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
D.
Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or
Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207.
04 22 00 - 5
1.
E.
For pigmented mortars, use colored portland cement-lime mix of formulation required to produce
color indicated, or if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations.
Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight for mineral oxides nor 2
percent for carbon black.
Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm), use aggregate graded
with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18 mm) sieve.
1.
Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound
stone, as required to match Architect's sample.
F.
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
G.
Ready-Mixed Mortar: Cementitious materials, water, and aggregate complying with requirements
specified in this Article; combined with set-controlling admixtures to produce a ready-mixed mortar
complying with ASTM C 1142.
H.
Cold-Weather Admixture:
Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with
ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition
indicated.
I.
Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMU,
containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.
J.
Water: Potable.
K.
1.
Cold-Weather Admixture:
a.
b.
2.
Water-Repellent Admixture:
a.
b.
2.4
Accelguard 80; Euclid Chemical Co.
Morset; Grace: W.R. Grace & Co.
“Dry-Bloc” mortar admixture, W.R. Grace & Co. shall be used in laying all exterior
masonry units.
“Dry-Brick” mortar admixture, W.R. Grace & Co., shall be used in laying all exterior brick
masonry units.
REINFORCING STEEL
A.
Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as follows:
1.
Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615 (ASTM A 615M).
a.
B.
2.5
Grade 60 (Grade 400).
Deformed Reinforcing Wire: ASTM A 496, with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 zinc coating.
JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Provide joint reinforcement formed from the following:
04 22 00 - 6
1.
Galvanized carbon-steel wire, coating class as follows:
a.
B.
Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm).
Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm).
For single-wythe masonry, provide type as follows with single pair of side rods:
1.
D.
Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c.
For multiwythe masonry, provide type as follows:
1.
Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c.
a.
b.
2.6
ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1, for interior walls; and ASTM A 153, Class B-2,
for exterior walls.
Description: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods
into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying
with requirements indicated below:
1.
2.
C.
Number of Side Rods for Multiwythe Concrete Masonry: One side rod for each face shell
of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches (100 mm) in width, plus 1 side rod for each
wythe of masonry 4 inches (100 mm) or less in width.
Provide integral drips on cross rods at cavity walls.
TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL
A.
General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements for
metal and size of this Article, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Wire: As follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
2.7
Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating.
Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating for wire ties
and anchors in exterior walls.
Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1
coating for wire ties and anchors in interior walls.
Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm).
Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M), shop painted with 2 coats of coal-tar epoxypolyamide paint complying with SSPC-Paint 16 to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for painting and SSPC-SP 6
for surface preparation.
ADJUSTABLE MASONRY-VENEER ANCHORS
A.
General: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and
compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs,
and as follows:
1.
Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf (445-N) load in both
tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch (1.3 mm).
04 22 00 - 7
2.8
MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A.
Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6);
with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to
comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter and length indicated and in the following
configurations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.9
Headed bolts.
Nonheaded bolts, straight.
Nonheaded bolts, bent in manner indicated.
Type: Chemical anchors.
Type: Expansion anchors.
Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild).
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A.
Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from the following material:
1.
2.
1.
B.
Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to
maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
1.
C.
2.10
Neoprene.
Urethane.
Polyvinyl chloride.
Polyvinyl Chloride: ASTM D 2287, General Purpose Grade, Type PVC-65406.
Bond-Breaker Strips:
(No. 15 asphalt felt).
Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I
MASONRY CLEANERS
A.
Job Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and
1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal (4-L) of water.
B.
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer’s standard-strength, general-purpose cleaner designed for
removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry
surfaces of type indicated below without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved
for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
1.
2.
3.
For masonry not subject to metallic, oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a concentrated
blend of surface-acting acids, chelating, and wetting agents.
For masonry subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of
organic and inorganic acids and special inhibitors.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
202 New Masonry Detergent; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
200 Lime Solv; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
202V Vana-Stop; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent; ProSoCo, Inc.
Sure Klean No. 101 Lime Solvent; ProSoCo, Inc.
Sure Klean Vana Trol; ProSoCo, Inc.
04 22 00 - 8
2.11
MASONRY CLEANERS
A.
Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and
1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. (4 L) of water.
B.
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength, general-purpose cleaner designed for
removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry
surfaces of type indicated below without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved
for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
1.
2.
3.
For masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a concentrated
blend of surface-acting acids, chelating, and wetting agents.
For masonry subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of
organic and inorganic acids and special inhibitors.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.12
A.
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, waterrepellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
B.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at the same rate for all mortar, regardless of weather
conditions, in order to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar
indicated below:
1.
2.
Limit cementitious materials in mortar for exterior use to portland cement and lime.
For masonry below grade and, in contact with earth, use type indicated below:
a.
3.
4.
Type: M.
For reinforced and load bearing masonry, use type indicated below:
a.
Type: S.
For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior
load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions, and for other applications where
another type is not indicated, use type indicated below:
a.
C.
202 New Masonry Detergent; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
200 Lime Solv; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
202V Vana-Stop; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent; ProSoCo, Inc.
Sure Klean No. 101 Lime Solvent; ProSoCo., Inc.
Sure Klean Vana Trol; ProSoCo, Inc.
Type: N.
Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. Use grout of consistency indicated or, if not
otherwise indicated, of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement that will completely fill spaces
intended to receive grout.
04 22 00 - 9
1.
2.
Use fine grout in grout spaces less than 2 inches (50 mm) in horizontal dimension, unless
Use coarse grout in grout spaces 2 inches (50 mm) or more in least horizontal dimension, unless
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
B.
3.2
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of unit masonry.
Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to
installation.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown.
Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of thickness indicated.
B.
Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections of the
Specifications.
C.
Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installing equipment,
complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening.
D.
Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as
required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without
cutting, where possible. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of
units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
E.
Mix units for exposed unit masonry from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce uniform
blend of colors and textures.
3.3
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A.
Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and arrises, do not exceed 1/4
inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), nor 3/8 inch in 20 feet (10 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in
12 m) or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not
exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more. For vertical
alignment of head joints, do not exceed plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), nor 1/2 inch (12
mm) maximum.
B.
Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and
other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm
in 12 m) or more. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet (3 m), nor
1/16 inch (1.5 mm) within width of a single unit.
04 22 00 - 10
C.
Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of columns, walls, and
partitions, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet (12 mm in 6 m), nor 3/4 inch in 40 feet (19 mm in 12 m) or
more.
D.
Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown,
do not exceed minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) nor plus 1/2 inch (12 mm).
E.
Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from bed-joint thickness indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). Do not vary bed-joint
thickness from bed-joint thickness of adjacent course by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from
head-joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary head-joint
thickness from adjacent head-joint thickness by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from collar-joint
thickness indicated by more than minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) or plus 3/8 inch (10 mm).
3.4
LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A.
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for
accurate locating of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less-thanhalf-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations.
B.
Lay walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and
coordinated with other construction.
C.
Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units
with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
1.
Match existing.
D.
Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2
inches (50 mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less
than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
E.
Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2-unit length for one-half running bond or
1/3-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay
masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh
masonry.
F.
Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build-in items specified under this and other Sections of the
Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
G.
Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in
the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
I.
Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams,
lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
J.
Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure
above and as follows:
1.
Install safing insulation in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.
04 22 00 - 11
3.5
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A.
Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.6
With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and
pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.
For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including
areas under cells.
Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment.
If not indicated, lay walls with 3/8-inch (10-mm) joints.
CAVITIES
A.
Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facing
cavities flush.
1.
B.
3.7
Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work progresses,
remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity.
Tie exterior wythe to back-up with individual metal ties. Stagger alternate courses.
HORIZONTAL-JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Provide continuous horizontal-joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of
longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2
inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
1.
2.
Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
Provide reinforcement in mortar joint 1 block course above and below wall openings and
extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond opening.
a.
Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.
B.
Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and
bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column
fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
3.8
LINTELS
A.
Install steel lintels where indicated.
B.
Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3.9
INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
A.
Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength
to resist grout pressure.
1.
Do not exceed the following pour heights for fine grout:
04 22 00 - 12
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
b.
c.
d.
For minimum widths of grout spaces of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or for minimum grout space
of hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 3 inches (38 by 76 mm), pour height of 12 inches (305
mm).
For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches (51 mm) or for minimum grout space of
hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches (63 by 76 mm), pour height of 60 inches (1524 mm).
of hollow unit cells of 3 by 3 inches (76 by 76 mm), pour height of 12 feet (3.6 m).
hollow unit cells of 3 by 4 inches (76 by 101 mm), pour height of 24 feet (7.3 m).
Provide cleanout holes at least 3 inches (76 mm) in least dimension for grout pours over 60 inches
(1524 mm) in height.
a.
b.
3.10
For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3/4 inch (19 mm) or for minimum grout space of
hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 2 inches (38 by 51 mm), pour height of 12 inches (305 mm).
hollow unit cells of 2 by 3 inches (51 by 76 mm), pour height of 60 inches (1524 mm).
of hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches (63 by 76 mm), pour height of 12 feet (3.6 m).
hollow unit cells of 3 by 3 inches (76 by 76 mm), pour height of 24 feet (7.3 m).
Do not exceed the following pour heights for coarse grout:
a.
3.
Provide cleanout holes at each vertical reinforcing bar.
At solid grouted masonry, provide cleanout holes at not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
The General Contractor will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform the
following testing for field quality control. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements
shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B.
Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in this Article will be performed during construction for
each 5000 sq. ft. (460 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof.
C.
Mortar properties will be tested per property specification of ASTM C 270.
D.
Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019.
E.
Prism-Test Method: For each type of wall construction indicated, masonry prisms will be tested per
ASTM E 447, Method B, and as follows:
1.
Prepare 1 set of prisms for testing at 7 days and 1 set for testing at 28 days.
F.
Evaluation of Quality-Control Tests: In the absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, masonry will be considered satisfactory if results from construction quality-control tests
comply with minimum requirements indicated.
G.
Brick Tests: For each type and grade of brick indicated, units will be tested according to ASTM C 67.
H.
Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested
according to ASTM C 140.
04 22 00 - 13
3.11
REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A.
Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if
units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar or
grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B.
Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill
with mortar. Point-up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat,
uniform appearance. Prepare joints for application of sealants.
C.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and
smears prior to tooling joints.
D.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
3.12
Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or
chisels.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison
purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of
masonry.
Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with
liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.
Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing
thoroughly with clear water.
Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of
stain present on exposed surfaces.
Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure unit masonry is without damage
and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A.
Recycling: Undamaged, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property and shall be removed from
the Project site for his use.
B.
Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including broken masonry units, waste
mortar, and excess or soil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in greatest dimension.
Mix masonry waste with at least 2 parts specified fill material for each part masonry waste. Fill
material is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade.
Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described
above, and other masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
04 22 00 - 14
SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel.
B.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Division 1 Section "Quality Control" for independent testing agency procedures and
administrative requirements.
Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for loose steel bearing plates and miscellaneous steel
framing.
Division 9 Section "Painting" for surface preparation and priming requirements.
A.
1.4
Structural Performance: Engineer structural steel connections required by the Contract Documents to be
selected or completed by the fabricator to withstand design loadings indicated.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data for each type of product specified.
C.
Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of structural steel components.
1.
2.
3.
Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show
size, length, and type of each weld.
Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify highstrength bolted slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned shear/bearing connections.
D.
E.
Mill test reports signed by manufacturers certifying that their products, including the following, comply
with requirements.
1.
2.
Structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
Bolts, nuts, and washers, including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
05 12 00 - 1
3.
4.
5.
1.5
Direct-tension indicators.
Shop primers.
Nonshrink grout.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed structural steel work similar
in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar to that
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the Work.
1.
Fabricator must participate in the AISC Quality Certification Program and be designated an AISCCertified Plant as follows:
a.
B.
C.
Category: Category II, complex steel building structures.
Fabricator shall be registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic
Design."
AISC's "Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members."
AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings."
ASTM A 6 (ASTM A 6M) "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates,
Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use."
Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Specification for Structural Joints Using
ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
D.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized to practice in the
jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind
indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for projects with structural steel framing
that are similar to that indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
E.
Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
1.
1.6
Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
A.
Deliver structural steel to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of
installation.
B.
Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground by
using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion
and deterioration.
1.
2.
Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty
before use.
Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members
or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.
05 12 00 - 2
1.7
SEQUENCING
A.
Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work.
Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: As follows:
1.
Carbon Steel: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M).
B.
Cold-Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
C.
Anchor Rods, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: As follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Nonhigh-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6);
carbon-steel, hex-head bolts; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers.
1.
2.
3.
E.
2.2
Unheaded Rods: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M).
Unheaded Bolts: ASTM A 687, high strength.
Headed Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); carbon-steel, hex-head
bolts; and carbon-steel nuts.
Headed Bolts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts and heavy
hex carbon-steel nuts.
Headed Bolts: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts and heavy
hex carbon-steel nuts.
Washers: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M).
Finish: Plain, uncoated.
Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325.
a.
Finish: Plain, uncoated.
Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490, uncoated.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
PRIMER
A.
2.3
Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer with good resistance to
normal atmospheric corrosion, complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664.
GROUT
A.
Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404, Size
No. 2. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for
placement and hydration.
B.
Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout
containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water-
05 12 00 - 3
reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application, and a 30-minute
working time.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate structural steel
according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in Shop Drawings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Fabricate architecturally exposed structural steel with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of
surface blemishes, including pitting, rust and scale seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and
roughness.
1.
2.
C.
Camber structural steel members where indicated.
Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6 (ASTM A 6M) and maintain
markings until steel has been erected.
Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
Fabricate for delivery a sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of
structural steel.
Complete structural steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming
operations.
Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings
and Bridges" for structural steel.
Remove blemishes by filling, grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and
shop priming.
Comply with fabrication requirements, including tolerance limits, of AISC's "Code of Standard
Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for architecturally exposed structural steel.
Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1.
Plane thermally cut edges to be welded.
D.
Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members transmitting loads in bearing.
E.
Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural steel framing. Weld exposed
joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure removable stops
to frames with countersunk, cross-recessed head machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10
inches (250 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for passage of other
work through steel framing members, as shown on Shop Drawings.
1.
2.
2.5
Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame-cut holes or enlarge holes
by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work.
SHOP CONNECTIONS
A.
Shop install and tighten nonhigh-strength bolts, except where high-strength bolts are indicated.
B.
Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
1.
Bolts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) high-strength bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
05 12 00 - 4
2.
C.
Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned
shear/bearing connections.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and
methods used in correcting welding work.
1.
2.
2.6
Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without
warp.
Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed
structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface bleeding of back-side
welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet welds 1/2 inch (13 mm) and
larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds.
GALVANIZING
A.
2.7
Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel indicated for
galvanizing according to ASTM A 123.
SHOP PRIMING
A.
Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag,
or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to SSPC specifications as follows:
1.
2.
3.
C.
SSPC-SP 2 "Hand Tool Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 11 "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."
Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's instructions
and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
1.
2.8
Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a
depth of 2 inches (50 mm).
Surfaces to be field welded.
Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
Apply 2 coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of
second coat to distinguish it from first.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
The General Contractor will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop
inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.
1.
2.
B.
Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test specimens
comply with or deviate from requirements.
Provide testing agency with access to places where structural steel Work is being fabricated or
produced so required inspection and testing can be accomplished.
Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do
not comply with specified requirements.
05 12 00 - 5
C.
Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work
with specified requirements.
1.
D.
Direct-tension indicator gaps will be verified to comply with ASTM F 959, Table 2.
In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be inspected and tested according to
AWS D1.1 and the inspection procedures listed below, at testing agency's option.
1.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks
or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Before erection proceeds, and with the steel erector present, verify elevations of concrete and masonry
bearing surfaces and locations of anchorages for compliance with requirements.
B.
Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure,
plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads.
Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place,
unless otherwise indicated.
ERECTION
A.
Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC
specifications referenced in this Section.
B.
Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and
roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing
plates.
1.
2.
3.
Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove
wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to
packing with grout.
Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Finish exposed
surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure.
a.
C.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions for proprietary grout materials.
Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges."
1.
Maintain erection tolerances of architecturally exposed structural steel within AISC's "Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
05 12 00 - 6
D.
Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently
fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact.
Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1.
Level and plumb individual members of structure.
E.
Splice members only where indicated.
F.
Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes that must be
enlarged to admit bolts.
3.4
FIELD CONNECTIONS
A.
Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using
ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
1.
2.
B.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and
methods used in correcting welding work.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Bolts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) high-strength bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned
shear/bearing connections.
Comply with AISC specifications referenced in this Section for bearing, adequacy of temporary
connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without
warp.
Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed
structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface bleeding of back-side
welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet welds 1/2 inch (13 mm) and
larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds.
A.
The General Contractor will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field
inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.
1.
Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work
complies with or deviates from requirements.
B.
Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do
not comply with specified requirements.
C.
Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work
with specified requirements.
D.
Field-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
1.
E.
Direct-tension indicator gaps will be verified to comply with ASTM F 959, Table 2.
In addition to visual inspection, field-welded connections will be inspected and tested according to
AWS D1.1 and the inspection procedures listed below, at testing agency's option.
05 12 00 - 7
1.
3.6
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks
or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
CLEANING
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting.
1.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
05 12 00 - 8
SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following metal fabrications:
1.
2.
3.
Loose steel lintels.
Shelf and relieving angles.
Miscellaneous framing and supports for the following:
a.
4.
Miscellaneous steel trim, including the following:
a.
5.
B.
Edgings.
Pipe bollards.
1.
1.3
Applications where framing and supports are not specified in other sections.
Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for structural steel framing system components.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data for nonslip aggregates and nonslip aggregate surface finishes, prefabricated building
columns, cast nosings, treads and thresholds, steel floor plate, paint products, and grout.
C.
Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans,
elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and
accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
D.
Samples representative of materials and finished products as may be requested by Architect.
E.
Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified
under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
F.
capabilities and experience. Include a list of completed projects with project name, addresses, names of
architects and owners, and other information specified.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 50 00 - 1
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for
this Project with a record of successful in-service performance, and with sufficient production capacity to
produce required units without delaying the Work.
B.
Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel,"
AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet
Steel."
1.
1.5
Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications
must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop
drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.
Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and
proceed with fabricating products without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure
that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FERROUS METALS
A.
Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use
materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
B.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M).
C.
Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as follows:
1.
2.
Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500.
Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
a.
D.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated, or another weight
required by structural loads.
1.
E.
For exterior installations and where indicated, provide tubing with hot-dip galvanized
coating per ASTM A 53.
Black finish, unless otherwise indicated.
Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant
materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1.
Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M)
malleable iron or ASTM A 27 (ASTM A 27M) cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as
required, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 50 00 - 2
F.
2.2
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for the metal alloy to be
welded.
PAINT
A.
Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664, selected for good resistance to normal
atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a
sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
B.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with
dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or
SSPC-Paint 20.
C.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no
asbestos fibers.
2.3
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited
zinc coating, for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and
class required.
B.
Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6),
with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M), and, where indicated, flat washers.
C.
Machine Screws: ANSI B18.6.3 (ANSI B18.6.7M).
D.
Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1 (ANSI B18.2.3.8M).
E.
Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ANSI B18.6.1.
F.
Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ANSI B18.22.1 (ANSI B18.22M).
G.
Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ANSI B18.21.1.
H.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to
sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and
equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1.
2.
I.
2.4
Material: Carbon steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
Material: Group 1 alloy 304 or 316 stainless-steel bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593
(ASTM F 738M) and ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).
Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as required.
GROUT
A.
Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: (Interior Application) Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying
with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 50 00 - 3
B.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: (Exterior Application) Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
C.
1.
Nonshrink, Metallic Grouts:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grouts:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
2.5
Supreme Plus; Cormix Construction Chemicals.
Hi Mod Grout; Euclid Chemical Co.
Embeco 885 and 636; Master Builders Technologies, Inc.
Ferrolith G Redi-Mix and G-NC; Sonneborn Building Products--ChemRex, Inc.
Met-ox; The Spray-Cure Company.
B-6 Construction Grout; W. R. Bonsal Co.
Diamond-Crete Grout; Concrete Service Materials Co.
Supreme; Cormix Construction Chemicals.
Sure-grip High Performance Grout; Dayton Superior Corp.
Euco N-S Grout; Euclid Chemical Co.
Five Star Grout; Five Star Products.
Vibropruf #11; Lambert Corp.
Crystex; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
Masterflow 928 and 713; Master Builders Technologies, Inc.
Sealtight 588 Grout; W. R. Meadows, Inc.
Sonogrout 14; Sonneborn Building Products--ChemRex, Inc.
Kemset; The Spray-Cure Company.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that
needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted
on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or
specified for various components of each metal fabrication.
B.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.
C.
Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
D.
Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Form
bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing
work.
E.
Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
F.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance
of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no
roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 50 00 - 4
G.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever
possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk)
screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
H.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space
anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
I.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections
that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated
installation.
J.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar
items.
K.
Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes
where water may accumulate.
2.6
ROUGH HARDWARE
A.
Furnish bent, or otherwise custom-fabricated, bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other
miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring
or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware
items are specified in Division 6 Sections.
B.
Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. Furnish malleable-iron washers for heads and
nuts that bear on wood structural connections, and furnish steel washers elsewhere.
2.7
LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A.
2.8
Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction,
made flat, free from warps or twists, and of the required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to
receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Galvanize after fabrication.
LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A.
B.
Fabricate loose structural steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and
recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
C.
Size loose lintels for equal bearing of 1 inch per foot (85 mm per m) of clear span but not less than 8
inches (200 mm) bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
2.9
SHELF AND RELIEVING ANGLES
A.
Fabricate shelf and relieving angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete
framing. Provide slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches (150
mm) from ends and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 50 00 - 5
B.
For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support shelf/relieving angles from back-up
masonry and concrete. Align expansion joints in angles with indicated control and expansion joints in
cavity wall exterior wythe.
C.
Galvanize shelf angles to be installed on exterior concrete framing.
2.10
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated that are not a part of structural
steel framework as required to complete the Work.
B.
Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive other adjacent construction
retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded
construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware,
hangers, and similar items.
1.
Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry.
Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.
a.
C.
Fabricate support for suspended toilet partitions, folding partitions and over head doors as follows:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Beams: Continuous steel shapes of size required to limit deflection to L/360 between hangers, but
use not less than C8 by 11.5 (C200 by 17.1) channels or another shape with equivalent structural
properties.
Hangers: Steel rods, 1/2-inch (13-mm) minimum diameter, spaced not more than 36 inches (900
mm) o.c. Thread rods to receive anchor and stop nuts. Fit hangers with wedge-shaped washers
for full bearing on sloping flanges of support beam.
Braces and Angles: Steel angles of size required for rigid support of beam and for secure
anchorage.
Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports in the following locations:
1.
2.11
Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. and provide
minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6
mm) thick by 8 inches (200 mm) long.
Exterior locations.
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown
with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field
splices wherever possible.
B.
Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required to coordinate assembly and installation with other
work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry construction, spaced not
more than 6 inches (150 mm) from each end, 6 inches (150 mm) from corners, and 24 inches (600 mm)
o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim in the following locations:
1.
Exterior locations.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 50 00 - 6
2.12
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designing
finishes.
B.
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.13
A.
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process
complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
B.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure
conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1.
2.
C.
ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
ASTM A 123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel products made of
uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch (0.76 mm) thick or
thicker.
Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning."
Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes or to
be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with
requirements of SSPC-PA 1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for
installing anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having
integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of
such items to Project site.
B.
Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations. Protect sleeves from water and
concrete entry.
3.2
A.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for
concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as
required.
B.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;
with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 50 00 - 7
C.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete masonry or
similar construction.
D.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be
left as exposed joints but cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut,
or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are
intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
E.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
3.3
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance
of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no
roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
SETTING LOOSE PLATES
A.
Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond
to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.
B.
Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members
have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if
protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout.
1.
2.
3.4
Use nonshrink, metallic grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated.
Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
INSTALLING SUPPORTS FOR TOILET PARTITIONS
A.
3.5
Anchor supports securely to and rigidly brace from overhead building structure.
INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS
A.
Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After bollards have
been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between bollard and sleeve solidly with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions.
B.
Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface.
3.6
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with
SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) minimum dry film thickness.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 50 00 - 8
B.
For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair
paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 50 00 - 9
SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.
2.
1.3
Framing with dimension lumber.
Wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise
specified.
B.
Exposed Framing: Dimension lumber not concealed by other construction and indicated to receive a
stained or natural finish.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses.
Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber
Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.
C.
Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling,
storing, installing, and finishing treated materials:
1.
2.
D.
1.5
For each type of preservative-treated wood product, include certification by treating plant stating
type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and
compliance with applicable standards.
For waterborne-treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was
reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site.
Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Single-Source Responsibility for Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood:
treated wood product from one source and by a single producer.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Obtain each type of fire-retardant-
06 10 00 - 1
1.6
A.
Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack
lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under
temporary coverings.
1.
For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each
bundle to provide air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Wood-Preservative-Treated Materials:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, Interior Type A:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Dricon Fire Treated Wood.
American Wood Treaters, Inc.
Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.
Metal Framing Anchors:
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Baxter: J. H. Baxter Co.
Chemical Specialties, Inc.
Continental Wood Preservers, Inc.
Hickson Corp.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, Exterior Type:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Baxter: J. H. Baxter Co.
Chemical Specialties, Inc.
Continental Wood Preservers, Inc.
Hickson Corp.
Osmose Wood Preserving, Inc.
Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
Harlen Metal Products, Inc.
Silver Metal Products, Inc.
LUMBER, GENERAL
A.
Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with
applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review.
B.
Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
following:
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch
nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
Wood Structural Panels:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece, or
omit grade stamps and provide grade-compliance certificates issued by inspection agency.
Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content
specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.
1.
2.
E.
NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association.
NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority (Canadian).
RIS - Redwood Inspection Service.
SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency
evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species,
moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
1.
D.
Plywood: DOC PS 1, unless otherwise indicated.
Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness indicated
on the Contract Documents.
Comply with “Code Plus” provisions in APA Form No. E30K, “APA Design/Construction Guide:
Residential & Commercial.”
Factory mark panels according to indicated standard.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be treated,
comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each
treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of
Review.
1.
2.
B.
Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu. ft.
(4.0 kg/cu. m). After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and
15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic.
For exposed items indicated to receive stained finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed
through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in
connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with
masonry or concrete.
Wood framing members less than 18 inches (460 mm) above grade.
Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.
Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, apply field
treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 3
drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.
2.4
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
General: Where fire-retardant-treated wood is indicated and within all interior building areas, comply
with applicable requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fireretardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL; U.S. Testing; Timber Products
Inspection, Inc.; or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
B.
Research or Evaluation Reports: Provide fire-retardant-treated wood acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction and for which a current model code research or evaluation report exists that
evidences compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood for application indicated.
Interior Type A: For interior locations, use chemical formulation that produces treated lumber and
plywood with the following properties under conditions present after installation:
1.
2.
3.
Bending strength, stiffness, and fastener-holding capacities are not reduced below values
published by manufacturer of chemical formulation under elevated temperature and humidity
conditions simulating installed conditions when tested by a qualified independent testing agency.
No form of degradation occurs due to acid hydrolysis or other causes related to treatment.
Contact with treated wood does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
C.
Exterior Type: Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
D.
Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.
2.5
DIMENSION LUMBER
A.
General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards
Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated.
B.
Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud or No. 2 grade and any of the following
species:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Exterior and Load-Bearing Walls: Construction or No. grade and any of the following species:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.6
Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
Spruce-pine-fur (south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
Douglas fir-south; WWPA.
Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA
Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including rooftop equipment
curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar
members.
B.
Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 4
C.
Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative
treatment.
D.
Grade: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber per ALSC's NGRs of any
species. For board-size lumber, provide No. 3 Common grade per NELMA, NLGA, or WWPA; No. 2
grade per SPIB; or Standard grade per NLGA, WCLIB or WWPA of any species.
2.7
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this
Article for material and manufacture.
1.
Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative
humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of Type 304 stainless
steel.
B.
Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.
C.
Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D.
Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E.
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. (ASME B18.2.3.8M)
F.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with
ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
2.8
METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A.
General: Provide galvanized steel framing anchors of structural capacity, type, and size indicated on the
contract drawings.
B.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60
(ASTM A 653M, Z180) coating designation; structural, commercial, or lock-forming quality, as standard
with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated.
2.9
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1inch (25-mm) nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); selected from manufacturer's
standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small to use
with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 5
C.
Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location
of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction.
D.
Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and
plywood.
3.2
WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS
A.
Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or
attaching other work. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and level of attached work.
Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B.
Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless
otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to
formwork before concrete placement.
3.3
WOOD FURRING
A.
Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for
tolerance of finish work.
1.
B.
3.4
Firestop furred spaces of walls at each floor level and at ceiling with wood blocking or
noncombustible materials, accurately fitted to close furred spaces.
Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 2-by-2-inch nominal-size furring at 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.,
vertically.
INSPECTION
A.
Examine substrate for suitability to accept work.
B.
Start of work constitutes acceptance of substrate and responsibility for performance.
3.5
ERECTION – STUDS
A.
Install cold-formed framing in accordance with requirements of ASTM-C1007 and with applicable
sections of the AISI Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing General Provisions.
B.
Comply with manufacturer’s instructions.
C.
Openings: Install header, jamb, and sill framing system per approved engineering documents.
D.
Expansion Joints at Portland Cement Plaster.
1.
E.
Utilize double studs, spaced 3/8 inch apart, where expansion joints (EJ) are indicated.
Studs and runners:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Align outside deep leg runner track accurately according to exterior wall layout.
Fasten 12 inch OC, or as needed to satisfy design criteria.
Position studs vertically in inside deep leg runners at required spacing.
Install minimum of 2 studs each side of openings; use more if required to meet loadings.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 6
5.
Anchorage:
a.
Top:
1)
2)
3)
b.
7.
8.
F.
2.
Where stud design is outside edge of floor slab, provide galvanized connectors that satisfy loading
requirements and allow individual floor movement to occur without affecting stud system
integrity.
As required to meet design requirements, shop weld assemblies.
Retouch burned off or abraded galvanizing with galvanizing repair coating.
Coordinate installation of metal wall backing used to support wall-supported items with
installation of exterior stud wall system.
See Section 092216 for items requiring metal wall backing.
Wood Wall Blocking: Specified in Section 061053.
1.
2.
3.6
Anchor each stud at bottom to runners with two, 3/8 inch minimum, type S-12 pan
head screws.
Metal Wall Backing: Specified in Section 092216.
1.
G.
Allow ¾ inch clearance between top of inside deep leg runner and outside deep leg
runner.
Do not fasten inside deep leg runner to outside deep leg runner.
Fasten studs to inside deep leg runner.
Bottom:
1)
6.
Coordinate installation of wood wall blocking used to support wall-supported items with
installation of exterior wall stud wall system specified herein.
See Section 061053 for items requiring wood wall blocking.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect erected wall and openings with temporary covers until finish and flashing are installed.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 7
SECTION 06 40 23 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Plastic-laminate countertops.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for exposed framing and for furring, blocking, shims, and
hanging strips for installing interior woodwork.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for exposed framing and for furring, blocking, and other
carpentry work concealed in the wall.
Division 9 Section "Painting" for field finishing of installed interior architectural woodwork.
Division 12 Section “Manufactured Casework” for pre-fabricated cabinetry.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing
woodwork items unless concealed within other construction prior to woodwork installation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data for each type of product and process specified and incorporated into items of architectural
woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation.
C.
Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details,
attachment devices, and other components.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Show details to an acceptable scale which clearly shows products and components.
Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking
and reinforcing specified in other Sections.
Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, and
other items installed in architectural woodwork.
Samples for initial selection of the following in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of
actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each
type of material indicated.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 40 23 - 1
1.
2.
3.
E.
Shop-applied transparent finishes.
Shop-applied opaque finishes.
Plastic laminates.
Samples for verification of the following:
1.
2.
Laminate-clad panel products, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and
surface finish, with separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core.
Exposed cabinet hardware, one unit for each type and finish.
F.
Product certificates signed by woodwork fabricator certifying that products comply with specified
requirements.
G.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Arrange for interior architectural woodwork installation by a firm that can
demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and quality
to those required for this Project.
C.
Quality Standard: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following standard:
1.
D.
AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural
Woodwork Institute for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and
other requirements.
Mockup: Prior to fabricating or installing interior architectural woodwork, construct mockup to verify
selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of
materials and execution. Build mockup of the size indicated, using materials indicated for final unit of
work, and complying with the following requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Locate mockup on site in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
Notify Architect one week in advance of the date and time when fabrication of mockup will begin.
Notify Architect one week in advance of the date and time when mockup will be installed.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Architect's acceptance of mockup before start of final unit of Work.
Retain and maintain mockup during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
a.
1.6
Accepted mockup in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may
become part of the completed Work.
A.
Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and
deterioration.
06 40 23 - 2
B.
1.7
Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate
woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than
installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in
"Project Conditions."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work is
completed, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual
dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded
measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
1.
2.
1.8
Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, reinforcements, and furring that support
woodwork by accurate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurements on final
shop drawings.
Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and
proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming
at site and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed
dimensions.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of
Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and
installed as indicated.
B.
Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved schedule for cabinet hardware specified in
Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate cabinet shop
drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of
woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of interior woodwork,
with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product characteristics indicated:
B.
General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the WIC quality standard for each type of
woodwork and quality grade indicated, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
Softwood Plywood: PS 1.
Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1.
Formaldehyde Emission Level for Medium-Density Fiberboard: Comply with requirements of NPA 9.
06 40 23 - 3
D.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 made with phenol-formaldehyde resins.
E.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required by
woodwork quality standard.
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering highpressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Formica Corporation.
Laminart.
Nevamar Corp.
Pioneer Plastics Corp.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div.
Ralph Wilson Plastics Co.
F.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement.
G.
Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Red oak, plain sawn or sliced.
H.
Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardword.
2.2
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15
percent moisture content.
B.
Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with ASME B18.6.1 for
applicable requirements.
C.
Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for
applicable requirements.
D.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide
nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere
as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-inplace anchors.
2.3
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard
and of the following grade:
1.
Grade: Premium.
B.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture
content in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation
areas.
C.
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the
following:
06 40 23 - 4
1.
2.
Corners of cabinets and edges of solid-wood (lumber) members 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick or less:
1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
Edges of rails and similar members more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
D.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to Project
site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and
fitting.
E.
Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures,
electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams
to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in
countertops and similar exposures, seal edges with a water-resistant coating.
2.4
COUNTERTOPS
A.
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for countertops.
1.
B.
Grade: Premium.
Type of Top: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following:
1.
2.
Grade: GP-50, 0.050-inch (1.270-mm) nominal thickness.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of
exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
a.
Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in the
following categories:
1)
2)
3)
4)
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Solid colors.
Solid colors, with core same color as surface.
Wood grains.
Patterns.
Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts.
Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
Core Material: Medium-density particleboard.
SHOP FINISHING
A.
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
B.
General: The entire finish of interior architectural woodwork is specified in this Section, regardless of
whether shop applied or applied after installation. The extent to which the final finish is applied at
fabrication shop is Contractor’s option, except shop apply at least the prime coat before delivery.
C.
Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk
fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as
applicable to each unit of work.
1.
Backpriming; Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed
surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. Concealed
06 40 23 - 5
surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with
plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative overlay.
D.
Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, and
sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Grade: Premium.
AWI Finish System TR-0: Synthetic penetrating oil.
AWI Finish System TR-1: Standard lacquer.
AWI Finish System TR-2: Catalyzed lacquer.
AWI Finish System TR-3: Water-reducible acrylic lacquer.
AWI Finish System TR-4: Conversion varnish.
AWI Finish System TR-5: Catalyzed vinyl lacquer.
Staining: Match Architects sample.
Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply a vinyl wash coat to woodwork made from closed-grain
wood before staining and finishing.
Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining (if any), apply paste wood filler to open-grain
woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood.
Sheen: Semigloss, 55-75 gloss units.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing.
B.
Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete
work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in
Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.
B.
Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed
shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm)
C.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.
D.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds,
stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete
installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and
matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish
same as wood base, if finished.
Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing.
Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch and 96
inches (3mm in 2400 mm).
Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately
aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered
operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
06 40 23 - 6
1.
2.
F.
2.
3.3
Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other
variation from a straight line.
Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. Calk space between
backsplash and wall with specified sealant.
1.
G.
Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400mm) sag, bow, or other
variation from a straight line.
Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to the extent not completed at shop or before
installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified finish
coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats were
applied in the shop.
A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate functional and visual defects;
where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore
damaged or soiled areas.
3.4
PROTECTION
A.
3.5
Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator and Installer that
ensures that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
A.
Grommets for cable passage through countertops: 1.5 inch (25 mm) OD, molded-plastic grommets with
1-1/4-inch (19-mm) hole and plastic cap with slot for wire passage. Color as selected by Architect.
B.
Silencers: Drawer and door application, clear-rubber with self-adhering adhesive.
06 40 23 - 7
SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Cavity wall thermal and sound insulation.
Concealed rigid building insulation.
Suspended ceiling thermal insulation.
Safing insulation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data for each type of insulation product specified.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a
single source with resources to provide products complying with requirements indicated without delaying
the Work.
A.
Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other
sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for
handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering insulation
products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation:
a.
Amoco Foam Products Company.
THERMAL INSULATION
07 21 00 - 1
b.
c.
d.
2.
DiversiFoam Products.
Dow Chemical Co.
UC Industries, Inc.; Owens-Corning Co.
Glass-Fiber Insulation:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
CertainTeed Corporation.
Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation.
Schuller International, Inc.
INSULATING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards.
1.
B.
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation formed from
polystyrene base resin by an extrusion process using hydrochlorofluorocarbons as blowing agent to
comply with ASTM C 578 for type and with other requirements indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Type II, 1.35-lb/cu. ft. (22-kg/cu. m) minimum density.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and
450, respectively.
Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Thermal insulation combining mineral fibers of type
described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without
membrane facing).
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Type IV, 1.60-lb/cu. ft. (26-kg/cu. m) minimum density, unless otherwise indicated.
450, respectively.
Recycled Content: Not less than 50 percent blend of postconsumer and recovered polystyrene
resins.
Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation formed by
expansion of polystyrene resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with ASTM C 578 for type
and with other requirements indicated below:
1.
2.
D.
Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.
Interior Sound Attenuation Insulation: Provide sound attenuation batts within interior sound wall
cavities where indicated on contract drawings.
24”x40”x6-1/4” (R-19_ ceiling batts above all lay-in ceilings equal to “Sonobatts” by Owens
Corning.
50, respectively.
Faced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Thermal insulation combining mineral fibers of type described
below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A (blankets with reflective
vapor-retarder membrane facing and flame spread of 25 or less); with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foilscrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face.
1.
Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.
THERMAL INSULATION
07 21 00 - 2
2.
3.
2.3
Exterior Wall Cavity and Attic Insulation: Provide Kraft-faced fiberglass insulation as
manufactured by Owens Corning Fiberglass (or equivalent) within wall cavity and attic space
unless indicated otherwise. Thickness as indicated on drawings.
Flanged Units: Provide blankets fabricated with facing incorporating 5-inch- (127-mm-) wide
flanges along edges for attachment to framing members.
SAFING INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Slag-Wool-Fiber Board Safing Insulation: Semirigid boards designed for use as fire stop at openings
between edge of slab and exterior wall panels, produced by combining slag-wool fibers with
thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA and IB; nominal density of 4 lb/cu. ft.
(64 kg/cu. m); passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x h x
sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (27.7 K x m/W at 24 deg C).
B.
Calking Compound: Material approved by manufacturer of safing insulation for sealing joint between
foil backing of safing insulation and edge of concrete floor slab against penetration of smoke.
C.
Safing Clips: Galvanized steel safing clips approved by manufacturer of safing insulation for holding
safing insulation in place.
2.4
INSULATION FASTENERS
A.
Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates
indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.
B.
1.
Anchor Adhesives:
a.
b.
2.
TACTOO Adhesive; AGM Industries, Inc.
Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive; Gemco.
Anchoring systems as recommended by insulation manufacturers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections
in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting
performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections
capable of puncturing vapor retarders or that interfere with insulation attachment.
THERMAL INSULATION
07 21 00 - 3
3.3
A.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application
indicated.
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice and snow.
C.
Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around
obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D.
Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise
shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.4
INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A.
Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical
anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B.
Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to
edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation
with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C.
Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
1.
D.
Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to
surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by metal stud framing members according to the
following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. Where more than
one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.
Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of
insulation and adjoining framing members.
Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm)
o.c.
Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with
concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced
24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending
beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw attach short flange of furring channel to web of
attached channel. Start from this furring channel with standard width insulation panel and
continue in regular manner. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches
(300 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.
Until gypsum board is installed, hold insulation in place with 10-inch (250 mm) staples fabricated
from 0.0625-inch (1.6 mm) diameter tie wire and inserted through slot in web of member.
Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown.
Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of
approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu.m).
THERMAL INSULATION
07 21 00 - 4
3.5
PROTECTION
A.
3.6
General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures,
physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject
to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A.
See CPI Bulletin AX-205, “Working with MDI and Polymeric MDI What You Should Know”.
B.
Refer to appropriate Materials Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for additional safety information.
C.
Before starting to apply spray polyurethane foam or coating, any potential sources of air entry into the
building must be sealed off. These units and any other potential sources of air entry into the building
must be sealed.
THERMAL INSULATION
07 21 00 - 5
SECTION 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes firestopping for the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated floor and roof construction including both empty
openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items.
Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated walls and partitions including both empty openings and
openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items.
Sealant joints in fire-resistance-rated construction.
Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for construction of openings in concrete slabs.
Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for joint fillers for non-fire-resistive-rated masonry
construction.
Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for safing insulation and accessories.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for non-fire-resistive-rated joint sealants.
Division 15 Sections specifying ducts and piping penetrations.
Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire,
according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases.
B.
F-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F
ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fireresistance rating of the constructions penetrated.
C.
T-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with T
ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where indicated and where systems
protect penetrating items exposed to contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas. T-rated
assemblies are required where the following conditions exist:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside of wall cavities.
Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures.
Where firestop systems protect penetrations located in construction containing doors required to
have a temperature-rise rating.
Where firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 4 inch (100 mm) diameter nominal
pipe or 16 sq. in. (100 sq. cm) in overall cross-sectional area.
FIRESTOPPING
07 84 00 - 1
D.
Fire-Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings indicated, as determined
per ASTM E 119, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the
construction in which the joint occurs.
E.
For firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that do not
deteriorate when exposed to these conditions.
1.
2.
3.
1.4
For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant
through-penetration firestop systems.
For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) or more in width and
exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting the floor
loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means.
For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not
requiring removal of insulation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B.
Product data for each type of product specified.
1.
Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations
controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and are nontoxic to building occupants.
C.
Product certificates signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying that their products
comply with specified requirements.
D.
Product test reports from, and based on tests performed by, a qualified testing and inspecting agency
evidencing compliance of firestopping with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current
products.
E.
Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of
Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping that complies with the following requirements
and those specified under the "System Performance Requirements" article:
1.
Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to throughpenetration firestop system designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory," by
Warnock Hersey, or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency.
2.
Fire-resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested for fire-response characteristics per
ASTM E 119 under conditions where the positive furnace pressure differential is at least 0.01 inch
of water (2.5 Pa), as measured 0.78 inch (20 mm) from the face exposed to furnace fire. Provide
systems complying with the following requirements:
a.
FIRESTOPPING
Fire-Resistance Ratings of Joint Sealants: As indicated by reference to design designations
listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory" or by another qualified testing and
inspecting agency.
07 84 00 - 2
B.
Information on drawings referring to specific design designations of through-penetration firestop systems
is intended to establish requirements for performance based on conditions that are expected to exist
during installation. Any changes in conditions and designated systems require the Architect's prior
approval. Submit documentation showing that the performance of proposed substitutions equals or
exceeds that of the systems they would replace and are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed firestopping that is similar
in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and that has performed successfully.
D.
Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems for each kind of penetration
and construction condition indicated from a single manufacturer.
E.
Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method specified in
40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy."
F.
Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that designated
through-penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements.
1.6
A.
Deliver firestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and
legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number;
shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to
Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B.
Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture,
temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Conditions: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are
outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost,
condensation, or other causes.
B.
Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per firestopping manufacturers' instructions by natural means or,
where this is inadequate, forced air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the
substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B.
Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and
to comply with "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1. Use only components specified by
the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for the
designated fire-resistance-rated systems. Accessories include but are not limited to the following items:
1.
Permanent forming/damming/backing materials including the following:
FIRESTOPPING
07 84 00 - 3
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
2.2
Semirefractory fiber (mineral wool) insulation.
Ceramic fiber.
Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming materials to prevent leakage of
fill materials in liquid state.
Fire-rated formboard.
Joint fillers for joint sealants.
Temporary forming materials.
Substrate primers.
Collars.
Steel sleeves.
Applications: Provide firestopping systems composed of materials specified in this Section that comply
with system performance and other requirements.
FILL MATERIALS FOR THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A.
Ceramic-Fiber and Mastic Coating: Ceramic fibers in bulk form formulated for use with mastic coating,
and ceramic fiber manufacturer's mastic coating.
B.
Ceramic-Fiber Sealant: Single-component formulation of ceramic fibers and inorganic binders.
C.
Endothermic, Latex Compound Sealant: Single-component, endothermic, latex formulation.
D.
Intumescent, Latex Sealant: Single-component, intumescent, latex formulation.
E.
Intumescent Putty: Nonhardening, dielectric, water-resistant putty containing no solvents, inorganic
fibers, or silicone compounds.
F.
Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component, elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil on one side.
G.
Job-Mixed Vinyl Compound: Prepackaged vinyl-based powder product for mixing with water at Project
site to produce a paintable compound, passing ASTM E 136, with flame-spread and smoke-developed
ratings of zero per ASTM E 84.
H.
Mortar: Prepackaged dry mix composed of a blend of inorganic binders, fillers, and lightweight
aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogenous mortar.
I.
Pillows/Bags: Re-usable, heat-expanding pillows/bags composed of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a
combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant additives.
J.
Silicone Foam: Two-component, silicone-based liquid elastomer that, when mixed, expands and cures in
place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
K.
Silicone Sealant: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealant
of grade indicated below:
1.
L.
Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces
and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping/
gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening
conditions.
Solvent-Release-Curing Intumescent Sealant:
polymer-based sealant of grade indicated below:
FIRESTOPPING
Solvent-release-curing, single-component, synthetic-
07 84 00 - 4
1.
M.
Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces
and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping/
gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening
conditions.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Ceramic-Fiber and Mastic Coating:
a.
2.
Ceramic-Fiber Sealant:
a.
3.
Pensil 500 Intumescent Putty, General Electric Co.
Flame-Safe FSP1000 Putty, International Protective Coatings Corp.
Fire Barrier Moldable Putty, 3M Fire Protection Products.
Intumescent Wrap Strips:
a.
b.
c.
8.
Metacaulk 950, The RectorSeal Corporation.
Fire Barrier CP 25WB Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products.
Intumescent Putty:
a.
b.
c.
7.
Flame-Safe FS500/600 Series, International Protective Coatings Corp.
Flame-Safe FS900/FST900 Series, International Protective Coatings Corp.
Intumescent Latex Sealant:
a.
b.
6.
Fyre-Shield, Tremco Inc.
Endothermic, Latex Compounds:
a.
b.
5.
Endothermic, Latex Sealant:
a.
4.
FireMaster Bulk and FireMaster Mastic, Thermal Ceramics.
Dow Corning Fire Stop Intumescent Wrap Strip 2002, Dow Corning Corp.
CS2420 Intumescent Wrap, Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc.
Fire Barrier FS-195 Wrap/Strip, 3M Fire Protection Products.
Job-Mixed Vinyl Compound:
a.
USG Firecode Compound, United States Gypsum Co.
9.
Mortar:
a.
K-2 Firestop Mortar, Bio Fireshield, Inc.
b.
Novasit K-10 Firestop Mortar, Bio Fireshield, Inc.
c.
KBS-Mortar Seal, International Protective Coatings Corp.
10.
Pillows/Bags:
a.
b.
FIRESTOPPING
Firestop Pillows, Bio Fireshield, Inc.
KBS Sealbags, International Protective Coatings Corp.
07 84 00 - 5
11.
Silicone Foams:
a.
b.
12.
Dow Corning Firestop Sealant 2000, Dow Corning Corp.
Dow Corning Firestop Sealant SL 2003, Dow Corning Corp.
Pensil 100 Firestop Sealant, General Electric Co.
CS240 Firestop Sealant, Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc.
Fyre-Sil, Tremco Inc.
Fyre-Sil S/L, Tremco Inc.
Solvent-Release-Curing Intumescent Sealants:
a.
b.
c.
2.3
Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam 2001, Dow Corning Corp.
Pensil 200 Foam, General Electric Co.
Silicone Sealants:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
13.
Biostop 500 Intumescent Firestop Caulk, Bio Fireshield, Inc.
Fire Barrier CP 25N/S Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products.
Fire Barrier CP 25S/L Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products.
FIRE-RESISTIVE ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants
of base polymer indicated that complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those referenced for
Type, Grade, Class, and Uses, and requirements specified in this Section applicable to fire-resistive joint
sealants.
B.
Sealant Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following:
1.
C.
Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for
products of type indicated.
Single-Component, Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure-related Use
NT, and joint-substrate-related Uses M, G, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O.
1.
Additional Movement Capability: Provide sealant with the capability to withstand the following
percentage changes in joint width existing at time of installation, when tested for adhesion and
cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, and remain in compliance with
other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated:
a.
D.
50 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 100 percent
movement.
Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure-related Use NT,
and joint-substrate-related Uses M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O.
1.
Additional Movement Capability: Provide sealant with the capability to withstand the following
percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation, when tested for adhesion and
cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, and remain in compliance with
other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated:
FIRESTOPPING
07 84 00 - 6
a.
40 percent movement in extension and 25 percent in compression for a total of 65 percent
movement.
E.
Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT, M, A, and (as
applicable to joint substrates indicated) O.
F.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the
G.
1.
Single-Component, Neutral-Curing, Silicone Sealant:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
Vulkem 922, Mameco International Inc.
Dynflex, Pecora Corp.
Dynatred, Pecora Corp.
Dynatrol II, Pecora Corp.
Sikaflex 2cn NS, Sika Corp.
Sonolastic NP 2, Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.
Dymeric, Tremco Inc.
Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.4
Dow Corning 790, Dow Corning Corp.
Dow Corning 795, Dow Corning Corp.
Silpruf, General Electric Co.
Ultraglaze, General Electric Co.
864, Pecora Corp.
Isoflex 880 GB, Harry S. Peterson Co., Inc.
Isoflex 881, Harry S. Peterson Co., Inc.
Vulkem 921, Mameco International Inc.
Sikaflex--15LM, Sika Corp.
MIXING
A.
For those products requiring mixing prior to application, comply with firestopping manufacturer's
directions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection
of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce firestopping
products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening
configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
FIRESTOPPING
07 84 00 - 7
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to comply
with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from penetrating
items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping.
Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable
of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning
operation.
Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
B.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that manufacturer's
recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and
migration onto exposed surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will
remain exposed upon completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged
by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestopping materials. Remove tape
as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.
3.3
INSTALLING THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPS
A.
General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1 and the throughpenetration firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and
applications indicated.
B.
Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
their application and in the position needed to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths required to
achieve fire ratings of designated through-penetration firestop systems. After installing fill materials,
remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of
firestop systems.
C.
Install fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the
following results:
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items.
Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating
items.
For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth,
uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
INSTALLING FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS
A.
General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1, with ASTM C 1193,
and with the sealant manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and
applications indicated.
B.
Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce
the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability and develop fire-resistance rating required.
FIRESTOPPING
07 84 00 - 8
C.
Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint
substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform,
cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum sealant movement capability.
Install sealants at the same time joint fillers are installed.
D.
Tool nonsag sealants immediately after sealant application and prior to the time skinning or curing
begins. Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated or required to produce fire-resistance
rating, as well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealants with sides of
joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor
sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
3.5
CLEANING
A.
Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and of products in which
opening and joints occur.
B.
Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from
damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or
damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs,
cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately and install new materials to
produce firestopping complying with specified requirements.
FIRESTOPPING
07 84 00 - 9
SECTION 07 92 13 - INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations:
1.
Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
Other joints as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
Tile control and expansion joints.
Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls and
partitions.
Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and
elevator entrances.
Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures.
Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below:
a.
b.
B.
Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
Joints between different materials listed above.
Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows.
Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces.
Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for through-penetration firestopping systems.
Division 8 "Glazing" for sealants used in glazing.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing concealed perimeter joints of gypsum
board partitions to reduce sound transmission.
Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panels" for sealing edge moldings at perimeter of acoustical
ceilings.
Division 9 Section "Tile" for sealing tile joints.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to maintain
watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates.
INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 13 - 1
B.
1.4
Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed to establish and
maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining or deterioration of joint
substrates.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B.
Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required.
1.
Certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the primers and cleaners required for
sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds.
C.
Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of
strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view.
D.
Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with specification
requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
E.
Compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric sealant manufacturer indicating that materials
forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with
joint sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance
and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant applications
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with
a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single
manufacturer for each different product required.
1.6
A.
Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating
manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and
mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B.
Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Conditions:
conditions:
1.
2.
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer.
When joint substrates are wet.
07 92 13 - 2
B.
Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than
allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.
C.
Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable
of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.8
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Sequence installation of joint sealants to occur not less than 21 nor more than 30 days after completion of
waterproofing, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General Sealer Performance Requirements: Provide colors indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as
selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s standard bead samples, consisting of stipes of actual
products showing a full range of colors. Select materials for compatibility with joint surfaces and other
indicated exposures, and except as otherwise indicted select modulus of elasticity and hardness or grade
recommended by manufacturer for each application indicted. Where exposed to foot traffic, select
marketing materials of sufficient strength and hardness to withstand stiletto heel traffic damage or
deterioration of sealer system.
1.
Elastomeric Sealants:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Non-Elastomeric Sealants:
a.
b.
3.
Two-Component Polysulfide Sealant: Polysulfide-based, 2 part elastomeric sealant,
complying with FS TT-S-227, Class A, Type II (non-sag) unless Type I recommended by
manufacturer for application shown.
Two-Component Polyurethane Sealant: Polyurethane-based, 2 part elastomeric sealant,
complying with FS TT-S-00227, Class A, Type I (self-leveling) unless Type II
recommended by manufacturer for application shown.
One-Component Polysulfide Sealant: Polysulfide-based, 1-part elastomeric sealant,
complying with FS TT-S-00230, Class A, Type II (non sag) unless Type I recommended
by manufacturer for application shown.
One-Component Polyurethane Sealant: Polyurethane-based, 1-part elastomeric sealant,
complying with FS TT-S-00230, Class A, Type I (self-leveling) unless Type II
recommended by manufacturer for application shown.
One-Component Acrylic Sealant: Acrylic terpolymer, solvent-based one-part, thermoplastic sealant compound; solids not less than 95% acrylic; complying with FS TT-S00230, Class B, Type II; recommended by manufacturer for general use as an exposed
building construction sealant.
Butyl Rubber Sealant: Polymerized butyl rubber and inert fillers (pigments), solvent-based
with minimum 75% solids, non-sag consistency, tack-free time of 24 hours or less,
paintable, non-staining; complying with FS TT-S-001657.
Cellular/Foam Joint Fillers:
a.
Closed-Cell Synthetic Rubber Joint Filler: Provide expanded synthetic rubber complying
with ASTM D 1056, Class Sc-E (oil-resistant and medium swell), of 2 to 5 psi compression
07 92 13 - 3
b.
c.
d.
4.
deflection (Grade SCE 41); except provide 13 to 17 psi compression deflection (Grade
SCE 44) where filler is applied under sealant exposed to traffic.
Closed-Cell PVC Joint Filler: Provide flexible expanded polyvinyl chloride complying
with ASTM D 1667, Grade VE 41 BL (3.0 psi compression deflection); except provide
higher compression deflection grades as my be necessary to withstand installation forces
and provide proper support for sealants, if any.
Expanded Polyethylene Joint Filler: Provide flexible, compressible, closed-cell,
polyethylene of not less than 10 psi compression deflection (25%); except provide higher
compression deflection strength as may be necessary to withstand installation forces and
provide proper support for sealants; surface water absorption of not more than 0.1 lbs. per
sq. ft.
Open-Cell Polyurethane Joint Filler: Provide flexible, highly compressible, open-cell
polyurethane foam of not less than 1.3 lbs. per cu. ft. density and not less than 2 psi
compression deflection (25%), with not more than 10% compression set for 25 hours at
50% compression; comply with ASTM D 3574.
Miscellaneous Materials:
a.
b.
c.
Joint Primer/Sealer: Provide type of joint primer/sealer recommended by sealant
manufacturer for joint surfaces to be primed or sealed.
Bond Breaker Type: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant
manufacturer to be applied to sealant-contact surfaces where bond to substrate or joint filler
must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self-adhesive tape where
applicable.
Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock of polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed
polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or other flexible, permanent, durable
nonabsorptive material as recommended by sealant manufacturer for compatibility with
sealant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A.
3.2
Comply with manufacturer’s printed instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified, and except where manufacturer’s technical representative directs otherwise.
JOINT PREPARATION
A.
Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant or calking compound. Remove dirt,
insecure coatings, moisture and other substances which could interfere with bond of sealant or calking
compound. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
B.
Prime or seal joint surfaces where indicated, and where recommended by sealant manufacturer. Do not
allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Set joint filler units at proper depth or position in joint to coordinate with other work, including
installation of bond breakers, back rods and sealants. Do not leave voids or gaps between ends of joint
filler units.
B.
Install sealant backer rod for liquid elastomeric sealants, except where shown to be omitted or
recommended to be omitted by sealant manufacturer for application indicated.
07 92 13 - 4
C.
Install bond breaker tape where indicated and where required by manufacturer’s recommendations to
ensure that elastomeric sealants will perform properly.
D.
Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants are deposited in uniform,
continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete “wetting” of joint bond surfaces equally on
opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly
below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and vertical surface,
fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt.
E.
Install sealant to depths as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by sealant manufacturer but within
the following general limitations, measured at center (thin) section of bead:
1.
2.
3.
For floor slabs and similar joints sealed with elastomeric sealants and subject to traffic and other
abrasion and indentation exposures, fill joints to a depth equal to 75% of joint width, but neither
more than 5/8" deep nor less than 3/8" deep.
For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not subject to traffic, fill joints to a
depth equal to 50% of joint width, but neither more than 1/2" deep nor less than 1/4" deep.
For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealants and calking compounds, fill joints to a depth in
range of 75% to 125% of joint width.
F.
Spillage: Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate
into voids of adjoining surfaces. Clean adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to
eliminate evidence of spillage.
G.
Recess exposed edges of gaskets and exposed joint fillers slightly behind adjoining surfaces, unless
otherwise shown, so that compressed units will not protrude from joints.
H.
Bond ends of gaskets together with adhesive or “weld” by other means as recommended by manufacturer
to ensure continuous watertight and airtight performance. Miter-cut and bond ends at corners unless
molded corner units are provided.
I.
Sealant Type and Location:
1.
2.
J.
Joint Filler Type and Location:
1.
3.4
Building Exterior Surfaces: Two component elastomeric sealants.
Building Interior Surfaces one component elastomeric or non-elastomeric sealants.
Building walls and associated Areas: Sealant backer rod.
CURE AND PROTECTION
A.
Cure sealants and calking compounds in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability.
Advise Contractor of procedures required for cure and protection of joint sealers during construction
period, so that they will be without deterioration or damage (other than normal wear and weathering) at
time of substantial completion.
07 92 13 - 5
SECTION 08 11 00 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes steel doors and frames, including door louvers, transom panels and sidelights.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Division 4 Section "Masonry".
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealer".
Division 8 Section "Glazing".
Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware".
Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies”.
Division 9 Section “Painting”.
REFERENCES
A.
General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this
specification section to the extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority
abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards
subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation.
B.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
11.
C.
ASTM A 366 Standard Specification for Commercial Steel (CS) Sheet, Carbon (0.15 Maximum
Percent) Cold-Rolled.
ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
ASTM A 924 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated
by the Hot-Dip Process.
ASTM D610 Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Rusting on Painted Steel Surfaces.
ASTM D714 Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering of Paints.
ASTM D1621 Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
ASTM D1622 Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
ASTM D1623 Standard Test Method for Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid
Cellular Plastics.
ASTM D1654 Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to
Corrosive Environments.
ASTM D2126 Standard Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and
Humid Aging.
ASTM D2863 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to
Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index).
American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
ROLLING SERVICE DOORS
08 33 00 - 1
1.
2.
3.
D.
UL 10(b) and UL 10 (c) Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
UL Building Materials Director.
Warnock Hersey, Inc. (WHI):
1.
2.
1.4
NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows.
NFPA 252 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1.
2.
G.
Fed Spec C578Bead Fusion Test.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1.
2.
F.
ANSI/DHI A115.IG Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware.
ANSI/SDI Standard A224.1 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors & Frames.
ANSI A250.8 Standard Steel Door Frames.
Federal Specification (Fed Spec):
1.
E.
WHI Directory of Listed Products.
WHI Directory of Positive Pressure Rated Door assemblies and components.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.5
Performance Requirements: Provide metal doors and frames which have been manufactured, fabricated
and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Submittal Procedures Section.
B.
Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer’s SPEC-DATA product sheet, for specified
products.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product components, including
anchorage, accessories and finish colors.
1.
2.
Indicate door type, frame, steel, core, material thickness, reinforcements, anchorages, exposed
fasteners locations, openings (glazed, paneled or louvered) and hardware arrangement.
Include schedule identifying each unit, with door marks or numbers referencing numbering in
schedules or drawings.
D.
Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors and textures. Coordinate with
Division 9 Painting Section for paint finishes.
E.
Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following:
1.
2.
3
Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with
specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
Manufacturer’s Instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Manufacturer’s field reports specified herein.
08 33 00 - 2
F.
Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:
1.
2.
1.6
Operation and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for installed products in
accordance with Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Data and Operation Data) Section.
Include methods for maintaining installed products and precautions against cleaning materials and
methods detrimental to finishes and performance.
Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Installer should be experienced in performing work of this section and should
have specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project.
1.
B.
Regulatory Requirements:
1.
C.
3.
1.7
Labeled Door and Frame Construction: Where noted or required, provide Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc., (UL) or Warnock Hersey Inc. (WHI) labels with appropriate fire resistance and
temperature rise ratings for class of opening indicated. Construction details and hardware
applications authorized by testing or certification laboratories shall take precedence over project
details or specifications.
Mock-Ups: Install at project site a job mock-up using acceptable products and manufacturer approved
installation methods. Obtain Owner’s and Architect’s acceptance of finish color, texture, pattern and
workmanship standards. Comply with Division 1 Quality Control (Mock-Up Requirements) Section.
1.
2.
D.
Certificate: When requested, submit certificate indicating qualifications.
Mock-Up Size: 3 x 5.
Maintenance: Maintain mock-up during construction for workmanship comparison; remove and
legally dispose of mock-up if it is no longer required.
Incorporation: Mock-up shall be incorporated into final construction upon Owner’s approval.
Pre-installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate
conditions, manufacturer’s installation instructions and manufacturer’s warranty requirements. Comply
with Division 1 Project Management and Coordination (Project Meetings) Section.
A.
General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections, and with ANSI A250.8.
B.
Ordering: Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid
construction delays.
C.
Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact.
1.
D.
Handle and store products according to Amweld recommendations published in technical
materials. Leave product wrapped or otherwise protected and under clean, dry storage conditions
until required.
Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions, at
temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.
08 33 00 - 3
1.
2.
1.8
Door Storage: Doors shall be protected at corners to prevent damage or marring of finish. Doors
shall be stored in an upright position under cover on building site on wood sills or on floors in a
manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid creating a humidity chamber by using a plastic
or canvas shelter and not venting the area covered.
Frame Storage: Frames shall be stored in an upright position under cover on building site on wood
sills or on floors in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid creating a humidity
chamber by using a plastic or canvas shelter and not venting the area covered.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication;
show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule
with construction progress to avoid construction delays.
WARRANTY
A.
Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.
B.
Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document
executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation
of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.
1.
Warranty Period: 1 year commencing on Date of Substantial Completion for manufacture
workmanship and defect. Lifetime warranty on the continuous welded edges of the door.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Sizes:
1.
C.
Standard Door Sizes: As indicated on drawings.
Fire Rating:
1.
D.
Amweld Building Products.
Ceco Door Products.
Curries Company.
Steelcraft.
Provide doors and frames with UL or WHI listing (classification marks) where specified.
Sound Rating:
1.
Provide sound transmission class of standard units tested as follows:
a.
b.
E.
1 3/4" 18 Gauge Door: 31 STC.
1 3/4" 16 Gauge Door: 35 STC.
Finishes:
08 33 00 - 4
1.
2.
2.2
Exposed surfaces on doors and frames shall be cleaned, treated with a 3 stage iron phosphate and
given 1 shop coat of synthetic resin, rust-inhibitive alkyd enamel primer. Prime paint shall be
tested at a recognized independent testing laboratory in accordance with ANSI/SDI Standard
A250.10 and meet the acceptance criteria outlined in that document (120 salt spray hours, 240
humidity hours, etc.).
Colors: Finish doors with gray primer paint, ready for field painting.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
2.3
Substitutions: as permitted in Section 1.
MATERIALS
A.
Steel Materials:
1.
2.
Cold-Rolled Steel: Comply with ASTM A 366 cold-rolled carbon steel sheet.
Galvanized Steel: Comply with ASTM A 924 general requirements for steel sheet metallic coated
by hot dip process (formerly ASTM A525).
B.
Primer Materials: Comply with ANSI A250.10 test procedures and acceptance criteria for prime painted
steel surfaces for steel doors and frames.
C.
Painted Finish Material: Comply with ANSI A250.3 test procedures and acceptance criteria for factory
applied finish for steel doors and frames.
D.
Door Color Paint Material: Provide manufacturer’s standard finish and color.
2.4
DOORS
A.
General: Provide doors of sizes, 1 3/4" thickness and designs as scheduled with the following criteria:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI 250.8
for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:
1.
2.
C.
Level II and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty) Full Flush type.
Steel thickness: 18 ga.
Exterior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI
A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:
1.
2.
D.
Tops and bottoms of door shall not be less than 18 gauge galvanized channels. Tops shall be
flush. Bottoms shall have inverted channel.
Sound and cold retardation shall be ensured by bonding a nominal 1 lb. density, procured rigid
polystyrene foam core to the panels.
Doors shall be joined at the edge with a continuous welded seam using no filler material to create
a smooth, unbroken surface for an acceptable seam on the edge.
Fabricate from two sheets of 14, 16, 18 and 20 gauge steel (ASTM A366) with no visible seams
on either face.
Level III and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Full Flush type.
Steel thickness: 16 ga.
Vision Lite Systems: Manufacturer’s standard kits consisting of glass lite moldings to accommodate glass
08 33 00 - 5
thickness and size of vision lit indicated.
1.
All vision lites shall be full flush type. No overlapping face edge accepted.
E.
Labeled Doors: Where noted, provide Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or Warnock Hersey Inc.
(WHI) labels with appropriate fire resistance and temperature rise ratings for the class of opening
indicated. Construction details and hardware applications authorized by labeling authorities shall take
precedence over project details or specifications.
F.
Hardware Locations: Unless otherwise specified, the location of locks, hinges, latches, push/pull plates
and bars, exit devices, handle sets, closer reinforcings, roller latches and arm pulls shall conform to the
recommendations of the Steel Door Institute.
G.
Louvers: Provide factory installed insert type louvers with vision-proof inverted Y baffles. Louver blades
shall be 18 gauge and frames shall be on 18 gauge welded steel construction.
H.
Glazing: Provide doors with formed steel kits of screw-in type, to permit selection of secure side in field.
Glazing arrangements shall accommodate 1/4" (6.4 mm) thick glass.
I.
Prime Painted Doors: Exposed surfaces shall be cleaned, treated with a Bonderite chemical and given 1
baked-on shop coat of EPA compliant gray synthetic primer.
J.
Prepainted Doors: Doors shall be chemically cleaned and treated with a Bonderite chemical. Doors shall
receive a heavy coat of electrostatically applied finish paint, baked on. Finish paint shall be a durable
formulation, made specifically for Amweld. Hard film shall provide good resistance to both mar and
abrasion tests. Weather and chemical resistance shall be a property of the finish.
K.
Transom Panels (Series 5500-5600 and 5700): Provide face sheets of 18 gauge steel (16 gauge optional).
Panels shall be reinforced with a core bonded to faces with a thermosetting adhesive. When specified, a
horizontal 12 gauge flat strip astragal shall be factory installed on transom panel.
2.5
MANUFACTURED FRAME UNITS
A.
General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings that
comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Conceal fastenings, unless
B.
Frames of 0.042-inch thick (18 gauge)steel sheet for:
1.
C.
Frames of 0.053-inch thick (16 gauge) steel sheet for:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Door openings wider than 48 inches.
Level I steel doors.
Level II steel doors.
Level III steel doors, unless otherwise indicated.
Frames of 0.067-inch thick (14 gauge) steel sheet for:
1.
2.
E.
Level I steel doors.
Level III steel doors, unless otherwise indicated.
Level IV steel doors, unless otherwise indicated.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike
jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames.
08 33 00 - 6
F.
Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016-inch- thick steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior
of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware
operation.
G.
Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.045-inch-thick, electrolytic zinc-coated or
metallic-coated steel sheet.
1.
Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.177-inch diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A
510 (ASTM A 510M) may be used in place of steel sheet.
H.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be built into
exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 152/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable.
I.
Frame minimum steel thickness: Interior - 16 ga., Exterior - 14 ga.
J.
Provide ½" thick by 1-3/4" wide full height filler strip of styrofoam behind hinge jamb to allow for
drilling and topping for continuous hinge in field.
K.
Metal Door Frames: Fabricate from 16 or 14 gauge steel (ASTM A366) for 1 3/4" (45 mm) doors and 16
gauge for 1 3/8" (35 mm) doors. Frames shall be designed with integral stop and trim. Mitered corners
shall be reinforced with 18 gauge channel shaped Inter-Lok reinforcements. Knocked-down frames shall
have self-aligning tabs and slots for securely locked corners. Welded frame corners shall be mitered, arc
welded and ground smooth per ANSI A250.8.
L.
Masonry: Equip frames with 1 welded in floor anchor in each jamb. Provide 3 field inserted steel lock-in
or welded-in anchors (maximum of 24" (610 mm) oc) for each jamb. Anchors shall be type for particular
construction involved (i.e., wood stud, masonry or steel stud).
M.
Drywall Frames: Design frames for installation after wall is erected. Provide hinge and strike jambs with
welded-in compression anchors which are to be screw adjusted after frame is installed to maintain a tight
grip on wall and shall be equipped with welded-in sill anchors. Provide 16 gauge frames.
N.
Hardware Preparation: Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped to receive specified
mortise hardware and reinforced only for specified surface hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface
hardware shall be done in the field. Plaster guards shall be installed on applicable hardware cutouts in
400 Series frames. Strike jambs shall be prepared for 3 rubber silencers.
O.
Labeled Frames: When noted or required, provide for frame, windows and/or transoms and sidelights
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or Warnock Hersey Inc. (WHI) labels for class of opening
indicated. Construction details and hardware applications authorized by labeling authorities shall take
precedence over project details or specifications.
P.
Galvanized Option: Provide frame members of ASTM A40 hot dipped 16 or 14 gauge galvanized
materials in 0.4 oz class conforming to ASTM A924 and A653. Treat materials in mill to ensure superior
prime paint adhesion.
Q.
Prime Panted Frames: Exposed surfaces shall be cleaned, treated with Bonderite chemical and given 1
baked-on shop coat of EPA compliant gray synthetic primer.
R.
Prepainted Frames: Frames shall be chemically cleaned and treated with a Bonderite chemical, plus a
heavy coat of electrostatically applied baked on finish paint. Finish paint shall be a durable formulation,
made specifically for Amweld. Hard film shall provide good resistance to both mar and abrasion tests.
Weather and chemical resistance shall be a property of finish.
08 33 00 - 7
2.6
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
2.7
Related Materials: Refer to other sections listed under Related Sections for related materials.
SOURCE QUALITY
A.
Source Quality: Obtain metal door and frame products from a single manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A.
3.2
Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical bulletins, product
catalog installation instructions and product carton instructions for installation.
EXAMINATION
A.
Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that substrate conditions, which have been previously installed
under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
1.
3.3
Verify that door frame openings are installed plumb, true and level before beginning installation
process. Select fasteners of adequate type, number and quality to perform the intended functions.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation:
1.
3.4
Preparation for Field Painting: Before application of finish coat of paint, surfaces must be dry and
free to dirt, oil and dust. Finish coat shall be applied over a film which is intact. Scratches or bare
edges shall be field primed with a rust inhibiting paint before top coating. Comply with
instructions on finish coat application provided by paint manufacturer.
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
B.
Set frame product plumb, square, aligned and without twist at correct elevation.
Frame Installation: Install pressed steel frames. Installation shall be plumb, straight and true,
rigidly secured in place, and properly braced. Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-IG installation
guide.
Frame Installation Tolerances: Plumbness tolerance (measured through a line from intersecting corner of
vertical members and the head to the floor) + 0.063" (1.6 mm).
1.
2.
3.
Squareness tolerance (measured through a line 90 degrees from one jamb at upper corner of
product, to opposite jamb): + 0.063" (1.6 mm).
Alignment tolerance (measured on jambs, through a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall): +
0.063" (1.6 mm).
Twist tolerance (measured at face corners of jambs, on parallel lines perpendicular to plane of
08 33 00 - 8
wall) + 0.063" (1.6 mm).
C.
Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Installation Reference Standard(s): Install metal doors and frames in accordance with requirements of
applicable reference standards.
1.
2.
3.
E.
3.5
Comply with Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) installation standards.
Comply with Steel Door Institute (SDI) installation and maintenance standards.
Comply with NFPA80 installation standards.
Fire Rated Construction:
1.
F.
Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction.
Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer’s templates and instructions.
Finish exposed field welds to present a smooth uniform surface. Touch up with a rust inhibitive
primer.
Touch up exposed surfaces scratched or marred during shipment, installation or handling with a
rust inhibitive primer.
Install glazing materials and door silencers.
Regulatory Requirements: Install fire labeled steel door and frame product in accordance with
NFPA80, current edition, unless specified otherwise.
Related Products Installation: Refer to other sections listed under Related Sections for related products
installation.
FIELD QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
A.
3.6
Door Supplier’s Field Services: Upon Owner’s request, provide Door Supplier’s field service consisting
of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.7
Adjusting: Adjust hinge sets, locksets and other hardware.
compatible with door and frame coatings.
Lubricate using a suitable lubricant
CLEANING
A.
3.8
Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace
products that have been installed and are damaged. Clean installed products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions prior to Owner’s acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site
and legally dispose of debris.
PROTECTION
A.
Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction.
08 33 00 - 9
SECTION 08 33 00 – ROLLING SERVICE DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes manual overhead rolling doors:
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications. Door opening jamb and head members.
06 10 00 Rough Carpentry. Door opening jamb and head members.
08 71 00 Hardware. Padlocks. Masterkeyed cylinder.
09 91 00 Painting. Field painting.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Design Requirements:
1.
2.
Wind Loading: Supply doors to withstand up to 5 psf design wind load.
Cycle Life:
a.
1.4
Design doors of standard construction for normal use of up to 20 cycles per day maximum.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Reference Section 01 33 23 Submittal Procedures; submit the following items:
1.
2.
3.
Product Data.
Shop Drawings: Include special conditions not detailed in Product Data. Show interface with
adjacent work.
Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Provide proof of manufacturer ISO 9001:2008 registration.
Provide proof of manufacturer and installer qualifications – see 1.5 below.
Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions.
Closeout Submittals:
a.
b.
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Certificate stating that installed materials comply with this specification.
08 33 00 - 1
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications:
1.
2.
1.6
Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001:2008 registered and a minimum of five years experience
in producing doors of the type specified.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer’s approval.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Reference Section 01 66 00 Product Storage and Handling Requirements.
B.
Follow manufacturer’s instructions.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Standard Warranty: Two years from date of shipment against defects in material and workmanship.
B.
Maintenance: Submit for owner’s consideration and acceptance of a maintenance service agreement for
installed products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturer: Basis of Design shall be Model ESD10 as manufactured by Cornell Iron Works, Inc.,
Crestwood Industrial Park, Mountaintop, PA 18707. Telephone: (800) 233-8366, Fax: (800) 526-0841.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), ISO 9001:2008 Registered.
1.
B.
Alternate Manufacturer: Rayner Dura Coil Standard Commercial Rolling Doors, (800) 9 Rayner.
1.
C.
2.2
Distributor: Michigan Overhead Door and Loading Inc., (810) 603-2600.
Distributor: Dover & Company, (810) 235-2573.
Substitutions: Reference Section 00 43 25 Substitutions Prior to Award of Contract.
MATERIALS
A.
Curtain:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Slats: No. 5F gauge, Grade 40 steel, ASTM A 653 galvanized steel zinc coating.
Bottom Bar: Two 2x2x1/8 inch (50x50x3.2 mm) structural steel angles.
Fabricate interlocking sections with high strength nylon cast iron endlocks on alternate slats each
secured with two ¼” (6.35 mm) rivets. Provide windlocks as required to meet specified wind
load.
Slat Finish:
a.
GalvaNex™ Coating System to include an ASTM A 653 galvanized base coating treated
with dual process rinsing agents in preparation of a chemical bonding, color as selected by
Architect, baked-on polyester base coat and a baked-on polyester finish coat. The scientific
08 33 00 - 2
organic material composition and chemical bonding process of GalvaNex™ produces a
superior finish against corrosion and abrasion. GalvaNex™ components include a limited
two year finish warranty.
5.
Curtain Configuration:
a.
6.
Bottom Bar Finish:
a.
7.
Finish:
a.
2.
Standard Guide Configuration.
Counterbalance Shaft Assembly:
1.
2.
Barrel: Steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum deflection of 0.03 inches per
foot (2.5 mm per meter) of width.
Spring Balance: Oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion spring assembly designed for
proper balance of door to ensure that maximum effort to operate will not exceed 25 lbs (110 N).
Provide wheel for applying and adjusting spring torque.
Brackets: Fabricate from minimum 3/16 inch (5 mm) steel plate with permanently lubricated ball or
roller bearings at rotating support points to support counterbalance shaft assembly and form end closures.
1.
Finish:
a.
E.
Steel: Phosphate treatment followed by a (color as selected by Architect) baked-on zincrich polyester powder coat; minimum 2.5 mils (0.065 mm) cured film thickness.
Guide Configuration:
a.
D.
Standard Bottom Bar configuration
Guides: Fabricate with structural steel angles. Provide windlock bars of same material when windlocks
are required to meet specified wind load. Top of inner and outer guide angles to be flared outwards to
form bellmouth for smooth entry of curtain into guides. Provide removable guide stoppers to prevent
over travel of curtain and bottom bar. Top 16 ½” (419.10 mm) of coil side guide angles to be removable
for ease of curtain installation and as needed for future curtain service.
1.
C.
Steel: Phosphate treatment followed by a (color as selected by Architect) baked-on
polyester powder coat; minimum 2.5 mils (0.065 mm) cured film thickness.
Bottom Bar Configuration:
a.
B.
Standard Curtain configuration.
Hood: 24 gauge galvanized steel with reinforced top and bottom edges. Provide minimum ¼ inch (6.35
mm) steel intermediate support brackets as required to prevent excessive sag.
1.
Finish:
a.
with dual process rinsing agents in preparation of a chemical bonding, (color as selected by
Architect) baked-on polyester base coat and a (color as selected by Architect) baked-on
08 33 00 - 3
polyester finish coat. The scientific organic material composition and chemical bonding
process of GalvaNex™ produces a superior finish against corrosion and abrasion.
GalvaNex™ components include a limited two year finish warranty.
F.
Weatherstripping:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Bottom Bar: Replaceable, bulb-style, compressible EDPM gasket extending into guides.
Guides: Vinyl strip sealing against fascia side of curtain.
Hood: Neoprene/rayon baffle to impede air flow above coil.
Lintel Seal: Nylon brush seal fitted at door header to impede air flow.
ACCESSORIES
A.
2.4
Locking:
1.
Manual Push-Up: Padlockable slide bolt on fascia side of bottom bar at each jamb extending into
slots in guides.
OPERATION
A.
Manual Push-Up: Provide lift handles on bottom bar and pole with hook.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates upon which work will be installed and verify conditions are in accordance with
approved shop drawings.
B.
Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates.
C.
Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install door and operating equipment with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers and
supports.
B.
Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
3.4
Following completion of installation, including related work by others, lubricate, test, and adjust doors
for ease of operation, free from warp, twist, or distortion.
CLEANING
A.
Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Remove surplus materials and debris from the site.
08 33 00 - 4
3.5
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Demonstrate proper operation to Owner’s Representative.
B.
Instruct Owner’s Representative in maintenance procedures.
08 33 00 - 5
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 08 33 24 – ROLLING FIRE DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes manual and electric operated , automatic closing, overhead rolling fire doors; fire
doors with SmokeShield® UL leakage rated assembly label:
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications. Door opening jamb and head members.
06 10 00 Rough Carpentry. Door opening jamb and head members.
09 91 00 Painting. Field painting.
Division 26, Electrical wiring and conduit, fuses, disconnect switches, connection of operator to
power supply, installation of control station and wiring, and connection to alarm systems.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Performance Requirements:
1.
1.4
Provide doors with Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. label for the fire rating classification, ¾ hr.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Reference Section 01 33 23 Submittal Procedures; submit the following items:
1.
2.
3.
Product Data.
Shop Drawings: Include special conditions not detailed in Product Data. Show interface with
adjacent work.
Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Provide proof of manufacturer ISO 9001:2008 registration.
Provide proof of manufacturer and installer qualifications – see 1.5 below.
Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions.
Closeout Submittals:
a.
b.
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Certificate stating that installed materials comply with this specification.
ROLLING FIRE DOORS
08 33 24 - 1
Genesee County CARD
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications:
1.
2.
1.6
Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001:2008 registered and a minimum of five years experience
in producing fire and smoke control units of the type specified.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer’s approval.
A.
Reference Section 01 66 00 Product Storage and Handling Requirements.
B.
Follow manufacturer’s instructions.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Standard Warranty: Two years from date of shipment against defects in material and workmanship.
B.
Maintenance: Submit for owner’s consideration and acceptance of a maintenance service agreement for
installed products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturer: Basis of Design shall be Model ERD10 as manufactured by Cornell Iron Works, Inc.,
Crestwood Industrial Park, Mountaintop, PA 18707. Telephone: (800) 233-8366, Fax: (800) 526-0841.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), ISO 9001:2008 Registered.
1.
B.
Alternate Manufacturer: Rayner Fire Coil Fire Rated Rolling Doors, (800) 9 Rayner.
1.
C.
2.2
Distributor: Michigan Overhead Door and Loading Inc., (810) 603-2600.
Distributor: Dover & Company, (810) 235-2573.
Substitutions: Reference Section 00 43 25 Substitutions Prior to Award of Contract.
MATERIALS
A.
Curtain:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Slats: No. 5F, flat faced 201 gauge, Grade 40 steel, ASTM A 653 galvanized steel zinc coating.
Bottom Bar: Two 2x2x1/8 inch (50x50x3.2 mm) structural steel angles.
Fabricate interlocking continuous slat sections with high strength steel endlocks secured with two
¼” (6.35 mm) rivets per UL requirements.
Slat Finish:
a.
with dual process rinsing agents in preparation of a chemical bonding, color as selected by
Architect, baked-on polyester base coat and a (color as selected by Architect) baked-on
ROLLING FIRE DOORS
08 33 24 - 2
Genesee County CARD
5.
Bottom Bar Finish:
a.
B.
Guides: Fabricate with minimum 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) structural steel angles. Top of inner and outer
guide angles to be flared outwards to form bellmouth for smooth entry of curtain into guides. Provide
removable guide stoppers to prevent over travel of curtain and bottom bar. Top 16 ½” (419.10 mm) of
coil side guide angles to be removable for ease of curtain installation and as needed for future curtain
service.
1.
Finish:
a.
C.
2.
Barrel: Steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum deflection of 0.03 inches per
foot (2.5 mm per meter) of width.
Spring Balance: Oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion spring assembly designed for
proper balance of door to ensure that maximum effort to operate will not exceed 25 lbs (110 N).
Provide wheel for applying and adjusting spring torque.
Brackets: Fabricate from minimum 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) steel plate with permanently lubricated ball or
roller bearings at rotating support points to support counterbalance shaft assembly and form end closures.
1.
Finish:
a.
E.
Hood: 24 gauge galvanized steel with reinforced top and bottom edges. Provide minimum ¼ inch (6.35
mm) steel intermediate support brackets as required to prevent excessive sag.
1.
Finish:
a.
2.3
Counterbalance Shaft Assembly:
1.
D.
with dual process rinsing agents in preparation of a chemical bonding, (color as selected by
Architect) baked-on polyester base coat and a (color as selected by Architect) baked-on
OPERATION
A.
Manual FireGard Crank Hoist: Provide combination hand crank / controlled closing system operator
including removable hand crank and geared reduction unit. Integral to the unit is a locking mechanism to
hold the door at any position of travel during normal door operation mode and a governor to control
automatic closing speed.
1.
Automatic closure shall be activated by fusible link.
ROLLING FIRE DOORS
08 33 24 - 3
Genesee County CARD
2.
3.
B.
Doors shall maintain a closing speed not to exceed 12” (305 mm) per second during normal and
automatic closing.
Resetting of spring tension or mechanical dropouts shall not be required.
Automatic Closing and Speed Governor Mechanism:
1.
FireGard™ Crank System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Activation: Melting of fusible link.
Operation: Hand crank open/close or use of a wall mounted close control station. When
automatic closing is activated, integral brake and crank operator shall disengage. Integral
governor controls closing speed.
Average Closing Speed: Not more than 12 inches (305 mm) per second.
Reset Procedure: Resetting of spring tension or mechanical dropouts shall not be required.
Simply open door by use of crank operator after alarm is cleared.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates upon which work will be installed and verify conditions are in accordance with
approved shop drawings.
B.
Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates.
C.
Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
3.3
General: Install door and operating equipment with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers and
supports.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.4
Following completion of installation, including related work by others, lubricate, test, and adjust doors
for ease of operation, free from warp, twist, or distortion.
A.
3.5
Site Test: Test doors for normal operation and automatic closing. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction to witness test and sign Drop Test Form.
CLEANING
A.
Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Remove surplus materials and debris from the site.
ROLLING FIRE DOORS
08 33 24 - 4
Genesee County CARD
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Demonstrate proper operation, testing and reset procedures to Owner’s Representative.
B.
Instruct Owner’s Representative in maintenance procedures.
ROLLING FIRE DOORS
08 33 24 - 5
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 08 36 13 - SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of sectional overhead doors equipment:
1.
2.
3.
New operator with timer for existing overhead door.
New safety devices for existing overhead door.
New detector loops and transmitters for existing overhead door.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for electrical service and connections for powered
operators, and accessories.
Division 16 Section "Disconnect Switches and Circuit Breakers" for disconnect switches and circuit
breakers for powered operators.
DEFINITIONS
A. Operation Cycle: One complete cycle of a door begins with the door in the closed position. The door is
then moved to the open position and back to the closed position.
1.4
A. Structural Performance: Provide sectional overhead doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity
loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of door components:
1.
Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (960 Pa), acting inward and outward.
B. Operation-Cycle Requirements: Design sectional overhead door components and operator to operate for
not less than 100,000 cycles.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional overhead door and accessory. Include details of
construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. Provide
roughing-in diagrams, operating instructions, and maintenance information. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
Setting drawings, templates, and installation instructions for built-in or embedded anchor devices.
Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.
Motors: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting arrangements; size and location
of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding lug; and coatings.
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
08 36 13 - 1
Genesee County CARD
B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's
data sheets.
1.
Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring and between components provided by door
manufacturer and those provided by others.
C. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements.
D. Manufacturers' Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with requirements
specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. On request, submit evidence of manufacturing experience.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the
sectional overhead door manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this
Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing sectional overhead doors
similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain sectional overhead doors through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.
Obtain operators and controls from the sectional overhead door manufacturer.
D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of sectional overhead
door accessories and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with equal
performance and dimensional characteristics may be considered.
Refer to Division 1 Section
"Substitutions."
E. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
1.
2.
The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as
defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: The basis of design is Therma Seal (Standard) as manufactured by Raynor.
Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Liftmaster Professional Products
Raynor
Clopay Building Products.
Alternate suppliers/manufacturers must be pre-approved by Architect.
08 36 13 - 2
Genesee County CARD
2.2
ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door
manufacturer for door and operational life specified, complete with electric motor and factory-prewired
motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, floor
activation loops, transmitters, wall-mounted control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and
accessories required for proper operation.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Disconnect Device: Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for automatically engaging sprocketchain operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor, without
affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and operator so they are accessible from floor level.
Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is
engaged.
D. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without
affecting emergency auxiliary operator.
E. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70
Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V, AC or DC.
F. Door-Operator: Provide unit consisting of electric motor and the following:
1.
Basis of Design shall be Model GT5011L4 electric operator as manufactured by Liftmaster
Professional Products. Include four (4) remote transmitters..
G. Timer and Detector Loops: Provide seven-day timer equal to Model 26DGI16 as manufactured by
Liftmaster Professional Products along with two (2) detector loops #503267 24 volt (NEMA 1), two (2)
4’x8’ wire loops #50XNI1218. Cut loops into existing pavements and seal with joint sealant.
H. Control Station: Revise existing control section.
I.
Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop
door at fully opened and fully closed positions.
J.
Safety Device:
1.
Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in door
opening without contact between door and obstruction. Provide photoelectric sensors at doors within
washbay area. Refer to door schedule.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Self-Monitoring Type: Provide self-monitoring sensor designed to interface with door operator
control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device. When self-monitoring
feature is activated, door operates to close only with constant pressure on close button.
Device must be waterproof and capable of operation in wet conditions.
Unit shall be equal to Model 1RB-4X as manufactured by Remy.
Sensor shall be mounted between 18" to 24" above finished floor and without obstruction to
pedestrian traffic.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
08 36 13 - 3
Genesee County CARD
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine wall and overhead areas, including opening framing and blocking, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, clearances, and other conditions affecting
performance of Work of this Section.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A. General: Install specified equipment according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and
as specified.
B. Floor activation loops provided for overhead doors to be installed by electrical contractor.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion and
fitting weathertight for entire perimeter.
3.4
DEMONSTRATION
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup services and to
train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown,
troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance
Data."
Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.
08 36 13 - 4
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 08 71 00: FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Work included:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
C.
Division 1 – General Requirements
Division 6 – Rough Carpentry
Division 6– Finish Carpentry: Installation of Finish Hardware
Division 8 – Steel Doors and Frames
Division 8 – Wood Doors
Division 8 – Special Doors
Division 8 – All Glass Entrances and Storefronts
Division 8 – Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts
Division 16 – Smoke Detection Systems
Division 16 – Security Access Systems
Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere, unless specifically
listed in the hardware sets:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.2
Furnish hardware required to complete the work as shown on the drawings and as specified herein;
Furnish trim attachments and fastenings, specified or otherwise required, for proper and complete
installation.
Furnish all items of Finish Hardware specified, scheduled, shown or required herein except those items
specifically excluded from this section of the specification.
Cabinet Hardware.
Signs, except as noted.
Folding partitions, except cylinders where detailed.
Sliding aluminum doors
Chain link and wire mesh doors and gates
Access doors and panels
Overhead and Coiling doors
Revolving Doors
REFERENCES
A.
National Fire Protection Associations (NFPA):
1.
2.
NFPA 101-2009, "Life Safety Code"
NFPA 80-2007, "Installation of Fire Doors and Windows"
B.
Michigan Building Code -2009
C.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1.
2.
ANSI A 156 Standards series.
ICC/ANSI A117.1-2003 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
FINISH HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 1
Genesee County CARD
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
"Finish Hardware": Items required for swinging, sliding and folding doors, except special types of unique
and non-matching hardware specified under door and frame Sections of these Specifications.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Design requirements:
1.
Review of hardware requirements:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Performance requirements:
1.
Furnish finish hardware complying with the requirements of laws, codes, ordinances and guidelines of
governmental authorities having jurisdiction:
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.5
Thoroughly review finish hardware schedule, comparing it with the floor plan, door schedule,
and door details to verify hardware requirements, quantities, door swings, finishes, and sizes.
If an inconsistency or error in the proposed construction documents is suspected, the hardware
supplier is to bring it immediately to the attention of the Architect. If the quantity of items is
questioned, for bidding purposes, assume the higher quantity is required and price accordingly.
Architect’s review of Submittals is for design concept only, and does not relieve the Contractor
of the responsibility to furnish sufficient material and functions required for a complete and codeworthy installation. Determination of all quantities is the responsibility of the Contractor.
NFPA 101, “Life Safety Code”, 2009 edition
NFPA 80, “Installation of Fire Doors and Windows”, 2007 edition
Michigan Building Code -2009
ICC/ANSI A117.1-2003 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities
SUBMITTALS
A.
Hardware Schedule
1.
2.
3.
Submit number of Hardware Schedules as directed in Division 1.
Follow guidelines established in Door & Hardware Institute Handbook (DHI) Sequence and Format
for the Hardware Schedule unless noted otherwise.
Schedule will include the following:
a.
b.
Door Index including opening numbers and the assigned Finish Hardware set.
Preface sheet listing category only and manufacturer's names of items being furnished as follows:
CATEGORY
Hinges
Lock sets
Kick Plates
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
SPECIFIED
Manufacturer A
Manufacturer X
Open
SCHEDULED
Manufacturer B
Manufacturer X
Manufacturer Z
Hardware Locations: Refer to Article 3.1 B.2 Locations.
Opening Description: Single or pair, number, room locations, hand, active leaf, degree of swing,
size, door material, frame material, and UL listing.
Hardware Description: Quantity, category, product number, fasteners, and finish.
Headings that refer to the specified Hardware Set Numbers.
Scheduling Sequence shown in Hardware Sets.
Product data of each hardware item, and shop drawings where required, for special conditions
FINISH HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 2
Genesee County CARD
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
B.
2.
2.
1.6
Prior to submittal of the final hardware schedule and prior to final ordering of finish hardware, submit
one sample, if required, of each type of exposed hardware unit, finished as required and tagged with
full description for coordination with schedule.
Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units, which are acceptable and remain undamaged through
submittal, review and field comparison procedures, may, after final check of operation, be used in the
work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements.
Key Schedule:
1.
E.
Submit, in booklet form Manufacturers Catalog cut sheets of scheduled hardware.
Submit product data with hardware schedule.
Samples:
1.
D.
and specialty hardware.
Electrified Hardware system operation description.
"Vertical" scheduling format only. "Horizontal" schedules will be returned "Not Approved."
Typed Copy.
Double-Spacing.
8 1/2 x 11 inch sheets
U.S. Standard Finish symbols or BHMA Finish symbols.
Product Data:
1.
2.
C.
Submit detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final keying instructions have been
followed.
Submit as a separate schedule. –Not required for this project.
Submit to General Contractor/Construction Manager, the factory order acknowledgement numbers for the
various hardware items to be used on the project. The factory order acknowledgement numbers shall help
to facilitate and expedite any service that may be required on a particular hardware item. General
Contractor/Construction Manager shall keep these order acknowledgement numbers on file in the
construction trailer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary
crafts and who are completely familiar with the requirements and the methods needed for proper
performance of the work of this Section.
B.
Supplier qualifications:
1.
2.
C.
A recognized architectural finish hardware supplier.
Continuously in business of finish hardware supply for not less than 5 years.
Provide the service of a qualified Architectural Hardware Specialist to:
1.
Be available for consultation with the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner during progress of
construction, and:
a.
b.
c.
Inspect installation of all finish hardware items;
Make all minor adjustments required; and
Report to the Architect on completeness of the installation.
FINISH HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 3
Genesee County CARD
2.
The hardware consultant may be an employee of the supplier.
D.
Installer qualifications: Employ a competent hardware installer with at least five (5) years experience
installing commercial grade hardware similar to that proposed for the Work.
E.
Source limitations: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single
manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements.
F.
Mandatory pre-construction meeting:
1.
2.
Immediately following the Architect’s final approval of the submittals, convene a mandatory preinstallation meeting to be attended by the Architect, Contractor, Installer, Supplier, and the Architect’s
hardware consultant.
Proposed agenda to include review of:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
1.7
The Contract Documents;
Installation schedule;
Hardware Specifications;
Hardware locations and opening descriptions;
Special installation instructions;
Other items of pertinence to the Work.
A.
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620.
B.
Product identification:
1.
2.
Tag and mark each item separately in manufacturers unopened package, identifying it by product
number and architectural opening number, as listed in the approved Finish Hardware Schedule.
Include instructions, templates, and fasteners needed for installation.
C.
Deliver individually packaged hardware items on a vehicle operated by a direct employee of the Hardware
Supplier. Contractor shall immediately, and in the presence of the Hardware Supplier, inventory the
contents of the delivery.
D.
Hardware supplier: Furnish finish hardware items directly to the factory or mill for factory-installation,
where required.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Provide a secure, well lit, dry storage area for the sole purpose of storing finish hardware. Prohibit access
to all jobsite personnel, except those employed by the installing contractor.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer’s warranty:
1.
B.
Refer to Division 1 for warranty requirements.
During the warranty period, replace defective work, including labor, materials and other costs incidental to
the work. Replace work found to be defective as defined in the General Conditions.
FINISH HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 4
Genesee County CARD
C.
Failures due to defective materials or workmanship to include, but not to be limited to:
1.
2.
Failures in operation of any operating component;
Defects which contribute to unsightly appearance, potential safety hazard, or potential untimely failure
of the products furnished under this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each finish hardware
item is indicated in the Finish Hardware Schedule at the end of this Section.
B.
Product designations:
1.
C.
One or more manufacturers are listed for each hardware type required. Product listed is for basis of
design. Only products listed in part 2 product descriptions will be allowed for substitution.
ANSI/BHMA designations:
1.
Used to describe hardware items, or to define quality or function. Provide products complying with
these standards in addition to additional requirements of this Section.
D.
Hand of door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing (“hand”) of door leafs.
E.
Hardware: Use hardware manufactured to conform to published templates and, generally, prepared for
machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal
screws, except as specifically indicated.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Base metals:
1.
2.
B.
Manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness, but in no case of lesser
(commercially-recognized) quality than that specified for applicable hardware units by applicable
ANSI A156 series standard for each type hardware item and with ANSI A156.18 for finish
designations indicated.
Do not furnish "optional" materials for those indicated, except as otherwise specified.
Anti-Microbial Protection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Anti-microbial technology shall meet ASTM E2149 - 01 standard test method for determining the
antimicrobial activity of immobilized antimicrobial agents under dynamic contact conditions and JIS Z
2800 2000 test for antimicrobial activity and efficacy.
All hardware items designed to be touched including; however, not limited to: push-plates, pull-grips,
push-bars, panic devices, panic trim, lockset handles and trim shall be coated with quat-silane
antimicrobial PS5MD.
It is the distributors’ responsibility to secure all hardware items requiring anti-microbial coating and to
deliver these items to the certified anti-microbial technology processor for application of the quatsilane coating. Products shall be returned in their original packaging to the distributor for jobsite
delivery. Allow lead-time of coated hardware items, so not to delay project schedule.
Anti-microbial coating shall not discolor original finish and not contain heavy metals (lead, silver,
mercury, copper, etc.)
Do not furnish "optional" materials for those indicated. Approved anti-microbial technology providers
FINISH HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 5
Genesee County CARD
include: Sterile Source AM- sterilesource.com .
C.
Fasteners:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
2.3
Furnish Phillips flat-head screws with each hardware item, unless otherwise indicated.
Exposed screws: Match finish of hardware (even where noted to be "prepared for paint").
Use concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when door is closed, except where no
standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners.
Do not use thru-bolts where bolt head or nut on opposite face would be exposed.
Where adequate reinforcement is not feasible, thru-bolting would only be acceptable if through
sleeves, or if sex-screw fasteners are used.
Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued
adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of finish hardware.
MANUFACTURED UNITS, GENERAL
A.
Reference standards:
Item:
1. Butts and hinges:
2. Locks and lock trim:
3. Exit devices:
4. Door controls-closers:
5. Architectural door trim:
6. Template hinge dimensions:
7. Door controls-overhead holders:
8. Power Doors
9. Mortise locks and latches:
10. Release Devices:
11. Auxiliary hardware:
12. Continuous Hinge
B.
Hardware finishes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Comply with:
ANSI A156.1-2006
ANSI A156.2-2003
ANSI A156.3-2001,
ANSI A156.4-2000, Grade 1
ANSI A156.6-2005
ANSI A156.7-2003
ANSI A156.8-2005
ANSI A156.10-2005
ANSI A156.13-2005, Grade 1
ANSI A156.15-2006
ANSI A156.16-2002
ANSI A156.25-2008
Materials and Finishes Standard: Comply with ANSI A156.18 Finish designations used in schedules
as listed, therein.
Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door, unless otherwise indicated.
Match the color and texture of hardware items to manufacturer's standard finish for the latchset,
lockset, or push-pull unit.
Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating, composition, hardness, and other
qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than that specified or described
by referenced standards.
Anti-Microbial coating shall not discolor finish of the hardware.
Hardware for fire-rated openings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Comply with NFPA 80
Tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratory (UL), or Factory Mutual (FM) for type, size and use of
door, and complying with requirements of door and door frame label.
Provide UL or FM label on door indicating "Fire door to be equipped with fire-exit hardware".
Provide UL or FM label on exit device indicating "Fire Exit Hardware".
FINISH HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 6
Genesee County CARD
2.4
PRODUCTS
A.
Hinges:
1.
Butt Hinges:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Continuous Hinges:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
B.
ANSI A156.1 - for commercial quality.
Provide only template-produced units.
All butt hinges to be ball bearing-5 knuckle ball bearing type.
Hinges at exterior doors shall be of non-ferrous material.
Hinges at out-swing corridor doors: Non-removable (NRP)
Size hinges as specified; otherwise according to hinge manufacturer’s recommendation for door
size and weight.
Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door.
Acceptable products: PBB, equal by Stanley & Hager.
Continuous shall be Pin & Barrel Stainless steel hinges with 600lb rating.
ANSI/BHMA A156.26 -Grade 1.
Fire-rating: "WHI-listed" or "UL-listed” as necessary
Placement of fire label will be on top of the door at cont. hinge locations.
Fasteners: As required by door and frame condition, and as recommended by hinge manufacturer
furnish ASF adjustable screws as specified.
Furnish all continuous hinges with FBRG Flange Bearing option.
Furnish CTW8 power transfers where specified.
Undersize doors according to hinge clearance requirements.
Acceptable manufacturer’s: Larson & Shaw, IDC, Markar
Lock Cylinders and Keying:
1.
General:
a.
2.
Cylinders:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Type: Mortise or rim-type as required by function of locking device.
Provide screw on cams or tail piece as required.
Construct lock cylinder parts from brass/bronze, stainless steel or nickel silver.
Provide solid machined cylinder rings with tension spring to resist wrenching of cylinder.
Length, finish and size as required.
Provide cylinder(s) as required by function for each locking device.
System:
a.
b.
4.
Supplier shall meet with the owner and provide a completed key schedule. The key schedule
shall include keysets, marks and key schedule corresponding to each opening.
Provide cylinders, cores and keys, combinated to owners’ directions.
Provide a LFIC cylinder and LFIC core for each locking device as required.
Keying:
a.
b.
Deliver keys and final cores to the hardware installation Contractor for final installation, when
directed by the Owner.
Comply with Owner's instructions for master keying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide
individual change key for each lock which is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of
FINISH HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 7
Genesee County CARD
c.
d.
related locks.
Key material: Nickel silver
Key quantity:
(1)
(2)
(3)
C.
Cylindrical Locks:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Comply with ANSI A156.2 –Series 4000, Grade 1 criteria for cylindrical locks
Mechanical functions indicated in the hardware sets.
Cylindrical chassis shall be investment cast stainless steel.
Provide appropriate fasteners for lock and strike.
Trim: 15 lever-type equal to Marshall Best Security.
Trim shall be coated with Sterile Source AM Anti-Microbial compound.
Acceptable products: M Best MB1, Schlage ND, Corbin CL3300
Exit devices:
1.
General:
a.
b.
Comply with ANSI A156.3, Grade 1, Types 1, 4, and 28 criteria for products supplied.
At fire doors:
(1)
(2)
2.
E.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Provide UL or FM label on exit device indicating "Fire Exit Hardware", where
appropriate.
Mount exit device using sex-bolts on labeled wood doors.
Type: Flat, push-bar type –comprised completely of stainless steel.
Provide Electrified functions and controllers as specified in sets.
Provide cylinder-dogging (on non-rated devices) & dead-locking latch bolts.
The device & trim shall be coated with SterileSource AM Anti-Microbial compound.
Function indicated in the hardware sets.
Trim: Extra-heavy-duty lever matching lockset style.
Acceptable products: SDCS6000 series / Von Duprin 99 series
Electric Peripherals:
1.
General:
a.
b.
F.
Three (3) change keys for each lock.
Three (3) master keys for each master system.
Two (2) core removal keys.
Locksets:
1.
D.
Provide Labeled UL products only.
Filtered and Regulated Class 2 output.
2.
3.
Type: Power and Amp load as required.
Function:
4.
a.
Timer ELR Power Supply RPIPT1014-2
b. 600 series power supplies with voltage reulator
c.
RPI -LEM-1DLS
Acceptable products: RPI, SDC, Camden
Door closers:
FINISH HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 8
Genesee County CARD
1.
General:
a.
b.
2.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Not included under general door and hardware
package; furnished under separate contract.
General:
a.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
All automatic doors shall comply with ANSI 156.10 and be UL listed.
All automatic doors shall be high energy type.
Furnish all necessary peripherals for each opening for the application as scheduled. Provide Aux.
power supply as required for peripherals.
Provide Fire Alarm contacts at all rated openings.
Automatic door equipment must be installed by an AAADM installer. AAADM certification
must be supplied to owner upon completion.
Furnish with Parallax System #3 and Ultraview motion sensors.
Acceptable Swinging products: Besam SM900
Overhead stops:
1.
2.
General: ANSI A156.8 - 1982 Grade 1 criteria.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
3.
I.
International 44CI Series, LCN 4000 series, Sargent 281
Swinging Operated Doors:
1.
H.
Full rack-and-pinion type
Cast Iron Body.
Hydraulic fluid: Non-gumming and non-freezing.
Closer body: Non-handed, multi-size spring power.
With three non-critical V valves and hex key adjustment to independently regulate sweep latch
speed and backcheck.
Provide mounting brackets necessary to clear sound seals and weatherstrip.
Enclose in a full, molded cover.
Provide drop plates or special brackets for proper mounting.
Pressure Relief Valves will NOT be accepted on Door Closers.
Provide Barrier Free power setting as required by ANSI A117.1
Acceptable products:
a.
G.
ANSI A156.4 - 1986 Grade 1 criteria.
All closers shall be the products of one manufacturer.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Surface-, or concealed-mounted overhead stops where scheduled.
Track and arm: High-quality extruded brass or bronze and plated or polished to the finish
specified.
Provide thru-bolts when used on fire-rated or hollow core wood doors.
Acceptable products: RPI, International and Glynn Johnson
Stops and Holder devices:
1.
General:
a.
b.
Provide stops where scheduled, wall or floor, as opening conditions dictate, utilizing wall stops
FINISH HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 9
Genesee County CARD
wherever possible.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
3.
J.
Wall stops: Cast brass, bronze or stainless steel. Concave wall stop to have stainless steel washer
imbedded in rubber stop.
Floor stops: Cast Stainless, brass or bronze, and plated as required.
Make selection of floor stop height based upon floor conditions and door undercut.
Acceptable products: Trimco, IDC, Glynn Johnson
Kick plates, mop plates and armor plates:
1.
2.
General: ANSI A156.16 - 1989 criteria.
Description:
a.
b.
Minimum .050" thick, B4E Bevel 4 edges.
Dimensions:
(1)
(2)
(3)
3.
Mounting:
a.
b.
c.
4.
K.
Install kick plates and armor plates flush to bottom edge of door.
Notch armor plates for lock or exit device trim or active case.
When armor plate is used on doors with touch bar type exit devices, determine height of plate by
measuring from bottom of door to 1" below bottom of touch bar, and notch for active case.
Acceptable manufacturers: Hiawatha, Trimco and Burns
Push / Pull bars & Grips:
1.
General:
a.
2.
3.
Offset pull bar 1" in diameter x 12” center to center.
Straight push bar 1" in diameter x length required by door width.
Trim shall be coated with SterileSource AM Anti-Microbial compound.
Mounting:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
L.
Width: 1-1/2" less than door width to which they are to be applied.
Kick plate height: 10"
Armor plates: 34" for non-labeled doors, unless scheduled otherwise.
Mount push-pull bars back to back with thru-bolts and N thru flow mount at free ends.
Mount pull bars with thru-bolts and N thru flow mount at free ends.
Mount offset pulls so as to avoid conflict with vertical rod, when used in conjunction with
vertical rod exit devices.
Acceptable products: Trimco, Hiawatha, Burns
Push Plates & Pull Plates:
1.
General:
FINISH HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 10
Genesee County CARD
a.
2.
M.
Acceptable Manufacture: Trimco, Hiawatha, Burns
General:
a.
2.
3.
Panic latch Guard PG8000
Vertical Rod Cover PG-ROD.630 x 18"
Panic Rail Guard PG8125VV-4
Corner Roller Z400 (DL34105) DFG-36
Mounting:
a.
4.
Provide protection devices as specified.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Mount per manufactures template and recommendations.
Acceptable Manufacture: Trimco, Hiawatha, Burns
Thresholds:
1.
General:
a.
b.
2.
3.
ANSI A156.21 - 1989, Grade 1 criteria.
Comply with A.D.A. requirements, unless otherwise scheduled.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
O.
Mount Pull Plate prior to Push Plate –Pull fasteners shall be concealed under Push Plate.
Protection Devices:
1.
N.
Pull Plate: Pull Diameter: 1", CTC: 8", Plate: 4” x 16” x .050
Push Plate 6” x 16” x .050” or Plate: 4” x 16” x .050 as specified.
Base Metal: Solid Stainless Steel
Trim shall be coated with SterileSource AM Anti-Microbial compound.
Mounting:
a.
4.
ANSI A156.6 Grade 1 criteria.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Flat profile
Installation locations are scheduled.
Provide templates for thresholds to related door suppliers to coordinate proper undercut.
Acceptable products: Reese, Durable Products, KN Crowder
Door Seal and Inside Astragals:
1.
General:
a.
FINISH HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 11
Genesee County CARD
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
b.
c.
P.
Apply related hardware (closer, foot bracket, strike, etc.) on top of hardware compatible type
weatherstrip.
Do not notch or splice weather strip.
Adjust related template hardware locations, as required.
Sweeps and strips:
1.
General:
a.
2.
3.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
Q.
Flat profile.
Dimensions: Appropriate to door opening size.
Provide templates for thresholds to related door suppliers to coordinate proper undercut.
Mounting:
a.
4.
Flat profile.
Dimensions: Appropriate to door opening size.
Key Control:
1. Key Cabinet
a.
b.
c.
d.
Provide a Complete System; Including all accessories -key gathering envelopes, hook labels,
permanent key tags, temporary key tags, signature receipt forms, visible index and instruction
book. Provide with capacity for 150 percent of the number of locks required for the project.
Provide complete cross-index system set up by hardware supplier. Place keys on markers and
hooks in the cabinet as determined by the final key schedule. Provide hinged panel type cabinet
for wall mounting. Provide one each wall mounted key cabinet.
Provide Tel Kee RWC-Series with complete system.
Supplier shall include the cost of this service in their proposal.
R. Impact Door:
1.
Double Acting Impact Doors
a.
Provide Double Acting Impact Door:
Eliason Door System RMR-1500 (paired opening)
Door Body: Rotationally molded, monolithic door panel with CFC-Free foamcore and full
perimeter gaskets. 1.5" total door thickness. Polyethylene door skin is .188" thick.
Finish : Chosen by architect from full selection of colors.
Window: 18" X 18" High Impact Polycarbonate
Hinge: Easy Swing Hinge System
Easy Spring Bumper : 18" high
Jamb Guard : 3" X 9:
FINISH HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 12
Genesee County CARD
Provide all necessary hanging devices and hardware for a complete operating system.
2.
2.5
Acceptable products: Eliason Door System RMR-1500
OTHER MATERIALS
A.
2.6
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as
selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
HARDWARE FINISHES
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7
B.
Provide the following hardware finishes scheduled:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest extent possible
and except as otherwise indicated.
Reduce differences in color and textures as much as commercially possible where the base metal or
metal forming process is different for individual units of hardware exposed at the same door or
opening.
In general, match items to the manufacturer's standard finish for the latch and lock set (or push/pull
units if no latch/lock sets) for color and texture.
Provide finishes matching those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the Architect's
sample.
Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness and
other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than that specified for the
applicable units of hardware by referenced standards.
Finish designations used in schedules and elsewhere listed in ANSI A156.18 "Materials and Finishes
Standard", including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for
their products.
All hardware items designed to be touched including; however, not limited to: push-plates, pull-grips,
push-bars, panic devices, panic trim, lockset handles and trim shall be coated with quat-silane
antimicrobial PS5MD. Approved anti-microbial technology providers include: Sterile Source AMsterilesource.com.
26D
32D
AL
Black
Satin Chromium Plated
Satin Stainless Steel
Aluminum Painted
Black Painted
Base material: Manufacturer’s standard high-carbon steel, brass, aluminum or bronze.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SURFACE CONDITIONS
A.
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions
detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
are corrected.
FINISH HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 13
Genesee County CARD
3.2
COORDINATION
A.
3.3
Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades
for interface with the work of this Section.
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
Install each item in its proper location firmly anchored into position, level and plumb, and in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Handing, hardware heights, locations, and degree of opening swing are indicated in the Drawings and
Finish Hardware Schedule.
Mount finish hardware units:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
5.
6.
B.
At recommended heights and locations as shown in approved finish hardware schedule,
complying with requirements of the A.D.A., and pertinent provisions of the Building Code.
To function at proper degree of opening of doors as indicated on approved finish hardware
schedule.
By manufacturer's template.
Prior to final finishing of the door. Remove hardware to allow finishing of door, and
permanently reinstall hardware upon completion of finishing operation.
Reinforce, where necessary, the substrate to assure proper attachment.
Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners.
Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
Installing closers:
1.
2.
Mount closers per manufacturer's template, and secure the Architect’s approval of the closer
installation.
The Contractor will be required to REPLACE doors onto which closers are improperly mounted at
no additional cost to the Owner. Repair or patching of such doors will not be acceptable.
C.
Installing Stops: Install all wall stops into reinforced wall or stud. Install floor stops out of the way foot
traffic at a height high enough to accommodate any ramp or uneven floor condition.
D.
E.
Installing thresholds at exterior doors: Set in full bed of butyl-rubber, or polyisobutylene mastic sealant.
Installing weatherstrip: Install weatherstrip prior to installing closers, OH Stops or panic hardware.
Template closers and panic devices from weatherstrip and install all closer / OH Stop shoe brackets and
panic device strikes onto the weatherstrip without notching or cutting the weatherstrip.
F.
Installing Sweeps: Install all sweeps on exterior side of opening.
G.
Installing Astragals: Install all adjustable astragals on the edge of the door in machined mortise.
3.4
A.
Inspection of final hardware installation: The Contractor, hardware suppliers, and Architectural Hardware
Consultant (AHC) shall thoroughly check the quality of the installation and the functionality of each unit of
finish hardware at all openings in the Work. The Hardware Supplier shall forward a detailed written report
of all operational or installation deficiencies to the Architect and Contractor.
FINISH HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 14
Genesee County CARD
3.5
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A.
B.
3.6.1
Check and adjust each item of hardware and each door upon completion of final installation. Verify proper
function, and replace units which cannot be made to operate freely and smoothly, as intended for the
application.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE
HARDWARE SET 1
2 ea
Power Transfer Continuous Hinge LS300 x CTW8
32D
1 ea
Panic Device S6201F x E
32D
1 ea
32D
1 ea
Timer ELR Power Supply RPIPT1014-2
---1 ea
Riser Drawings RPIGCC0911-1
---1 ea
LFIC Rim Cylinder x IC comb core (type as required) 26D
2 ea
Pull 1191-4 x N Mounting
32D
1 ea.
*Dual Auto Opt. SM900 full surface Mounted x FA
AL
1 set
*System #3 Full Parallax
---1 set
*Ultraview motion sensors
---* Auto operator and controls furnished under separate contract
2 ea.
Panic latch Guard PG8000
32D
2 ea.
Vertical Rod Cover PG-ROD.630 x 18"
32D
2 ea.
Panic Rail Guard PG8125VV-4
32D
2 ea.
32D
2 ea.
Armorplate K0050 34 x 1 ½” LDW B4E
32D
1 ea.
Threshold S205A (cope as required)
AL
2 ea.
Sweep 353A –Mount pull side
AL
1 set
Weatherstrip 853A (mount prior to hdwe)
AL
1 set
Outside Astragal 103C x 103C
AL
Note:
Fire alarm command center termination required.
Coordinate Timer ELR Power Supply with Auto Operator.
HARDWARE SET 2
2 ea
Continuous Hinge LS300
2 ea
Pull 1191-4 x Counter sunk R5 Mounting
2 ea
Push Plates 1001-11 (mount over R5 mount)
1 ea.
*Dual Auto Opt. SM900 full surface Mounted
1 set
*System #3 Full Parallax
1 set
*Ultraview motion sensors
* Auto operator and controls furnished under separate contract
2 ea.
2 ea.
Armorplate K0050 34 x 1 ½” LDW B4E
1 ea.
Threshold S205A (cope as required)
2 ea.
1 set
Weatherstrip 853A (mount prior to hdwe)
1 set
Outside Astragal 103C x 103C
FINISH HARDWARE
32D
32D
32D
AL
------32D
32D
AL
AL
AL
AL
08 71 00 - 15
Genesee County CARD
HARDWARE SET 3
Double Acting Impact Pair of Doors:
Eliason Door System RMR-1500 (paired opening)
Door Body: Rotationally molded, monolithic door panel with CFC-Free foam core and full perimeter gaskets. 1.5"
total door thickness. Polyethylene door skin is .188" thick.
Finish : Chosen by architect from full selection of colors.
Window: 18" X 18" High Impact Polycarbonate
Hinge: Easy Swing Hinge System
Easy Spring Bumper : 18" high
Jamb Guard : 3" X 9:
Provide all necessary hanging devices and hardware for a complete operating system.
HARDWARE SET 4
3 ea.
1 ea.
1 ea.
Hinges BB81 ½ x 4 ½
Office Lockset MB1L-01 15
Wall Stop 1270 WV
x IC comb core
26D
26D
26D
Hinges BB81 ½ x 4 ½ NRP
Storeroom Lockset MB1L-05 15 x IC comb core
Closer 44CI PA x 44-2023 stop (push side mount)
Kickplate K0050 10 x 1 ½” LDW B4E
26D
26D
AL
32D
HARDWARE SET 5
3
1
1
1
ea.
ea.
ea
ea.
HARDWARE SET 6
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea.
1 ea.
1 ea.
1 ea.
1 set
Note:
32D
Panic Device S6103P x E
32D
ELR Power Supply 632RF x 12VR
---Riser Drawings RPIGCC0911-2
---LFIC Rim Cylinder x IC comb core (type as required) 26D
Pull 1191-4 x N mount
32D
Closer 44CI PA (push side mount)
AL
Overhead Stop 1023SL
32D
Kickplate K0050 10” x 1 ½” LDW B4E
32D
Threshold S205A (notch & cope as required)
AL
AL
Weatherstrip 854C (mount prior to strike & closer)
AL
Access Control reader, controller and peripherals provided by owner.
HARDWARE SET 7
3
1
1
1
ea.
ea.
ea
ea.
Hinges BB81 ½ x 4 ½ NRP
x IC comb core
Closer 44CI PA x 44-2023 stop (push side mount)
FINISH HARDWARE
26D
26D
AL
32D
08 71 00 - 16
Genesee County CARD
HARDWARE SET 8
3
1
1
1
1
1
ea.
ea.
ea
ea
ea.
ea.
Privacy Latch MB1A-20 15
Closer 44CI RA (pull side mount)
Coat Hook 3071
Wall Stop 1270WV
26D
26D
AL
26D
26D
32D
HARDWARE SET 9
3
1
1
1
1
ea.
ea.
ea
ea.
ea.
x IC comb core
Wall Stop 1270WV
26D
26D
AL
26D
32D
HARDWARE SET 10
1
1
2
1
1
1
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea.
ea.
Panic Device x Classroom Trim S6108P CD x EK08
LFIC Mort. Cylinder x IC comb core (type as required)
Wall Stop 1298
32D
32D
26D
AL
26D
32D
HARDWARE SET 11
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
1 set
Note:
32D
32D
---Riser Drawings RPIGCC0911-3
---LFIC Rim Cylinder x IC comb core (type as required) 26D
32D
AL
32D
32D
AL
AL
AL
HARDWARE SET 12
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
Intercom System with Release RPI -LEM-1DLS
Riser Drawings RPIGCC0911-3
LFIC Rim Cylinder x IC comb core (type as required)
FINISH HARDWARE
32D
32D
---------26D
32D
08 71 00 - 17
Genesee County CARD
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
1 set
Note:
AL
32D
32D
AL
AL
AL
Locate Intercom Release Station at Office 113
HARDWARE SET 13
3
1
1
1
1
1
ea.
ea.
ea
ea
ea.
ea.
Privacy Latch MB1A-20 15
Coat Hook 3071
Wall Stop 1270WV
26D
26D
AL
26D
26D
32D
HARDWARE SET 14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea.
ea.
ea.
ea.
set
Panic Device S6103P CD
LFIC Rim Cylinder x IC comb core (type as required)
LFIC Mort. Cylinder x IC comb core (type as required)
32D
32D
26D
26D
32D
AL
32D
32D
AL
AL
AL
HARDWARE SET 15
3 ea.
1 ea.
1 ea.
1 ea.
1 ea.
1 ea.
Note:
Pull Plate 1017-3B (mount prior to push plate)
Push Plate 1001-9 (mount over pull plate fasteners)
Wall stop 1298
Mount Pull Plate prior to Push Plate to conceal fasteners
26D
32D
32D
AL
32D
32D
FINISH HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 18
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 08 71 13 – AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This section includes the following types of automatic entrance doors:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Full energy power door operators for swinging doors.
Division 7 Sections for caulking to the extent not specified in this section.
Division 8 Section “Steel Doors and Frames”.
Division 8 Section “Door Hardware” for hardware to the extent not specified in this Section.
Division 26 and 28 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for automatic
entrance door operators and access control devices.
REFERENCES
A.
References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA).
1.
2.
C.
ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
Michigan Building Code 2009
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
ANSI/BHMA A156.10 American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors.
ANSI/BHMA A156.19 Standards for Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
1.
2.
3.
UL Listed R-9469 Fire Door Operator with Automatic Closer.
UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems.
UL991 Listed - Tests for Safety-Related Controls Employing Solid-State Device.
D.
American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM).
E.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
1.
2.
F.
ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles and Tubes.
ASTM B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Allow Sheet and Plate.
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAMM).
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
08 71 13 - 1
Genesee County CARD
1.
1.4
Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural Metal Products.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Double Egress Doors: A pair of doors that simultaneously swing with the two doors moving in opposite
directions with no mullion between them.
B.
Double Swing Doors: A pair of doors that swing with the two doors moving in opposite directions with a
mullion between them; each door functioning as a single swing door.
C.
Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door operator to open the
door.
1.
Knowing act:
Consciously initiating the powered opening of a low energy door using
acceptable methods including wall mounted switches such as push plates and controlled access
devices such as keypads, card readers and key switches.
D.
Safety Device: A device that detects the presence of an object or person within a zone where injury could
occur and provides a signal to stop the movement of the door.
E.
AAADM: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers.
1.5
A.
General: Provide automatic door operators that have been designed and fabricated to comply with
specified performance requirements, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer’s corresponding standard
systems.
B.
Automatic door equipment accommodates medium to heavy pedestrian traffic and have the following
minimum performance characteristics:
1.
2.
Up to 350 pound (159 kg) weight of doors for surface mounted operator.
Up to 300 pound (136 kg) weight of doors for concealed mounted operator.
C.
Operator capable of operating within temperature ranges of -20°F (-29°C) and 160°F (71°C).
D.
Opening Force requirements for Egress Doors: In the event of power failure to the operator, swinging
automatic entrance doors shall open with a manual force, not to exceed 30lbf (133N) applied at 1” (25
mm) from the latch edge of the door.
E.
Break Away Device: Swinging automatic entrances shall require no more than 50 lbf (222 N) applied 1”
(25 mm) from the latch edge of the door. When the door(s) is opened in the breakout mode, powered
operated components excluding spring power shall not operate the doors.
F.
Closing Time:
1.
2.
1.6
Doors shall be field adjustable to close from 90 degrees to 10 degrees in 2 seconds or longer as
applicable per ANSI/BHMA A156.10 standards.
Doors shall be field adjusted to close from 10 degrees to fully closed in not less than 1.5 seconds.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Comply with Division 01 - Submittal Procedures.
08 71 13 - 2
Genesee County CARD
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, fabrication, operational descriptions and finishes.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s shop drawings, including elevations, sections and details,
indicating dimensions, materials, operator, motion/presence sensor control device, anchors, hardware,
finish, options and accessories.
1.
2.
3.
Indicate required clearances, and location and size of each field connection.
Indicate locations and elevations of entrances showing activation and safety devices.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and activation / safety device wiring.
D.
Samples: Submit manufacturer’s samples of aluminum finish.
E.
Manufacturers Field Reports: Submit manufacturer’s field reports from AAADM certified technician of
inspection and approval of doors for compliance with ANSI/BHMA A156.10 after completion of
installation.
F.
Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for
each item comprising the complete door opening installation in quantity as required in Division 01,
Closeout Submittals.
G.
Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance agreements specified in this Section.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 10 years of documented
experience in manufacturing of doors and equipment of similar to that indicated for this Project and that
have a proven record of successful in-service performance.
1.
A manufacturer with company certificate issued by AAADM.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Installers, trained by the primary product manufacturers, with a minimum 5
years documented experience installing and maintenance of units similar in material, design, and extent
to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful
in-service performance.
C.
Certified Inspector Qualifications: Certified by AAADM.
D.
Source Limitations for Automatic Operators: Obtain each type of door operator and sensor components
specified in this Section from a single source, same manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Certifications: Operators shall be certified by the manufacturer to meet performance design criteria in
accordance with the following standards.
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
ANSI/BHMA A156.10 American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems.
UL Listed R-9469 Fire Door Operator with Automatic Closer.
Emergency Exit door requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for
automatic entrance doors serving as a required means of egress.
08 71 13 - 3
Genesee County CARD
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate door operators with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand,
function and finish. Coordinate hardware for automatic entrances with hardware required for rest of the
project.
B.
Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of power door operators with
connections to power supplies and access control system as applicable.
1.9
WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this
Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor
under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
Automatic Door Operators shall be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1)
year from the date of substantial completion.
C.
During the warranty period a factory-trained technician shall perform service and affect repairs. A safety
inspection shall be performed after each adjustment or repair and a completed inspection form shall be
submitted to the Owner.
D.
During the warranty period all warranty work, including but not limited to emergency service, shall be
performed during normal business hours.
E.
Manufacturer shall have in place a dispatch procedure that shall be available 24 hours a Day, 7 Days a
week for emergency call back service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURER
A.
Manufacturer: Besam Entrance Solutions, 1900 Airport Road, Monroe, North Carolina 28110. Toll Free
(877) SPEC-123. Phone (704) 290-5520 Fax (704 ) 290- 5555 Website www.besam-usa.com contact:
[email protected].
B.
Manufacturer: Stanley Access Technologies, LLC, 65 Scott Swamp Road, Farmington, CT 06032,
Phone: (800) 7 Access Magic Force Operator.
2.2
AUTOMATIC SWING DOOR OPERATOR
A.
Model: Besam Swingmaster 900 full energy automatic door operator (Basis of Design). Alternate
manufacturers must submit to Architect for approval. Refer to Section 00 43 25 “Substitutions Prior to
Award of Contract”.
1.
Configuration: Operator to control single swinging doors and pairs of swinging doors as indicated
on the drawings and specified below:
a.
b.
Traffic Pattern: One Way
Pairs of Doors: Simultaneous swing
08 71 13 - 4
Genesee County CARD
2.
Automatic Operator: Electro-mechanical, non-handed operator, powered by 24 volt, 1/4 hp motor.
Spring shall be adjustable to compensate for different manual push forces required on varying
door widths.
a.
Side Access Operator Housing: Operator is contained in a 6 inch (152 mm) x 6 inch (152
mm) side access, extruded aluminum housing.
1)
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Connecting Hardware: Surface mounted operators to have a cast steel arm from the
operator, secured to the top face of the swing door.
UL Listed R-9469 Fire Door Operator with Automatic Closer (surface mounted operator).
Operator can be field adjusted to comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.19 American National
Standard for Power Assist and Low Energy Operated Doors. Activation devices may also
need to be switched to knowing-act activation devices for compliance with ANSI/BHMA
A156.19.
Electrical Characteristics: Maximum power consumption is 4 amps at 120 VAC, built-in
thermal overload protection.
Opening Cycle: The adjustable speed operator mechanically powers the drive shaft which
maintains constant engagement throughout the opening cycle. Operator shall allow manual
door operation with operational forces of 15 lbf maximum to fully open the door applied at
1” (25 mm) from the latch edge of the door.
Hold Open: The operator shall stop and hold the door open at the selected door opening
angle for an adjustable period of time.
Closing Cycle: Closing shall be provided by means of spring. Closing forces regulated by
utilizing the motor and gear assembly as a dynamic brake.
Obstruction Control: The operator will stop and reverse the door movement.
Stack Pressure Compensation: Operator is designed to counteract most wind and/or interior
stack pressures without an additional power assist mechanism.
Electronic Controls: Solid state integrated circuit controls the operation and switching of
the swing power operator. The electronic control provides low voltage power supply for all
means of actuation. The controls include time delay (1 to 60 seconds) for normal cycle.
Operator Interface:
a.
b.
2.3
Extended Width, full width of door frame.
Door Operation:
a.
4.
Safety Sensor Integration for overhead presence safety device and door mounted
reactivation safety sensors.
Electric Strike Integration for electrified door hardware.
ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES
A.
General: Provide activation and safety devices in accordance with ANSI/BHMA standards, for condition
of exposure and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of
occupancy indicated. Coordinate activation and safety devices with door operation and door operator
mechanisms.
B.
Automatic Activation:
1.
Motion Sensors: Shall be the a self-contained, K-band-frequency, microwave-scanner unit;
achieving both a narrow or wide sensing pattern, adjustable to provide detection field sizes and
functions required by ANSI/BHMA A156.10.
08 71 13 - 5
Genesee County CARD
a.
C.
Motion Sensors to offer three motion detection actions; bi-directional, uni-directional, and
uni-MTF detection.
Safety Devices:
1.
Door Mounted Presence Detector: Shall be the Besam door mounted (mounted at top of each
door), infrared presence safety device; adjustable to provide detection field sizes and functions
required by ANSI/BHMA A156.10. Unit to provide detection during the travel of the door.
a.
b.
2.
The door mounted presence detector shall be mounted on both the swing side and the
approach side of the door (2 sensors per leaf), providing detection on both the pull side and
the push side.
Upon detection the sensor shall provide a signal to stop or reverse the door action.
Presence Detector: Shall be the Besam header mounted, overhead infrared presence safety device
utilizing infrared technology for detection; adjustable to provide detection field sizes and functions
required by ANSI/BHMA A156.10. Unit to provide the following two independently adjustable
patterns of detection:
a.
b.
c.
2.4
The door closed position covering the area on the swing side of the door.
The door open position including an area of detection that reaches through the threshold
toward the non-swing side of the door.
The unit is not active during the door closing cycle.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Guide Rails: Anodized aluminum fabricated from bars, minimum 30 inches (762 mm) high, and finished
to match doors unless otherwise indicated; positioned and projecting from face of door jamb for distance
as indicated, but not less than that required by ANSI/BHMA A156.10 for type of door and direction of
travel; with filler panel.
B.
Guide Rails: To be as detailed (see architectural drawings).
2.5
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.6
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Automatic Operator Enclosure:
1.
Anodized Finish:
a.
B.
Clear, AA- M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm.
Guide Rails:
1.
Anodized Finish:
a.
Clear, AA- M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm.
08 71 13 - 6
Genesee County CARD
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine roughing-in for electrical source power to verify actual locations of wiring connections.
C.
Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Do not install damaged components. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
Rigidly secure non-movement joints.
B.
Operators: Install automatic operators plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades
without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place.
1.
2.
Install surface mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets and guides level and true to location
with anchorage for permanent support.
C.
Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system as specified in Division
26 Sections.
D.
Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in division 7 Section “Joint Sealants” to seal between the
operator housing and the adjacent wall surface.
E.
Signage: Apply signage on both sides of each door and sidelite as required by ANSI/BHMA A156.10
and manufacturers installation instructions.
3.3
A.
Manufacturers Field Services:
1.
2.
3.4
Manufacturer’s representative shall provide technical assistance and guidance for installation of
doors.
Before placing doors into operation, AAADM certified technician shall inspect and approve doors
for compliance with ANSI/BHMA A156.10. Certified technician shall be approved by
manufacturer.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.5
Adjust door operators, controls and hardware for smooth and safe operation and for weather tight closure.
Adjust doors in compliance with ANSI/BHMA A156.10.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by automatic operator installation.
B.
Clean metal surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess sealants, compounds, dirt and other
substances. Repair damages; finish to match original finish.
08 71 13 - 7
Genesee County CARD
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain safe operation of the door.
08 71 13 - 8
SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section included glazing and related components.
B.
1.
1.3
Division 8 Section “Steel Doors and Frames” for glazing requirements in steel doors and frames.
GLAZING SCHEDULE
A.
Typical Glazing:
1.
2.
B.
1.4
Interior Fixed glass: Black glazing tape.
Interior Glazed Doors: Black glazing tape.
Safety glass where required: Meet or exceed applicable current requirements of ANSI Z97.: “Safety
Glazing”.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Samples:
1.
2.
Each type and thickness of glass; three (3) samples, 12 inches square. Framed assembly, complete
with backing and edge for framed mirrors; one (1) unit not less than 12 inches square.
Gaskets and Tapes; Three (3) samples, 6 inches long; each type and shape; molded corners for
each type of gasket.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Glass:
1.
2.
3.
4.
All Glass: Conform to Fed. Spec. DD-G451D, type and thickness as indicted.
Sheet Glass: Clear sheet, thickness as indicated on drawings; Type I, Class I Quality q4.
Clear Transparent Float and Plate: Type I, Class I, Quality q3:
Tempered Glass conform to Fed. Spec.DD-G-1403B: Type I, Class I or Quality q3.
a.
GLAZING
Tolerance: Warpage maximum 1/16 inch per foot but not exceeding 1/8 inch total.
08 80 00 - 1
b.
c.
d.
B.
Provide at locations where required by Building Code.
All Safety Glass required by Code: Tempered unless laminated.
Tempering: Horizontal tempering to avoid tong marks for all lights less than 49 inches
wide or 120 inches high.
Schedule of Glass Types:
GL-1: Clear 1/4” transparent tempered glass.
GL-2: Clear 1/4” transparent tempered firelight HT glass.
2.2
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Glazing Gaskets: Type and cross section indicated on the drawings, meeting the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Elastomer Content of Gasket Compound: 100% silicone rubber, black and non-staining.
Physical Properties - Glazing Gaskets: Meet performance requirements of ASTM C 542.
Detail: Manufacturer’s standard detail as indicated and as required to provide specified
performance.
Type: Closed cell or solid; durometer as required by glazing design.
B.
Sealant for Glazing: Meet requirements for materials and workmanship specified under “Joint Sealant”
Section of Division 7.
C.
Glazing Tape: Tremco #440; Shore A hardness of 10 at installation and not exceeding 20 upon aging.
D.
Setting Blocks: neoprene or EPDM 70 to 90 Shore A Hardness as recommended by manufacturer;
certified non-staining and compatible with sealant. Use EPDM for units set with silicone glazing sealant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GLAZING
A.
Cutting and Fitting: Cut all glass and fit with the minimum edge clearance and bite on glass
recommended by the glass manufacturer and FGMA and within an allowable tolerance of 1/32 inch per
1/8 inch of thickness.
B.
Cut all tempered glass at the factory exactly to template.
1.
C.
Setting Blocks: As recommended by glass manufacturer, non-staining, compatible with sealant.
Workmanship:
1.
2.
3.
Install glass in accordance with recommendations outlined in “Glazing Manual” and “Glazing
Sealing Systems Manual” prepared by Flat Glass Marketing Association.
Remove and replace units showing visible misalignment, open joints or other irregular appearance
at the exposed portion of bead.
Glaze doors, frames and window wall units in strict accordance with instructions of manufacturer.
D.
Interior Glazing: Dryset with black glazing tape.
E.
Glaze all exterior entrance doors, sidelights, transums, window wall frames and similar members as
follows:
1.
Install glass so that 1/8 inch clear space is maintained between glass and stops on both interior and
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 2
exterior. Wipe glass edges and stop faces with solvent as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
Set glazing gasket and install spacer shims and setting blocks. Maintain 1/4 inch below surface of
stop.
3.2
GLASS CLEANING AND POLISHING
A.
Upon completion of the work in any area, remove from the premises and legally dispose of all packing
crates, broken glass and construction debris resulting from the work.
B.
Upon completion thoroughly wash, clean and polish all glass and metal work.
C.
Remove and replace all chipped, scratched, broken or otherwise defective glass.
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 3
SECTION 09 26 00 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Nonload-bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies.
Gypsum board attached to steel framing.
Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings and soffits.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for fire-retardant treated wood framing and furring.
Division 7 Section “Firestopping” for firestopping systems and fire-resistance-rated joint sealants.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505 for definitions of terms for
gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data for each type of product specified.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board
assemblies from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel
products from a single manufacturer.
C.
Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same
manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to
gypsum board manufacturer.
D.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-resistance-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated,
provide gypsum board assemblies that comply with the following requirements:
1.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design
GYPSUM BOARD ASSSEMBLIES
09 26 00 - 1
2.
3.
1.6
Manual" or design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listing of another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Gypsum board assemblies indicated are identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance according
to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Doors within the assembly be a minimum of 20-minute fire-resistance rated fire doors with
positive latching, self-closing listed fire door hardware.
A.
Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of
manufacturer or supplier.
B.
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum
panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and
finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's
recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Room Temperatures: For non-adhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than
40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50
deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg
F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources.
C.
Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during
hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
1.
Steel Framing and Furring:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Clark Steel Framing, Inc.
Consolidated Systems, Inc.
Dale Industries, Inc.
Dietrich Industries, Inc.
Marino/Ware (formerly Marino Industries Corp.).
National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division.
Unimast, Inc.
Gypsum Board and Related Products:
a.
b.
c.
Domtar Gypsum.
Georgia-Pacific Corp.
National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division.
09 26 00 - 2
d.
3.
United States Gypsum Co.
Grid Suspension Assemblies:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Chicago Metallic Corp.
USG Interiors, Inc.
Worthington Steel Company (formerly National Rolling Mills).
STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A.
General: Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements:
1.
B.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled
over to form 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) wide minimum lip (return), and complying with the following
requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:
1.
2.
C.
Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant coating.
Thickness: 20 gauge - 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm) unless otherwise indicated.
Depth: as indicated on contract drawings.
Deflection Track: Manufacturer's standard top runner designed to prevent cracking of gypsum board
applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection of the structure above fabricated from steel sheet
complying with ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M) or ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M). Thickness as
indicated for studs, and width to accommodated depth of studs, and of the following configuration:
1.
Top runner with 2-1/2-inch- (63.5-mm-) deep flanges that either have V-shaped offsets that
compress when pressure is applied from construction above or have slots 1 inch (25.4 mm) o.c.
that allow fasteners attached to studs through the slots to accommodate structural movement by
slipping.
a.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1)
2)
D.
Superior Flex Track System (SFT); Delta Star, Inc.
SLP-TRK; Metal-Lite, Inc.
Steel Rigid Furring Channels:
(uncoated) metal as follows:
1.
2.
ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth and minimum thickness of base
Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Depth: 1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm).
E.
Furring Brackets: Serrated-arm type, adjustable, fabricated from corrosion-resistant steel sheet
complying with ASTM C 645, minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm),
designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring.
F.
Z-Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard Z-shaped furring members with slotted or non-slotted web,
fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 53M) or ASTM A 568 (ASTM A
568M); with a minimum base metal (uncoated) thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), face flange of 1-1/4
inch (31.8 mm), wall-attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), and of depth required to fit insulation
thickness indicated.
G.
Steel Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel, 0.0598-inch (1.5-mm) minimum thickness of base (uncoated)
09 26 00 - 3
metal and 7/16-inch- (11.1-mm-) wide flanges, 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) deep, 475 lb/1000 feet (45 kg/100
m), unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Steel Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing complying with ASTM A 653
(ASTM A 653M) or ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M), length and width as indicated, and with a minimum
base metal (uncoated) thickness as follows:
1.
Thickness: 0.027 inch (0.7 mm) where indicated.
I.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates
involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications
indicated.
J.
Resilient Channel: Cord-rolled galvanized steel, 1/2" x 2-1/2" punched for screw attachment. Unit length
shall be 12'-0".
2.3
STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
A.
General: Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
B.
Cast-in-Place and Post-installed Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from
corrosion-resistant materials, with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires, and with capability to
sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by
testing according to ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1.
2.
3.
Cast-in-place type designed for attachment to concrete forms.
Chemical anchor.
Expansion anchor.
C.
Wire Ties: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
D.
Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.1-mm)
diameter.
E.
Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 0.0598-inch (1.5-mm) minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and
7/16-inch- (11.1-mm-) wide flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and
doubled over to form 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) wide minimum lip (return), and complying with the following
requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:
1.
2.
3.
G.
Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) deep, 475 lb/1000 feet (70 kg/100m), unless
Furring Channels: ¾ inch (19.1 mm) deep, 300 lb/1000 feet (45 kg/100 m), unless otherwise
indicated.
Finish: Rust-inhibitive paint (interior west areas).
Depth: As indicated.
Protective Coating: Manufacturer’s standard corrosion-resistant coating.
Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), and minimum
thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows:
09 26 00 - 4
1.
2.
H.
2.4
Protective Coating: Manufacturer’s standard corrosion-resistant coating.
Optional Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: Equal to USG Drywall Suspension system,
ASTM C 645, manufacturer’s standard direct-hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and
cross-furring members that interlock to form a modular supporting network.
GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
A.
General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available that will minimize endto-end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application.
1.
B.
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.5
Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches (1219 mm).
Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies.
Type: Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces.
Type: Moisture resistant type for wet areas.
Edges: Tapered.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) unless otherwise indicated.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Accessories for Interior Installation: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C
1047 and requirements indicated below:
1.
Material: Formed metal or plastic, with metal complying with the following requirement:
a.
2.
Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.6
Steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process or rolled zinc.
Cornerbead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound.
Use LC-beads for edge trim, unless otherwise indicated.
L-bead with face flange only; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use L-bead
where indicated.
One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot
opening.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of
both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated.
B.
Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Setting-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged, job-mixed, chemical-hardening
powder products formulated for uses indicated.
1.
Where setting-type joint compounds are indicated as a taping compound only or for taping and
filling only, use formulation that is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it.
09 26 00 - 5
2.
3.
D.
For prefilling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer.
For topping compound, use sandable formulation.
Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products complying
with the following requirements for formulation and intended use.
1.
Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face
flanges of trim accessories.
Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats.
All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds.
Job-Mixed Formulation: Powder product for mixing with water at Project site.
a.
b.
c.
2.7
Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face
flanges of trim accessories.
Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats.
All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds.
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable,
nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements:
1.
Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings
in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM
E 90.
B.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning,
nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to
reduce transmission of airborne sound.
C.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical sealants that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a.
b.
2.8
PL Acoustical Sealant; ChemRex, Inc.; Contech Brands.
AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp.
SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co.
BA-98; Pecora Corp.
Tremco Acoustical Sealant; Tremco, Inc.
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced
standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.
B.
Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for laminating gypsum panels.
09 26 00 - 6
C.
Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting-type joint compound recommended for spot-grouting hollow metal
door frames.
D.
Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum panels to steel
framing.
E.
Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.033 inch (0.84 mm) thick.
Fastening gypsum board to wood members.
Fastening gypsum board to gypsum board.
Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from 0.033
to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames, castin-anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section.
PREPARATION
A.
Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead
structural assemblies to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have
been installed to receive ceiling hangers that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to
support ceilings.
1.
3.3
Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation well in advance
of time needed for coordination with other construction.
INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A.
Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM
C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, fire-retardant treated blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum
board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories,
furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of
gypsum board manufacturer or, if none available, with United States Gypsum Co.'s "Gypsum
Construction Handbook."
C.
Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed
by structural movement. Comply with details shown on Drawings.
1.
2.
Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling.
Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure, except at floor.
a.
Provide slip- or cushioned-type joints as detailed to attain lateral support and avoid axial
09 26 00 - 7
b.
loading.
Install deflection and firestop track top runner at fire-resistance-rated assemblies where
indicated.
1)
D.
3.4
Attach jamb studs at openings to tracks using manufacturer's standard stud clip.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members.
Independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members as indicated.
INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
A.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum
that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where
required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or
other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that
interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members,
install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance
limits established by referenced standards.
Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-typing, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a
manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts
that extend through forms.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
B.
Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
C.
Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated, but not less than that
required by the referenced steel framing installation standard.
D.
Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross-furring or
grid suspension members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) as measured both
lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.
E.
Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated.
F.
Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets
vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to
fit into wall track.
3.5
INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A.
Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board stud
assemblies abut other construction.
1.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips or foam gaskets
between studs and wall.
09 26 00 - 8
B.
Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do not
vary more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.
C.
Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except
where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for
doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for
gypsum board.
1.
For STC-rated and fire-resistance-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs
and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around
structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed, to support
gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid
structure.
D.
Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated.
E.
Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated.
1.
Single-Layer Construction: Space studs 24 inches (610 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each gypsum board
panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
G.
Frame door openings to comply with GA-219, and with applicable published recommendations of
gypsum board manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws
either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple
studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
1.
2.
H.
3.6
Install 2 studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and brace to underside of floor or roof structure
above.
Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if none indicated, as
required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door
heads.
APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A.
Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with
ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B.
Install sound-attenuation blankets, where indicated, prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets are
readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
C.
Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not
less than one framing member.
D.
Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels
together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space
between panels. Do not force into place.
E.
Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports
or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut
09 26 00 - 9
edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints other than control
joints at corners of framed openings where possible.
F.
Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open
(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
G.
Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
H.
Form control and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with space between edges of
adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels.
I.
Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases that are braced internally.
1.
2.
3.
Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,
coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members
projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed
by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide
joints to install sealant.
J.
Isolate perimeter of nonload-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors, as
detailed. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with
U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting
structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
K.
Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing
standard and manufacturer's recommendations.
1.
3.7
Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications.
GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS
A.
Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows:
1.
2.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent
possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless parallel
application is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies. Use maximum-length panels to
minimize end joints.
a.
3.
B.
On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints.
Locate edge joints over furring members.
Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows:
1.
3.8
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board.
Fasten with screws.
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten
09 26 00 - 10
gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for
type, length, and spacing of fasteners.
B.
Install cornerbead at external corners.
C.
Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type with
face flange formed to receive joint compound, except where other types are indicated.
1.
2.
3.
D.
3.9
Install LC-bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can
be attached to framing or supporting substrate.
Install L-bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed.
Install aluminum trim and other accessories where indicated.
Install control joints at locations indicated or install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and
manufacturer's recommendations and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of cornerbead, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration.
B.
Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint compound.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories having flanges not
requiring tape.
D.
Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA-214.
1.
2.
Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of
finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies.
Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces, where wall finish is scheduled to receive vinyl wall covering
or a painted finish.
E.
Use one of the following joint compound combinations as applicable to the finish levels specified:
F.
Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the finish levels specified:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
G.
Embedding and First Coat: Setting-type joint compound. Fill (Second) Coat: Setting-type joint
compound. Finish (Third) Coat: Sandable, setting-type joint compound.
Embedding and First Coat: Setting-type joint compound. Fill (Second) Coat: Setting-type joint
compound. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound.
Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or taping compound. Fill
(Second) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound. Finish (Third)
Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound.
Embedding and First Coat: Job-mixed, drying-type, taping compound. Fill (Second) Coat: Jobmixed, drying-type, topping compound. Finish (Third) Coat: Job-mixed, drying-type, topping
compound.
Embedding and First Coat: Job-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose compound. Fill (Second) Coat:
Job-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose compound. Finish (Third) Coat: Job-mixed, drying-type, allpurpose compound.
Embedding and First Coat: Setting-type compound. Fill (Second) Coat: Setting-type compound.
Finish (Third) Coat: Job-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose compound.
For Level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), and finish
09 26 00 - 11
(third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand
between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for
decoration.
H.
3.10
Where Level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound.
A.
Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure gypsum
board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
09 26 00 - 12
SECTION 09 31 16 – THIN SET QUARRY TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.
B.
1.
1.3
Quarry tile and base.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants” for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation
joints in tile surfaces.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1.
A.
Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following
values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:
1.
B.
Load-Bearing Performance: For ceramic tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide installations rated
for the following load-bearing performance level based on testing assemblies according to ASTM C 627
that are representative of those indicated for this Project:
1.
1.5
Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.
Heavy: Passes cycles 1 through 12.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of tile, mortar, grout, and other products specified.
B.
Tile Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of
tiles showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and composition of
tile indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.
C.
Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of grout
showing the full range of colors available for each type of grout indicated. Metal accessories color
samples for initial section: manufacturer’s color charts.
THIN SET QUARRY TILING
09 31 16 - 1
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile installations similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B.
Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from
one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for each contiguous area of
consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.
C.
Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each
mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source
or producer.
D.
Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section
from one source and by a single manufacturer for each product:
1.
E.
1.7
Joint sealants.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1
Section "Project Meetings."
A.
Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until
time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
B.
Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and ambient
temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced standards and
manufacturer's written instructions.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed,
are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for
each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on the Drawings.
B.
09 31 16 - 2
1.
Products:
a.
Quarry Tile:
1)
2)
2.
American Olean.
Metropolitan Ceramics.
Tile-Setting and -Grouting Materials:
a.
b.
2.2
Bonsal: W.R. Bonsal Company.
Laticrete International, Inc.
PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
ANSI Quarry Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Quarry
Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1.
2.
Provide tile complying with Standard Grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.
For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in Part 1
"Definitions" Article.
B.
ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards
referenced in "Setting Materials" and "Grouting Materials" articles.
C.
Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and
other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance
characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements:
1.
Provide Architect's selections from porcelain tile manufacturer's full range of colors, textures, and
patterns for products of type indicated. Note that 3 color tile will be used (field & border).
D.
Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample
submittals, blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one package show the same range
in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
E.
Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed
surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of
petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.
2.3
TILE PRODUCTS
A.
2.4
Tile products shall be as indicated on Drawings: 6"x6" tile with 4"x6" base.
SETTING MATERIALS
A.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, composed as follows:
1.
Mixture of Dry-Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of prepackaged dry-mortar mix and
liquid-latex additive complying with the following requirements:
a.
Latex Additive: Hydroment multi-purpose acrylic latex mortar admixture.
09 31 16 - 3
2.5
GROUTING MATERIALS
A.
Commercial Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated, for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) or
wider.
1.
2.
2.6
Polymer modified grout.
Color by Architect.
ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and
characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
B.
Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints, unless
2.7
A.
Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds:
Latex-modified, portland-cement-based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.
B.
Metal Strips: As manufactured by Schluter Systems
1.
C.
Temporary Protective Coating: Provide product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed
surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; is compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products;
and is easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.
1.
D.
2.8
Jolly Profile: Installed at raw edge of tile as base (when base tile is not a standard for tile
manufacturer). Color to match that of the tile; exposed edge size to match tile thickness.
Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially
formulated and recommended for use as a temporary protective coating for tile.
Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout
surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.
MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A.
Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written
instructions.
B.
Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C.
Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other
procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics
for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
09 31 16 - 4
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
installed tile.
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.2
Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films, and curing
compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 series of tile
installation standards for installations indicated.
Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of
work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.
Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not
coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Architect.
PREPARATION
A.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or
silicone and are incompatible with tile-setting materials by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum
sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush.
B.
Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with dry-set or latex-portland cement mortars that
comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for
installations indicated.
1.
2.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile-setting material manufacturer's written
instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions.
Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
C.
Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify
that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken from one package show the same
range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended,
either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
D.
Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent
adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence
of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of temporary protective coating indicated
below, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces:
1.
3.3
Grout release.
A.
ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards in
"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and
to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B.
TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA
installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering
without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and
corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
09 31 16 - 5
D.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible
surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned
joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or
covers overlap tile.
E.
Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on
floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in
each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless
otherwise indicated. See Drawings for tile pattern.
F.
Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction,
and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not
saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1.
G.
Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards:
1.
2.
3.4
Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement, dry-set, commercial portland cement, and latexportland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.
For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6.
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Cleaning: On completion of placement of grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of
foreign matter.
1.
2.
3.
Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout
manufacturer’s written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Protect metal
surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface
with clean water before and after cleaning.
Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is
acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging
drains.
B.
Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded,
and otherwise defective tile work.
C.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer,
that ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
1.
2.
D.
3.5
When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to
completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy
covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed.
Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Quarry Tile Floor Installation Schedule,
including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards.
09 31 16 - 6
B.
Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
1.
3.6
Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch (includes base joint width).
A.
Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of
foreign matter.
1.
2.
3.
Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout
manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Protect metal
surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface
with clean water before and after cleaning.
Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is
acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging
drains.
B.
Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded,
and otherwise defective tile work.
C.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer,
that ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
1.
2.
D.
When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to
completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy
covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed.
Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
09 31 16 - 7
SECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes ceilings consisting of acoustical panels.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual acoustical panels or
sections of acoustical panels, suspension systems, and moldings showing the full range of colors,
textures, and patterns available for each type of ceiling assembly indicated.
C.
Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of ceiling assembly indicated; in sets for each
color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
1.
6-inch- (150-mm-) square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color.
D.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
E.
Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of acoustical panel ceilings and components with
requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed acoustical panel ceilings
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful inservice performance.
B.
Source Limitations for Suspension System: Obtain each suspension system from one source with
resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying
the Work.
1.
1.5
Obtain both acoustical ceiling panels and suspension system from the same manufacturer.
A.
Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened
packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 51 13 - 1
moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture
content.
C.
Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and
weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient
temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for
its intended use.
COORDINATION
A.
1.8
Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression
system, and partition assemblies.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.
Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of
amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each
designation in the Acoustical Panel Ceiling Schedule at the end of Part 3.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that
comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light
reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Mounting Method for Measuring Noise Reduction Coefficient: Type E-400; plenum mounting in
which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface per ASTM E 795.
B.
Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.
C.
Panel Characteristics: Comply with requirements indicated in the Acoustical Panel Ceiling Schedule at
the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM E 1264 classifications.
09 51 13 - 2
2.3
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung 15/16" exposed metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable
ASTM C 635 requirements.
B.
Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and
Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's
standard factory-applied white finish for type of system indicated.
C.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung,
D.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1,
Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69mm-) diameter wire.
E.
Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
F.
Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
G.
Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04-inch- (1-mm-)
thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation;
with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts.
H.
Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's
standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension
systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges
of suspension system runners.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same
depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member.
For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit
penetration exactly.
For narrow-face suspension systems, provide suspension system and manufacturer's standard edge
moldings that match width and configuration of exposed runners.
Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals;
Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as
specified below). Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking
and for minimum dry film thickness.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Celotex Corporation (The); Building Products Division; Architectural Ceilings Marketing
Dept.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
Fry Reglet Corporation.
Gordon, Inc.
MM Systems, Inc.
USG Interiors, Inc.
09 51 13 - 3
I.
Perimeter Trim: Edge trim for suspended ceiling system, consisting of 4” x 9/16” metal pans.
Attachment to grid system is provided by an attachment clip, which snaps into and locks against hems of
trim and is screw-attached to the bulb of the intersecting DONN suspension system member.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
2.4
USG-COMPÄSSO Suspension Trim
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable,
nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements:
1.
Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings
in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to
ASTM E 90.
B.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning,
nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to
reduce airborne sound transmission.
C.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the
1.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a.
b.
c.
2.
PL Acoustical Sealant; Chemrex, Inc., Contech Brands.
AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp.
SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a.
b.
BA-98; Pecora Corp.
Tremco Acoustical Sealant; Tremco, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling
installation and anchorage, and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
1.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose
installation is specified in other Sections.
1.
Furnish cast-in-place anchors and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of
time needed for coordinating other work.
09 51 13 - 4
B.
3.3
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite
edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown
on reflected ceiling plans.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per
manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
1.
B.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum
that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss
obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally
effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that
interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system
members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent
devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of
three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other
devices that are secure; that are appropriate for substrate; and that will not deteriorate or otherwise
fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to
cast-in-place hanger inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or drilled-in anchors that extend through
forms into concrete.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly
from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm)
from ends of each member.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where
necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1.
2.
3.
Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings
before they are installed.
Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not
more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of
1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
D.
Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove
and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
E.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and
edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.
09 51 13 - 5
1.
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to long axis of space.
For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of
suspension system runners and moldings.
For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm
contact with top surface of runner flanges.
Paint cut panel edges remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces
using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.
CLEANING
A.
3.5
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension
system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor
finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired
to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING SCHEDULE
A.
Mineral Base Acoustical Panels for Acoustical Panel Ceiling ACT-#:
indicated, provide acoustical panels complying with the following:
1.
ACT-1 24” x 48” x ¾” (Kitchen and Pantry):
a.
USG – Clima Plus – Vinyl 3270 “White”
1)
2)
3)
4)
2.
Where this designation is
CAC: 40
Suspension System: 15/16” exposed grid
ASTM E/264 Classification: type III, Form 1, Pattern E1.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A.
ACT-2 – 24” x 48” x ¾” (Offices – as shown on drawings):
a.
b.
Armstrong – Cirrus – Tegular – 534 or
USG – Eclipse – Clima Plus - 76775
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
NRC: .70
CAC: 38
Suspension System: 15/16” exposed grid
ASTM E/264 Classification: Type III, Form 1, Pattern E1
Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A.
09 51 13 - 6
SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.
2.
B.
1.
1.3
Resilient wall base.
Resilient flooring accessories.
Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring."
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard sample sets consisting of sections of units showing
the full range of colors and patterns available for each type of product indicated.
C.
Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard sizes, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of
each product color and pattern specified.
D.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of resilient wall base and accessories certifying that each
product furnished complies with requirements.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has
specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type and color of product specified from one source with resources to
provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.
1.5
A.
Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers, each bearing
names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.
B.
Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained between
50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09 65 13 - 1
C.
1.6
Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation, unless longer
conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) in spaces
to receive resilient products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least 48
hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer time periods.
After postinstallation period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than
95 deg F (35 deg C).
B.
Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.
C.
For resilient products installed on traffic surfaces, close spaces to traffic during installation and for time
period after installation recommended in writing by manufacturer.
D.
Coordinate resilient product installation with other construction to minimize possibility of damage and
soiling during remainder of construction period. Install resilient products after other finishing operations,
including painting, have been completed.
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for each 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction
thereof, of each different type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
Deliver extra materials to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated in the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule
at the end of Part 3.
RESILIENT WALL BASE
A.
2.3
Rubber Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS-W-40, Type I and with requirements specified in the
Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule.
RESILIENT ACCESSORIES
A.
Rubber Accessories: Products complying with requirements specified in the Resilient Wall Base and as
indicated on the contract drawings.
09 65 13 - 2
2.4
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation
provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated.
B.
Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread manufacturer to fill
nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
C.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate
conditions indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur, with Installer
present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including those for maximum moisture
content. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for resilient product installation and
comply with requirements specified. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated
to receive resilient products.
B.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill
cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
D.
Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing resilient products. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install resilient products according to manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B.
Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent
pieces aligned.
Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
Do not stretch base during installation.
On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
Install premolded outside and inside corners before installing straight pieces.
09 65 13 - 3
C.
Place resilient products so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to substrates with adhesive.
Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed.
D.
Apply resilient products to stairs as indicated and according to manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
3.4
A.
Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient product
manufacturers.
Sweep or vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly.
Do not wash resilient products until after time period recommended by resilient product
manufacturer.
Damp-mop or sponge resilient products to remove marks and soil.
Protect resilient products against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use
protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by resilient product manufacturer.
1.
Apply protective floor polish to vinyl resilient products installed on floors and stairs that are free
from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes, if recommended by manufacturer.
a.
b.
C.
Clean resilient products not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish
date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products according to manufacturer's
written recommendations.
1.
2.
3.5
Use commercially available product acceptable to resilient product manufacturer.
Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.
Before cleaning, strip protective floor polish that was applied to vinyl products on floors and stairs
after completing installation only if required to restore polish finish and if recommended by
resilient product manufacturer.
After cleaning, reapply polish on vinyl products on floors and stairs to restore protective floor
finish according to resilient product manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate with
Owner's maintenance program.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
A.
Rubber Wall Base RB: 4" high preformed coved rubber wall base.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Color and Pattern: By Owner.
Style: Cove with top-set toe.
Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
Height: 4 inches (101.6 mm).
Lengths: Coils in lengths standard with manufacturer, but not less than 96 feet (29.26 m).
Outside Corners: Premolded.
Inside Corners: Premolded.
Ends: Premolded.
Surface: Smooth.
09 65 13 - 4
B.
Accessories: Provide floor transition strips as detailed and shown on contract drawings.
09 65 13 - 5
SECTION 09 65 19 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Vinyl composition floor tile.
Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and
other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
LEED Submittals:
1.
C.
Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content.
Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways,
enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
1.
Show details of special patterns.
D.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated.
E.
Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
G.
Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in
techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation indicated.
1.
Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by
manufacturer for installation techniques required.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09 65 19 - 1
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
1.5
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
A.
1.6
Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient
temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10
deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F
(21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time
periods:
1.
2.
3.
48 hours before installation.
During installation.
48 hours after installation.
B.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).
C.
Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D.
Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E.
Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for
storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern
of floor tile installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE - VCT
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the
1.
2.
3.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Imperial Texture.
Mannington; Essentials.
Tarkett, Inc.; Expressions.
B.
Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 1, solid-color tile.
C.
Wearing Surface: Smooth.
09 65 19 - 2
D.
Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
E.
Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).
F.
Colors and Patterns: Refer to Exhibit B at end of Specifications for Interior Color, Color Selection Chart.
2.3
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended
hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions
indicated.
1.
Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a.
C.
VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
Floor Polish for VCT: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture
content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other
Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might
interfere with adhesion of floor tile.
C.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient
products.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do
not use solvents.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with
installation only after substrates pass testing.
Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with
installation only after substrates pass testing.
09 65 19 - 3
a.
C.
D.
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only
after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate acceptable to flooring
manufacturer.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and
remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
1.
E.
3.3
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least
48 hours in advance of installation.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B.
Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles
at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal
less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1.
Lay tiles square with room axis.
C.
Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.
D.
Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E.
Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center
of door openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
G.
Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar
items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile
installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to
cover perimeters.
H.
Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a
completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of
adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.4
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:
1.
2.
3.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
09 65 19 - 4
C.
Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations
and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D.
Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before
applying liquid floor polish.
E.
Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
09 65 19 - 5
SECTION 09 67 16 - EPOXY FLOORING (ALTERNATE NO. ONE)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes applying special coating systems to items and surfaces scheduled, including
surface preparation, prime coats, and topcoats.
B.
Types of special coating systems required for the Project include the following:
1.
Special coatings for interior use include the following:
a.
C.
1.
1.3
Two-component, multi-purpose, high strength, epoxy flooring resin.
General painting is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B.
Product data for each coating system specified, including block fillers and primers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Provide the manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for
handling, storing, and applying each material proposed for use.
List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify
each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling
use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
Color shall be manufactures standard grey color for all areas scheduled.
Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of color and material to be applied with texture to
simulate actual conditions on representative samples of the actual substrate.
1.
2.
3.
Provide stepped samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use
representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until the required sheen,
color, and texture are achieved.
Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to
location and application.
Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only.
a.
EPOXY FLOORING
Concrete: Provide two 4-inch (100-mm) square samples for each color and finish.
09 67 16 - 1
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has successfully completed coating
system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project.
B.
Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat material produced by the same
manufacturer as the finish coats for each type of coating. Use only thinners recommended by the
manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
1.5
A.
Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, new, unopened packages, and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient
temperature of 50 deg F (9 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
1.
1.6
Name or title of material.
Product description (generic classification or binder type).
Manufacturer's name, stock number and date of manufacture.
Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.
Thinning instructions.
Application instructions.
Color name and number.
Handling instructions and precautions.
Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures
to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from
handling, mixing, and applying the coatings.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Apply coatings only when the temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are
between 50 deg F (9 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).
B.
Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when the relative humidity exceeds 95 percent; at
substrate temperatures less than 5 F deg (3 C deg) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.
2.
Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain the temperature and conditions specified before
proceeding with or continuing the coating operation.
Work may continue during inclement weather only if areas and surfaces to be coated are enclosed
and the temperature within the area can be maintained within limits specified by the manufacturer
during application and drying periods.
C. Maximum moisture content of concrete 4% by weight.
D. Always end at an edge, corner, or joint. Do not apply directly over joint filler.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
EPOXY FLOORING
09 67 16 - 2
2.1
EPOXY RESIN FLOOR FINISH
A.
The following specification identifies a product manufactured by Sika Corporation, which has been
established as a basis for minimum product performances. Bennings Painting Co. Industrial Flooring is
also an acceptable installer for the floor system. Alternative products which meet or exceed the
following specification may be submitted to the Architect for review and approval.
2.2
PRIMER COAT
A.
Sika Floor 90N, with broadcast sand for all scheduled areas. (All areas shall be non-slip.)
B.
Performance Criteria
1.
Properties of the mixed epoxy resin coating:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Pot Life: 25-35 minutes
Tack-Free Time to Touch (5-6 mils): 3-3.5 hours
Initial viscosity (Brookfield Viscometer, Spindle #3; Speed 100) 480 cps
Color: 11 standard colors
Solids: 100%
Properties of the cured epoxy resin coating:
a.
b.
Total Water Absorption (ASTM D-570) at 7 days: 1.34% max. (2 hour boil)
Tensile Properties (ASTM D-638) at 14 days
1)
2)
c.
d.
Impact Resistance (MIL D-3134) 30 in. lbs.
Bond Strength (ASTM C-882) Hardened Concrete to Hardened Concrete
1)
2)
e.
3.
2 day (dry cure); 3000 psi min.
14 day (moist cure); 2300 psi min.
Abrasion (Taber Abrader) at 14 days
1)
f.
g.
Tensile Strength: 7400 psi min.
Elongation at Break: 4.0% min.
Weight loss: 0.38gm max. (H-22 wheel; 100 gm weight; 1000 cycles)
The coating must be VOC compliant.
The coating must not produce an amine blush.
Properties of the epoxy resin broadcast (epoxy resin/aggregate* = 1/2.25 by volume):
a.
Compressive Properties (ASTM D-695) at 28 days
1)
2)
b.
Tensile Properties (ASTM D-638) at 14 days
1)
2)
3)
EPOXY FLOORING
Compressive Strength: 7500 psi min.
Modulus of Elasticity: 6.0 x 105 psi min.
Tensile Strength: 2000 psi min.
Elongation at Break: 0.9 % min.
Modulus of Elasticity: 4.0 x 105 psi min.
09 67 16 - 3
c.
Flexural Properties (ASTM D-790) at 14 days
1)
2)
d.
e.
f.
Flexural Strength (Modulus of Rupture): 4000 psi min.
Tangent Modulus of Elasticity in Bending: 8.0 x 105 psi min.
Shear Strength (ASTM D-732) at 14 days: 3000 psi min.
Deflection Temperature (ASTM D-648) at 14 days: 100 F min. (fiber stress loading = 66
psi)
Abrasion (Taber Abrader) at 14 days:
1)
Weight Loss: 1.85 gm max. (H-22 wheel; 1000 gm weight; 1000 cycles)
* Aggregate used shall conform to ASTM C-190.
C.
Materials
1.
Epoxy resin coating.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
D.
Component “A” shall be modified epoxy resin of the epichlorohydrin bisphenol A type
containing suitable viscosity control agents. It shall not contain butyl glycidyl ether.
Component “B” shall be primarily a reaction product of a selected amine blend with an
epoxy resin of the epichlorohydrin bisphenol A type containing suitable viscosity control
agents, pigments, and accelerators.
The ratio of Component A: Component B shall be 2:1 by volume.
The material shall not contain asbestos.
Aggregate for the epoxy resin broadcast shall be an oven-dried, 20-40 gradation sand approved by
the Architect.
Mixing & Application
1.
Mixing of the epoxy resin coating:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To minimize color differences, blend two complete Component B’s together. Use only
one of the blended Component B’s to mix with a Component A. After the first
Component B has been used, blend the second Component B with a new Component B
and repeat the above procedure for the entire application.
Premix each component. Proportion equal parts by volume of Component A and
Component B into a clean, dry mixing pail. Mix thoroughly for 3 minutes min. with a
jiffy paddle on a low-speed (400-600 rpm) drill. Mix only that quantity of material that
can be used within its pot life (25-40 minutes at 73 F).
Placement Procedure: The epoxy resin coating shall be applied only to approved, prepared
surfaces with high-quality brushes, rollers or spray equipment. Coating shall be applied at
ambient and substrate temperatures between 50 F and 90 F. Application thickness shall be
between 4-7 mils per coat. Care is to be taken to avoid sags or runs. If they occur, they are to be
sanded out and the area re-coated.
Allow the coating to self-level, and then slowly broadcast an oven-dried sand in such a manner
that the sand drops vertically into the epoxy resin. Broadcast lightly making several passes,
allowing the epoxy resin to bleed through the sand before the next pass. Cover completely with
sand before the epoxy resin becomes tack-free. Estimate oven-dried sand quantity required to
broadcast to excess at 2 lbs./sq. ft. Remove excess aggregate when the broadcast overlay has
reached sufficient cure as to not be damaged.
Apply second coat of epoxy resin coating.
When applying the coating, never stop the application until the entire surface has been coated, if
possible. If impossible, always discontinue at an edge, corner, or joint. Never let a previously
EPOXY FLOORING
09 67 16 - 4
6.
E.
coated film dry. Always coat into a wet film. Always apply the coating at a 45 angle to an edge,
corner, or joint.
Adhere to all limitations and cautions for the epoxy resin coating in the manufacturers printed
literature.
Cleaning
1.
2.
The uncured epoxy resin coating can be cleaned from tools with an approved solvent. The cured
epoxy resin coating can only be removed mechanically.
Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of spillovers onto
adjacent areas.
Note: Tests were performed with material and curing conditions at 71 -75 F and 45-55%
relative humidity.
EPOXY FLOORING
09 67 16 - 5
SECTION 09 77 00 – SPECIAL WALL SURFACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Prefinished polyester glass reinforced plastic sheets and adhered to unfinished gypsum
wallboard.
B.
Products Not Furnished or Installed under This Section:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Gypsum substrate board.
Quarry Tile Base.
Resilient Base
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 092600 – Gypsum substrate board.
B.
Section 051200 - Metal Stud Framing
C.
Section 099100 - Painting & Transparent Finishes.
D.
Section 096513 - Resilient Base.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
American Society for Testing and Materials: Standard Specifications (ASTM)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.4
ASTM D 256 - Izod Impact Strengths (ft #/in)
ASTM D 570 - Water Absorption (%)
ASTM D 638 - Tensile Strengths (psi) & Tensile Modulus (psi)
ASTM D 790 - Flexural Strengths (psi) & Flexural Modulus (psi)
ASTM D 2583- Barcol Hardness
ASTM D 5319 - Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polyester Wall and Ceiling
Panels.
ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit sufficient manufacturer's data to indicate compliance with these specifications,
including:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Preparation instructions and recommendations.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
Installation methods.
Shop Drawings: Submit elevations of each wall showing location of paneling and trim members with
respect to all discontinuities in the wall elevation.
SPECIAL WALL SURFACING
09 77 00 - 1
C.
Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer’s standard color pattern selection samples representing
manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
D.
Samples for Verification: Submit appropriate section of panel for each finish selected indicating the
color, texture, and pattern required.
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.5
Submit complete with specified applied finish.
For selected patterns show complete pattern repeat.
Exposed Molding and Trim: Provide samples of each type, finish, and color.
Manufacturers Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for adhesives and sealants prior to their delivery to
the site.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to building code requirements for interior finish for smoke and flame spread requirements as
tested in accordance with:
1.
ASTM E 84 (Method of test for surface burning characteristics of building Materials)
a.
B.
Sanitary Standards: System components and finishes to comply with:
1.
2.
3.
1.6
Wall Required Rating – Class C.
United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) requirements for food preparation facilities,
incidental contact.
Food and Drug Administration (FDA) 1999 Food Code 6-101.11.
Canadian Food Inspection Agency (CFIA) requirements.
A.
Deliver materials factory packaged on strong pallets.
B.
Store panels and trim lying flat, under cover and protected from the elements. Allow panels to acclimate
to room temperature (70°) for 48 hours prior to installation.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Building are to be fully enclosed prior to installation with sufficient heat
(70°) and ventilation consistent with good working conditions for finish work
B.
During installation and for not less than 48 hours before, maintain an ambient temperature and relative
humidity within limits required by type of adhesive used and recommendation of adhesive manufacturer.
1.
1.8
Provide ventilation to disperse fumes during application of adhesive as recommended by the
adhesive manufacturer.
WARRANTY
A.
Furnish one year guarantee against defects in material and workmanship.
09 77 00 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A.
Marlite;
202 Harger Street, Dover, OH
[email protected] www.marlite.com.
1.
B.
800-377-1221
FAX (330) 343-4668 Email:
Hudo Fiber-Lite Panel.
Product:
1.
2.2
44622.
Standard FRP (Fiberglass Reinforced Panels), smooth finish.
PANELS
A.
Fiberglass reinforced thermosetting polyester resin panel sheets complying with ASTM D 5319.
1.
2.
Coating: Multi layer print, primer and finish coats.
Dimensions:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Tolerance:
a.
b.
B.
Thickness – 0.090 inch (2.29mm) nominal
Width - 4'-0” (1.22m) nominal
Length – 10’-0” (3.0m) nominal
Length and Width: +/-1/8 inch (3.175mm)
Square - Not to exceed 1/8 inch for 8 foot (2.4m) panels or 5/32 inch (3.96mm) for 10 foot
(2.4m) panels
Properties: Resistant to rot, corrosion, staining, denting, peeling, and splintering.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Flexural Strength - 1.0 x 104 psi per ASTM D 790. (7.0 kilogram-force/square millimeter)
Flexural Modulus - 3.1 x 105 psi per ASTM D 790. (217.9 kilogram-force/square millimeter)
Tensile Strength - 7.0 x 103 psi per ASTM D 638. (4.9 kilogram-force/square millimeter)
Tensile Modulus - 1.6 x 105 psi per ASTM D 638. (112.5 kilogram-force/square millimeter)
Water Absorption - 0.72% per ASTM D 570.
Barcol Hardness (scratch resistance) of 35 55 as per ASTM D 2583.
Izod Impact Strength of 72 ft. lbs./in ASTM D 256
C.
Back Surface: Smooth. Imperfections which do not affect functional properties are not cause for
rejection.
D.
Front Finish: Surface textures for FRP:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Color: 151 Light Grey. Special colors can be custom matched and manufactured provided there is a
minimum square footage order of 5,000 ft2.
Surface: Smooth (indicated by “S” designation i.e., S 151 Light Grey).
Fire Rating: Class C (III) Fire Rating. (S 151 Light Grey, Class C).
Size: FRP standard size is:
a.
4’ x 10’ [1.2m x 3m] x .120”
09 77 00 - 3
2.3
MOLDINGS
A.
Aluminum Trim: Heavy weight extruded aluminum 6063-T5 alloy prefinished at the factory.
1.
2.
Finish: Factory oven-baked finish.
Profiles:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.
B.
Color: Bright Anodized __________
PVC: Extruded PVC Trim Profiles for .090 inch thick panels.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
M 350 Inside Corner
M 360 Outside Corner
M 365 Division
M 370 Edge
Color: Match panels
Outside Corner Guard:
1.
M 961 PVC
a.
2.4
F550 Inside Corner
F561 Outside Corner
F565 Division
F570 Edge
A551 Inside Corner
A560 Outside Corner
A565 Division
A570 Edge
Refer to contract drawings for locations.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners: Non-staining nylon drive rivets.
1.
2.
B.
Adhesive: Either of the following construction adhesives complying with ASTM C 557.
1.
2.
C.
Match panel colors.
Length to suit project conditions.
FRP Adhesive - Water- resistant, non-flammable adhesive
Construction adhesive flexible, water-resistant, solvent based adhesive formulated for fast, easy
application.
Sealant:
1.
2.
Clear Silicone Sealant
Color Match Sealant.
09 77 00 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Examine backup surfaces to determine that corners are plumb and straight, surfaces are smooth, uniform,
clean and free from foreign matter, nails countersunk, joints and cracks filled flush and smooth with the
adjoining surface.
1.
B.
Repair defects prior to installation.
1.
3.2
Verify that stud spacing does not exceed 24 inch (61cm) on-center.
Level wall surfaces to panel manufacturer’s requirements.
indentations.
Remove protrusions and fill
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence.
B.
Cut sheets to meet supports allowing 1/8” inch (3 mm) clearance for every 8 foot (2.43m) of panel.
1.
2.
Cut and drill with carbide tipped saw blades or drill bits, or cut with shears.
Pre-drill fastener holes 1/8 inch (3.175mm) oversize with high speed drill bit.
a.
b.
C.
Apply panels to board substrate, above base, vertically oriented with seams plumb and pattern aligned
with adjoining panels.
1.
Install panels with manufacturer's recommended gap for panel field and corner joints.
a.
b.
D.
Adhesive trowel and application method to conform to adhesive manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Drive fasteners for snug fit. Do not over-tighten.
Apply panel moldings to all panel edges using silicone sealant providing for required clearances.
1.
2.
3.3
Space at 8 inches (20.32cm) maximum on center at perimeter, approximately 1 inch from
panel edge.
Space at in field in rows 16 inches (40.64cm) on center, with fasteners spaced at 12 inches
(30.48 cm) maximum on center.
All moldings must provide for a minimum 1/8 inch (3.18mm) of panel expansion at joints and
edges, to insure proper installation.
Apply sealant to all moldings, channels and joints between the system and different materials to
assure watertight installation.
CLEANING
A.
Remove excess sealant from panels and moldings. Wipe panel down using a damp cloth and mild soap
solution or cleaner.
B.
Refer to manufacturer's specific cleaning recommendations Do not use abrasive cleaners.
09 77 00 - 5
SECTION 09 91 00 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
Refer to contract drawings for exterior deck staining and stair treatment.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be
painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface,
paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules
indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard
colors and finishes available.
1.
C.
Exposed exterior items and surfaces.
Exposed interior items and surfaces.
Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop
priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts, hangers, exposed
steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces including mechanical and electrical equipment.
Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.
1.
Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Foundation spaces.
Furred areas.
Ceiling plenums.
Pipe spaces.
Duct shafts.
Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a.
PAINTING
Architectural woodwork and casework.
Acoustical wall panels.
Metal lockers.
Unit kitchens.
Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
Light fixtures.
Distribution cabinets.
Anodized aluminum.
09 91 00 - 1
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
D.
Valve and damper operators.
Linkages.
Sensing devices.
Motor and fan shafts.
Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other coderequired labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Stainless steel.
Chromium plate.
Copper.
Bronze and brass.
Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel.
Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.
Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop priming interior architectural
woodwork.
Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation for gypsum board and
corner guards installations.
Divisions 15 and 16: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions 15 and
16, respectively.
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.4
Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85degree meter.
Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60degree meter.
Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60degree meter.
Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at
a 60-degree meter.
Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60degree meter.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.
1.
2.
3.
PAINTING
Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and
cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label
analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for
use.
Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling
use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
09 91 00 - 2
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for
each type of finish-coat material indicated.
C.
Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual
conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.
1.
2.
3.
Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use
representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color,
and texture are achieved.
Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for
location and application.
Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only:
a.
b.
D.
1.5
Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4-by-8-inch (100-by-200-mm) samples of masonry, with
mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color.
Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch- (100-mm-) square samples of flat metal and two 8inch- (200-mm-) long samples of solid metal for each color and finish.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system
applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful inservice performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from
the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
1.
1.6
Final approval of colors will be from job-applied samples.
A.
Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing
manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Product name or title of material.
Product description (generic classification or binder type).
Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
Thinning instructions.
Application instructions.
Color name and number.
VOC content.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient
temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
1.
PAINTING
Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.
Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health
hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
09 91 00 - 3
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).
B.
Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7.2 and 35 deg C).
C.
Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at
temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.
1.8
Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed
and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying
periods.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quantities
described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and identify
with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner.
1.
Quantity: Furnish the Owner with extra paint materials in the quantities indicated below:
a.
Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.785 L)
or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in the paint schedules.
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in the paint schedules.
C.
Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of
shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
Devoe & Raynolds Co. (Devoe).
Fuller-O'Brien Paints (Fuller).
Glidden Co. (The) (Glidden).
Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore).
PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG).
Pratt & Lambert, Inc. (P & L).
Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W).
PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as
PAINTING
09 91 00 - 4
demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types
specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be
acceptable.
C.
Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be
performed for compliance with paint application requirements.
1.
2.
B.
Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of
the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish
materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1.
3.2
Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within
a particular area.
Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates
primed by others.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and
similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because
of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and
painting.
1.
B.
Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could
impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1.
C.
After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers
skilled in the trades involved.
Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not
fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written
instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1.
2.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineralfiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt,
grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers
have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
a.
PAINTING
Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
09 91 00 - 5
b.
c.
2.
b.
c.
d.
e.
b.
c.
D.
Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to
requirements of SSPC-SP 10.
Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before
priming.
Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush,
clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same
primer as the shop coat.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is
free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated
from coil stock by mechanical methods.
Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other
recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and
imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces,
undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.
When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall
construction occurs on backside.
Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or
sealer immediately on delivery.
Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated;
remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical
cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC)
recommendations.
a.
4.
Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If
surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this
condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other
etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia,
rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.
Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and
sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a.
3.
Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during
application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain
material before using.
Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
APPLICATION
A.
General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques
best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1.
2.
PAINTING
Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to
09 91 00 - 6
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
formation of a durable paint film.
Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector
covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend
coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired
protection.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or
furniture with prime coat only.
Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers
or grilles.
Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.
Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise
prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the
manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to
manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats
until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges,
corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of
flat surfaces.
Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces
until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb
pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose
adhesion.
Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size
for the surface or item being painted.
Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.
Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.
D.
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended
spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the
manufacturer.
E.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed
in equipment rooms, mechanical and electrical equipment, and in occupied spaces.
F.
Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PAINTING
Piping, pipe hangers, and supports.
Heat exchangers.
Tanks.
Ductwork.
Insulation.
Motors and mechanical equipment.
09 91 00 - 7
7.
8.
G.
Accessory items.
Roof top penetrators to match color of shingles.
Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
Conduit and fittings.
Switchgear.
Panelboards.
H.
Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with
pores filled.
I.
Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by
others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat
appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
J.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque
surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
K.
Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or
repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.4
A.
The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner
deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:
1.
2.
The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material
being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and
certified in the presence of the Contractor.
The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by
the Owner:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
3.
PAINTING
Quantitative material analysis.
Abrasion resistance.
Apparent reflectivity.
Flexibility.
Washability.
Absorption.
Accelerated weathering.
Dry opacity.
Accelerated yellowness.
Recoating.
Skinning.
Color retention.
Alkali and mildew resistance.
The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does
not comply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from
the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. If
necessary, the Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously painted
surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the 2 coatings are incompatible.
09 91 00 - 8
3.5
CLEANING
A.
Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint
materials from the site.
1.
3.6
After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by
washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage
by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings
provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
1.
3.7
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A.
Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required
on shop-primed items.
1.
Full-Gloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.
a.
Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm).
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
b.
13101 Mirrolac Rust Penetrating Metal Primer.
621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer.
5205 Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer, Red.
IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163.
6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer.
S 4551 Tech-Gard High Performance Rust-Inhibitor Primer.
Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1.
First and Second Coats: Full-gloss, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.0
mils (0.076 mm).
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
B.
Devoe:
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
P & L:
S-W:
Devoe:
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
P & L:
S-W:
70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd-Urethane Gloss Enamel.
312-XX Heavy-Duty Industrial Maintenance Enamel.
4500 Series Glid-Guard Alkyd Industrial Enamel.
Impervo Enamel #133.
6-282 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Gloss-Oil Enamel.
S 4500 Series Tech-Gard Maintenance Gloss Enamel.
Industrial Enamel B-54 Series.
Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated (galvanized) metal
surfaces:
1.
PAINTING
Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.
09 91 00 - 9
a.
b.
C.
Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
1.
Devoe:
2)
3)
4)
5)
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
6)
P & L:
8502/8520 Mirrolac-WB Interior/Exterior Waterborne Flat DTM
Primer and Finish.
621-05 Blox-Rust Latex Metal Primer.
5205 Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer, Red.
IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155.
90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM
Industrial Enamel.
Z/F 1003 Suprime "3" Interior/Exterior Latex etal Primer.
First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate
mils (0.066 mm).
1)
Devoe:
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
P & L:
17XX Wonder-Shield Semi-Gloss Exterior Acrylic Latex House and
Trim Paint.
664-XX Weather King II Semi-Gloss House & Trim Paint.
6600 Series Spred Ultra Exterior Gloss Latex House & Trim Paint.
MoorGlo Latex House & Trim Paint #096.
78 Line Sun-Proof Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint.
Z/F 3100 Series Aqua Royal Latex House & Trim Finish.
Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete masonry units:
1.
Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a block filler and a primer.
a.
Block Filler: High-performance, latex block filler applied at spreading rate recommended
by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry mill thickness of not less than 4.0 mils (0.102
mm).
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
b.
PAINTING
52902 Bloxfil 200 Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler.
290-00 Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler.
5317 Ultra-Hide Block Filler Latex Interior-Exterior
Moorcraft Interior & Exterior Block Filler #173.
6-7 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Masonry Latex Block Filler.
Z/F 98 Pro-Hide Plus Block Filler.
Primer:
Alkali-resistant, exterior, acrylic-latex primer applied at spreading rate
mils (0.036 mm).
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
c.
Devoe:
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
P & L:
Devoe:
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
P & L:
Primer not required over block filler.
Z/F 1001 Suprime “1” Multi-Purpose 100 Percent Acrylic Primer.
First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than
2.4 mils (0.061 mm).
09 91 00 - 10
3.8
1)
Devoe:
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
P & L:
17XX Wonder-Shield Semi-Gloss Exterior Acrylic Latex House and
Trim Paint.
664-XX Weather King II Semi-Gloss House & Trim Paint.
6600 Series Spred Ultra Exterior Gloss Latex House & Trim Paint.
MoorGlo Latex House & Trim Paint #096.
78 Line Sun-Proof Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint.
Z/F 3100 Series Aqua Royal Latex House and Trim Finish
INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A.
Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry block
units:
1.
Semigloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over an undercoat and a filled surface.
a.
Block Filler: High-performance, latex-based block filler applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry mill thickness of not less than 5.0
mils (0.13 mm).
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
b.
B.
5317 Ultra-Hide Block Filler Latex Interior-Exterior
Z 98 Pro-Hide Plus Latex Block Filler.
Heavy-Duty Block Filler B42W46.
Undercoat: Interior, alkyd- or latex-based, enamel undercoater, as recommended by the
manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
c.
Devoe:
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
P & L:
S-W:
Devoe:
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
P & L:
S-W:
26XX Velour Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.
220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
UH 400 Ultra-Hide Alkyd Interior Enamel Undercoater.
Moore’s Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.
6-855 Speedhide Interior Latex Enamel Undercoater.
S/D 1012 Suprime “12” Interior Alkyd Wall primer.
Classic 99 Interior/Exterior Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel A-40 Series.
Finish Coat: Odorless, semigloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than
1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Devoe:
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
6)
7)
P & L:
S-W:
206-XX Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.
UH 8400 Ultra Traditional Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.
Satin Impervo #235.
27 Line Wallhide Low Odor Interior Enamel Wall and Trim SemiGloss Oil.
S/D 5700 Series Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.
Concrete Masonry Units – Epoxy Paint
1.
PAINTING
Full Gloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over an undercoat and a filled surface.
09 91 00 - 11
a.
Block Filler: High-performance, latex-based, block filler applied at spreading rate
mils (0.13 mm).
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
b.
5317 Ultra-Hide Block Filler, Latex Interior-Exterior.
Z 98 Pro-Hide Plus Latex Block Filler.
Heavy-Duty Block Filler B42W46.
ICI
:
PPG:
S-W:
Tru Glaze #4406.
#98 Line.
Water Based Epoxy B70 Series.
Finish Coat: Full gloss latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the
1)
2)
6)
C.
Devoe:
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
P & L:
S-W:
Undercoat: Interior, alkyd- or latex-based, enamel undercoater, as recommended by the
1)
2)
6)
c.
ICI
:
PPG:
S-W:
Tru Glaze #4406.
#98 Line.
Water Based Epoxy B70 Series.
Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: This section
also includes painting over existing vinyl faced gypsum panels.
1.
Low-Luster, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a.
Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
b.
50801 Wonder-Tones Interior Vinyl Latex Primer-Sealer.
220-20 Pro-Tech Interior Latex Wall Primer and Sealer.
5111 Spred Ultra Latex Primer-Sealer.
Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody #216.
17-10 Quick-Dry Interior Latex Primer-Sealer.
Z/F 1004 Suprime "4" Interior Latex Wall Primer.
First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior enamel
applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film
thickness of not less than 2.8 mills (0.07 mm).
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
PAINTING
Devoe:
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
P & L:
Devoe:
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
P & L:
34XX Wonder-Tones Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel.
212-XX AA Enamel Acrylic Latex Eggshell Enamel.
4100 Series Spred Ultra Eggshell Latex Wall & Trim Paint.
Moore's Regal AquaVelvet #319.
89 Line Manor Hall Eggshell Latex Wall and Trim Enamel.
Z/F 4000 Series Accolade Interior Velvet.
09 91 00 - 12
D.
Woodwork and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new, interior wood surfaces:
1.
Low-Luster, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over primer.
a.
b.
Primer: Alkyd or acrylic-latex-based, interior wood primer, as recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mills (0.036 mm).
1)
Devoe:
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
P & L:
51701 Wonder-Prime All-Purpose Latex Primer Sealer & Vapor
Barrier.
5111 Spred Ultra Latex Primer-Sealer.
Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.
17-255 Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoater.
Z/F 1001 Suprime “1” 100 Percent Acrylic Multi-Purpose Primer.
First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior enamel
applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film
thickness of not less than 2.8 mils (0.071 mm).
1)
2)
E.
Devoe:
P & L:
35XX Wonder-Tones Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel.
Z/F 4000 Series Accolade Interior Velvet.
Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
1.
Semigloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over an enamel undercoater and a primer.
a.
Primer:
Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as
recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate
mils (0.038 mm).
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
b.
PAINTING
13101 Mirrolac Rust Penetrating Metal Primer.
621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer.
5207 Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer, White.
IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163.
6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer.
S 4551 Tech-Gard High Performance Rust Inhibitor Primer.
Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1.
Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semigloss, interior, alkyd-enamel finish
coat, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate
mils (0.031 mm).
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
c.
Devoe:
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
P & L:
S-W:
Devoe:
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
P & L:
S-W:
6-6 Speedhide Interior Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoater.
S/D 1011 Suprime "11" Interior Alkyd Wood Primer.
ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel B34W200.
mils (0.036 mm).
09 91 00 - 13
F.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Devoe:
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
6)
7)
P & L:
S-W:
110-XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.
Satin Impervo #235.
S/D 5700 Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.
Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over zinc-coated metal:
1.
Semigloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over an undercoat and a primer.
a.
b.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Devoe:
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
6)
7)
P & L:
S-W:
Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semigloss, interior, alkyd-enamel finish
coat, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate
mils (0.031 mm).
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
c.
2.
Devoe:
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
P & L:
S-W:
UH 8400 Series Spred Ultra Traditional Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.
6-6 Speedhide Interior Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoater.
S/D 1011 Suprime "11" Interior Alkyd Wood Primer.
ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel B34W200.
mils (0.036 mm).
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Devoe:
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
6)
7)
P & L:
S-W:
110-XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.
Satin Impervo #235.
S/D 5700 Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.
Classic 99 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel A-40 Series.
Full-Gloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 coats over a primer.
a.
PAINTING
13201 Mirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer.
Industrial Enamel.
Z/F 1003 Suprime "3" Interior/Exterior Latex Metal Primer.
Galvite Paint B50W3.
09 91 00 - 14
b.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Devoe:
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
6)
7)
P & L:
S-W:
13201 Mirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer.
Industrial Enamel.
Z/F 1003 Suprime "3" Interior/Exterior Latex Metal Primer.
Galvite Paint B50W3.
First and Second Coats: Full-gloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate
mils (0.064 mm).
1)
Devoe:
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Fuller:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
P & L:
S-W:
84XX Mirrolac-WB Interior-Exterior Waterborne High Gloss
Enamel.
213-XX AA Enamel Interior Acrylic Latex High-Gloss Enamel.
6900 Series Lifemaster Pro Hi-Performance Acrylic Coating.
Impervex Enamel #309.
51 Line Brilliant Reflections Interior/Exterior Latex Gloss Enamel.
Z/F 4400 Series Accolade Interior High Gloss.
ProMar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel B21W201.
PAINTING
09 91 00 - 15
SECTION 10 14 00 - SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
Refer to contract drawings for additional signage requirements and locations (specified on drawings).
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following types of signs:
1.
2.
1.3
Interior (accessible signage).
Signage accessories
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B.
Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to materials,
dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
C.
Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale
sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement,
accessories, and installation details.
1.
2.
1.4
Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording and lettering
layout.
Samples: Provide samples of each sign component for initial selection of color, pattern and surface
texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated for this
Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce
sign units required without causing delay in the Work.
B.
UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide lighting fixtures and electrical components for illuminated signs
that are labeled and listed by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards.
C.
Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from one source of a
single manufacturer.
D.
Design Concept: The Drawings indicates sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of signs and are
based on the specific types and models indicated. Sign units by other manufacturers may be considered
provided deviations in dimensions and profiles do not change the design concepts as judged by the
SIGNAGE
10 14 00 - 1
Architect.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to
ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
1.
Manufacturers of Panel Signs:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.2
Andco Industries Corp.
APCO Graphics, Inc.
ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
Poblocki & Sons, Inc
The Supersine Company.
PRODUCTS
A.
Accessible Toilet Rooms shall be identified as “Accessible” in accordance with the Americans with
Disabilities Act and Michigan Barrier Free Requirements. Rooms shall be identified with a 1.5" x 8" sign
below a 8" x 8" symbol of compliance. Room signs shall be mounted with centerline at 60"above the
finish floor and on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door. Signs shall be acrylic sheet .0625 XT
matte polymer with raised graphics. Frame shall be .510 inches deep injection molded polystyrene with
bullnosed corners. Provide raised tactile letters and grade 2 braille below sign graphics. Character type
shall be upper case and min. 1" high with character proportion to meet width/stroke to height ratio.
Finish shall be matte eggshell with 70% contrast between background and letters colors as selected by the
Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.
B.
Non-Accessible Toilet/Changing Rooms shall be identified with 8"x8" sign mounted with centerline 60
inches above finish floor adjacent to latch side of door. Sign shall be acrylic sheet 0.625 XT matte
polymer with raised letters. Frame shall be .510inches deep molded polysterene with bullnosed corners.
Provide raised tactile letters with minimum 1inch high uppercase letters. Finish shall be matte eggshell
with 70% contract between background and letters. Colors as selected by Architect.
2.3
MATERIALS (Panel Signs)
A.
White Translucent Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as “white” provide white translucent sheet of
density required to produce uniform brightness and minimum halation effects.
B.
Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the sign material and
mounting surface for exterior signs and 0.30" thick double face tape for interior signs.
SIGNAGE
10 14 00 - 2
2.4
PANEL SIGNS
A.
Panel Signs: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs,
shapes, sizes, and details of construction
1.
Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under installed
conditions with a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type
described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1.
B.
3.2
Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or
other defects in appearance.
Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated.
A.
After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Protect units
from damage until acceptance by the Owner.
SIGNAGE
10 14 00 - 3
SECTION 10 28 13 - TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes toilet and bath accessory items as scheduled.
B.
Mirrored glass for frameless applications is specified in Division 8 Section "Mirrored Glass."
C.
Toilet compartments and related accessories are specified in Division 10.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications
Sections.
B.
Product data for each toilet accessory item specified, including construction details relative to materials,
dimensions, gages, profiles, mounting method, specified options, and finishes.
C.
Samples of each toilet accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements. Acceptable
full-size samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.
D.
Schedule indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations (by room) for each toilet accessory
item to be provided for project.
E.
Setting drawings where cutouts are required in other work, including templates, substrate preparation
instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchorage devices.
F.
Maintenance instructions including replaceable parts and service recommendations.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish accessory manufacturers' standard inserts and anchoring devices that
must be set in concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
B.
Single-Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and
for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid
interference with and ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet
accessory items.
TOILET ACCESSORIES
10 28 13 - 1
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by mirror manufacturer, agreeing to replace any mirrors
that develop visible silver spoilage defects within warranty period.
B.
Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C.
The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of
the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering toilet
accessories that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.2
A & J Washroom Accessories.
American Specialties, Inc.
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
Bradley Corporation.
General Accessory Manufacturing Co.
McKinney/Parker.
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 0.034 inch (0.9 mm) minimum thickness.
B.
Brass: Leaded and unleaded, flat products, ASTM B 19; rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with
finished edges, ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M); Castings, ASTM B 30.
C.
Sheet Steel: Cold-rolled, commercial quality ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M), 0.04 inch (1.0 mm)
minimum. Surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish.
D.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 527 G60 (ASTM A 527M Z180).
E.
Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal, ASTM B 456, Type SC 2.
F.
Baked Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss white, baked acrylic enamel coating.
G.
Mirror Glass: Nominal 6.0 mm thick, conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, and
with silvering, electro- plated copper coating, and protective organic coating.
H.
Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
I.
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, or of galvanized steel
where concealed.
TOILET ACCESSORIES
10 28 13 - 2
2.3
ACCESSORIES: BY IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS AS INDICTED ON THE FOLLOWING TOILET
ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
A.
Referenced Manufacturer: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
B.
Refer to drawings for number of accessories required and locations.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
B.
Surface-Mounted Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
No names or labels are permitted on exposed faces of units.
On either interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface, provide identification of each
item by either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer’s name
and product model number.
Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled.
Hand doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel piano hinge.
Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.
Contractor shall install blocking as required.
Recessed Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fabricate units of welded construction, without mitered corners.
Hand doors or access panels with full-length stainless steel piano hinge.
Provide anchorage which is fully concealed when unit is closed.
Contractor shall install blocking as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate and
recommended by manufacturer of unit.
B.
Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at height indicated.
C.
Provide tamper-proof fastenings.
3.2
A.
Adjust accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly.
B.
Replace damaged or defective items.
C.
Clean and polish exposed surfaces after removing temporary labels and protective coatings.
TOILET ACCESSORIES
10 28 13 - 3
SECTION 10 44 16 – PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.
2.
B.
1.
1.3
Fire extinguishers.
Fire extinguisher mounting brackets.
Division 15 Section "Fire Protection" for fire protection systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
1.
1.4
Product data for type of fire extinguisher used.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Single-Source Responsibility:
manufacturer.
Obtain extinguishers and cabinets from one source from a single
B.
UL-Listed Products: Fire extinguishers shall be UL listed with UL listing mark for type, rating, and
classification of extinguisher.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
J.L. Industries.
Larsen's Manufacturing Co.
Modern Metal Products by Muckle.
Potter-Roemer, Inc.
Samson Metal Products, Inc.
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
10 44 16 - 1
2.2
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.
General: Provide fire extinguishers for each cabinet and surface mounting condition at locations
indicated, in colors and finishes selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard, that comply with
authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 2-A:10:B:C, 5-lb nominal capacity, in enameled steel
container.
2.3
MOUNTING BRACKETS
A.
Brackets: Designed to prevent accidentally dislodging extinguisher, of sizes required for type and
capacity of extinguisher indicated, in plated finish.
1.
2.
Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets. As indicated on drawings as surface
mounted type.
Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets and for those located in cabinets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine rough-in for hose vales, hose racks, and cabinets to verify locations of piping connections prior
to cabinet installation.
B.
Examine walls and partitions for thickness and framing for cabinets to verify cabinet depth and mounting
prior to cabinet installation.
C.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation.
B.
Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights to comply with
applicable regulations of governing authorities.
1.
2.
Prepare recesses in walls for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim and
to comply with manufacturer's instructions.
Fasten mounting brackets and cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
10 44 16 - 2
SECTION 11 40 00 - FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fabricated equipment.
Cooking equipment.
Self-contained refrigeration equipment.
Walk-in refrigeration equipment.
Powered food-preparation equipment.
Warewashing equipment.
Serving equipment.
B.
Owner-Furnished Equipment:
Contractor.
C.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Where indicated, Owner will furnish equipment for installation by
Mechanical Specifications for "Commercial-Kitchen Hoods" for ventilation hoods.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Manufacturer's model number.
Accessories and components that will be included for Project.
Clearance requirements for access and maintenance.
Utility service connections for water, drainage, power, and fuel; include roughing-in dimensions.
B.
Shop Drawings: For fabricated equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, roughing-in dimensions,
fabrication details, utility service requirements, and attachments to other work.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each factory-applied color finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: For foodservice facilities.
1.
2.
Indicate locations of foodservice equipment and connections to utilities.
Key equipment using same designations as indicated on Drawings.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
11 40 00 - 1
3.
B.
1.5
Include plans and elevations; clearance requirements for equipment access and maintenance;
details of equipment supports; and utility service characteristics.
Warranty: Samples of special warranty.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For foodservice equipment to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
In addition to items specified in Section 017713 "Project Closeout",
Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
Product Schedule: For each foodservice equipment item, include the following:
a.
b.
c.
1.6
Designation indicated on Drawings.
Manufacturer's name and model number.
List of factory-authorized service agencies including addresses and telephone numbers.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
NSF Standards: Provide equipment that bears NSF Certification Mark or UL Classification Mark
certifying compliance with applicable NSF standards.
B.
BISSC Standards: Provide bakery equipment that complies with BISSC/Z50.2.
1.
Provide BISSC-certified equipment.
C.
UL Certification: Provide electric and fuel-burning equipment and components that are evaluated by UL
for fire, electric shock, and casualty hazards according to applicable safety standards, and that are UL
certified for compliance and labeled for intended use.
D.
Steam Equipment: Provide steam-generating and direct-steam heating equipment that is fabricated and
labeled to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
E.
Regulatory Requirements: Install equipment to comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."
NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."
NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."
NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations."
F.
Seismic Restraints: Comply with SMACNA's "Kitchen Ventilation Systems and Food Service
Equipment Fabrication and Installation Guidelines," Appendix A, "Seismic Restraint Details," unless
G.
Preinstallation Conference: To be determined by the Architect following project award.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with foodservice equipment
by field measurements before fabrication. Indicate measurements on Coordination Drawings.
11 40 00 - 2
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate foodservice equipment layout and installation with other work, including layout and
installation of lighting fixtures, HVAC equipment, and fire-suppression system components.
B.
Coordinate locations and requirements of utility service connections.
C.
Coordinate sizes, locations, and requirements of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.9
Overhead equipment supports.
Equipment bases.
Floor areas with positive slopes to drains.
Floor sinks and drains serving foodservice equipment.
Roof curbs, equipment supports, and penetrations.
WARRANTY
A.
Refrigeration Compressor Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace compressors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
2.
Failure includes, but is not limited to, inability to maintain set temperature.
Warranty Period: One year parts and labor warranty from date of Substantial Completion. All
refrigeration compressors to have an additional four year parts warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT
A.
Item No. 1 – Walk-in Cooler/Freezer (1 Req’d)
1.
Bally Refrigerated Boxes Model FABRICATED
a.
b.
9'-8" x 29'-9 1/2" x 8'-6" high, size, shape and configuration as shown on plan. The interior
wall and ceiling panels to be stucco aluminum. The exterior to be stucco aluminum where
exposed and the balance to be .026 galvalume. Provide pre-fabricated rigidized aluminum
insulated floor panels with interior ramps. Insulation to be 4" urethane foamed in place in
walls, floor and ceiling panels. Doors to be 36" x 78", hinged Super Doors with s/s finish,
third hinge and diamond-plate kick panels, 32” high on interior and exterior of doors.
Freezer to have a pressure relief port. Furnish with 5 extra light fixtures. Provide
embossed aluminum closure trim to 10’-0” ceiling where exposed and angle trim where
walk-in panels abut building walls.
Provide and install refrigeration systems for coolers and freezer. Cooler system to be 7/8
HP and freezer system to be 3-1/2 HP. Cooler systems to be 208 volt single phase electric,
R-404a, pre-assembled remote, air cooled with air defrost timers, liquid line drier, sight
glass and shut-off valve, suction filter, mounted fused disconnect switch, low profile
evaporator coil, TXV valve, solenoid valve and room thermostat, outdoor covers and low
ambient kits. Freezer system to be 208 volt 3 phase electric, R-404a, pre-assembled
remote, air cooled with electric defrost timer, liquid line drier, sight glass and shut-off
valve, suction filter, mounted fused disconnect switch, low profile evaporator coil, TXV
valve, solenoid valve, room thermostat and defrost kit, outdoor covers and low ambient kit.
Condensing units to be mounted on a curb on building roof as directed by Architect. Curbs
to be constructed of heavy-gauge galvanized steel which shall be welded together. Each
curb shall be sized to accommodate one condensing unit, approximately 38” x 32” x 12”
high with flanged base.
11 40 00 - 3
B.
Item No. 1A – Reinforced Walk-in Floor (Not in Base Bid) (1 Req’d)
1.
Bally Refrigerated Boxes Model FABRICATED
a.
b.
C.
This item is not included in base bid but in the Schedule of Alternates as Alternate
No.3.
Provide Walk-in Cooler and Freezer floor panels with 14 gauge galvanized steel reinforced
floor underlayment.
Item No. 2 – Freezer Shelving (1 lt. Req’d).
1.
Metro Model NK3
a.
MetroSeal 4 tier high wire shelving units for freezer, consisting of the following shelves
and posts:
1) 8 ea. 2448NK3 shelves
4) 16 ea. 74PK posts
D.
Item No. 3 1.
Cooler Shelving (1 lt. Req'd).
Metro Model NK3
a.
MetroSeal 4 tier high wire shelving units for cooler, consisting of the following shelves and
posts:
1)
2)
3)
E.
Item No. 4 1.
b.
Item No. 5 1.
Cold Food Prep Cooler (1 Req'd).
Bally Refrigerated Boxes Model CUSTOM
a.
F.
24 ea. 2448NK3 shelves
4 ea. 2436NK3 shelves
28 ea. 74PK posts
8’-8-1/2" x 15'-5" x 8'-6" high, size, shape and configuration as shown on plan. The interior
wall and ceiling panels to be stucco aluminum. The exterior to be stucco aluminum where
exposed and the balance to be .026 galvalume. Provide pre-fabricated rigidized aluminum
insulated floor panels with interior ramp. Insulation to be 4" urethane foamed in place in
walls, floor and ceiling panels. Door to be 36" x 78", hinged Super Door with s/s finish,
third hinge and diamond-plate kick panels, 32” high on interior and exterior of doors.
Furnish with 2 extra light fixtures. Provide embossed aluminum closure trim to 10’-0”
ceiling where exposed and angle trim where walk-in panels abut building walls.
Provide and install refrigeration system for cooler. Cooler system to be 1 HP, 208 volt
three phase electric, R-404a, pre-assembled remote, air cooled with air defrost timer,
liquid line drier, sight glass and shut-off valve, suction filter, mounted fused disconnect
switch, low profile evaporator coil, TXV valve, solenoid valve and room thermostat,
outdoor cover and low ambient kits. Condensing unit to be mounted on a curb on building
roof as directed by Architect. Curb to be constructed of heavy-gauge galvanized steel
which shall be welded together. Curb shall be sized to accommodate condensing unit,
approximately 38” x 32” x 12” high with flanged base.
Cooler Shelving (1 lt. Req'd)
Metro Model NK3
11 40 00 - 4
a.
MetroSeal 4 tier high wire shelving units for cooler, consisting of the following shelves and
posts:
1)
2)
3)
G.
Item No. 6 1.
Pot and Pan Shelving (1 lt. Req'd).
Metroseal 4 tier high shelving units, consisting of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Item No. 7 1.
4 ea. 2448NK3 shelves.
16 ea. 74PK posts.
Metro Model NK3
a.
H.
12 ea. 74UPK posts.
6 ea. 5M casters,
6 ea. 5MB casters.
Clean Dishtable (1 Req'd)
Eagle Group Model CDTR-72-14/3
a.
Spec-Master® Clean Dishtable, straight design, 72"L, for left-to-right operation, 14 gauge
type 304 stainless steel top, stainless steel tubular legs, crossrails, gussets & feet.
1)
Accessories:
a)
I.
Item No. 8 1.
Item No. 9 1.
Dishwasher Hood (1 Req'd)
Type II condensate canopy to include: single shell all 300 series stainless steel
construction. Hood shall have a 2" wide perimeter gutter with 1/2" diameter drain and
contain a stainless steel perforated duct protector. Hood to be 60" x 42" x 24" high and
include s/s trim panels to finished ceiling at front and ends.
Dishwasher (1 Req'd)
Hobart Model AM15T
a.
Dishwasher, Door Type, Tall Chamber, hot water/chemical sanitizing, 58-65 racks/hour,
straight-thru or corner, solid-state controls w/digital status, with booster heater, electric
tank heat, auto-fill, s/s tank, frame, doors & feet, 480/60/3, sheet pan rack, ENERGY
STAR®.
1)
Accessories:
a)
b)
c)
K.
Item No. 10 1.
4 ft E-111 Undershelving, 14/304 stainless steel
Avtec Model NCH-60-42
a.
J/
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
Drain water tempering kit
3/4" brass pressure regulator
Water hammer arrestor kit
Disposer (1 Req'd)
InSinkErator Model SS-200-18B-MSLV
11 40 00 - 5
a.
Complete Disposer Package, with 18" diameter bowl, 6 5/8" diameter inlet, with sleeve
guard and splash baffle, 2 HP motor, s/s construction, includes T&S B-0455 vacuum
breaker, solenoid valve, flow control valve, low voltage manual switch with line
disconnect, single direction, adjustable leg kit.
1)
Accessories:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
L.
Item No. 11 1.
Soiled Dishtable (1 Req'd)
Spec-Master® Soiled Dishtable, straight design, 72"L, for left-to-right operation, 8"H
backsplash,14gauge type 304 stainless steel top, rolled rim on front & side, stainless steel
tubular legs, crossrails, gussets and adjustable feet, NSF.
1)
Accessories:
a)
b)
c)
Item No. 12 1.
Hand Sink (4 Req'd)
Hand Sink, wall model, 14-3/4" x 18-7/8" with 7-1/2" backsplash, stainless steel
construction, requires splash mounted faucet, deep-drawn seamless design-positive drain,
NSF.
1)
Accessories:
a)
b)
Item No. 13 1.
1 ea E-41 Disposal provision package, includes weldment only for cone
furnished with Item #10, control panel bracket weldment, and holes for prerinse & anti-siphon vacuum breaker.
1 ea Scrap Trough, 5"W x 2"D, 1-1/2" center drain opening, removable
basket with handles, stainless steel construction.
4 ft E-111 Undershelving, 14/304 stainless steel
Eagle Group Model HSA-10
a.
N.
1 ea Standard height disposer body
480/60/3
1 ea Disposer throat guard, 6-5/8" opening only
1 ea T &S B-0133-B Prerinse Unit, wall mount. base faucet with spring
check cart. & lever handles, 2" diameter flanges with 1/2" NPT female
eccentric flanged inlets, 35-1/2"H, 15" overhang, 8-1/4" clear, 18" riser, B0107 spray valve, B-0044-H flex stainless steel hose, 6" wall bracket.
1 ea T&S B-0230-K Installation Kit, 1/2" NPT nipple, lock nut and washer,
short E1-1/2" NPT female x male.
Eagle Group Model SDTL-72-14/3
a.
M.
4 ea Standard Gooseneck Faucet, with wrist handles splash mount, 4" O.C.,
NSF.
4 ea Left and right side splashes.
Three Compartment Sink (1 Req'd)
Eagle Group Model 314-24-3-24-SL
a.
Sink, Three Compartment, 24" double drainboards, 24" front-to-back x 24"W
compartments, 14"D, 9-1/2" backsplash, stainless steel open frame base with side
crossrails, 16/304 stainless steel, NSF.
11 40 00 - 6
1)
Accessories:
a)
b)
O.
Item No. 14 1.
Cook’s Table (2 Req'd).
Spec-Master® Work Table, 36"W x 72"L, 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel top with rolled
edges front & back, square turndown ends, 18 gauge stainless steel undershelf, 1-5/8" O.D.
16 gauge stainless steel legs, adjustable stainless steel feet, Uni-Lok® system, NSF.
1)
Accessories:
a)
b)
c)
Item No. 15 1.
Six Burner Range (1 Req'd).
Endurance™ Restaurant Range, 36", gas, (6) 30,000 BTU burners with lift-off burner
heads, 27" deep standard oven base, s/s front, sides, backriser & lift-off high shelf, fully
mig welded chassis, 215,000 BTU, CSA, NSF.
1)
Accessories:
a)
b)
c)
Item No. 16 1.
2 ea E18 Duplex receptacle and mounting plate (under table).
2 ea 502946 Drawer Assembly, 20", includes housing, drawer pan, drawer
front, glides and roller slides, type 430 stainless steel, NSF complete.
8 ea 313835 Flanged Bullet Feet, stainless steel
Vulcan Hart Model 36S-6B
a.
Q.
3 ea 336002-TB Twist Handle Drain, 2" NPS connection with twist handle
bracket.
2 ea T&S B-0231-CC Sink Mixing Faucet, with 12" swing nozzle, wall
mounted, 8" centers on sink faucet with 1/2" IPS CC male inlets, lever
handles.
Eagle Group Model T3672SE
a.
P.
1 ea Natural gas.
1 ea RR4 Casters (set of 4).
1 ea Dormont 1675KITS48 Safety System Moveable Gas Connector Kit,
3/4" inside dia., 48" long, covered with stainless steel braid, coated with blue
antimicrobial PVC, 1 SnapFast™ QD, 1 SwivelMAX™, 1 full port valve, 1
elbow, coiled restraining cable with hardware, limited lifetime warranty.
Tilting Skillet (2 Req'd)
Vulcan Hart Model VG40
a.
Braising Pan, Gas, 40-gallon capacity, 46" wide open base, manual tilt, 9" deep s/s pan
with gallon markings, pouring lip & removable strainer, spring assist cover with drip edge,
pan holder, thermostatic control, includes L faucet bracket, electric ignition, 12" s/s legs
with adjustable flanged feet, 120,000 BTU.
1)
Accessories:
a)
b)
c)
d)
2 ea Natural gas, over 2,000 ft. MUST specify elevation
2 ea 120v/60/1, 300w for controls, standard
2 ea Motor driven pan lift
2 ea DOUBLE Pantry Deck-Mount Faucet, 12" swivel spout, includes 4"
and 12" riser, NSF and Lead Reduction Compliant
11 40 00 - 7
e)
R.
Item No. 17 1.
Item No. 18 1.
Floor Trough (2 Req'd)
Floor Trough, 24" x 36", anti-splash, with yellow fiberglass grating.
Double Deck Convection Oven (3 Req'd)
Vulcan Hart Model VC44GD
a.
Convection Oven, Gas, double-deck, standard depth, solid state controls, electronic spark
igniters, stainless steel front, top and sides, s/s doors with windows, 44,000 BTU each
section.
1)
Accessories:
a)
b)
c)
d)
T.
Item No. 19 1.
Convection Oven- Existing, By Owner (1 Req'd).
Existing Garland double stack convection ovens to be relocated from current location at
322 E. Hamilton to new site by FSEC.
1)
Provide the following accessories:
a)
b)
Item No. 20 1.
2.
3 ea Natural gas, specify elevation if over 2,000 ft.
3 ea (2) 115v/1ph, 1/2 HP, 9.0 amps, 6' cords & plugs standard.
3 ea Casters in lieu of standard legs.
OWNER EXISTING
a.
U.
Eagle Group Model ASFT-2436-FG
a.
S.
1 ea Set of Casters, 2 with locking brakes.
Fryer (NOT IN BASE BID) (1 Req'd).
This item is not included in base bid but in the Schedule of Alternates as Alternate No. 4.
Pitco Frialator Model 1-SF-SG18-S
a.
Solstice Prepackaged Fryer System w/ Solstice SoloFilter System, gas, (1) 70 - 90 lb oil
capacity full tank, millivolt control, s/s tank, front & sides, under-fryer drawer filtration,
140,000 BTU (-F), CSA, NSF, CE.
1)
Accessories:
a)
b)
1 ea Natural gas.
1 ea 115v/60/1, 7.0 amps, 1/3 hp, NEMA 5-15P (filter system).
11 40 00 - 8
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
V.
Item No. 21 1.
Item No. 22 1.
Item No. 23 1.
Item No. 24 1.
(FUTURE, N.I.C.)
Existing Steamer (1 Req'd)
Existing double stack steamers with stand to be relocated from current location at 322 E.
Hamilton to new site by FSEC.
Exhaust Hood (1 lt. Req'd)
Avtec Model CH-120-60-4S
a.
Y.
Steam Kettle (Future) (1 Req'd).
AccuTemp Model S62401D060 DBL:
a.
X.
1 ea Casters, 10", rigid non-locking and locking, for (1) SE/SG fryer, with
SoloFilter.
1 pk Filter Paper, envelope, heavy duty, 18-1/2" x 20-1/2"
1 ea Filter powder, 120-8 oz. packets
1 ea Tank cover, 18 gauge light duty, for model SG18/18BNB &
SGM18x24, 65c+.
Groen Model AH/1E-40
a.
W.
(4ea) 10’-0" x 5'-0" x 24" high wall canopy hoods, 18 gauge s/s construction on all surfaces
with s/s grease filters, grease troughs and removable grease cups. Hoods UL listed to UL710 Type 1 standards and built to NFPA-96 requirements. Install hoods at 6’-8” above
floor where shown on plan. Provide hoods with 8” tall, 16” deep perforated front supply
plenums mounted to hood face. Provide (16) globe light fixtures with pre-wired light
switch on front of hood (4 per hood), exhaust temp sensors for exhaust fan interlock and
thermal interlock assembly. Provide hood over fryer and steam kettle with a fan switch.
Include S/S trim panels from top of hood to 10’-0” ceiling at front and ends of hoods, 22
gauge s/s wall panels 80” high with cap strips and divider bars at full height wall areas and
48” high panels at 12’-0” middle section. Provide 22 gauge s/s divider filler between
hoods at 12’-0” long middle section. Provide 22 gauge s/s divider filler between hoods at
12’-0” long 48” high wall section. Provide 16 gauge s/s wall cap, 7” x 120” to cover top of
wall opening at 48” high wall section and 22 gauge s/s wall caps, 7” x 32” to cover sides
of wall opening.
Fire Supression System (1 lt. REQ'D.
Ansul Fire Protection Model R-102
a.
Fire Suppression System installed in exhaust hoods. Shall be a liquid chemical fire
protection system with extinguisher nozzles for duct, plenum and surface protection as
required. System shall incorporate an automan release, remote manual pull station, fusible
links, detectors, chemical tank, s/s cabinet and mechanically operated gas shut-off valve.
Run piping so that minimum amount is exposed. Exposed piping to be chrome plated.
System shall conform to all U.L. 300 requirements, local and state codes, NFPA #96 and
State Fire Marshall.
11 40 00 - 9
Z.
Item No. 25 1.
Work Table (2 Req'd)
Eagle Group Model T3672SE
a.
Spec-Master® Work Table, 36"W x 72"L, 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel top with rolled
edges front & back, square turndown ends, 18 gauge stainless steel undershelf, 1-5/8" O.D.
16 gauge stainless steel legs, adjustable stainless steel feet, Uni-Lok® system, NSF.
1)
Accessories:
a)
AA.
Item No. 26 1.
Item No. 27 1.
Existing 60 Qt. Mixer (1 Req'd).
Existing mixer to be relocated from current location at 322 E. Hamilton to new site by
FSEC.
Work Table (1 Req'd).
Eagle Group Model T3072SE-BS:
a.
Spec-Master® Work Table, 30"W x 72"L, 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel top with 4-1/2"
backsplash, rolled front edge, square turndown ends, 18 gauge stainless steel undershelf, 15/8" O.D. 16 gauge stainless steel legs, adjustable stainless steel feet, Uni-Lok® system.
1)
Accessories:
a)
b)
CC.
Item No. 28 1.
Item No. 29 1.
1 ea 502946 Drawer, 20", with complete enclosed assembly.
1 ea SWS1272-16/3 Snap-n-Slide™ Wall Shelf, 12" x 72", 1-1/2" upturn on
rear and ends, 1-1/2" roll on front edge, 12" width, 16 gauge type 304
stainless steel, NSF.
Existing Slicer with Stand (1 Req'd).
Hobart Model 1712RE:
a.
DD
2 ea 502946 Drawer Assembly, 20", includes housing, drawer pan, drawer
front, glides and roller slides, type 430 stainless steel, NSF complete.
Hobart Model H-600
a.
BB.
Existing slicer and stand to be relocated from current location at 322 E. Hamilton to new
site by FSEC.
Prep Table with Sinks (1 Req'd).
Eagle Group Model T30132SEM-BS:
a.
Spec-Master® Work Table, 30"W x 134"L, 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel top with 41/2" backsplash, boxed marine edge front and ends, 18 gauge stainless steel undershelf, 15/8" O.D. 16 gauge stainless steel legs, adjustable stainless steel feet, Uni-Lok® system.
1)
Accessories:
a)
b)
2 ea FNWNF-20-20-10-1 Sink, 20” x 20” x 10” bowl, for 30”W tables
factory welded into top where shown on plan.
2 ea 336002 Twist Handle Drain, 2” IPS connection.
11 40 00 - 10
c)
d)
EE.
Item No. 30 1.
Item No. 31 1.
Item No. 32 1.
Item No. 33 1.
Existing carts to be relocated by owner.
Existing S/S Cart (1 Req'd).
Existing cart to be relocated by owner.
Existing Hot Food Cabinets (3 Req'd).
OWNER EXISTING
a.
HH.
Existing Utility Carts (4 Req'd).
OWNER EXISTING
a.
GG.
Existing hot food cabinets (1 ea. USECO HP-6A-LX cabinet and two FEW UHS-12 and
PHU-12 cabinets) to be relocated from current location at 322 E. Hamilton to new site by
FSEC.
Heated Pass-Thru Cabinet (1 Req'd).
Traulsen Model AHF332WP-FHS:
a.
Spec-Line Heated Cabinet, Pass-Thru, Three-Section, stainless steel exterior, aluminum
interior, standard depth cabinet, full-height doors, (3) chrome plated adjustable shelves per
section, INTELA-TRAUL™ microprocessor controls, 6” adjustable s/s legs, NSF, UL,
ENERGY STAR®.
1)
Accessories:
a)
b)
c)
d)
II.
Item No. 34 1.
Item No. 35 1.
1 ea 208/115v/60/1 ph, 15.5 amps, standard.
1 ea Thermometer side: Left door hinged left/center and right doors hinged
right, standard.
1 ea Rear: left door hinged left/center and right doors hinged right,
standard.
3 ea. Additional plated shelf.
Existing Utility Carts (2 Req'd).
OWNER EXISTING
a.
JJ.
1 ea T&S B-0221-CC Deck Mixing Faucet, with swing nozzle, 12” swing
nozzle, 8” centers on deck faucet with ½” IPS CC mail inlets, lever handles.
2 ea. SWS1560-16/3 Snap-n-Slide™ Wall Shelf, 15" x 60", 1-1/2" upturn on
rear and ends, 1-1/2" roll on front edge, 15" width, 16 gauge type 304
stainless steel, NSF.
OWNER EXISTING
a.
FF.
Existing carts to be relocated by owner.
Hot Food Tables (2 Req'd).
Randell Model 3514-240:
11 40 00 - 11
a.
Hot Food Table, electric, 240V, 63”L, 30”D, 36”H, (4) 12”x20” open wells, stationary
modular, open shelf base, s/s top and ends, full length 8”D NSF workboard & s/s 7”D plate
shelf, 6” adjustable legs.
1)
Accessories:
a)
b)
c)
d)
KK.
Item No. 36 1.
Item No. 37 1.
MM. Item No. 38 -
Item No. 39 1.
N.I.C. – Furnished by owner.
Existing Platform Dollies (6 Req'd).
Existing dollies to be relocated by owner.
Existing Milk Coolers (2 Req'd).
Beverage Air Model ST58N
a.
NN.
Hot Food Packaging System (2 Req'd).
OWNER EXISTING
a.
1.
Existing milk coolers to be relocated from current location at 322 E. Hamilton to new site
by FSEC.
Milk Cooler (2 Req'd).
Beverage Air Model ST58N-W:
a.
School Milk Cooler, normal temp, 58” W, 31-1/2” D, 24.0 cu. Ft., dual access, flat top
carton capacities, (1368) 1/3 qt., (1539) 1/2 pt., case capacities, (16) 13” x 13” x 11”, white
exterior, galvanized interior, with s/s doors, 4” heavy duty casters, (2) with brakes, 1/3 hp,
UL, cUL, UL-EPH, NSF, MADE IN USA.
1)
Accessories:
a)
b)
OO.
Item No. 40 1.
2 ea 208V/60/1-ph, 3.46 kw, 16.64 amps, NEMA 6-30P (4 x 1150 watt
elements).
2 ea Caster, 6” for 35-1/2” work height.
2 ea Overshelf, deck mount, single tier 63”
2 ea. Spillage Plan, aluminum, for 3500 series units (set of 4).
Oliver Model 1908 E
a.
LL.
2 ea 115v/60/1-ph, 7.5 amps, standard.
2 ea 4” Heavy duty casters, (2) w/brakes, standard.
Staging Cooler (1 Req'd).
Bally Refrigerated Boxes Model CUSTOM
a.
6’-9-1/2" x 14'-5-1/2" x 8'-6" high, size, shape and configuration as shown on plan. The
interior wall and ceiling panels to be stucco aluminum. The exterior to be stucco aluminum
where exposed and the balance to be .026 galvalume. Provide pre-fabricated rigidized
aluminum insulated floor panels with interior ramp. Insulation to be 4" urethane foamed in
place in walls, floor and ceiling panels. Door to be 36" x 78", hinged Super Door with s/s
finish, third hinge and diamond-plate kick panels, 32” high on interior and exterior of
doors. Furnish with 2 extra light fixtures. Provide embossed aluminum closure trim to
11 40 00 - 12
10’-0” ceiling where exposed and angle trim where walk-in panels abut building walls.
Wall to have cut-out where shown for 6 glass door line-up.
1)
Accessories:
a)
b.
PP.
Provide and install refrigeration system for cooler. Cooler system to be 1-1/2 HP, 208 volt
three phase electric, R-404a, pre-assembled remote, air cooled with air defrost timer, liquid
line drier, sight glass and shut-off valve, suction filter, mounted fused disconnect switch,
low profile evaporator coil, TXV valve, solenoid valve and room thermostat, outdoor cover
and low ambient kits. Condensing unit to be mounted on a curb on building roof as
directed by Architect. Curb to be constructed of heavy-gauge galvanized steel which shall
be welded together. Curb shall be sized to accommodate condensing unit, approximately
38” x 32” x 12” high with flanged base.
Item No. 40A - Existing Staging Refrigerators (NOT IN BASE BID) (2 Req'd).
1.
ColdTech USA Model CFD-3R
a.
QQ.
Existing refrigerators to be relocated from current location at 322 E. Hamilton to new site
by FSEC.
Item No. 40B - New Staging Refrigerators (NOT IN BASE BID) (2 Req'd).
1.
True Food Service Equipment Model T-72:
a.
Refrigerator, Reach-in, three-section, (9) shelves, stainless steel front & exterior, aluminum
ends, white aluminum interior with stainless steel floor, (3) s/s hinged doors with locks,
dial thermometer, 4" castors, 1/2 HP, 115v/60/1-ph, NEMA 5-15P, 9.6 amps, ENERGY
STAR®, MADE IN USA.
1)
Accessories:
a)
b)
c)
d)
RR.
Item No. 41 1.
Item No. 42 1.
2 ea Self-contained refrigeration standard.
2 ea 4” Swivel castors, standard (adds 5” to OA height).
2 ea Left door hinged left, center & right doors hinged right, standard.
6 ea. Additional white wire shelf
Existing Cooler Shelving (3 Req'd).
OWNER EXISTING
a.
SS.
1 ea Anthony 101 normal temp 6-door line up, 2 frames, 26” x 75”,
reversible door, two-pane non-heated glass, door rail heaters. (30) 27” deep
white or black epoxy coated shelves with galvanized steel posts and shelf
brackets, standard T8 pre-wired light fixtures and (2) energy smart
controllers.
Existing 18:” x 42” Amco shelving racks to be relocated by owner.
Cold Food Packaging System (2 Req'd).
Oliver Model 1908 E
a.
N.I.C. – Furnished by owner.
11 40 00 - 13
TT.
Item No. 43 1.
Cold Prep Table (2 Req'd).
Eagle Group Equipment Model T30120SE:
a.
Spec-Master® Work Table, 30"W x 120"L, 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel top with
rolled edges front & back, square turndown ends, 18 gauge stainless steel undershelf, 15/8" O.D. 16 gauge stainless steel legs, adjustable stainless steel feet, Uni-Lok® system,
NSF.
1)
Accessories:
a)
UU.
Item No. 44 1.
Item No. 45 1.
Existing Shelving Racks (2 Req'd).
Existing 18” x 48” x 5tier shelving racks to be relocated by owner.
Work Table (1 Req'd).
Eagle Group Equipment Model T3072SE-BS:
a.
Spec-Master® Work Table, 30"W x 72"L, 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel top with 4-1/2”
backsplash, rolled front edge, square turndown ends, 18 gauge stainless steel undershelf, 15/8" O.D. 16 gauge stainless steel legs, adjustable stainless steel feet, Uni-Lok® system.
1)
Accessories:
a)
WW. Item No. 46 1.
Prep Sink (1 Req'd).
Sink, One Compartment, no drainboards, 24" front-to-back x 24"W compartment, 14"D, 91/2" backsplash, galvanized open frame base with side crossrails, 16/304 stainless steel,
NSF.
1)
Accessories:
a)
b)
Item No. 47 1.
Item No. 48 1.
1 ea 336002 Twist Handle Drain, 2” IPS connection.
1 ea. T&S B-0231-CC Sink Mixing Faucet, with 12” swing nozzle, wall
mounted, 8” centers on sink faucet with 1/2” IPS CC male inlets, lever
handles.
Waste Baskets (4 Req'd).
OWNER PROVIDED
a.
YY.
1 ea 502946 Drawer, 20”, with complete enclosed assembly.
Eagle Group Model 314-24-1:
a.
XX.
2 st CAH6-SB Table Casters, 5” diameter, resilient tread, three swivel and
three with brakes (set of six), 200 lb weight capacity per caster, zinc.
OWNER EXISTING
a.
VV.
By Owner, N.I.C.
Iced Maker (NOT IN BASE BID) (1 Req'd).
11 40 00 - 14
2.
Manitowoc Model ID-0302A
a.
Indigo™ Series Ice Maker, cube-style, air-cooled, self-contained condenser, up to 310-lb
approximately/24 hours, stainless steel finish, dice size cubes, ENERGY STAR®
Qualified.
1)
Accessories:
a)
b)
c)
d)
ZZ.
Item No. 49 1.
AAA. Item No. 50 -
BBB. Item No. 51 -
CCC. Item No. 52 -
DDD. Item No. 53 -
(FUTURE, N.I.C).
Existing Conveyor (1 Req'd).
Existing 12’-0” long belt conveyor to be relocated from current location at 322 E. Hamilton
to new site by FSEC.
Existing Dunnage Racks (4 Req'd).
Existing Cambro dunnage racks to be relocated by owner.
OWNER EXISTING
a)
EEE. Item No. 54 1.
Blast Chiller/Freezer (Future) (1 Req'd).
OWNER EXISTING
a.
1.
Metro Wire Super Erecta Shelving racks, 24” x 48” x 4 tier high with 74P posts.
OWNER EXISTING
a.
1.
Chemical Storage Shelving Racks (2 Req'd).
American Panel Corporation Model AP10BCF100-2
a.
1.
1 ea (-161) 115v/60/1 ph, std. 10.8 amps.
1 ea. Ice Bin, w/top-hinged front-opening door, approximately 150 lb. ice
storage capacity, for top-mounted ice maker, stainless steel exterior.
1 ea. 6” adjustable stainless steel legs, std.
1 ea. Everpure EV9324-01 INSURICE 2000 Single System, 1/2 micron
precoat filtration, (1) I2000 cartridge, w/self-contained scale inhibitor feed,
for cubers up to 750 lbs/day or flakers up to 1,500 lbs/day, pressure gauge,
flushing valve, flow rate: 1.67 gpm.
Metro Model BR SERIES
a.
1.
OWNER EXISTING
a.
FFF. Item No. 55 -
11 40 00 - 15
1.
OWNER EXISTING
a.
GGG. Item No. 56 1.
HHH. Item No. 57 -
Item No. 58 1.
JJJ.
2.2
Existing Metro portable dunnage racks to be relocated by owner.
Pantry Shelving (N.I.C.) (1 lt. Req'd).
N.I.C., PROVIDED BY ARCHITECTURAL TRADES
Item No. 59 1.
Existing Portable Dunnage Racks (14 Req'd).
OWNER EXISTING
a.
III.
OWNER EXISTING
a.
1.
Field Erection Labor.
Provide labor and materials necessary to deliver, uncrate, assemble and install equipment as
outlined in the General Specifications including the relocation of equipment called out in the
itemized specifications. Includes installation of exhaust hoods with s/s wall panels and closure
trim. Include all required permits. Furnish labor for erection of walk-in cooler/freezer boxes,
hanging of coils, piping and insulation of refrigeration lines for all remote systems, setting of
condensing units on building roof, charging of system, start up and adjustments. Include
installation of drain lines for evaporator coils and heat tape as required.
A.
Installation Accessories, General: NSF certified for end-use application indicated.
B.
Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; silicone. Type S (single component), Grade NS (nonsag),
Class 25, Use NT (nontraffic) related to exposure, and Use M, G, A, or O as applicable to joint substrates
indicated.
1.
Public Health and Safety Requirements.
a.
b.
2.
2.3
Sealant is certified for compliance with NSF standards for end-use application indicated.
Washed and cured sealant complies with the FDA/s regulations for use in areas that come
in contact with food.
Cylindrical Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type C, closed-cell polyethylene, in diameter
greater than joint width.
FINISHES
A.
Stainless-Steel Finishes:
1.
2.
Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.
11 40 00 - 16
a.
b.
B
Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign
matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
Powder-Coat Finishes: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply manufacturer's
standard, baked-polymer, thermosetting powder finish. Comply with resin manufacturer's written
instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install foodservice equipment level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
B.
Provide cutouts in equipment, neatly formed, where required to run service lines through
equipment to make final connections.
Complete equipment assembly where field assembly is required.
1.
2.
Provide closed butt and contact joints that do not require a filler.
Grind field welds on stainless-steel equipment until smooth and polish to match adjacent finish.
C.
Install equipment with access and maintenance clearances that comply with manufacturer's written
installation instructions and with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Install cabinets and similar equipment on bases in a bed of sealant.
E.
Install closure-trim strips and similar items requiring fasteners in a bed of sealant.
F.
Install joint sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint backing
unless otherwise indicated. Produce airtight, watertight, vermin-proof, sanitary joints.
3.2
RELATED WORK BY OTHERS
A.
In general, all utility rough-ins and final connections, as well as certain other special work which is listed
hereinafter, will be performed by others in accordance with the following detailed requirements.
B.
The K.E.C. shall furnish the installing trades with all information and assistance required for the proper
installation of all equipment and/or components.
C.
The work to be done by the Electrical Contractor relating to equipment in this section, unless noted
otherwise on the drawings, shall include, but not limited to, the following:
1.
General
a.
b.
c.
Rough-in electrical service through walls, floors and/or ceiling and run conduit and
conductors from the rough in and make the connections to an approved terminal block,
terminal panel, or junction box on the equipment as furnished by the K.E.C. The K.E.C. to
coordinate the work so as to make all final connections accessible.
Furnish and install and electrical outlets in walls, floors, and ceiling. Where plug-in
receptacles are shown, the K.E.C. shall be responsible for all work beyond the receptacle.
Furnish and install disconnect switches as required for the equipment in accordance with
the electrical code.
11 40 00 - 17
d.
2.
b.
Furnish and install shunt trips and/or power contactors with 120 volt coils with contact
ratings matching the cooking appliances under the range hood ventilator. Wire from the
micro-switch/relay on the fire control system chemical tanks to the power contactors/shunt
trips.
Wire from the micro-switch/relay on the fire control chemical tanks to the electrically
operated automatic gas shut-off valve and resent station.
Walk-in Cooler/Freezer
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
Wire from rough-in thru the disposer control panel and/or components to disposer motor.
Fire Control System
a.
4.
Furnish and install all conduit and conductors between remote control panels and
equipment.
Disposer
a.
3.
Wire from the timer mounted on compressor rack to the low temperature unit cooler coil
mounted in the freezer compartment all as furnished by the K.E.C.
Wire from junction box on unit cooler coils to room temperature thermostats and solenoid
valve all as furnished by the K.E.C.
Wire from the pre-wired lights and switch assembly to the additional ceiling lights all as
furnished by the K.E.C.
Wire from the junction box on top of the cooler/freezer ceiling to the unit cooler coils all as
furnished by the K.E.C.
The work to be performed by the Mechanical Contractor and/or Plumbing Contractor relating to the
equipment in this section, unless noted otherwise on the drawings, shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
1.
General
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Booster Heater
a.
3.
Rough-in waste, steam, gas and water lines through the walls, floors and ceilings as shown
on the drawings. Run waste lines from the rough-in and make the final connections on the
equipment. Provide all traps and manifold and interconnect sink drains where shown. Run
supply lines from the rough-in and make the connections to the equipment. Provide all
traps, strainers, valves, and vents required for proper installation.
Rough-in exhaust systems through ceilings, floors and walls as shown on the drawings.
Extend ducts to the flange connection or connector collars on the canopy/ventilator and
make the connection thereto.
Install stainless steel or chrome plated brass excutchions or flanges for utility lines which
extend through equipment.
Install faucets, pre-rinse units, hose stations, pot fillers, vacuum breakers, check valves and
flow control valves as furnished by the K.E.C.
Install pressure reducing valves, safety relief valves, combination dial
thermometer/pressure gauges, shock stops, strainers, and other components as furnished by
the K.E.C. Connect the hot water outlet on booster to final rinse connection on washer.
Refer to booster piping diagram.
Dishwashers
a.
Install water pressure reducing valves and vacuum breakers as furnished by the K.E.c.
11 40 00 - 18
4.
Disposer
a.
5.
Furnish and install all piping and connect water supply through the disposer control panel
and to the scrap trough end water inlets and to the auxiliary inlet on the disposer. Install
vacuum breakers and valves as furnished by the K.E.C. Refer to dishtable/disposer piping
diagram.
The work to be done by various other trades relating to equipment in this section, unless noted otherwise
on the drawings, shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.
Walk-In Cooler/Freezer
a.
2.
Provide a pit for floor insulation and curb as furnished and installed by the K.E.C. Over the
insulation furnish and install the concrete and finished flooring.
General
a.
b.
3.3
Install wall mounted hose stations and connect with all accessories as furnished by the
K.E.C.
Dishtable/Disposer
a.
E.
Furnish and install all piping and connect the disposer through the disposer control panel
with all components as furnished by the K.E.C. Refer to disposer piping diagram.
Hose Stations
a.
6.
Furnish and install all masonry or concrete bases and platforms.
Provide floor depressions, wall openings, recesses and holes through walls, floors and
ceilings required for piping ducts.
A.
After completing installation of equipment, repair damaged finishes.
B.
Clean and adjust equipment as required to produce ready-for-use condition.
C.
Protect equipment from damage during remainder of the construction period.
3.4
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain foodservice equipment.
11 40 00 - 19
SECTION 12 35 30 - MANUFACTURED CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
SUMMARY
A.
1.
2.
4.
B.
1.
1.3
Kitchen cabinets.
Plastic-laminate countertops and backsplashes.
Cabinet hardware.
Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for nonintegral sinks and plumbing fittings.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed; including visible surfaces in
open cabinets or behind glass doors.
B.
Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawers fronts, including interior faces of
doors and interiors and sides of drawers. Bottoms of wall cabinets are defined as “semiexposed”.
C.
Concealed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces not usually visible after installation; including sleepers, web
frames, dust panels, bottom of drawers, and ends of cabinets installed directly against and completely
concealed by walls or other cabinets. Tops of wall cabinets and utility cabinets are defined as
“concealed”.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
Cabinets.
Plastic-laminate countertops.
Cabinet hardware.
B.
Shop drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other
work. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, hardware, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining
countertops, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view.
D.
Samples for Verification:
MANUFACTURED CASEWORK
12 35 30 - 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.5
Plastic laminate for cabinet finish, 8 by 10 inches.
Thermoset decorative panels for cabinet interior finish, 8 by 10 inches.
Plastic laminate for countertops, 8 x 10 inches.
Exposed hardware, for each type of item.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Cabinets: Obtain cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, configurations, and finish material of cabinets by referencing
designated manufacturer’s catalog numbers. Other manufacturer’s cabinets of similar sizes and door and
drawer configurations, same finish material, and complying withe the Specifications may be considered.
Refer to Division 1 Section “Product Requirements”.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Conditions: Do not deliver or install casework until building is enclosed, wet-work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature above 55°F. Ambient relative
humidity must be maintained between 25-55% prior to delivery and through installation period.
B.
Established Dimensions: Where casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions
for areas where casework is to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to
established dimensions. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting.
C.
Field Measurements: Where casework is indicated to fit to existing construction, verify dimensions of
existing construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of casework.
B.
Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CABINET MATERIALS
A.
General:
1.
B.
Core: Particleboard, Grade M-3, according to ANSI-A208.1 - 1999.
Exposed Material:
1.
Plastic Laminate: Particleboard faced with high-pressure decorative laminate complying with
NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.
a.
Color, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from cabinet manufacturer’s full
range.
12 35 30 - 2
2.
PVC Edge Molding: Rigid PVC extrusions, through color with satin finish, 3 mm thick at doors
and drawer fronts, and 1 mm thick elsewhere.
a.
C.
Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally
fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Color: As selected by Architect from cabinet manufacturer’s full range.
Semi-exposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1.
D.
Provide material finished on both sides for shelves, dividers, drawer bodies, and other
components with two semi-exposed surfaces.
Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with
semi-exposed edges.
Colors: As selected by Architect from cabinet manufacturer’s full range.
Concealed Materials: Solid wood or plywood, of any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects
affecting strength or utility; particleboard; medium-density fiberboard; or hardwood.
CABINET HARDWARE
A.
General: Manufacturer’s standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, size, style, material, and
finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
B.
Pulls: Back-mounted decorative pulls, one per door or drawer, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer’s full range.
C.
Hinges: Fully concealed.
D.
Drawer Guides: Bottom mounted, epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent
rebound when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and complying with BHMA
A156.9, Type B05011 or B05091, rated for 100 lb, with full extension for file drawers.
E.
Locks, model # LK010 (where shown or noted only).
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Five disc tumbler cam locks with chrome plated steel face plate.
All locks keyed alike or keyed differently by room and master keyed. Shall permit a minimum of
166 keying options.
Lock core is removable with a control key, permitting owner to easily change lock arrangements
without tools.
Inactive door of base and wall cabinets shall be secured by using an elbow catch or a chain bolt for
tall cabinets.
COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A.
Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Formica Corp.
12 35 30 - 3
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.4
Lamin-Art.
Nevamar Company, LLC.
Panolam Industries International Incorporated.
Wilsonart International.
Pionite.
Grade: HGS
Grade for Backer Sheet: BKL>
Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from plastic-laminate manufacturer’s full
range.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M3.
CABINETS
A.
Basis of Design Product: The design for cabinets is based on Case Systems, Inc, (ph. 989-496-9510).
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product such as
TMI Systems Design Corporation, 800-456-6716 (Dealer in Grand Rapids - 616-301-8454) and Stevens
Industries Cabinet Company represented by C.R. Equipment, 517-882-2446. Approved manufacturers:
Primeway, Inc. (Kevin Walby – Ph: (248) 583-6922).
B.
Face Style: Flush overlay; door and drawer faces cover cabinet fronts with only enough space between
faces for operating clearance.
C.
Cabinet Style: Frameless.
D.
Door and Drawer Fronts: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick plastic-laminate-faced particleboard with PVC edge
banding.
E.
Exposed Cabinet End Finish: Plastic laminate.
F.
Cabinet End Construction: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick particleboard.
G.
Cabinet Tops and Bottoms: 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick particleboard or 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick plywood,
fully supported by and secured in rabbets in end panels, front frame (if any), and back rail.
H.
Back, Top, and Bottom Rails: 3/4-by-2-1/2-inch (19-by-63-mm) solid wood, interlocking with end panels
and rabbeted to receive top and bottom panels. Back rails secured under pressure with glue and with
mechanical fasteners.
I.
Wall-Hung-Unit Back Panels: 3/16-inch- (4.8-mm-) thick plywood fastened to read edge of end panels
and to top and bottom rails.
J.
Base-Unit Back Panels: 3/16-inch- (4.8-mm-) thick plywood fastened to rear edge of end panels and to
top and bottom rails.
K.
Base-Unit Back Panels: 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick plywood fastened to rear edge of end panels and to top
and bottom rails.
L.
Front Frame Drawer Rails: 3/4-by-1-1/4-inch (19-by-32-mm) solid wood mortised and fastened into face
frame.
M.
Front Frame Drawer Rails: 3/4-by-1-1/4-inch (19-by-32-mm) solid wood mortised and fastened into face
frame.
12 35 30 - 4
N.
Drawers: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body.
1.
2.
Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued dowels.
All drawer components shall be ½" thick M3 particleboard.
O.
Shelves: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick M3 engineered board core with balanced construction and have a 1
mm thick PVC front edge. Adjustable shelves 36" and over shall be 1 inch thick.
P.
Joinery: Rabbet backs flush into end panels and secure with concealed mechanical fasteners. C onnect
tops and bottoms of wall cabinets and bottoms and stretchers of base cabinets to ends and dividers with
mechanical fasteners. Rabbet tops, bottoms, and backs into end panels.
2.5
PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A.
Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front, cove (intersection of top with backsplash),
backsplash, and endsplash style:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Plastic Laminate Substrate: Particleboard not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick.
1.
2.
C.
Front: Self-edge.
Backsplash: Square edge without scribe.
Endsplash: Square edge without scribe.
For countertops at sinks and lavatories, use Grade M-3-Exterior-Grade particleboard or exteriorgrade plywood.
Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) at front, back, and ends with additional
layers of particleboard laminated to top.
Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet on underside of countertop substrate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces using concealed shims. Where
cabinets abut other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and
moldings in finish to match cabinet face.
B.
Install cabinets without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are aligned.
Complete the installation of hardware and accessories as indicated.
C.
Install cabinets and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m).
D.
Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing.
1.
E.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches (600
mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration into wood framing,
blocking, or hanging strips.
Fasten plastic laminate countertops by screwing through corner blocks in base units into underside of
countertop. Form seams using splines to align adjacent surfaces, and secure with glue and concealed
12 35 30 - 5
clamping devices designed for this purpose.
1.
3.2
Provide cutouts for sinks and lavatories, including holes for faucets and accessories, grommets, for
electrical wiring.
A.
Adjust cabinets and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate smoothly
without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Clean casework on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore
damaged or soiled areas.
12 35 30 - 6
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 210529 –HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all pipe hanging and support systems.
B.
1.
Division 21 Section “Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems.”
2.
Division 21 Section “Fire Protection System.”
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1.
ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
a.
b.
2.
MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society:
a.
b.
c.
3.
1.4
B31.1 - Power Piping.
B31.8 - Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems.
SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture.
SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application - 1996.
SP-90 - Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports.
NFPA – National Fire Protection Association:
a.
Standard 13 – Installation of Sprinkler Systems
DEFINITIONS
A.
Pipe restraint: Pipe supporting element which is designed to limit or direct pipe movement due to internal
static pressure, gravitational forces, frictional forces from hangers, rollers, and guides, and forces from
expansion compensation devices:
1.
Pipe restraints are not designed to restrain pipe movement caused by thermal expansion, shock or
surge.
B.
Pipe guide: A pipe restraint designed to direct pipe movement along a single axis.
C.
Pipe anchor: A pipe restraint designed to provide a static point about which pipe movement normally
occurs, by limiting the longitudinal and axial movement at that point.
D.
Other terms: As defined in MSS SP-90.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
210529 - 1
Genesee County CARD
1.5
DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIRMENTS
A.
Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or in these Specifications, this Contractor shall be responsible to
design and provide all pipe hangers, supports, restraints, braces, framing, etc., as required to comply with
all applicable building codes, ASME B31 and MSS SP-69.
B.
Comply with the requirements of Division 22 Section “Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control” for
vibration isolation of piping.
C.
Comply with the requirements of Division 21 Section “Fire Protection System” for pipe hangers and
supports for fire protection piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
The materials of all pipe hanging and supporting elements shall be in accordance with the latest
requirements of the ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31.1 and MSS Standard Practice MSS SP-58 and
MSS SP-69 except as supplemented or modified by the requirements of these Specifications.
B.
The material in contact with the pipe shall be compatible with the piping material so that neither shall have
a deteriorating action on the other.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Elcon.
B.
Michigan Hanger.
C.
Grinnell.
D.
Bergen.
E.
Hilti.
2.3
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
As indicated on the Drawings and described in these Specifications, in accordance with MSS SP-58.
B.
Refer to Part 3 of these Specifications for application of specific manufactured hanger and support types.
2.4
HANGER RODS
A.
Minimum rod diameters for rigid rod hangers shall be as shown in MSS SP-69 Table 4 (Minimum Rod
Diameter for Single Rigid Rod Hangers) and as indicated in Part 3 of these Specifications.
B.
Hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only. At hanger locations where lateral or axial movement is
anticipated, suitable linkage shall be provided to permit swing.
C.
Rod material must be compatible with hanger and comply with above. Do not field cut thread on
galvanized rod.
D.
Do not use perforated strap.
210529 - 2
Genesee County CARD
E.
Multiple supports:
1.
2.
2.5
Horizontal banks of pipe may be supported on a common base member without regard to the pipe
centerline elevation.
In the supporting of multiple pipe runs, provisions shall be made to keep the lines in their relative
lateral positions, using clamps or clips as required. Lines subject to thermal expansion shall be free
to roll axially or slide.
SADDLES AND SHIELDS
A.
All piping:
1.
2.
2.6
Saddle: MSS Type 39 (Grinnell #160-164).
Shield: MSS Type 40 (Grinnell #167) provide and install in accordance with Manufacturer's shield
size selection tables.
ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A.
Provide at all expansion loops and joints:
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.7
As indicated on the Drawings.
As required to maintain alignment.
In accordance with Expansion Joint Manufacturer's Association recommendations.
Equal to Grinnell #256, or #255 as necessary.
FABRICATED STEEL SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTS
A.
Provide as required:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Steel shapes and plates.
Bolts.
Welds.
Materials and fabrication in accordance with:
1.
2.
AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.
AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (except Section 4.2.1.).
C.
Design: Responsibility of Subcontractor, except as specifically indicated on Drawings.
D.
Paint all finished fabrications:
1.
2.
2.8
As specified in Division 9 Section “Painting.”
Color as directed by Owner.
BUILDING ATTACHMENTS
A.
As indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications.
B.
Concrete attachments:
1.
2.
3.
rovide galvanized finish for all attachments used in wet or potentially wet areas.
Provide stainless steel bolts and nuts in wet and potentially wet areas, including kitchen areas.
Poured concrete:
210529 - 3
Genesee County CARD
a.
b.
4.
2.
3.
4.
Steel W, I, or S shapes: MSS Type 23 clamp with retaining clip, (Grinnell Fig. 87) up to 2-inch; MSS
Type 28 (Grinnell Fig. 292) or MSS Type 21 (Grinnell Fig. 133, 134) above 2-inch.
Steel channel: MSS Type 20 universal channel clamp.
Bar joists: Steel washer plate (Grinnell Fig. 60).
Concrete: See "B" above.
Vertical piping:
1.
2.
E.
Use toggle bolt attachment as indicated on Drawings.
Alternatively, provide adhesive anchor, Hilti HY-20; or as approved.
Drilling is not permitted except where specifically approved by Engineer and coordinated with
precast Manufacturer to miss embedded, prestressed steel strands.
Horizontal piping:
1.
D.
Use fittings specifically designed for attachment to stems of precast tees.
Precast concrete plank:
a.
b.
c.
C.
Use cast-in-place inserts or bolted
surface mounted attachments, at Contractor’s option.
Expansion style anchors are not permitted on piping systems subject to vibration.
Precast concrete tees:
a.
b.
5.
Steel shapes: Welded brackets as approved by Engineer.
In the absence of a Specification for a particular type of attachment, furnish attachments comparable in type
and quality to that specified above for a similar situation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A.
General requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The selection of pipe hangers and supports shall be based on the overall design concept of the piping
system and any special requirements which may be called for in these Specifications or as indicated
on the Drawings. The support systems shall provide for, and control, the free or intended movement
of the piping including its movement in relation to that of the connected equipment. They shall
prevent excess stress resulting from the transfer of weight being introduced into the pipe or connected
equipment.
The selection of hangers and supports shall be made to provide the piping system with the degree of
control that its operating characteristics require.
The selection of hangers or supports will take into consideration the combined weight of the
supported systems, including system contents and test water.
Select and install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
system, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and facilitate action of expansion
joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units.
The spans in MSS SP-69 Table 3 do not apply where concentrated weights, such as valves or heavy
fittings, or where changes in direction of the piping occur between hangers.
Select all hangers and supports rated for the maximum potential loading with pipe full.
Select hangers for cold (less than 50 degrees F) piping service for installation over the insulation.
210529 - 4
Genesee County CARD
8.
Where significant, vertical movement of
pipe occurs at the hanger location a resilient support must be used:
a.
Selection of resilient supports shall be based on permissible load variations and effects on
adjacent equipment. Support selection for typical load variations are shown on MSS SP-69
Table 2 (Spring Support Selection). Load and movement calculations shall be made for the
proper selection of spring hangers.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system
Specification sections.
C.
Horizontal piping hangers and supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Specification sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Vertical piping clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system specification
sections, install the following types:
1.
E.
Extension pipe or riser clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN20
to DN500).
Hanger rod attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system specification
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.2
Adjustable steel clevis hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN15 to DN750).
Adjustable swivel split or solid ring hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN20 to DN200).
Adjustable steel band hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS
1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN200).
Adjustable band hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 8 (DN15 to DN200).
Adjustable swivel ring band hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
Steel turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy loads.
Steel clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 degree F (49 to 232 degree C) piping installations.
Swivel turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type II, split pipe rings.
Malleable iron sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building
attachments.
Steel weldless eye nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 degree F (49 to 232 degree C) piping
installations.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Pipe hanger and support installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports,
clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
B.
General:
1.
2.
3.
Adjust all components as required for proper operation and required pipe slope.
Double nut all support rods at hangers.
Location and routing:
a.
Install piping as indicated:
1)
On the Drawings.
210529 - 5
Genesee County CARD
2)
b.
4.
5.
On the reviewed Shop
Drawings.
Secure Engineer's approval for all pipe routing changes.
Coordinate with other trades for placement of concrete attachments prior to concrete pouring.
Install all items in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Support at valves: Provide additional supports at all valves in piping 4-inch and larger.
D.
Vertical risers:
1.
2.
Support independently from adjacent hangers on horizontal piping.
Cast iron waste, vent or drainage piping:
a.
b.
3.
Support at the base and at each floor level.
Support spacing not to exceed 15-foot centers.
Copper piping:
a.
b.
Support at the base and at 6-foot maximum centers for sizes 1-1/4-inch and smaller.
Pipes larger than 1-1/4-inch:
1)
2)
4.
Vertical threaded, welded or grooved steel piping:
a.
b.
5.
Support at 4-foot centers maximum for sizes 1-1/2-inch or smaller.
Support at the base and at 4-foot centers for all sizes larger than 1-1/2 inches.
Completely encircle covering and insulating material.
Horizontal runs:
1.
General:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
F.
Support at the base of the riser and at every other floor.
Maximum allowable unsupported piping length is 12 feet.
Plastic piping:
a.
b.
c.
E.
Supported at each floor level.
Not to exceed 10-foot centers.
Provide adequate supports for the loads with a factor of safety of at least 5 (400 pounds
minimum).
Provide protective shield at all hangers and rollers supporting plastic pipe and coated pipe.
Support spacing not to exceed MSS SP-69 Table 3, or the requirements for seismic restraint,
whichever is more stringent.
Hanger rod diameter shall not be less than the requirements of MSS SP-69 Table 4, or the
requirements for seismic restraint, whichever is more stringent.
Rollers: All piping systems designed to accommodate thermal expansion movement shall be
mounted on rollers.
Bar joists: Attachments to bar joists shall be made to top member and at panel points.
Fire protection systems:
1.
Hanger and supports for fire protection systems shall conform to the following standards published
by the National Fire Protection Association in the National Fire Codes for fixed extinguishing
equipment:
210529 - 6
Genesee County CARD
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
NFPA-11 - Foam Extinguishing Systems.
NFPA-12 - Carbon Dioxide Systems.
NFPA-13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
NFPA-14 - Standpipe and Hose Systems.
NFPA-15 - Water Spray Systems.
NFPA-16 - Foam Water Systems
NFPA-17 - Dry Chemical Extinguishing System.
Hangers in general are covered in NFPA-13. If the system is other than a standard water sprinkler
system, the applicable NFPA Standard shall also be consulted.
G.
Ductile iron piping: The size of hanger components shall be suitable for the O.D. of the pipe to be
supported.
H.
Cast iron soil piping:
1.
2.
3.3
The size of hanger components shall be suitable for the O.D. of the pipe to be supported.
Spacing shall comply with MSS SP-69 Table 3.
PIPE RESTRAINTS
A.
Provide adequate pipe restraints for all expansion or contraction of piping due to temperature change and/or
building expansion:
1.
2.
B.
Including, but not limited to, that indicated on the Drawings.
As instructed by Owner or Engineer.
Concrete work installed in connection with anchors or supports:
1.
Make with approved Portland Cement:
a.
At least 5-1/2 bags per cubic yard.
b.
Properly mixed with approved aggregate.
c. Attain a compression strength of not less than 3,000 psi at 28 days.
3.4
VIBRATION ELIMINATORS
A.
Provide as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the requirements of Division 21 Section
“Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control.”
B.
Install so as to cause minimum restraint to normal thermal movements.
3.5
INSULATION PROTECTION
A.
Provide protection saddle:
1.
2.
3.
Equal to insulation thickness.
At each hanger.
For all insulated piping systems where longitudinal expansion exceeds 1-inch per 100 feet.
B.
Provide preservative treated wood block "saddle" for all insulated domestic cold water piping systems
larger than 3-inch IPS. Grinnell Fig. #159 is also acceptable.
C.
Provide insulation protection shield:
1.
At each hanger for all "cold" (less than 50 degrees F) piping services.
210529 - 7
Genesee County CARD
2.
In accordance with the following table:
Pipe Size (IPS)
5" and Smaller
6" to 12"
3.
Shield Gage
16
12
Length
12"
16"
Installed as follows:
a.
b.
c.
3.6
Surround lower covering.
Straddle equidistant on hanger.
Flared at both ends as required to avoid damage to pipe covering, jacket and vapor barrier.
PAINTING
A.
Touchup: Cleaning and touchup of painting of field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas of shop
paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section “Painting.”
B.
Galvanized surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas. Apply galvanizing repair paint to
comply with ASTM A780.
END OF SECTION 210529
210529 - 8
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 211313 – WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the design, furnishing and installation of a fire protection system:
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.
C.
Wet pipe system with sprinklers.
Controls.
Inspector’s test stations.
Division 21Section “Fire Suppression.”
Division of Work
1.
2.
In accordance with the General Conditions, the Contractor is responsible for dividing the Work
among the Subcontractors and Suppliers and for selecting the Work to be performed by specific
trades.
The following are suggestions as to how the Work may be divided. (This is not a complete list of all
Work):
a.
Fire Protection Subcontractor:
1)
2)
3)
b.
Electrical Contractor:
1)
1.3
Prepare system design and layout.
Furnish and install all system piping and components including, but not necessarily
limited to, flow switches, valve supervisory switches, and air pressure switches.
Secure approvals, permits and pay all fees and costs to Authorities having Jurisdiction.
Provide all necessary wiring interface and wiring to the building fire alarm system
including, but not limited to, wiring of alarm bells, flow switches, valve supervisory
switches, and air pressure switches.
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
ANSI/ASME Standards:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
A17.1 – Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators and Moving Walks.
B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 150 and 300.
B16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings.
B16.25 – Buttwelding Ends
B36.10M – Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
211313 - 1
Genesee County CARD
2.
ANSI/AWWA Standards:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
1.4
13 – Installation of Fire Protection Systems.
14 – Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems.
24 – Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances.
25 - Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems.
1963 – Standard for Fire Hose Connections.
Underwriters Laboratories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
7.
C105 – Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe Systems.
C500 – Metal Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.
NFPA Standards:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
6.
A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless.
A126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.
A135 – Specifications for Electric Resistance Welded Pipe.
A181 - Forgings, Carbon Steel for General Purpose Piping.
A197 - Cupola Malleable Iron.
A234 – Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for moderate and Elecvated
Temperatures.
A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile.
A674 – Standard Practice for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe for Water or other
Liquids.
B75 – Specification for Seamless Copper Tube.
B88 - Specification for Seamless Copper Tube.
B251 – Specifications for general Requirements for Wrought Seamless Copper and copperAlloy Tube.
AWWA Standards:
a.
b.
5.
C104/A21.4 – Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron pipe and Fittings for Water
C110/A21.10 – Ductile Iron and Ggray-Iron Fittings, 3-inch through 48-inch, for Water and
other Liquids.
C111/A21.11 – Rubber Gasket joints for Ductile-Iron and gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
C150/A21.60 – Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron pipe.
C151/A21.51 – Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or Other Liquids.
ASTM Specifications:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
193 – Alarm valves for Fire Protection Service.
262 – Gate Valves for Fire Protection Service.
312 – Check valves for Fire Protection Service.
688 – Hose Valves Fire Protection Service.
753 – Alarm Accessories for Automatic Water-Supply control Valves Fire Protection Service.
789 – Indicator Posts for Fire Protection Service.
Additional references: Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM).
DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
System layout and design responsibility are included in the Work of this Section:
1.
2.
Details of construction, quantities, components and accessories indicated on the Drawings and in the
Specifications are minimum requirements.
Minimum design criteria are as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings.
211313 - 2
Genesee County CARD
3.
Confirm final design requirements with
the authority or authorities having jurisdiction:
a.
b.
4.
5.
b.
Indicate areas to be sprinklered.
Indicate primary water service location and size.
Indicate riser locations.
Complete system requirements are not indicated.
Sprinkler system layout:
1.
2.
D.
Sprinkler piping system shall consist of looped or gridded configurations.
Gridded configuration shall only be deigned according to hydraulic calculation.
Occupancy hazard fire control approach:
1.
Water demand requirements shall be determined from the occupancy hazard fire control approach in
accordance with NFPA 13:
a.
b.
2.
E.
The equipment and piping sizes and selections indicated on the Drawings have been
determined through the standard engineering practice and calculation methods based on the
best information available at the time that these documents were produced. A complete layout
and hydraulic analysis has not been done.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all assumptions and design elements used as
the basis of the preliminary design and to perform final calculations, sizing and selections as
necessary to comply with the performance criteria specified and with NFPA 13.
Intent of Drawings
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
The Owner’s fire insurance underwriter.
Government regulating authorities.
Any increase in system component requirements beyond these minimums that are determined by the
systems designer to be necessary to provide the functional intent and for a complete system shall not
be a basis for an increase in cost to the Owner.
Final design:
a.
B.
Special design approaches are allowed only in accordance with the provisions of NFPA 13.
See Drawings for water density requirements.
Occupancies or portions of occupancies shall be classified according to the quantity and
combustibility of contents, the expected rate of heat release, the total potential for heat release, the
heights of stockpiles, and the presence of flammable and combustible liquids.
Protection area limitations:
1.
Maximum coverage per occupancy hazard shall be as follows:
a.
b.
c.
Light hazard: 52,000 square feet.
Ordinary hazard: 52,000 square feet.
Extra hazard:
1)
2)
3)
Pipe schedule: 25,000 square feet.
Hydraulically calculated: 40,000 square feet.
Storage: high piled and other standards: 40,000 square feet.
211313 - 3
Genesee County CARD
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Refer to Division 1 Section “Submittal Log”.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications for fabrication and installation personnel:
1.
2.
Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Shop Drawings.
B.
System installation and components shall comply with NFPA 13.
C.
System testing shall comply with NFPA 25.
D.
Comply with the requirements of the following:
1.
2.
Owner’s insurer.
Local authorities having jurisdiction.
E.
Agency approvals: All components critical to operation or otherwise required by NFPA or the Owner’s
insurer shall be documented for compliance and with UL listing.
F.
Manufacturer's services: Submit Manufacturer's sworn statement that the equipment furnished complies
with this Specification.
1.7
A.
Receiving and storage:
1.
2.
All materials shall be delivered in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as
applicable.
Handle and store materials:
a.
In a manner which will prevent:
1)
2)
3)
b.
B.
In accordance with Manufacturer’s directions.
Rejected material and replacements:
1.
2.
1.8
Deterioration or damage.
Contamination with foreign matter. Each end of pipe shall be capped, plugged or taped.
Damage by weather or elements.
Reject damaged, deteriorated or contaminated material and immediately remove from the site.
Replace rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to the Owner.
A.
1.9
Contractor’s attention is called to ductwork, water and drain piping, and electrical systems. Coordinate
these systems to avoid conflict in elevations of the systems where same may cross each other.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents:
211313 - 4
Genesee County CARD
1.
Sprinkler cabinets:
a.
b.
Steel construction for wall mounting with painted finish and hinged cover.
Sized to contain a minimum of six spare sprinkler heads of each type used with wrenchs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE, FITTINGS AND HANGERS
A.
Underground pipe and fittings:
1.
Ductile iron pipe: ANSI A21.50 and A21.51:
a.
b.
2.
Joints:
a.
b.
3.
ANSI A21.11.
U.S. Pipe TR Flex restrained or equal.
Main line fittings:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Wall thickness: Class 52, except as indicated otherwise.
Cement mortar lining: ANSI A21.4.
Short bodied: ANSI A21.10.
Restrained joint with cement mortar lining: ANSI A21.11.
Working pressure: 250 psi.
Aboveground pipe and fittings:
1.
Piping:
a.
Steel pipe in accordance with ASTM A135 or ASTM A53.
1)
2)
Welded: Schedule 40.
Threaded or cut groove:
a)
b)
b.
2.
Schedule 40 for sizes less than 8 inches.
Schedule 30 for sizes 8 inches and larger.
Copper tube in accordance with ASTM B75 or B88.
Fittings:
a.
b.
Standard weight steel, butt weld type conforming to ANSI B16.9 and ASTM A234.
Screwed fittings:
1)
2)
c.
Permitted in pipe sizes 2” and less.
Conform to ANSI B16.3 and ASTM A197.
Extra heavy pattern r (required when pressures exceed 175 psi):
1)
2)
Standard weight cast iron fittings 2 inches and less are acceptable if pressure does not
exceed 300 psi.
Standard weight malleable iron fittings 6 inch and smaller are acceptable if pressures fo
not exceed 300 psi.
211313 - 5
Genesee County CARD
3)
4)
Grooved pipe couplings and
fittings as specified in Division 15 Section “Grooved piping Systems”.
Black iron fittings are acceptable on dry fire protection system with galvanized piping.
C.
Flexible connectors: Not allowed.
D.
Hangers and supports: Comply with the requirements of Division 15 Section “Pipe Hangers and Supports”
for selection of pipe hangers and supports.
2.2
SPRINKLER SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A.
Fittings:
1.
2.
3.
B.
UL listed with 175 psi minimum working pressure rating.
Materials compatible with piping material.
High pressure piping systems: 250 psig minimum working pressure fittings.
Sprinkler drain and alarm test fittings:
1.
Cast or ductile iron body with threded or locking lug inlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight
glass.
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Sprinkler branch line test fittings:
1.
2.
Brass body with threaded inlet, capped drain outlet, and threaded outlet for sprinkler.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
D.
Elkhart Brass Manufacturing Company.
Fire-End and Croker Corporation.
Potter-Roemer/ Fire Protection Division.
Sprinkler inspector’s test fitting:
1.
2.
Cast or ductile-iron housing with threaded inlet and drain outlet and sight glass.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
2.3
Manufacturers: Fire-End and Croker Corporation.
Tyco Fire Products.
Viking Corporation.
Victaulic Company of America.
AGF Manufacturing Company.
Triple R Specialty of Ajax, Inc.
Tyco Fire Products.
SPRINKLER HEADS
A.
UL listed with 175 psig minimum pressure rating.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Viking.
Reliable Corporation.
Tyco.
Victaulic.
Bulb:
211313 - 6
Genesee County CARD
1.
D.
Temperature rating of temperature activated color coded glass bulbs or fused link plates in
accordance with NFPA 13, or as dictated by the Authority having Jurisdiction.
Mounting and finish:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.4
In restroom areas, provide concealed type sprinklers with cover plate factory-finished in off-white
baked enamel.
In typical suspended accessible ceilings, provide semi-recessed style.
In areas without ceilings, provide upright heads with bronze finish.
In Storage Rooms, Janitor Rooms, Receiving Rooms and similar uses, heads may be bronze finished
pendant style.
Furnish and install sprinkler guards when sprinklers are subject to mechanical damage or when
ceiling is 7’-0” or less above finished floor.
ELO type sprinklers may be used where approved.
VALVES
A.
UL listed with 175 psi minimum working pressure rating; UL 262.
B.
Interior valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
C.
Grinnell.
Crane.
Hammond.
Nibco.
Milwaukee.
Clow.
2-1/2-inch and larger: Cast iron, flanged, IBBM gate or butterfly valves.
2-inches and less: bronze gate valves.
Sectional control valves:
1.
2.
3.
Manufacturer: East Jordan Iron Works Series A18; or equal.
Gate valve with non-rising stem, mechanical joint one end and flanged joint opposite end.
Provide three-section cast iron adjustable valve box and cover at grade.
D.
Backflow prevention devices: Comply with the requirements of Division 22 “Plumbing”.
E.
Swing Check Valves:
1.
2.
3.
2.5
Manufacturer: Viking model D-1 (2-1/2 inch), D-2 (4-inch); or equal by Clow, Crane, Grinnell,
Hammond or Stockham.
Bosses tapped:
a.
1/2-inch for 2-1/2-inch through 4-inch.
b.
3/4-inch for 6-inch through 8-inch sizes.
UL 312, ductile iron body, steel hand hole cover, stainless steel clapper, brass seat, rubber-faced
clapper, flanged or grooved end connections.
ALARMS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Potter Electric Signal.
2.
System Sensor.
211313 - 7
Genesee County CARD
3.
4.
5.
B.
Kennedy.
Viking.
Grinnell.
Flow Switches
1.
2.
C.
Furnished and wired by the Fire Alarm Subcontractor.
Mounted in the piping by the Fire Protection Contractor.
Valve Supervisory Switches
1.
2.
Comply with UL 753.
Furnished, mounted, and wired by the Fire Alarm Subcontractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
System layout:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Interferences
1.
2.
3.
3.2
The extent of the sprinkler system protection and the general arrangement of the piping shall be as
indicated on the approved shop drawings.
Deviations therefrom may be made as required by inspection authorities, insuring agencies, or as
required due to interference with other equipment, structural members, ducts and similar items, and
shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.
Provide additional heads as may be required for an approved system.
The distance from a sprinkler to wall shall not exceed one-half the allowable distance between
sprinklers.
The small room rule may be used as specified in NFPA 13.
Report discrepancies or conflicts as discovered to the Engineer.
Do not proceed with work until a satisfactory resolution is found.
No additional compensation will subsequently be made due to interferences occurring as a result on
Contractor’s lack of coordination, error, oversight or other cause in not properly establishing the
locations of all new or existing piping.
INSTALLATION
A.
Sprinkler Heads:
1.
Location:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Locate sprinkler heads in suspended ceiling symmetrically with lights, diffusers, and ceiling
tile layout. Conceal piping above ceilings.
Generally locate heads in the center of lay-in ceiling tiles.
Obtain Engineer’s approval of head locations prior to installation.
Sprinkler Head Coatings:
a.
Non-corrosive environments:
1)
Unless applied by the manufacturer, heads shall not be painted.
211313 - 8
Genesee County CARD
2)
B.
Conceal all piping in areas with ceilings and bulkheads; otherwise piping may be exposed.
Supports:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
4.
Make all joints using flexible fittings, including grooved, cut and plain end and quick fit style
with a machine specifically designed for the purpose.
Drainage
a.
b.
c.
5.
Support and install piping in accordance with NFPA 13.
Support piping from the building structure, except piping may be supported from ductwork
hangers that comply with NFPA 13.
Hanger spacing, rod size, and hanger spacing shall be per NFPA 13.
Support cross mains by at least one hanger between each two branch lines.
Support risers in buildings having ceilings over 25-feet high at each riser pipe section.
Cutting and grooving
a.
Install piping to allow for drainage.
Provide drains at base of risers, on valved sections, at fire department connections and at other
locations as required for complete drainage of systems.
Extend drain piping to spill over floor drain, hub outlet, mop sink, or other as approved.
Penetrations: Comply with the requirements of Division 15 Section “Mechanical Penetrations”.
Inspector’s Test Stations
1.
2.
3.3
If any heads are painted by
other than the sprinkler factory, then those heads shall be removed and replaced with new
heads.
Piping
1.
2.
C.
Furnish and install as required.
Pipe to building exterior or other location where water damage will not result.
PAINTING AND LABELING
A.
Exposed fire protection system piping, fittings and hangers will be painted by the Painting Contractor.
B.
Label piping and devices as specified in Division 22 Section “General Mechanical Provisions”. Comply
with OSHA “Safety Color Code for marking Physical Hazards”.
3.4
A.
Clean and test piping in accordance with Division 22 Section “Testing and Cleaning.”
211313 - 9
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 220200 – PLUMBING EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all materials, labor, equipment, supervision, fees,
and services incidental to proper completion of all plumbing system work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Domestic cold water system.
Domestic hot water system.
Interior waste and vent piping to 5'-0" outside building.
Cooling coil condensate drainage system.
Domestic water supply:
a.
b.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.3
Arrange and pay for connection to municipal water service.
Provide approved water meters and pay for all fees, permits, inspections, and tests relating to
the water meter installation. Provide separate meter and valving for irrigation.
Division 22 Section "Steel Pipe and Fittings."
Division 22 Section "Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings."
Division 22 Section "Plastic Pipe and Fittings."
Division 22 Section "Copper Pipe and Fittings."
Division 22 Section "Grooved Piping Systems."
Division 22 Section “Mechanical Penetrations.”
Division 22 Section “Valves.”
Division 22 Section “Pipe Hangers and Supports.”
Division 22 Section “Piping Insulation.”
Division 22 Section “Plumbing Fixtures and Trim.”
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
A112.19.2 - V.T. China Plumbing Fixtures.
A112.1.2 - Air Gaps in Plumbing Systems.
A112.21.1 - Floor Drains.
A112.21.2 - Roof Drains.
A112.36.2M - Cleanouts.
A112.26.1 - Water Hammer Arresters.
ASSE (American Society of Sanitary Engineering) Standards:
a.
b.
1001 - Pipe Applied Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers.
1003 - Water Pressure Reducing Valves.
PLUMBING EXECUTION
220200 - 1
Genesee County CARD
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
1.4
A53 - Steel Pipe, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
A181 - Carbon Steel Forgings for General Purpose Piping.
A194 - Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-Temperature
Service.
A234 - Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated
Temperatures.
A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength.
A395 - Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures.
A518 - Corrosion-Resistant High Silicon Iron Castings.
B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).
C76 - Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe.
C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
D2136 - Test Method for Coated Fabrics - Low Temperature Bend Test.
D2657 - Practice for Heat Fusion Joining of Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings.
D2665 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.
D2751 - Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
D3034 - Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
D4101 - Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion Materials.
F789 - Type PS-46 and PS-115 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Gravity Flow Sewer Pipe
and Fittings.
AWWA Standards:
a.
b.
5.
6.
1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.
1012 - Backflow Preventers with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent.
1013 - Reduced Pressure Principal Backflow Preventer.
1016 - Individual Thermostatic Pressure Balancing, and Combination Pressure Balancing and
Thermostatic Control Valves for Individual Fixture Fittings.
1017 - Temperature Actuated Mixing Valves for Hot Water Distribution Systems.
ASTM Standards:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
C500 - Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems.
M20 - Water Chlorination Principles and Practices.
PDI (Plumbing and Drainage Institute) Standard: WH-201 - Water Hammer Arresters.
ARI Standard: 1010 - Drinking Fountains and Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking Water Coolers.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Refer to Division 1 Section "Submittal Schedule."
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
2.
B.
Requirements of regulatory agencies:
1.
2.
All state and local codes and ordinances shall have jurisdiction.
All related electrical devices shall be housed in suitable enclosures as defined by the National
Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).
PLUMBING EXECUTION
220200 - 2
Genesee County CARD
3.
All gas-fired appliances and installation shall be in accordance with American Gas Association
(AGA) guidelines.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A.
Comply with the requirements of Division 22 Sections "Facility Water Distribution" and "Facility Sanitary
Drainage".
B.
Refer to schedules in Part 3 of this Specification for specific applications of pipe materials to plumbing
systems.
C.
Refer to Division 22 Section “Pipe Hangers and Supports” and the schedule in Part 3 of this Section for
Hanger and Support Requirements for Plumbing System Piping.
2.2
VALVES
A.
Above ground valves:
requirements.
Refer to Division 22 Section “Valves” for valve construction and material
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WATER SUPPLY SERVICE SYSTEM
A.
Description: Interconnect into water service main in the building as required. Furnish and install water
meters of size indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Fees, permits, inspection and tests: Pay for all fees, permits, inspections, and tests related to the water
meter installation.
C.
Pipe and fittings: Cast iron in accordance with Division 22 Section “Facility Water Distribution.”
3.2
DOMESTIC COLD AND HOT WATER SYSTEMS
A.
Description: Provide as indicated on the Drawings and as required to comply with all applicable codes and
regulations, complete system of piping, fittings, valves, auxiliaries and accessories as required to connect
cold and hot water to all items requiring cold or hot water.
B.
Pipe and fittings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Above grade: Type L and drawn copper in accordance with ASTM B88 and Division 15 Section
“Copper Pipe and Fittings.“ Exposed pipe and fittings at fixtures shall be chrome plated.
Below grade: Cast iron in accordance with Division 15 Section “Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings” or Type
K soft temper copper in accordance with ASTM B88 and Division 15 Section “Copper Pipe and
Fittings.”
Rolled grooved pipe may also be used for above grade installations of 2-1/2-inch and larger piping.
Provide unions at each screwed valve, unions, and at all points in the piping system where necessary
to facilitate dismantling.
Installation:
1.
All interior piping shall be run square and straight with the building.
PLUMBING EXECUTION
220200 - 3
Genesee County CARD
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Piping in finished areas shall be concealed within walls, chases, enclosures, etc.
Piping in exposed areas shall be run as high as possible within joists and beam spaces, or below the
floor as indicated on the Drawings.
Piping shall follow approved paths as shown or indicated on the Drawings. Connect to existing lines
where required or to equipment in an approved manner. Locate pipes, valves and equipment
accessible for maintenance, minimum obstruction of passage and work spaces.
Install drain valves at all low points in piping system.
Recirculation pumps:
1.
2.
3.3
Where indicated, furnish and install hot and tempered recirculating water systems; return to the cold
water side of the heater and provide a shutoff valve and union in each line. Special requirements as
detailed on the Drawings.
Provide supplemental angles, hangers and bracing required for the support of the equipment.
BUILDING STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
A.
3.4
Description: Furnish and install the storm drainage system as indicated on Drawings. System includes, but
is not necessarily limited to, the following items: Rain leaders, conductors, roof drains, cleanouts and
secondary overflow drains when required by authorities having jurisdiction.
BUILDING SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM
A.
Description: Furnish and install the entire building sanitary drainage system as indicated on the Drawings.
System includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following items: Waste and vent piping for all
plumbing, fixtures requiring same, floor drains, cleanouts.
B.
Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
3.5
General runs of sanitary sewer are indicated on Drawings diagrammatically and every bend, offset,
etc., is not necessarily indicated, all of which must be installed to properly drain all stacks, fixtures,
vents, etc.
Run horizontal waste lines at a minimum slope of 1/8-inch per foot.
Connections between mains and laterals shall be made with wyes and 1/8 bends.
Changes in direction shall be with long radius ells except in stacks where sanitary tees and short
radius 1/4 bends may be used in changes from horizontal to vertical.
Flash all vent stacks at the roof.
Cleanouts shall be installed where required by code and as indicated on the Drawings and specified
herein. They shall be accessibly located, set flush with finish surface or finish grade, and shall be
same nominal pipe size as line served, but no larger than 4 inches. Stainless steel cover plates
required for wall accessed cleanouts.
Provide cleanouts located in waterproof above grade floors with flashing flange and clamp device.
Flash with 60 mil PVC membrane minimum 4-foot square.
Furnish and install stack base fittings at the base of each riser set on a concrete or brick base on firm
soil. All vertical risers shall be supported at floors.
Pitch vent lines to gravity drain to waste pipe.
COOLING COIL CONDENSATE DRAINAGE SYSTEM
A.
Each above-the-ceiling cooling unit shall have its condensate collection pan piped for drain-off on roof.
B.
Pipe size to match drain pan connection.
3.6
PLUMBING PUMPS
A.
Mount and wire all control and alarm components.
B.
Install in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
PLUMBING EXECUTION
220200 - 4
Genesee County CARD
3.7
CLEANING, TESTING, CHLORINATION
A.
As piping material is erected, the inside of all piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign material. Flush
and test piping before operation in accordance with Division 15 Section “Testing and Cleaning.”
B.
On completion of the domestic water piping systems, chlorinate the system using methods acceptable to
and approved by Engineer. Furnish all chlorine and chlorinating equipment.
C.
After system chlorination is complete, submit water Samples to the governing health department for
testing. Take Samples as directed by Engineer, and provide Engineer with a letter from the governing
health department indicating test results.
PLUMBING EXECUTION
220200 - 5
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 220519 – METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all temperature and pressure gages. Unless
otherwise specified, gages shall be as described in this Specification.
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
ASME Standard:
a.
b.
1.4
B40.1 - Gages - Pressure, Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element.
B40.30 - 1990 - Thermometers.
SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Ametek.
B.
Ashcroft.
C.
H.O. Trerice.
D.
3D Instruments.
E.
Trend Instruments.
F.
Weiss.
2.2
EQUIPMENT
A.
Dial Thermometer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Bimetal type with adjustable dial face.
5-inch diameter dial.
6-inch nominal stem length.
Union lock nut.
Zero adjustment.
Hermetic seal.
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220519 - 1
Genesee County CARD
7.
B.
Aluminum case, acrylic face, adjustable angle, red non-mercury tubing.
9-inch scale.
3-1/2-inch nominal stem length. (6-inch for pipe sizes 6 inches and over).
Equal to H.O. Trerice A400 Series.
Pressure gage:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Equal to H.O. Trerice B85600 Series.
Industrial Thermometer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Bourdon tube type or bourdon coil type with direct coupled pointer, liquid filled.
4-1/2-inch minimum diameter.
Accuracy of +1% of scale range.
Equal to H.O. Trerice 450 Series.
Liquid fill must be compatible with temperatures in measured fluid.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Thermowell:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Provide for all thermometers.
304 stainless steel.
Equal to H.O. Trerice Cat. No. 138-0015.3 (138.0016.2 for pipe 6 inches and over).
Needle valve:
1.
2.
Provide for all pressure gages.
Equal to H.O. Trerice Series 735.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install all thermometers and pressure gages in conformance with:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Support all pressure gages and remote-reading thermometers:
1.
2.
3.2
The Drawings.
These Specifications.
Manufacturer's recommendations.
Owner’s requested thermometers and pressure gages. 2 each for maintenance staff. Coordinate
location with Owner.
With 12-gage formed steel bracket.
Secured to structure or equipment.
APPLICATION
A.
Select all dial ranges such that normal operating temperature/pressure measured at point of installation is
near mid-range.
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220519 - 2
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 220523 – GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all valves.
B.
Related Section includes Division 22 Section “Plumbing.”
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
Except as specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.4
General: Provide valves with features indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide proper
valve features as determined by Installer for installation requirements. Comply with ASME B31.9 for
building services piping, and ASME B31.1 for power piping.
Flanged: Valve flanges complying with ANSI B16.1 (cast iron), ANSI B16.5 (steel), or ANSI B16.24
(bronze).
Threaded: Valve ends complying with ANSI B2.1.
Solder-Joint: Valve ends complying with ANSI B16.18.
Flangeless: Valve bodies manufactured to fit between flanges complying with ANSI B16.1 (cast
iron), ANSI B16.5 (steel), or ANSI B16.24 (bronze).
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Valves not specifically indicated on the Drawings:
1.
2.
C.
1.5
This Section is provided as a guide in the application and specification of specific valves intended for
use in this Project. This Section does not instruct where to install these valves unless specifically
noted. Refer to other specific Mechanical Specification Sections and Drawing details for instruction
for location and use.
As called out in the Piping Systems Schedules.
Size and class of valve to agree with line in which installed.
All valves 2-1/2-inch and larger shall be flanged unless noted otherwise.
Valves shall have Manufacturer's name, trademark and working pressure rating cast into the valve body.
SUBMITTALS
A.
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 - 1
Genesee County CARD
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Made in USA:
1.
2.
B.
Unless specifically noted otherwise, all valves shall comply with the Federal Trade Commission
Made in USA standard.
Supplier shall furnish documentation of USA content if requested by Engineer.
Qualification for fabrication and installation personnel:
1.
2.
Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the material and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Valves shall be manufactured by one Manufacturer for each type of valve. Where valve Manufacturers are
not specifically indicated, they shall be one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2.2
Nibco.
Kennedy.
Crane.
Milwaukee.
Red and White.
Stockham.
Grinnell.
Mueller.
Jamesbury.
DeZurik.
Conbraco.
MATERIALS
A.
Bronze valves:
1.
2.
2.3
All brass alloys used in valves shall contain no more than 15 percent zinc.
Alloys must comply with ASTM B61, B62 or B584.
HAND VALVES
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Provide extended stem handles with a minimum clearance of 1-1/2-inch on insulated service.
All valves used for throttling/balancing to have adjustable memory stops.
Pressure ratings are at service indicated by application.
Gate valves:
1.
2.
Gate valves used in connection with piping 2 inches in size and smaller shall be all bronze, union
bonnet, rising stems, solid wedge taper seat, screwed or sweat ends and back seat, designed for 125
psi SWP. Valves used for piping 2-1/2-inch in size and larger shall be IBBM, OS&Y, bolted bonnet,
rising stem, solid wedge, bronze mounted, and flanged ends designed for 125 pounds.
Based on Nibco T-124 for 2-inch and less, Nibco F-617-O for 2-1/2 inches or larger.
220523 - 2
Genesee County CARD
C.
Globe valves:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Threaded end 2-inch and smaller (125 psig and less): 125 pounds wsp, bronze body, rising stem,
screwed bonnet, Teflon disc, Grinnell No. 3210, Crane No. 7.
Solder joint end 2-inch and smaller: 125 pounds wsp, bronze body, rising stem, screwed bonnet,
Teflon disc, Grinnell No. 3210SJ, Crane No. 1310.
Flanged end 2-1/2-inch and larger (125 psig and less): 125 pounds wsp, iron body, bronze trim,
OS&Y bonnett, Grinnell No. 6200A, Crane No. 351.
Ball valves:
1.
2.
Ball valves used in connection with piping 2 inches in size and smaller shall have screwed or sweat
ends, 2 piece bronze body standard port with stainless steel ball or cadd plated ball and a like stem.
VA rated for 150 pound SWP and 600 WOG. Seats and seals shall be virgin Teflon for standard duty
cycle. Provide reinforced Teflon for applications identified for extended duty cycle.
Based on Jamesbury Series 300.
E.
Drain valves: Furnish at each low point 3/4-inch gate or ball valves as specified above. Install nipple with
cap at valve outlet.
F.
Plug valves:
1.
2.
2.4
Plug valves shall be nonlubricated eccentric plug type rated for 175 pound WOG with semi-steel
body neoprene coated plug and epoxy coated seat; equal to DeZurik Series 100 or Homestead
Ballcentric. Furnish with compatible wrench. All valves used for throttling/balancing to have
adjustable memory stop.
Plug valves (gas cock) for natural gas shutoff applications shall be lubricated type equal to
Homestead Figure 611 or 612 or Rockwell Figure 114 or 115.
CHECK VALVES
A.
Silent check valves:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Install silent check valves in all pump discharge.
Piping less than 2-inch: 300 pounds, bronze body, renewable bronze disc screwed or sweat ends,
bronze trim, Mueller, #203 BP; or equal.
Piping 2-inch and larger: 125 pounds, globe type, iron body, bronze trim, renewable seat and disc, SS
springs, Mueller #105-AP; or equal.
Swing check valve:
1.
2-inch and smaller: 125 psi valves for domestic hot and cold water. 150 psi valves for heating hot
water:
a.
b.
c.
2.
MSS SP-80; Class 125, cast-bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B62; with horizontal
swing, Y-pattern, and bronze disc; and having threaded or solder ends.
Provide valves capable of being reground while the valve remains in the line.
Provide Class 150 valves meeting the above specifications, with threaded end connections,
where system pressure requires or where Class 125 valves are not available.
2-1/2-inch and larger for domestic hot and cold water, heating hot water:
a.
b.
MSS SP-71; Class 125 cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A126, Class B;
horizontal swing, and bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze disc ring; and flanged ends.
Provide valves capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line.
220523 - 3
Genesee County CARD
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install valves in conformance with:
1.
2.
B.
The Shop Drawings reviewed by Engineer.
The Manufacturer's recommendations.
Install valves:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
At all branch piping connection to mains.
At all connections to equipment.
As required for complete control or isolation of any piece of equipment or service to branch lines.
In accessible locations.
Equal in flow area to connecting piping unless otherwise indicated.
No valve shall be installed with its stem below the horizontal.
C.
Furnish chain operated hand wheels, including rust-proof chain and chain guide for inaccessible overhead
valves.
D.
Install flanged valves at equipment in a manner which allows equipment side of valve to be opened up
without draining piping system.
220523 - 4
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 220529 –HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3
Division 22 Section “Steel Pipe and Fittings.”
Division 22 Section “Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings.”
Division 22 Section “Plastic Pipe and Fittings.”
Division 22 Section “Copper Piping.”
Division 22 Section “Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control.”
Division 23 Section “Natural Gas Piping System. “
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
a.
b.
2.
a.
b.
c.
1.4
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.
surge.
B.
C.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 1
Genesee County CARD
D.
1.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
Comply with the requirements of ASME B31.8 for pipe hangers and support of natural gas piping systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
Special finishes and materials:
1.
All ferrous hangers and supports used in the following areas shall be hot dip galvanized unless noted
otherwise:
a.
b.
2.
Stainless steel hangers and supports shall be used where exposed in the following areas:
a.
2.2
Outside.
In wet or potentially wet areas.
Kitchens and other food preparation areas.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Elcon.
B.
Michigan Hanger.
C.
Grinnell.
D.
Bergen.
E.
Hilti.
2.3
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
220529 - 2
Genesee County CARD
B.
2.4
HANGER RODS
A.
B.
C.
galvanized rod.
D.
E.
Multiple supports:
1.
2.
2.5
SADDLES AND SHIELDS
A.
All piping:
1.
2.
2.6
ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A.
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.7
A.
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.
2.
C.
Bolts.
Welds.
220529 - 3
Genesee County CARD
D.
1.
2.
2.8
A.
B.
1.
2.
3.
Provide galvanized finish for all attachments used in wet or potentially wet areas.
Poured concrete:
a.
b.
4.
a.
b.
5.
2.
3.
4.
Vertical piping:
1.
2.
E.
Horizontal piping:
1.
D.
a.
b.
c.
C.
Use cast-in-place inserts or bolted surface mounted attachments, at Contractor’s option.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
1.
220529 - 4
Genesee County CARD
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
equipment.
Where significant, vertical movement of pipe occurs at the hanger location a resilient support must be
used:
a.
B.
C.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
1.
E.
1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN200).
to DN500).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
attachments.
installations.
220529 - 5
Genesee County CARD
3.2
A.
B.
General:
1.
2.
3.
a.
1)
2)
b.
4.
5.
On the Drawings.
On the reviewed Shop Drawings.
C.
D.
Vertical risers:
1.
2.
a.
b.
3.
Copper piping:
a.
b.
1)
2)
4.
a.
b.
5.
Plastic piping:
a.
b.
c.
E.
Horizontal runs:
1.
General:
220529 - 6
Genesee County CARD
a.
minimum).
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
F.
mounted on rollers.
1.
equipment:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
G.
supported.
H.
1.
2.
3.3
PIPE RESTRAINTS
A.
building expansion:
1.
2.
B.
1.
a.
b.
3.4
220529 - 7
Genesee County CARD
A.
B.
3.5
A.
1.
2.
3.
At each hanger.
B.
C.
1.
2.
Pipe Size (IPS)
5" and Smaller
6" to 12"
3.
Length
12"
16"
a.
b.
c.
3.6
Shield Gage
16
12
PAINTING
A.
B.
220529 - 8
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 220553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes specifying the general requirements for execution of that portion of the Work defined
in Division 22 of these Specifications and as indicated on the Drawings.
1.
Major items include, but are not necessarily limited to:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
1.3
Piping, fittings and valves.
Piping, ductwork and equipment insulation.
Temperature and pressure gages.
Plumbing equipment.
Temperature control systems.
Labor, materials, equipment, tools, supervision and start-up services.
Mechanical systems testing, adjusting and balancing.
Instructions to Owner regarding operation.
Incidental and related items necessary to a complete and functionally operational installation of
the Work.
REFERENCES
A.
Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of Division 15 shall comply with the
following:
1.
ANSI:
a.
2.
A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
a.
b.
B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
1)
2)
3)
4)
3.
Section I.
Section II.
Section IV.
Section VIII.
International:
a.
b.
c.
Building Code of 2009 including Michigan amendments.
Mechanical Code 2009 including Michigan amendments.
Plumbing Code 2009 including Michigan amendments.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553-1
Genesee County CARD
1.4
A.
Construction details, components, accessories, sizes and model numbers indicated on the Drawings or in
these specifications are used to indicate minimum levels of quality and coordination requirements.
B.
Equipment supplied, whether as scheduled or selected from list of acceptable Manufacturers, must meet
minimum requirements listed in specifications or on Drawings, be compatible with facility and intended
use, and meet requirements for a functional system.
C.
Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Schedules and model numbers shall not be used to:
1.
2.
E.
Are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangement of systems and work included.
Do not necessarily indicate every required valve, fitting, trap, thermometer, gage, duct, elbow,
transition, turning vane, mounting support and access panel.
Shall not be scaled for measurement or installation location.
Shall not serve as Shop Drawings.
Serve as final, definitive quantity requirements. Contractor shall make own count as indicated on
Drawings.
Determine proper type or model with arrangement, mounting and accessories applicable.
Coordinate installation work of Division 15 with work of other trades to provide a complete and functional
system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPE FITTINGS
A.
Provide insulating couplings or unions where dissimilar materials are joined.
B.
Provide unions at valves and at equipment for making repairs.
3.2
PAINTING
A.
Paint exposed, non-insulated piping in accordance with the requirements of Division 9 Section “Painting.”
B.
Valves, fittings, and supports:
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Paint valves and fittings the same base color as the pipe they adjoin.
Paint floor stands the same base color as the pipe they adjoin.
Paint wall brackets and pipe hangers the same base color as the wall or ceiling they adjoin, or gray, if
wall or ceiling is not painted.
CODING AND TAGGING
A.
Piping:
1.
Applied to new piping after installation, insulation, and final painting.
220553-1
Genesee County CARD
2.
3.
Conform to Owner’s existing standards or conventions.
Markings:
a.
b.
c.
4.
5.
B.
Painted on, 1-inch high black letters.
Color coded band, conforming to ANSI A13.1.
Directional arrow.
Place markers at 20-foot centers with at least 1 in each room.
Plastic coated "Set Mark-Snap-Around" pipe markers manufactured by Seton Name Plate Corp., New
Haven, Connecticut; or approved equal, may be used in lieu of painted markers and bands.
Valves:
1.
2.
3.
Provide brass or minimum 1/16-inch thick laminated plastic tags indicating assigned valve number on
valves.
Furnish schedule(s) of tagged valves with number, location and purpose of each valve.
Place a copy of each schedule:
a.
b.
In the Maintenance Instructions.
In a string tie envelope labeled "Valve Schedule" and mount on the wall in Mechanical Room.
C.
Where valves, dampers, fans, and terminal units are located above the ceilings, a cadmium plated screw or
such marking as designed by Engineer shall be located in the ceiling tile directly below the device.
D.
Equipment:
1.
Provide for:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.4
Each pump, water heater, tank.
Labeled with its tag name/number as given on the Drawings.
Use 2-inch high stenciled painted lettering.
Similarly label control components associated with the above named equipment items.
CLEANING AND FINISHING:
A.
Comply with the requirements of Division 1 Section “Final Cleaning.”
B.
Entire installation shall be free from surface oil and grease before work will be considered for final
payment.
C.
After tests have been made and the system pronounced tight:
1.
2.
Clean piping and equipment.
Lubricate bearings.
220553-1
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 220700 – PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the furnishing and installation of piping insulation.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Division 15 Section “Mechanical Penetrations”.
Division 15 Section “Pipe hangers and Supports”.
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
ASTM Standard Test Methods: E84 – Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:
a.
4.
1.4
B209 – Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate
C533 – Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation
C534 - Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular
Form.
C547 – Mineral Fiber Preformed pipe insulation
C552 – Cellular glass Block and Pipe Insulation
255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials: 25, 50, 50 flame spread, fuel,
smoke.
ASHRAE: 90A – Energy Conservation in New Building Design
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
2.
1.6
A.
Receiving and Storage
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
220700 - 1
Genesee County CARD
1.
2.
B.
Deliver all materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers.
Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration or contamination with
foreign matter.
Rejected Material and Replacements:
1.
2.
Reject damaged, deteriorated or contaminated material and immediately remove from the Site.
Replace removed materials at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURER
A.
Insulation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Adhesives:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Benjamin Foster.
Childers.
Vimasco.
B. E. H.
Jacketing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Armstrong.
Johns Manville.
Owens-Corning.
Knauf.
Certainteed.
Rubatex.
Aeroflex USA
Pabco.
Childers.
Zeston.
Ceel-Co.
O’Brien.
MATERIALS
A.
Rigid molded glass fiber – high density:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Facing: all-service jacket (ASJ), factory applied jacketing.
Density: 6.0 lbs/cu ft. minimum.
Thickness: As scheduled.
Thermal conductivity (k): 0.31 BTU-in/hr-SF - F degrees at 200 degrees F mean.
Service temperature: 850F maximum.
Owners-Corning Type SSL-II or equal.
Typical for applications on piping below 16 inches (normal).
Flexible elastomeric thermal insulation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Thermal conductivity (K): 0.25 at 75 degrees mean.
Water vapor transmission: 0.17 perms/inch.
220700 - 2
Genesee County CARD
5.
C.
Armstrong AP, or equal.
Flexible elastomeric sheet:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Armstrong AP Armaflex; or equal.
PIPE AND FITTING COVERS
A.
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) covers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ultraviolet resistant.
0.030-inch minimum thickness.
Preformed to match outer diameter of insulation.
Preformed fitting covers; 10 mil thickness minimum.
Ceel-Tite 330, or equal by Topline or Zeston.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General
1.
Install piping insulation:
a.
b.
c.
d.
In conformance with the Drawings and Specifications
recommendations.
After the piping system has been satisfactorily tested.
Over clean, dry piping materials.
To the thicknesses as follows:
1)
2)
e.
2.
3.
4.
B.
the
manufacturer’s
As specified or as indicated on the Drawings.
Or if not specified or shown, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for
the specific application.
Continuous through wall, ceilings and sleeves (except at fire stops).
Fill all cracks and voids with insulation cement carefully troweled to leave a smooth finish.
Repair or replace all insulation damaged by demolition, water or mildew, or making connections to
piping or equipment.
Insulate bundles of pipes out-of-doors with complete wrap of insulation 1-1/2 inches thick and of
suitable diameter to contain bundle, with outer jacket.
Joints and fittings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
and
Block insulate valves and flanges with reusable insulation system.
Insulate elbows, tube turns, sweeps and bends with mitred sections or premolded fittings. Match pipe
covering material.
Fit joints tightly together.
Seal joints with sealing compound and preformed aluminum bands.
JACKETS AND FINISH
A.
General
220700 - 3
Genesee County CARD
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Provide moisture barrier between the insulation and the jacketing in a continuous, unbroken seal.
Secure jacketing by a continuous sealed joint to provide a positive weatherproof seal along the entire
length of the jacket.
Finish ends with caps.
On cold piping, cut caps to the exact size of the pipe and seal with a proper silicone caulking.
Provide slip joints at 25 feet minimum on center or as required for expansion.
Locate longitudinal jacket seams out of view on indoor piping where exposed to view.
PVC
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Center a preformed strap (snap-strap) containing a permanently weatherproof plastic sealant over
each circumferential joint and secure by tightening on a clip, or by a separate stainless steel banding.
Design the snap-strap to allow for normal expansion.
Cover all insulation and preformed insulation fittings.
Weld longitudinal seams together with welding adhesive as supplied by cover manufacturer.
Overlap adjacent jacketing 3/4-inch and weld circumferential seams together with welding adhesive.
Overlap fitting covers with adjacent pipe insulation jacketing and weld longitudinal and
circumferential seams together with adhesive.
Attachment:
1.
2.
For systems operating at 50 F and above: jacketing may be stapled using outward clinch staples
spaced 3 inches apart and at least 1/4 inch from the lap edge.
For systems operating below 50 F: Vapor seal the laps using self-sealing lap or a lap seal tape gun or
adhesive such as Benjamin Foster 520.
D.
Taper and seal insulation ends regardless of service.
E.
Fitting and pipe jackets shall have matching finishes ready for painting.
F.
For insulation without factory applied jacket:
1.
2.
3.3
Finish with 8-ounce glass mesh and mastic.
Use breather mastic on piping operating at greater than 50 F.
PIPING INSULATION APPLICATION
A.
Basis of thickness schedule:
1.
2.
Thicknesses shown are based on products having a maximum “k” factor of 0.26 at a mean
temperature of 75 F.
Thickness changes:
a.
b.
May be reduced for products having significantly lower “k” values.
Shall be increased for products having higher “k” values to produce equivalent or greater
overall thermal resistances
B.
Flame/smoke ratings: Comply with local requirements for flame and smoke minimum ratings. (This may
exclude some options listed herein.)
C.
Typical System Definitions
1.
2.
Systems 120 – 200F: HW, HWR
Systems 80 – 119 F: TW, TWR
220700 - 4
Genesee County CARD
3.
4.
5.
D.
Systems 40 – 79 F: CW, horizontal RWC, 2 feet vertical from roof drain connections, underside of
roof sumps.
Systems below 40F: Evaporator drains when ambient exceeds 40F.
Runouts: Piping 2” and less which extends 12 feet or less from a terminal connection.
Schedule for Indoor Aboveground Piping
1.
Insulate new piping and fittings with elastomeric foam insulating materials as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Systems 120 – 200F: 1/2” (runouts), 1” (1/2 to 1-1/2”).
Systems 80 – 119 F: 1/2” (runouts and 1/2” to 1-1/4”), 1” (1-1/2” to 12”).
Systems 40 – 79 F: 1/2” (runouts and 1/2” to 1-1/4”), 1” (1-1/2” to 12”).
Systems below 40F: 1/2” (1/2” to 1-1/4”), 1” (1-1/2” to 10”).
Fiberglass insulation materials may be used for piping and fittings in lieu of elastomeric foam.
a.
b.
Use wall thicknesses for all systems same specified for elastomeric foam.
Use fiberglass materials in lieu of elastomeric foam where insulation is exposed to public view.
220700 - 5
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 22 11 16 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the furnishing and installation of copper pipe and PEX and fittings.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Division 22 Section “Testing and Cleaning.”
Division of Work:
1.
2.
In accordance with the General Conditions, Contractor is responsible for dividing the Work among
the Subcontractors and Suppliers and for delineating the work to be performed by specific trades.
The following are suggestions as to how the Work may be divided. This is not a complete list of all
the work:
a.
b.
1.3
General Contractor: Coordinate work of this Section with other trades.
Mechanical Subcontractor: All work of this Section except as listed under General Contractor.
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
NSF Standards
a.
b.
3.
B280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service.
F876 – Cross-Linked Polyethelene (PEX) tubing
F877 - Cross-Linked Polyethelene (PEX) Plastic Hot and Cold Water Distribution Systems
F1807 – Metal Insert Fittings Using a Copper Crimp Ring sor SDR9 Cross-Linked Polythylene
Tubing
F2023 – Test Method for Evaluating the Oxidative Resistance of Cross-Linked Polyethylene
Tubing and Systems to Hot Chlorinated Water.
NSF 14 – Plastic Piping Component and Related Materials
NSF 61 – Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects
ANSI Publications: A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 11 16 - 1
Genesee County CARD
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
2.
B.
Manufacturer's services: Submit Manufacturer's sworn statement that the equipment furnished complies
with this Specification.
C.
Testing of copper piping: In accordance with Division 15 Section “Testing and Cleaning.”
1.5
A.
1.
2.
All materials shall be delivered in original, unbroken, brand marked containers.
Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent:
a.
b.
B.
Deterioration.
Contamination with foreign matter.
1.
2.
Replace removed materials at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
Seamless copper tubing:
1.
2.
Factory coded and marked.
Conform to the following schedule:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Aboveground: ASTM B88, Type L or K, hard drawn.
Buried: ASTM B88, Type K soft temper.
Refrigeration: ASTM B280, Type ACR, hard drawn.
Drainage: ASTM B306, Type DWV.
Pipe markings:
a.
b.
All piping longer than 2'-0" shall have a permanent marking in accordance with ASTM or
ANSI specifications.
This identification shall include the following:
1)
2)
3)
B.
Solder type shall conform to the following schedule:
1.
C.
Manufacturer's name.
Pipe pressure rating.
Pipe size.
Hot and cold water and recirculation lines: 95% tin and 5% silver.
Fittings:
22 11 16 - 2
Genesee County CARD
1.
General service:
a.
b.
2.2
Sweat type, wrought copper, long radius elbows.
Cast fittings shall only be allowed with written permission from the Engineer.
PEX Piping/Tubing
A.
Tubing Materials
1.
High-density cross-linked polyethylene tubing.
a.
b.
Manufactured to ASTM F876.
Pressure rated in accordance with Plastic Pipe Institute TR-4/03 standard grade hydrostatic
pressure ratings:
1)
2)
3)
c.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Factory coded and marked.
Color coded to indicate cold water (blue), hot water (red), hot water return (silver).
Sizes 1/2” to 2”.
PEX Press fittings constructed from bronze meeting UNS C83600, C87700 or C97710.
Conform to ASTM F877 press-fit type type tested as a system with ViegaPEX tubing.
Construct the PEX Press sleeve from Grade 304 or better stainless steel.
a.
Provide with one to three view holes to ensure proper PEX tube insertion depth.
Tubing and Fitting System
1.
2.
3.
D.
Chlorine rated in accordance with ASTM F876 to meet or exceed end use conditions of 100%
at 140 degrees F and per PEX 5006 (CL5) or NSF P171 (CLR).
Fittings
1.
2.
3.
C.
200 degrees F at 80 psig,
180 degrees F at 100 psig
73.4 degrees F at 160 psig.
Certify tubing and fittings per ANSI/NSF 14/61 for suitability to transport potable water.
Permanently marked with “NSF-pw”, cNSF us pw-G” or “NSF 61” to verify the listing.
Manufactured in a factory having an ISO 9001 or NSF International quality control program.
Manufacturers
1.
2.
Viega LLC: PureFlow Water System (ViegaPEX, ViegaPEX Ultra, ViegaPEX Barrier, FostaPEX).
Approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
During freezing weather:
1.
Protect all materials in such a manner that no harm can be done to:
a.
b.
Installations already made.
Materials and equipment on the Site.
22 11 16 - 3
Genesee County CARD
2.
3.2
Furnish all necessary protection for such installations and equipment as may be required.
ERECTION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
All piping: Follow approved paths as indicated on the Drawings.
Connect to existing lines where required, or to equipment in an approved manner.
Locate pipes, valves and equipment to provide:
a.
b.
4.
5.
6.
Normally, all pipe runs shall be plumb, parallel with the building and level, except for drain slope.
Be responsible for establishing and maintaining drain slope of piping in order to ensure drainage.
Expansion of piping:
a.
b.
7.
B.
All pipe connections shall provide freedom of movement of the piping during expansion and
contraction without springing of piping or injury to building steel or structure.
Any damage to building steel or structure as a result of work installed by Contractor shall be
repaired at Contractor's expense.
As piping material is erected:
a.
b.
8.
Access for maintenance.
Minimum obstruction of passageways and working space.
Thoroughly clean the inside of all piping.
Remove foreign material such as scale, sand, weld spatter, particles and cutting chips.
Provide caps or plugs in all openings at the end of each day's work and as otherwise directed for the
protection of the piping.
Pipe joints:
1.
2.
3.
Cut ends of copper tubing squarely using only sharp tube cutters.
Ream pipe to full I.D. before preparing the joint.
Soldering:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Solder or braze joints by cleaning outside ends of all copper tubings and inside of fittings
immediately before joining and soldering.
Apply solder flux to both tube and fitting.
Insert tube full depth into fitting, apply heat and solder in such a manner as to draw solder into
and completely around the joint.
Joining valves:
a.
b.
When joining copper lines to valves follow Manufacturer's instructions.
In general:
1)
2)
3.3
Valve shall be in the fully open position.
Solenoid and expansion valves shall be broken down.
A.
Clean and test piping in accordance with Division 22 Section “Testing and Cleaning.”
22 11 16 - 4
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 221316 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all sanitary system drain, waste, and vent pipe and
fittings.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Division 7 Section “Firestopping and Smokestopping.”
Division 22 Section “Plumbing.”
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
1.4
D1527 - Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40 and 80.
D1785 - Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120.
D2239 - Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR).
D2282 - Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR).
D2464 - Threaded Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
D2466 - Socket-Type Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
D2467 - Socket-Type Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
D3034 - Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
2.
B.
Trained and experienced with the material and the specialized installation tools.
Regulatory requirements:
1.
2.
Local codes having jurisdiction.
IPC 2003.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 - 1
Genesee County CARD
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Cabot, Enfield, J-M Pipe, R & G Sloane; no substitutions.
MATERIALS
A.
Provide in accordance with the following table:
Description
Type
Schedule
Pipe Materials
ASTM
Acceptable Applications
5. PVC, Type 1
Rigid
40
D3034
Drain, Waste, Vent
B.
2.3
Subject to approval of local fire authorities.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Pipe and fittings shall have the following identification printed in indelible ink, hot-stamped or molded:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Manufacturer's lot number.
Manufacturer's name or trademark.
Material designation.
Nominal pipe size.
FITTINGS
A.
Schedule: 80.
B.
Type: IK UPVC.
C.
Hydrostatic pressures of 2 times their rated working pressures.
D.
Injection molded.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ERECTION
A.
All piping shall follow approved paths as indicated on the Drawings, connect to existing lines where
required, or to equipment in an approved manner.
B.
Location of pipe, valves and accessory equipment shall be arranged in the best possible manner, consistent
with the Drawings, for accessibility and minimum obstruction of passageways and working space.
C.
Pipe runs shall be plumb, parallel with the building and level, except for drain slope.
D.
Drain slope shall be a minimum of 1-inch in 20 feet and shall be in the direction of flow where possible.
E.
Plastic pipe shall meet erection fire protection standards and be installed underground.
221316 - 2
Genesee County CARD
3.2
PIPE JOINTS
A.
Solvent cementing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Plastic pipe to be cut square to allow the pipe to "bottom out" in the socket of the fitting.
The pipe end to be beveled around the outside, and deburred on the inside to allow for proper fit.
The plastic piping and inside of fitting to be cleaned with an approved pipe cleaner to ensure proper
bonding of solvent cement.
The jointing surface must be dissolved and made semi-fluid with sufficient solvent cement being
applied to both surfaces to fill the gap between pipe and fitting.
There shall not be a ridge of cement around the inside of pipe or fitting.
B.
Joints between plastic pipe and copper, steel or cast iron piping to be made with local and state code
approved adapters.
C.
Approved polypropylene ferrule and slip nut joints may be used for pipe 2-inch or less above floor in
equipment or furniture cabinet bases.
D.
Schedule 80 pipe shall be threaded with special pipe dies for mating with Schedule 80 threaded fittings.
E.
Use only Schedule 80 flanges to be jointed by either solvent cement or threaded connections.
F.
Heat fusion:
1.
2.
3.
For all while line or polypropylene pipe systems.
Use electrical fusing method.
As recommended by Manufacturer.
221316 - 3
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 221319 – SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all materials, labor, equipment, supervision, fees,
and services incidental to proper completion of sanitary waste piping work:
1.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Interior waste and vent piping to 5'-0" outside building.
Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."
Division 22 Section “Valves.”
Division 22 Section “Plumbing Fixtures and Trim.”
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.
A112.1.2 - Air Gaps in Plumbing Systems.
A112.21.1 - Floor Drains.
A112.36.2M - Cleanouts.
ASTM Standards:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
A53 - Steel Pipe, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
A181 - Carbon Steel Forgings for General Purpose Piping.
A194 - Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-Temperature
Service.
A234 - Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated
Temperatures.
A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength.
A395 - Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures.
A518 - Corrosion-Resistant High Silicon Iron Castings.
C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
D2136 - Test Method for Coated Fabrics - Low Temperature Bend Test.
D2657 - Practice for Heat Fusion Joining of Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings.
D2665 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 - 1
Genesee County CARD
p.
q.
r.
3.
1.4
D3034 - Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
D4101 - Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion Materials.
F789 - Type PS-46 and PS-115 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Gravity Flow Sewer Pipe
and Fittings.
AWWA Standards:
a.
b.
4.
5.
C500 - Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems.
M20 - Water Chlorination Principles and Practices.
PDI (Plumbing and Drainage Institute) Standard: WH-201 - Water Hammer Arresters.
ARI Standard: 1010 - Drinking Fountains and Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking Water Coolers.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
2.
B.
1.
2.
All state and local codes and ordinances shall have jurisdiction.
All related electrical devices shall be housed in suitable enclosures as defined by the National
Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CLEANOUTS
A.
Furnish and install cleanouts where indicated on the Drawings in accordance with this Specification.
Cleanouts subject to vehicular traffic shall be heavy duty type. Wade model numbers are for reference only.
1.
Provide cleanouts with NH spigot outlet or ty-seal outlet connection, threaded adjustable housing,
flanged ferrule with tapered brass plug and round or square nickel brass or ductile iron vandalresistant secured top for floor finishes as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
B.
2.2
Unfinished concrete (scoriated XH DI top): Wade W-6000-Z.
Asphalt and Vinyl Tile (Recessed NB top): Wade W-6000-TS.
Ceramic and Quarry Tile (Scoriated NB top): Wade W-6000-XS.
Other light duty finishes (textured NB top): Wade W-6000.
Other heavy duty finishes (scoriated XH NB top): Wade-6000-X.
Exterior areas (scoriated XH DI top): Wade W-6000-Z.
Vertical rough piping (exposed): Wade-8560-E.
Piping concealed in walls: Wade W-8560-E with W-8480 round stainless steel cover.
Manufacturers: Wade, Smith, Zurn, Mi-Fab.
FLOOR DRAINS
A.
General
221319 - 2
Genesee County CARD
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.3
Furnish and install floor drains at low point of sloped floor or at elevations indicated on the
Drawings.
Construct with cast iron body with flange, clamping collar, seepage opening, deep seal trap with
tapped and 1/2” plugged trap primer connection.
Basis: Wade #W-1100STD.
Floor drains
1.
2.
3.
C.
FD (Equipment Rooms): 6” round satin bronze strainer with secured slotted grate.
FD (Toilet Rooms): 6” round satin bronze strainer with secured square hole grate.
FFD (Funnel FD): Same as FD (Toilet Rooms) with #EF4 4-inch diameter secured funnel 3.75” high.
Manufacturers: Wade, Smith, Josam, Zurn, Mi-Fab.
FLOOR SINKS
A.
Manufacturers: Wade, Smith, Josam, Zurn, Mi-Fab.
B.
FS-1: 12” x 12” x 8” deep.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
FS-2: 8” x 8” x 6” deep
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
14 gage type 304 stainless steel body with seepage flange and control holes.
14 gage Type 304 stainless steel ribbed non-tilt 1/2 loose set grate with 1/2” square holes.
Stainless steel perforated dome bottom strainer.
Smith #3003 -13
14 gage type 304 stainless steel body with seepage control holes.
14 gage Type 304 stainless steel ribbed non-tilt 1/2 loose set grate with 1/2” square holes.
Stainless steel perforated dome bottom strainer.
Smith #3100 -13
PREFABRICATED GREASE TRAPS
A.
GT-1 (at three compartment sink):
1.
2.
3.
Design to separate fats, oils, and grease from the waste water stream by passing the waste water thru
a flow control fitting which regulates the flow rate to the interceptor capacity.
Certified performance per PDI.
Construct of fabricated steel body for on-floor mounting.
a.
b.
c.
4.
5.
Provide with removable inlet baffles, internal air relief.
Provide gray Duco coating outside and acid resistant coating inside,
Provide one-piece steel cover having a single lock and lift ring, neoprene gasket, and cleanout.
Provide with flow control fitting with properly sized orifice and air inlet connection.
Manufacturers
a.
b.
Smith #3120 (20 gpm and 40 lbs grease capacity),
Equal by Wade, Josam, Zurn, Mi-Fab.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
221319 - 3
Genesee County CARD
3.1
SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM
A.
Description: Furnish and install the entire building sanitary drainage system as indicated on the Drawings.
System includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following items: Waste and vent piping for all
plumbing, fixtures requiring same, floor drains, cleanouts.
B.
Pipe and Fitting Material:
1.
C.
Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
3.2
Drains and cleanouts and other specialties as defined in Part 2 of this Section.
General runs of sanitary sewer are indicated on Drawings diagrammatically and every bend, offset,
etc., is not necessarily indicated, all of which must be installed to properly drain all stacks, fixtures,
vents, etc.
Run horizontal waste lines at a minimum slope of 1/8-inch per foot.
Connections between mains and laterals shall be made with wyes and 1/8 bends.
Changes in direction shall be with long radius ells except in stacks where sanitary tees and short
radius 1/4 bends may be used in changes from horizontal to vertical.
Flash all vent stacks at the roof.
Cleanouts shall be installed where required by code and as indicated on the Drawings and specified
herein. They shall be accessibly located, set flush with finish surface or finish grade, and shall be
same nominal pipe size as line served, but no larger than 4 inches. Stainless steel cover plates
required for wall accessed cleanouts.
Provide cleanouts located in waterproof above grade floors with flashing flange and clamp device.
Flash with 60 mil PVC membrane minimum 4-foot square.
Furnish and install stack base fittings at the base of each riser set on a concrete or brick base on firm
soil. All vertical risers shall be supported at floors.
Pitch vent lines to gravity drain to waste pipe.
CLEANING, TESTING, CHLORINATION
A.
As piping material is erected, the inside of all piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign material. Flush
and test piping before operation in accordance with Division 15 Section “Testing and Cleaning.”
B.
On completion of the domestic water piping systems, chlorinate the system using methods acceptable to
and approved by Engineer. Furnish all chlorine and chlorinating equipment.
C.
After system chlorination is complete, submit water Samples to the governing health department for
testing. Take Samples as directed by Engineer, and provide Engineer with a letter from the governing
health department indicating test results.
221319 - 4
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 223436 – COMMERCIAL GAS DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the furnishing and installation of a packaged domestic water heater system.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Division 22 Section “Plumbing.”
Division 23 Section “Facility Natural Gas Piping System.”
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Furnish and install completely pre-engineered, preassembled, prewired, prepiped, pretested packaged water
heating system(s) of type, size and capacity indicated.
B.
Package shall include gas-fired heater, tank, piping, wiring, controls, pump, insulation, valves, temperature
gage, pressure gage and relief valve.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
A.G.A. approved and certified.
B.
UL listed and approved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable:
1.
2.
3.
Bradford White.
Lochinvar.
A.O. Smith.
Raypak.
COMMERCIAL GAS DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
223436 - 1
Genesee County CARD
2.2
STORAGE WATER HEATERS
A.
Domestic water heaters:
1.
Heaters shall be completely factory assembled and include the following basic features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Gas-fired sealed combustion storage heaters:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
B.
Glass-lined tank with magnesium anode and 3-year limited warranty against corrosion.
Steel jacketed with baked enamel finish.
Tank insulation equal to ASHRAE 90.1-1999.
ASME auto-reset type temperature/pressure relief valve.
Electronic ignition system with 24 VAC control power.
Powered direct vent system for closed combustion and venting direct to building exterior.
Venting by plastic (PVC, ABS, or CPVC) materials per manufacturer recommendations.
Design certified by AGA.
Heaters shall meet ASHRAE 90.1-1999.
Capacities: As indicated on the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with Manufacturer’s instructions for the installation of water heaters.
B.
Install heaters with inlet and outlet gate valves, unions, di-electric fittings, relief valves piped full size to
floor drains, and temperature gage on outlet water.
C.
Factory-authorized service representative shall set and adjust burner and instruct Owner’s representative in
care and maintenance of unit.
D.
Provide 1-year’s free service from acceptance date with a factory-trained service representative subject to
call 24 hours per day.
3.2
VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
A.
3.3
Furnish and install on cold water supply to water heater when required by authority having jurisdiction or
when water heater is mounted higher in elevation than the fixtures it serves.
EXPANSION TANK
A.
Furnish and install HW expansion tank per Division 22 Section “Plumbing”.
COMMERCIAL GAS DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
223436 - 2
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 224200 – COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 4 - GENERAL
4.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
4.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the furnishing and installation of plumbing fixtures and trim.
B.
C.
Division of Work:
1.
2.
the work:
a.
b.
General Contractor: Install or arrange for installation of all fixture supports and carriers as
directed by mechanical Subcontractor.
Mechanical Subcontractor:
1)
2)
3)
4.3
Furnish all required fixture supports and carriers.
Instruct General Contractor regarding location and installation of supports and carriers.
Be responsible for proper rough-in locations and dimensions.
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
ANSI Standard:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.4
A112.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
A112.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.
A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures.
A112.19.5 - Trim for Water Closet Bowls, Tanks & Urinals.
A117.1 - Buildings and Facilities - Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically
Handicapped People.
ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act.
ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineers.
SUBMITTALS
A.
4.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installing personnel shall be adequately trained and experienced in the installation of the materials and
equipment.
COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES
224200 - 1
Genesee County CARD
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Comply with 2006 International Plumbing Code and all amendments there to as defined in the
Michigan Plumbing Code 2006.
Installation shall comply with Americans with Disability Act (ADA) regarding type of fixtures and
trim, height and clearance requirements, and safety components and systems.
Comply with the State of Michigan barrier free design requirements as published by the Michigan
Department of Labor Construction Code Commission.
Comply with Americans for Disability Laws.
PART 5 - PRODUCTS
5.1
MANUFACTURER
A.
Fixtures: American Standard, Kohler, Elkay, Crane, Eljer, Haws, Just, Fiat, Winholt.
B.
Flush valves: Sloan, Zurn, Technical Concepts.
C.
ADA drain and water line safety covers at lavatories and sinks:
1.
2.
Handy shieldsafety covers, Plumberex Specialty Products, Cathedral City, CA.
Handi Lav-Guard, Truebro, Inc., Ellington, CT.
D.
Faucets: Bradley, Moen, Zurn, Chicago Faucets, Delta, T & S Brass, Sloan.
E.
Fixture carriers: Wade, Josam, Zurn.
5.2
GENERAL
A.
Traps:
1.
2.
Equip fixtures with traps (with cleanouts) unless indicated otherwise, of the same size as the fixture
connection.
P-traps
a.
b.
3.
B.
5.3
Size branch lines as indicated.
Assemblies:
1.
2.
C.
Above grade: Chrome plated cast brass.
Above grade where concealed: May be PVC at Contractor’s option.
Where fixtures are described by a Manufacturer's assembly number, furnish the complete assembly.
Additional items not ordinarily furnished in the assembly will be indicated or noted.
Where roughing-in or installing fixtures and equipment furnished by other trades, provide required stops,
supplies and traps, as well as rough-in, installation, and connecting work.
WATER CLOSETS
A.
WC – Non-ADA floor mount:
1.
2.
White vitreous china, elongated, floor mounted, bottom outlet, siphon jet (1.6 gpf), 1-1/2 inch top
spud water closet, 14-1/8-inch high rim : American Standard #2303.100 “Madera”.
1.6 gpm, right or left hand mounting as required by fixture clearances, manual actuated; Sloan
“Royal”.
224200 - 2
Genesee County CARD
3.
B.
White molded plastic seamless, elongated open-front seat with stainless check hinge; Olsonite
#10CC.
WC/ADA – ADA floor mounted:
1.
2.
White vitreous china, elongated, floor mounted, bottom outlet, siphon jet (1.6 gpf), 1-1/2 inch top
spud water closet, rim 16-1/8” high: American Standard #2305.100 “Madera”.
Flush valve and actuator:
a.
3.
5.4
1.6 gpm, right or left hand mounting as required by fixture clearances, manual actuated; Sloan
“Royal”.
Seat: White molded plastic seamless, elongated open-front style with stainless check hinge; Olsonite
#10CC.
LAVATORIES
A.
LAV-1 - wall mount/manual controls:
1.
Fixture: American Standard #0355.012 with carrier.
a.
2.
Supply fitting: American Standard #2385.004.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
4.
B.
White vitreous china wall hung lavatory, 20-1/2 inch LR by 18-1/4 inch FB outside
dimensions.
Deck mounted single lever mixing faucet operation.
Comply with ANSI/ASME 112.18.1.M standards.
All metal body with indexed metal lever handle, all copper waterway.
Washerless ceramic disc valve cartridge.
Hot water high temperature limit safety stop.
Aerator for 2.5 gpm flow rate.
Perforated grid drain, tailpiece, trap, loose key stops and risers, with key handle.
Wall carrier.
LAV-2 - countertop mount/manual controls:
1.
Fixture: American Standard #0475.028 with carrier.
a.
2.
Supply fitting: Chicago #802-665CP.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
4.
White vitreous china self-rimming oval countertop lavatory, 16-inch LR by 10-inch FB inside
dimensions, 4-inch center faucet holes.
Deck mounted self-closing mixing faucet.
Comply with ADA.
Integral 4-inch spout with #E12 aerator for 2.2 gpm pressure compensated flow, vandal
resistant.
Indexed tapered handles.
Self-closing metering cartridge and actuator.
Comply with ANSI/ASME 112.18.1.M standards.
Perforated grid drain, tailpiece, trap, loose key stops and risers, with key handle.
Wall carrier.
224200 - 3
Genesee County CARD
C.
Fixture carriers:
1.
2.
Manufacturer: Wade, Zurn, Josam, or Smith.
Requirements:
a.
b.
3.
D.
Secure wall mounted lavatories into position by means of carriers specifically manufactured for
the fixture installed.
Carriers shall be of proper size to fit within the space allotted.
Supports: Provide adequate internal supports for wall mounting brackets.
Barrier free special trim:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.5
Incoming water shall be tempered with thermostatic mixing valve.
Tempered water shall not exceed 105 degrees F.
Barrier free lavatories shall have water supply tempered with an A.S.S.E. 1017 device.
ADA approved drain and water safety covers are required on all exposed piping under barrier free
lavatories.
SERVICE SINKS/BASINS
A.
MS – Floor mop basin:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
24-inch x 24-inch x 10-inch high molded stone with 1-inch minimum thick shoulders, white color,;
Fiat No. MSB-2424.
Factory installed stainless steel drain body for 3” drain pipe, combination strainer and lint basket of
stainless steel.
Exposed yoke wall mount utility faucet, top brace, cast brass construction with rough chrome finish,
stops in shanks, metal lever handles 6” threaded spout with threaded hose end and vacuum breaker,
ceramic disk valve cartridges: American Standard #8344.112.
Wall splash guards: Construct of FRP material, furnished and installed by General Contractor.
SS – Service Sink:
1.
2.
3.
24-inch x 20-1/2-inch enameled cast iron wall hung with plain back, white color, stainless steel rim
guard, wall hanger; American Standard #7695.000.
P-trap standard drain body for 3” drain pipe, strainer; American Standard #7798.0X0.
Exposed yoke wall mount utility faucet, top brace, cast brass construction with rough chrome finish,
stops in shanks, metal lever handles 6” threaded spout with threaded hose end and vacuum breaker,
ceramic disk valve cartridges: American Standard #8344.112.
PART 6 - EXECUTION
6.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install fixtures at proper heights in accordance with applicable codes and as indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Point up around fixtures where they abut a wall or floor unless so directed by Engineer.
C.
Securely fasten fixtures to the floor, wall, or counter. Fixtures shall be level and square.
D.
Follow Manufacturer's instructions for fixture installations, especially for grouting and calking.
224200 - 4
Genesee County CARD
6.2
INSPECTION
A.
Inspect each fixture and unit for damage to finish.
B.
Remove and replace cracked, dented units and units or items unable to be repaired or restored to a
condition acceptable to Engineer.
6.3
CLEANING
A.
Thoroughly clean by washing with soap and disinfectant solution on all plumbing fixtures.
B.
Remove, clean, and reinstall aerators.
224200 - 5
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 224700 – DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the furnishing and installation of plumbing fixtures and trim.
B.
C.
Division of Work:
1.
2.
the work:
a.
b.
General Contractor: Install or arrange for installation of all fixture supports and carriers as
directed by mechanical Subcontractor.
1)
2)
3)
1.3
Furnish all required fixture supports and carriers.
Instruct General Contractor regarding location and installation of supports and carriers.
Be responsible for proper rough-in locations and dimensions.
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
ANSI Standard:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
1.4
A112.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
A112.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.
A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures.
A117.1 - Buildings and Facilities - Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically
Handicapped People.
ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act.
ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineers.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installing personnel shall be adequately trained and experienced in the installation of the materials and
equipment.
DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
224700 - 1
Genesee County CARD
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Comply with 2006 International Plumbing Code and all amendments there to as defined in the
Michigan Plumbing Code 2006.
Installation shall comply with Americans with Disability Act (ADA) regarding type of fixtures and
trim, height and clearance requirements, and safety components and systems.
Comply with the State of Michigan barrier free design requirements as published by the Michigan
Department of Labor Construction Code Commission.
Comply with Americans for Disability Laws.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURER
A.
Fixtures: American Standard, Kohler, Elkay, Crane, Eljer, Haws, Just, Fiat.
B.
ADA drain and water line safety covers at lavatories and sinks:
1.
2.
C.
2.2
Handy shieldsafety covers, Plumberex Specialty Products, Cathedral City, CA.
Handi Lav-Guard, Truebro, Inc., Ellington, CT.
Fixture carriers: Wade, Josam, Zurn.
GENERAL
A.
Traps:
1.
2.
Equip fixtures with traps (with cleanouts) unless indicated otherwise, of the same size as the fixture
connection.
P-traps
a.
b.
3.
B.
Above grade: Chrome plated cast brass.
Above grade where concealed: May be PVC at Contractor’s option.
Size branch lines as indicated.
Assemblies:
1.
2.
Where fixtures are described by a Manufacturer's assembly number, furnish the complete assembly.
Additional items not ordinarily furnished in the assembly will be indicated or noted.
C.
Where roughing-in or installing fixtures and equipment furnished by other trades, provide required stops,
supplies and traps, as well as rough-in, installation, and connecting work.
D.
Fixture carriers:
1.
2.
Manufacturer: Wade, Zurn, Josam, or Smith.
Requirements:
a.
b.
3.
Secure wall mounted lavatories into position by means of carriers specifically manufactured for
the fixture installed.
Carriers shall be of proper size to fit within the space allotted.
Supports: Provide adequate internal supports for wall mounting brackets.
224700 - 2
Genesee County CARD
2.3
ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS
A.
EWC/ADA – (Wall mounted ADA, hi-low):
1.
2.
Duplex, wall surface mounted units, with self-contained electric water cooler at ADA height and with
adjacent wall, surface mounted drinking fountain at standard height; Elkay #OBFATL-8, Halsey
Taylor, Haws, approved equal.
Quality Assurance:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Certified as lead-free per Federal Safe Drinking Water Act.
Complies with ANSI and ADA standards for Barrier Free use.
Water chilling performance complying with ARI 1010-94.
Construction
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Stainless steel top, removable drain strainer, self-closing front and side push bars with raised
lettering, chrome plated brass bubbler head stream projectors with hood, flow regulator, traps,
stop valve, removable front access panel, vinyl finish, wall bracket.
Capacity: Eight gph of 50F water at 75F room and 80F inlet water.
Electrical: 115-volt, single phase, 5.4 FLA, 1/5 hp compressor, single point connection.
Design power supply, drain and water for concealed connection.
Provide factory drain and chilled water piping between EWC and DF.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install fixtures at proper heights in accordance with applicable codes and as indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Point up around fixtures where they abut a wall or floor unless so directed by Engineer.
C.
Securely fasten fixtures to the floor, wall, or counter. Fixtures shall be level and square.
D.
Follow Manufacturer's instructions for fixture installations, especially for grouting and calking.
3.2
INSPECTION
A.
Inspect each fixture and unit for damage to finish.
B.
Remove and replace cracked, dented units and units or items unable to be repaired or restored to a
condition acceptable to Engineer.
3.3
CLEANING
A.
Thoroughly clean by washing with soap and disinfectant solution on all plumbing fixtures.
B.
Remove, clean, and reinstall aerators.
224700 - 3
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 230200– HVAC EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
1.3
Concrete foundations and support steel.
HVAC piping, fittings and valves.
HVAC piping, ductwork and equipment insulation.
Excavation and backfilling required.
HVAC equipment, including drives.
Ductwork.
HVAC systems testing, adjusting and balancing.
the Work.
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
ANSI:
a.
2.
a.
b.
1)
2)
3)
4)
3.
ASTM:
a.
4.
Section I.
Section II.
Section IV.
Section VIII.
A325 - Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
International:
HVAC EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
230200 - 1
Genesee County CARD
a.
b.
c.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
1.
2.
E.
1.5
Drawings.
system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
MAINTENANCE
A.
Special tools: Where special tools are required for operation, furnish these to Owner.
B.
Loose and detachable parts:
1.
2.
C.
Start-up filters:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Retain loose and small detachable parts of the apparatus and equipment furnished until the
completion of the Work.
Turn over these parts to Owner.
Do not run air handling equipment without filters.
Provide temporary filters as required to protect the air handling systems during construction phase
work.
Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace temporary construction filter elements with the specified
filter elements in accordance with Division 15 Section “Air Cleaning Devices.”
Permanent heating equipment:
1.
Notify GC when installed and proposed to be used to heat building interior.
230200 - 2
Genesee County CARD
2.
3.
Prior to using, provide adequate means to keep internal duct and acoustic liner surface clean and in a
like-new condition.
Filters:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
In accordance with Division 23 Section “Air Cleaning Devices.”
Securely supported at each return and exhaust air open duct end and grille.
Support filter length at required intervals to prevent filter deformation.
Replaced at intervals required to keep internal duct and acoustic duct line free of construction
debris and dust.
Ductwork used by Contractor without adequate protection shall be cleaned to Architect’s satisfaction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
FABRICATIONS
2.1
A.
Miscellaneous structural steel:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Comply with the requirements of Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications,” where applicable.
Structural steel work shall be done in accordance with the AISC Specification for Design, Fabrication
and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, except that allowable stresses shall be reduced 25%.
Where required, high strength structural steel bolting conforming to ASTM Specification A325 and
assembled to AISC "Specifications for Assembly of Structural Joints. Using High Strength Steel
Bolts" or welding shall be used in place of rivets.
Connections shall be properly designed for the type of connection and the loads to be carried, and
shall be subject to Engineer's or Owner's approval.
Welding shall be done by operators who have been previously qualified by tests as prescribed in the
American Welding Society "Standard Qualification Procedure" to perform the type of work required.
Welding techniques shall conform to the American Welding Society "Code for Arc and Gas Welding
in Building Construction", Section 4, Workmanship.
Finished members shall be true to line and free from twist, bends and open joints.
Material installed in a ceiling plenum shall be either non combustible or have a maximum flame spread of
25 and a maximum smoke developed rating of 50.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
A.
Perform all excavation necessary for installation of work included in Division 23, regardless of character of
material encountered. The contract price will not be increased because of rock excavation, no matter what
procedure is utilized.
B.
Each trench shall be uniformly graded and the bottom shall be free of soft spots and stone. Water
encountered in trench must be drained away, or bailed and pumped out, and the trench kept dry for pipe
laying. In no case shall sewers be used as drains for such water. Trenches close to walks or columns shall
not be excavated without prior consultation with the Construction Manager.
C.
Shape bottoms of trenches so that when pipe is in place the lower fourth of the circumference for the full
length of the barrel will be supported on compacted fill. Dig bell holes so that no part of the weight of the
pipe is supported by the bell but no larger than necessary for proper jointing. Excavate all sewers and
piping requiring excavation below the compacted fill required for the structure to at least 6 inches below
pipe invert.
230200 - 3
Genesee County CARD
D.
Make sewer and drain trenches true to grade by means of substantial and accurately set batten-boards not
more than 50 feet apart with a taut cord or wire stretched between them.
E.
Immediately after testing and/or inspection, carefully backfill the trench with earth free from clods, brick,
etc. to a depth one-half the pipe diameter and then firmly puddle and tamped in such a manner as not to
disturb the alignment or joints of the pipe. Thereafter, puddle and tamp the backfill every vertical foot.
3.2
PIPE FITTINGS
A.
Provide insulating couplings or unions where dissimilar materials are joined.
B.
Provide unions at valves and at equipment for making repairs.
3.3
PAINTING
A.
B.
1.
2.
3.
3.4
STARTUP
A.
Coordinate the startup, testing and shutdown of the new equipment and systems involved.
B.
Operating personnel, fuel, water, power and other utilities necessary for equipment start-up, will be
furnished by Owner. Instructions will be provided to the operators by the equipment vendor's personnel.
C.
Inspection:
1.
2.
D.
Verify that Project conditions comply with requirements.
Verify that status of Work meets requirements for starting of systems.
Preparation:
1.
2.
Coordinate sequence for start-up of various systems.
Have at hand during entire startup process:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Verify that each piece of equipment has been checked for:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
Contract Documents.
Shop Drawings.
Product data.
Operation and maintenance data.
Proper lubrication.
Drive rotation.
Belt tension.
Control sequence.
Other conditions which may cause damage.
Verify control systems are fully operational in automatic mode.
230200 - 4
Genesee County CARD
5.
6.
Verify that tests, meter readings and specific electrical characteristics agree with those specified by
electrical equipment Manufacturer.
Bearings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
7.
b.
c.
Adjust tension in V-belt drives, and adjust variable pitch sheaves and drives for proper
equipment speed.
Adjust drives for alignment of sheaves and V-belts.
Clean and remove foreign materials before starting operation.
Motors:
a.
b.
9.
Inspect for cleanliness, clean and remove foreign materials.
Verify alignment.
Replace defective bearings and those which run rough or are noisy.
Grease as necessary and in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
Drives:
a.
8.
Check each motor for amperage comparison to nameplate value.
Correct conditions which produce excessive current flow and which exist due to equipment
malfunction.
Pumps:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Check mechanical seals for cleanliness and adjustment before running pump.
Inspect shaft sleeves for scoring.
Inspect mechanical faces, chambers and seal rings; replace if defective.
Verify that piping system is free of dirt and scale before circulating liquid through the pump.
Check pump performance:
1)
2)
Install a pressure gage on the discharge side of the check valve following pump.
Operate the pump at all system operating heads:
a)
b)
3)
4)
3.5
Watch pressure gage for several minutes after pump shut down.
Report significant pressure variations to Engineer.
Remove pressure gage and plug tap.
Fan wheels:
a.
b.
11.
Verify pump operation with the Manufacturer's pump curve.
Report deviations to Engineer.
Operate the pump through several cycles while observing the pressure gage:
a)
b)
10.
Inspect fan wheels for clearance and balance.
Provide factory-authorized personnel for adjustment when needed.
Control circuits: Check each electrical control circuit to ensure that operation complies with
Specifications and requirements to provide desired performance.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust and align equipment for smooth operation.
1.
Plumb true and with parts in proper position and alignment.
230200 - 5
Genesee County CARD
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.6
Rotating parts shall turn freely.
Flexible couplings shall be checked for alignment subject to Owner's approval.
Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
The work of installation shall be executed in conformity with the best practice, so as to contribute to
efficiency of operation, minimum noise or vibration, minimum maintenance, accessibility and sightliness.
A.
Comply with the requirements of Division 1 Section “Quality Control and Project Testing Requirements.”
B.
Preparation:
1.
Verify that system:
a.
b.
2.
Operation and maintenance manuals:
a.
b.
3.
C.
Completed.
Sufficient copies available for use in demonstrations and instructions.
Air system balancing shall have been completed prior to these performance tests.
Demonstration and instructions:
1.
Demonstration of and instruction on operation and maintenance of system:
a.
b.
2.
3.
To Owner's personnel.
Two weeks prior to final inspection.
Instruction:
a.
b.
c.
Operation and maintenance manual as basis.
Review contents of manual in detail.
Explain aspects of operation and maintenance.
Demonstrate:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.7
Has been inspected and put in service.
Is fully operational.
Startup.
Operation.
Control.
Adjustment.
Troubleshooting.
Servicing.
Maintenance.
Shutdown.
A.
B.
payment.
230200 - 6
Genesee County CARD
C.
1.
2.
D.
Lubricate bearings.
Final cleaning includes but is not limited to the following:
1.
Equipment with factory finishes:
a.
b.
Wash factory-finished equipment with mild soap and water and leave in first-class condition,
entirely free of stains or streaks.
Do not use abrasive materials. Touch up scratches or other violations of the factory finish paint
with matching paint from the equipment Manufacturer prior to cleaning.
230200 - 7
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 230513 – COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all electric motors required for Division 15 specified
equipment.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Division 16 Section “Overcurrent Protective Devices.”
Division 16 Section “Motor Starters.”
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association - Standards and publications governing the
following performance criteria:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
1.4
Frame design.
Torque.
Enclosures.
Dimensions.
Power supply and voltages.
Locked rotor KVA per horsepower.
Service factor.
Sound power levels.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.6
Manufacturer:
Company specializing in manufacture of electric motors and their accessories, with
minimum 3 years documented product development, testing, and manufacturing experience.
A.
Protect motors stored onsite from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable
weather-proof covering.
B.
For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately in a protected area.
MOTORS
230513 - 1
Genesee County CARD
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURER
A.
Reliance.
B.
Century.
C.
General Electric.
D.
Westinghouse.
E.
Louis Allis.
F.
Allis-Chalmers.
G.
Subject to compliance with specifications, motors drawing less than 250 watts and intended for intermittent
service may be supplied by an alternate Manufacturer commonly used by the equipment Manufacturer.
2.2
SPEED (EXCEPT WHERE NOTED OTHERWISE)
A.
1,800 rpm.
B.
Constant speed.
2.3
CONSTRUCTION
A.
Designed for continuous operation in 40 degree C environment, Class B insulation. Motors interconnected
with a variable frequency drive shall be provided with Class F insulation and shall be inverter duty rated.
B.
All copper windings with a minimum service factor of 1.15 for totally enclosed, fan-cooled (TEFC) and
1.25 for open, drip-proof (ODP) motors.
C.
NEMA frame, arrangement, and design as required for the specific application.
D.
Permanently lubricated unless specifically noted otherwise.
E.
Comply with all requirements for UL approval and labeling for specific hazard classification where
explosion-proof and severe duty motors are indicated.
F.
Provide a visible stainless steel nameplate indicating:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
MOTORS
Motor horsepower.
Voltage.
Phase.
Cycles.
RPM.
Full load amps.
Locked rotor amps.
Frame size.
Manufacturer's name and model number.
Service factor.
Power factor.
Efficiency: Nameplate motor efficiency shall be identified in accordance with NEMA MG-1-12.54.2.
230513 - 2
Genesee County CARD
G.
Electrical connection: Conduit connection boxes, threaded for conduit. For fractional horsepower motors
where connection is made directly, provide screwed conduit connection in end frame.
H.
Variable frequency drive units and motors shall be matched for proper operating characteristics.
2.4
RATINGS
A.
Motors shall meet NEMA standards and be capable of operating at rated load with a voltage variation of
±10%, a variable of ±5% in rated frequency, or a combined variation of 10% without damage to the motor.
B.
Motors shall be selected for the type of service involved.
2.5
BELT DRIVES
A.
2.6
Belt drive motors shall be provided with adjustable sheaves with the selected equipment speed occurring at
the midpoint of the adjustable range. Install belt guards over drives in accordance with OSHA
requirements.
THERMAL OVERLOADS
A.
Provide built-in thermal overloads on all fractional horsepower motors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with Manufacturer's recommended installation
methods for obtaining conformance with the Contract Documents.
B.
Alignment of all motors, factory coupled or mounted, and all motors field coupled and mounted, shall be
rechecked after all connections have been made and after 48 hours of operation in designed service.
C.
Verify the voltage characteristics of each motor prior to ordering.
D.
Verify the correct wire connections and rotation of equipment by "bumping" motor after wiring.
3.2
APPLICATION: Except as specifically indicated, motors shall be selected as follows:
A.
Shaded pole motors are not acceptable.
B.
Phase:
1.
2.
C.
Single phase starting:
1.
2.
D.
Less than 3/4 HP - single-phase.
3/4 HP and larger - three-phase.
1/8 HP and less - split phase or permanent split capacitor.
Greater than 1/8 HP - capacitor start.
Enclosure:
1.
MOTORS
Totally enclosed fan-cooled (TEFC) for all motors located outside, in wet areas or elsewhere as
indicated.
230513 - 3
Genesee County CARD
2.
Open drip-proof (ODP) for motors located elsewhere, in a clean, dry environment.
MOTORS
230513 - 4
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 230529 –HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3
Division 22 Section “Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings.”
Division 22 Section “Plastic Pipe and Fittings.”
Division 22 Section “Copper Piping.”
Division 23 Section “Natural Gas Piping System. “
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
a.
b.
2.
a.
b.
c.
1.4
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.
surge.
B.
C.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 1
Genesee County CARD
D.
1.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
Comply with the requirements of ASME B31.8 for pipe hangers and support of natural gas piping systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
Special finishes and materials:
1.
All ferrous hangers and supports used in the following areas shall be hot dip galvanized unless noted
otherwise:
a.
b.
2.
Stainless steel hangers and supports shall be used where exposed in the following areas:
a.
2.2
Outside.
In wet or potentially wet areas.
Kitchens and other food preparation areas.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Elcon.
B.
Michigan Hanger.
C.
Grinnell.
D.
Bergen.
E.
Hilti.
2.3
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
230529 - 2
Genesee County CARD
B.
2.4
HANGER RODS
A.
B.
C.
galvanized rod.
D.
E.
Multiple supports:
1.
2.
2.5
SADDLES AND SHIELDS
A.
All piping:
1.
2.
2.6
ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A.
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.7
A.
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.
2.
C.
Bolts.
Welds.
230529 - 3
Genesee County CARD
D.
1.
2.
2.8
A.
B.
1.
2.
3.
Provide galvanized finish for all attachments used in wet or potentially wet areas.
Poured concrete:
a.
b.
4.
a.
b.
5.
2.
3.
4.
Vertical piping:
1.
2.
E.
Horizontal piping:
1.
D.
a.
b.
c.
C.
Use cast-in-place inserts or bolted surface mounted attachments, at Contractor’s option.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
1.
230529 - 4
Genesee County CARD
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
equipment.
Where significant, vertical movement of pipe occurs at the hanger location a resilient support must be
used:
a.
B.
C.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
1.
E.
1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN200).
to DN500).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
attachments.
installations.
230529 - 5
Genesee County CARD
3.2
A.
B.
General:
1.
2.
3.
a.
1)
2)
b.
4.
5.
On the Drawings.
On the reviewed Shop Drawings.
C.
D.
Vertical risers:
1.
2.
a.
b.
3.
Copper piping:
a.
b.
1)
2)
4.
a.
b.
5.
Plastic piping:
a.
b.
c.
E.
Horizontal runs:
1.
General:
a.
minimum).
230529 - 6
Genesee County CARD
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
F.
mounted on rollers.
1.
equipment:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
G.
supported.
H.
1.
2.
3.3
PIPE RESTRAINTS
A.
building expansion:
1.
2.
B.
1.
a.
b.
3.4
A.
230529 - 7
Genesee County CARD
B.
3.5
A.
1.
2.
3.
At each hanger.
B.
C.
1.
2.
Pipe Size (IPS)
5" and Smaller
6" to 12"
3.
Length
12"
16"
a.
b.
c.
3.6
Shield Gage
16
12
PAINTING
A.
B.
230529 - 8
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 230553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
1.3
Concrete foundations and support steel.
HVAC piping, fittings and valves.
HVAC piping, ductwork and equipment insulation.
HVAC equipment, including drives.
Ductwork.
Mechanical systems testing, adjusting and balancing.
the Work.
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
ANSI:
a.
2.
a.
b.
1)
2)
3)
4)
3.
Section I.
Section II.
Section IV.
Section VIII.
International:
a.
b.
c.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 - 1
Genesee County CARD
1.4
A.
B.
C.
Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
1.
2.
E.
1.5
Drawings.
system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
MAINTENANCE
A.
Special tools: Where special tools are required for operation, furnish these to Owner.
B.
Loose and detachable parts:
1.
2.
Retain loose and small detachable parts of the apparatus and equipment furnished until the
completion of the Work.
Turn over these parts to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PAINTING
A.
B.
1.
2.
3.
230553 - 2
Genesee County CARD
3.2
CODING AND TAGGING
A.
Piping:
1.
2.
3.
Applied to new piping after installation, insulation, and final painting.
Conform to Owner’s existing standards or conventions.
Markings:
a.
b.
c.
4.
5.
B.
Painted on, 1-inch high black letters.
Color coded band, conforming to ANSI A13.1.
Directional arrow.
Place markers at 20-foot centers with at least 1 in each room.
Plastic coated "Set Mark-Snap-Around" pipe markers manufactured by Seton Name Plate Corp., New
Haven, Connecticut; or approved equal, may be used in lieu of painted markers and bands.
Valves:
1.
2.
3.
Provide brass or minimum 1/16-inch thick laminated plastic tags indicating assigned valve number on
valves.
Furnish schedule(s) of tagged valves with number, location and purpose of each valve.
Place a copy of each schedule:
a.
b.
In the Maintenance Instructions.
In a string tie envelope labeled "Valve Schedule" and mount on the wall in Mechanical Room.
C.
Where valves, dampers, fans, and terminal units are located above the ceilings, a cadmium plated screw or
such marking as designed by Engineer shall be located in the ceiling tile directly below the device.
D.
Equipment:
1.
Provide for:
a.
b.
c.
2.
E.
Similarly label control components associated with the above named equipment items.
Dampers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
Each fan, fan units, pump, rooftop HVAC units.
Labeled with its tag name/number as given on the Drawings.
Use 2-inch high stenciled painted lettering.
Provide for each fire damper, combination fire/smoke damper, smoke damper, and balancing damper.
Label shall bear the tag name and number as indicated on the Drawings.
Use 2-inch high stenciled black lettering.
Mark balancing damper location after final adjustment.
STARTUP
A.
Inspection:
1.
2.
B.
Verify that Project conditions comply with requirements.
Verify that status of Work meets requirements for starting of systems.
Preparation:
1.
Coordinate sequence for start-up of various systems.
230553 - 3
Genesee County CARD
2.
3.4
Have at hand during entire startup process:
a.
Contract Documents.
b.
Shop Drawings.
c.
Product data.
d.
Operation and maintenance data.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.5
The work of installation shall be executed in conformity with the best practice, so as to contribute to
efficiency of operation, minimum noise or vibration, minimum maintenance, accessibility and sightliness.
A.
Comply with the requirements of Division 1 Section “Quality Control and Project Testing Requirements.”
B.
Preparation:
1.
Verify that system:
a.
b.
3.6
Has been inspected and put in service.
Is fully operational.
A.
B.
payment.
C.
1.
D.
Final cleaning includes but is not limited to the following:
1.
Equipment with factory finishes:
a.
b.
Wash factory-finished equipment with mild soap and water and leave in first-class condition,
entirely free of stains or streaks.
Do not use abrasive materials. Touch up scratches or other violations of the factory finish
paint with matching paint from the equipment Manufacturer prior to cleaning.
230553 - 4
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 23 05 93 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes a description of the mechanical system testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) scope
of services. The following systems shall be included in the testing, adjusting, and balancing process:
1.
2.
3.
Exhaust systems.
Package rooftop HVAC units (Limited Scope).
Ventilation, and air conditioning:
a.
B.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Exhaust systems.
Division 1 Section "Quality Control and Project Testing Requirements."
Division 1 Section “Systems Start-Up.”
Division 15 Section “Mechanical General Provisions.”
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's Association (SMACNA) publications:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
1.4
Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of environmental systems.
Procedural Standards for Measuring Sound of Vibration.
Testing, Adjusting, Balancing Manual for Technicians.
Associated Air Balance Council (AABC): National Standards for Total System Balance, 2002
Edition.
National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB): Procedural standards for testing, adjusting, and
balancing of environmental systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Proper performance characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
1.5
In accordance with design intent, acceptable energy efficiency and Manufacturer's recommendations.
Providing acceptable thermal and acoustical performance in all service areas.
As directed by Engineer.
SUBMITTALS
A.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
23 05 93 - 1
Genesee County CARD
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Test and balance agency: Fully certified by Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National
Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) and have at least one member qualified as Certified Test
and Balance Engineer that has been issued this certification by National Examining Board - United
States and Canada. All work by this agency shall be done under direct supervision of the Certified
Test and Balance Engineer. All final reports shall be signed by this Certified Test and Balance
Engineer and shall include his official stamp.
Test and balance agency, as part of its contract, shall act as authorized inspection agency, responsible
to Construction Manager and Owner, and shall report any discrepancies or items not installed in
accordance with contract Drawings and Specification pertaining to air distribution, cooling and/or
heating and exhaust systems.
Test and balance agency shall include a service period of 90 days after acceptance of the test and
balance final report during which time the Construction Manager, at his discretion, may request a
recheck or resetting of any outlet, fan, pump or piece of equipment as listed in test report. The
Agency shall provide technicians to assist Construction Manager in making any tests he may require
during this period of time.
Report forms:
1.
2.
The report forms included in the appendix of the AABC Standard are incorporated in the work of this
Section for the purpose of identifying the level of detail required for testing and reporting.
TAB engineer may use the AABC forms or other similar forms which present equivalent information
in a logical format.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Patching materials:
1.
2.
2.2
Comply with requirements as specified in other Sections where applicable to provide materials
essentially and functionally identical to original installation before testing and balancing work.
Maintain the integrity of systems for air tightness, water tightness, and durability of finish.
INSTRUMENTS
A.
Instruments used for TAB work shall be as indicated in the referenced standards.
B.
Calibration:
1.
2.
Instruments to have been calibrated within one year of start of TAB work.
Appropriate documentation shall be made available to the Engineer on request.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION (BY CONTRACTOR)
A.
Prior to testing and balancing, verify air balance with random checks throughout the entire store and submit
complete air balance report to the Construction Manager.
B.
Coordinate work done by testing and balancing agency with work of other trades in following manner:
23 05 93 - 2
Genesee County CARD
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Notify test and balance agency within 30 days after award of construction Contract so that
preliminary plan check and field inspection phase may be initiated.
Provide one set of final prints of air conditioning plans for plan check purposes to test and balance
agency prior to construction.
Make necessary changes or additions to air conditioning system on items reported by test and balance
agency to be not in accordance with Contract Drawings and Specification.
EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A.
Before commencing work, verify that systems are complete and operable.
B.
Report any defects, deficiencies, or abnormal conditions in mechanical systems which prevent system
balance.
C.
Beginning of work test and balance indicates acceptance of existing conditions.
D.
Recorded data shall represent actually measured or observed conditions.
E.
Permanently mark settings of valves, and other adjustment devices. Set and lock memory stops.
3.3
AIR TEST AND BALANCING PROCEDURE (BY BALANCING AGENCY)
A.
HVAC units with fabric ductwork shall measure and balance supply air volumes by means of duct traverse
method, taking minimum of 16 readings. Seal duct access holes with plastic snap-in plugs. Use of duct
tape to seal access holes will not be permitted. All remaining units shall be measured and balanced at the
terminal units.
B.
Adjust grilles and diffusers to within 10% of individual requirements specified, and also adjust so as to
minimize draft in all areas.
C.
Total air delivery in any particular fan system shall be obtained by adjustment of particular fan speed.
Drive motor of each fan shall not be loaded over corrected full load amperage rating of motor involved.
D.
Total air delivery shall be determined from duct traverse measurements not from sum of inlets or outlets.
3.4
SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS (BY CONTRACTOR)
A.
3.5
Provide changes that are required for final balancing results, as determined by test and balance agency.
Such changes may encompass, but are not necessarily restricted to changing the pulleys, belts, dampers or
adding dampers or access panels.
A.
Air handling systems: Adjust to within ±10% for supply systems and ±10% for return and exhaust systems
of design.
B.
Air outlets and inlets: Adjust to within ±10% of design.
23 05 93 - 3
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 23 07 00 – DUCTWORK INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the furnishing and installation of thermal insulation applied to external surfaces of
ductwork and air handling devices:
1.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Internal acoustic duct liner is not included in the Work of this Section. Coordinate the work with duct
liner requirements in accordance with Division 15 Section “Mechanical Sound and Vibration
Control.”
Division 15 Section “Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control”.
Division 15 Section “Sheet Metal Ductwork”.
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
ASTM Standard Test Methods: E84 – Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:
a.
b.
4.
5.
1.4
C533 – Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation
C612 – Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation
C534 - Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular
Form.
90A – Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials: 25, 50, 50 flame spread, fuel,
smoke.
SMACNA: MF-1 – Mechanical Fastener Standard.
ASHRAE: 90.1 – 1989 Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
2.
DUCTWORK INSULATION
23 07 00 - 1
Genesee County CARD
B.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1.
2.
State and Local codes and ordinances.
Insulation, facing and adhesive shall have a composite rating:
a.
b.
c.
1.6
25 flame spread maximum.
50 smoke developed maximum.
In accordance with NFPA 255.
A.
Receiving and Storage
1.
2.
B.
Deliver all materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers.
Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration or contamination with
foreign matter.
Rejected Material and Replacements:
1.
2.
Replace removed materials at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURER
A.
Insulation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Adhesives:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Benjamin Foster.
Childers.
Vimasco.
B. E. H.
Jacketing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Armstrong.
Johns Manville.
Owens-Corning.
Knauf.
Certainteed.
Rubatex.
Aeroflex USA
Pabco.
Childers.
Zeston.
Ceel-Co.
O’Brien.
MATERIALS
A.
Semi-rigid fiberglass board:
DUCTWORK INSULATION
23 07 00 - 2
Genesee County CARD
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Water vapor transmission: 0.17 perms/inch.
Armstrong AP Armaflex, or equal.
Flexible duct wrap:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.3
Glass fibers formed into semi-rigid rectangular panels.
Facing: Foil reinforced scrim kraft (FSK)
Thermal conductivity (k): 0.23 BTU-in/hr-SF - F degrees at 75 degrees F mean.
Owners-Corning #703 or equal.
Typical for applications on piping below 16 inches (normal).
Flexible elastomeric thermal insulation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Glass fiber blanket, factory laminated to vapor barrier facing.
Density: 0.75 lbs/cu. ft.
Facing: FSK.
Owens-Corning Type 75; or equal.
MECHANICAL FASTENERS
A.
Impale anchors:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
12-gage galvanized steel.
Self-adhesive pad.
2-inch speed washer.
ADHESIVES
A.
Insulation-adhesive and tape: As recommended by the manufacturer of the insulation.
B.
Canvas adhesive: Benjamin-Foster #2800-081-42; or equal.
C.
Mastic: Benjamin-Foster #60-15 C. I. asphaltic coating, or #3035 and #3800 General Purpose VinylAcrylic.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Clean ductwork surfaces prior to applying insulation.
INSTALLATION
A.
General
1.
Install ductwork insulation:
DUCTWORK INSULATION
23 07 00 - 3
Genesee County CARD
a.
b.
c.
d.
In conformance with the Drawings and Specifications
recommendations.
After the ductwork system has been satisfactorily tested.
Over clean, dry ductwork materials.
To the thicknesses as follows:
1)
2)
e.
2.
3.
4.
B.
the
manufacturer’s
As specified or as indicated on the Drawings.
Or if not specified or shown, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for
the specific application.
Continuous through wall, ceilings and sleeves (except at fire stops).
Fill all cracks and voids with insulation cement carefully troweled to leave a smooth finish.
Repair or replace all insulation damaged by demolition, water or mildew, or making connections to
ductwork or equipment.
Insulate bundles of ductwork out-of-doors with complete wrap of insulation 1-1/2 inches thick and of
suitable diameter to contain bundle, with outer jacket.
Attach rigid insulation with mechanical fasteners spaced no more than 16-inches center-to-center and
no more than 3-inches from ductwork edges or insulation joints.
a.
2.
3.
Also use mechanical fasteners on the underside of rectangular ductwork wider than 24-inches.
Attach flexible wrap insulation with 4-inch wide strips of insulation bonding adhesive spaced at 8inches center-to-center. Apply adhesive over entire surface of ductwork which conveys, or is
subjected to, unconditioned outdoor air.
a.
Maintain maximum insulation thickness at corners.
Provide removable section of insulation with a protected edge over access doors and around damper
operators to allow operation without damage to insulation.
Joints and fittings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.3
and
Attachment:
1.
C.
Tightly butt joints and seal with 3-inch (minimum) foil reinforced kraft tape.
Tape and seal all fastener penetrations and all other penetrations of the vapor barrier facing with
vapor barrier adhesive.
Make flexible wrap insulation joints with a 2-inch overlap of the vapor barrier secured with 9/16-inch
outward clinching staples spaced 6-inches center-to-center.
Burnish or iron on taped joints at patches in rigid insulation to ensure a tight seal.
Use double tape strips when joining faced insulation with unfaced.
APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A.
Insulation Material Type:
1.
Key: Insulation type (Refer to Part 2 of this Specification Section).
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
S = Semi-rigid fiberglass board.
F = Flexible duct wrap.
L = Internal liner (Refer to Division 15 Section “Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control”).
E = Elastomeric foam.
Thickness = minimum insulation thickness.
DUCTWORK INSULATION
23 07 00 - 4
Genesee County CARD
B.
Thickness schedule:
1.
2.
Thicknesses shown are based on products having a maximum “k” factor as specified in Part 2.
Thickness changes:
a.
b.
c.
C.
May be reduced for products having significantly lower “k” values.
Shall be increased for products having higher “k” values to produce equivalent or greater
overall thermal resistances
Increase insulation thickness at least 1/2-inch greater than the flange depth when in flanged
ductwork.
Supply Air:
1.
Concealed locations
a.
In ceiling plenum used for return air from heated or cooled space
1)
2)
b.
2.
Material: F
Thickness: 1-1/2 inch
In ceiling plenum not used for return air from heated or cooled space:
1)
2)
Material: F
Thickness: 1-1/2 inch.
Exposed locations:
a.
In cooled and heated space or heated only space:
1)
2)
b.
Material: L
Thickness: 1-inch.
In building exterior exposed to outdoor conditions:
1)
2)
D.
Material: E
Thickness: 2-inch.
Return Air:
1.
Concealed locations:
a.
In ceiling plenum used for return air from heated or cooled space:
1)
b.
In ceiling plenum not used for return from heated or cooled space:
1)
2)
2.
Material: not required.
Material: F.
Thickness: 1-1/2 inch.
Exposed locations:
a.
In heated and cooled space:
1)
b.
Material: not required.
In heated space:
DUCTWORK INSULATION
23 07 00 - 5
Genesee County CARD
1)
2)
c.
Material: L
Thickness: 1 inch.
In spaces exposed to outdoor ambient and in building exterior:
1)
2)
E.
Material: E.
Thickness: 2 inch.
Do not use internal liner in any duct conveying any amount of unconditioned or unfiltered air.
DUCTWORK INSULATION
23 07 00 - 6
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 231123 – FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the furnishing and installation of natural gas piping and related items.
1.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Natural gas distribution system.
Division 23 Section “Testing and Cleaning.”
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
ANSI Z223.1 - Fuel Gas Code.
ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.
ASME B31.8 - Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications for fabrication and installation personnel: Trained and experienced in the fabrication and
installation of the materials and equipment.
B.
Installation shall comply with:
1.
2.
State and local codes and ordinances.
Requirements of:
a.
b.
Owner's insurer.
Gas distribution utility.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Interior gas piping shall be black Schedule 40 steel pipe in accordance with Division 15 Section “Steel Pipe
and Fittings,” and this Section.
B.
Buried piping:
1.
Wrap with a pressure-sensitive, adhesive-backed, polyvinyl chloride or polyethylene tape.
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING
231123 - 1
Genesee County CARD
a.
b.
c.
2.
C.
Spirally wrap straight pipe with 0.020-inch thick tape with minimum overlap of 1/2-inch.
Spirally wrap 2 layers of 0.010-inch thick tape with minimum overlap of 1/2-inch.
Manufacturers: 3M Company “Scotchwrap”.
Steel pipe with a factory-applied polyethylene plastic coating such as Energy Coatings Company,
“Pritec” may be used in lieu of wrapping specified above.
Refer to Gas Piping Schedule in Part 3 of this specification for complete materials specification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
A.
Description of work:
1.
2.
Provide complete natural gas distribution system as indicated on Drawings and as required to comply
with applicable codes and regulations at 2 psi with maximum 10% pressure drop.
This includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
Materials and installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.2
Connect to gas meter installation.
Vent lines to atmosphere where applicable.
Connect gas to equipment outlets.
Auxiliaries and accessories.
Provide gas pressure reducing valve at water heater, rooftop equipment and cooking
appliances.
Install gas piping and valves in accordance with the requirements of the plumbing code, the gas
company, and the American Gas Association.
Run gas piping and make final connections to equipment requiring gas.
Install gas cock and drip in branch laterals serving each piece of equipment.
Furnish control valves with equipment unless specified otherwise.
Gas pipe in inaccessible locations shall not have unions, valves, tubing fittings or running threads.
Provide dormant moveable gas connection fit Model No. 1675KITB48 with NBS deluxe FIT B-Type
quick disconnect. Fit to include 1 stainless steel gas connector with quick disconnect, stainless steel
braid and PVC coating 1 full port valve, 2 elbows, restraining cable and mounting hardware.
SCHEDULES
Pipe Size
1/2 to 11/2
2 to 6
Gas Piping
125 PSI Maximum Pressure – 250 Degree F Maximum Temperature
Schedule
Material
ASTM
Grade Remarks
40
40
Seamless Steel
Seamless Steel
Fittings
Ells
Size
1/2 to 1-1/2
2 to 6
Tees
1/2 to 1-1/2
Reducers
2 to 6
1/2 to 1-1/2
2 to 6
Description
150# Malleable Iron Screwed
Standard Weight Steel L.R. Butt
Weld
Miter Branch and Weld into Run or
Butt Weld Tees
Standard Weight Steel Butt Weld
A53
A53
B
B
Threaded and Coupled
Plain End
ANSI
B16.3
B16.9
ASTM
A197
A234
B16.3
A197
B16.9
B16.3
B16.9
A234
A197
A234
231123 - 2
Genesee County CARD
Fittings
Bushings
Couplings
Unions
Size
1/2 to 1-1/2
1/2 to 1-1/2
1/2 to 1-1/2
Plugs
Caps
1/2 to 1-1/2
1/2 to 1-1/2
2 to 6
1/2 to 6
Flanges
Gaskets
Valves
Shut-Off
Size
1/2 to 1-1/2
2 to 6
Description
Outside Hex. Head Iron
150# Malleable Irion Screwed with
Iron-to-Iron Seat
Malleable Iron Square Head Solid
Standard Weight Steel Butt Weld
150# F.S. Slip-On or Weld Neck
ANSI
B16.4
B16.3
B16.3
Nitrile Butadiene Rubber – 1/16
Inch
B16.21
B16.3
B16.9
B16.9
Description
200# WOG-Semi-Steel, Rockwell, Fig. 114
200# WOG-Semi Steel, Rockwell Fig. 115 or 165
ASTM
A197
A197
A197
A234
A181
Class 60
Ends
Screwed
Flanges
231123 - 3
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 23 31 13 – SHEET METAL DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the furnishing and installation of sheet metal ductwork and appurtenances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
As specified herein.
As required to provide a complete and operational air distribution system.
As necessary for the proper and complete performance of the Work.
Division 15 Section “Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control.“
Division 15 Section “Ductwork Insulation.”
Division 15 Section “Duct Accessories.”
Division 15 Section “Air Inlets/Outlets.”
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
ASHRAE Guidelines:
a.
b.
2.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
A480 - General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless Steel and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip.
A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process.
A924 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum - Alloy Sheet and Plate.
ASTM Standard Test Methods:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Handbook - Chapter - "Duct Construction."
Handbook - Chapter - "Duct Design."
A90 - Weight of coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.
C731 - Extrudability, after Packaging, Aging, of Latex Sealants.
D2202 - Slump of Sealants.
NFPA Standards:
a.
b.
c.
90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operation.
SHEET METAL DUCTWORK
23 31 13 - 1
Genesee County CARD
5.
SMACNA Guidelines:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
1.4
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible", Latest Edition.
"Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards."
“Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards.”
“Guide for Steel Stack Construction.”
UL Standards: 181 - Factory Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Duct sizes indicated on Drawings are net clear inside dimensions.
B.
Duct construction pressure classifications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.5
Duct System
Supply duct downstream of fan coils and
rooftop units
Return duct
Exhaust duct connected to fans
Exhaust duct connected to equipment fans
SMACNA
Pressure Classification
1" W.G.
1" W.G.
1" W.G.
3" W.G.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Sumbit shop drawings for approval on exposed ductwork in Gym and Balcony areas.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
2.
B.
1.
2.
3.
All state and local codes and ordinances.
Owner's insurer.
Flexible ductwork shall comply with:
a.
b.
1.7
UL listed - Class 1 Air Duct Material, Standard 181.
NFPA Standard 90A - Flame spread: 25, smoke developed: 50.
A.
1.
2.
All materials shall be delivered in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as
applicable.
Handle and store materials:
a.
In a manner which will prevent:
23 31 13 - 2
Genesee County CARD
1)
2)
3)
b.
B.
Deterioration or damage.
Contamination with foreign matter.
Damage by weather or elements.
In accordance with Manufacturer's directions.
1.
2.
Rejected damaged, deteriorated or contaminated material and immediately remove from the Site.
Replace rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Duct connection systems:
1.
2.
B.
Flexible duct:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Lindab, Inc.
Flexmaster USA, Inc., Type 3 uninsulated or 3M insulated as specified.
General Environment Corporation.
Wiremold Company.
Pre-fabricated fittings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
United McGill Corporation.
Buckley Air Products, Inc.
Eastern Sheet Metal, Inc.
LaPine Metal Products.
Lindab, Inc.
SEMCO.
D.
Manufactured ductwork and fittings shall be of one Manufacturer to ensure tight fit of ductwork and
components.
E.
Manufacturer's stamp:
1.
2.
2.2
Manufacturer's stamp shall be on the outside of the ductwork.
Stamp shall be clean and clear, indicating the metal gage.
MATERIALS
A.
Galvanized steel:
1.
2.
B.
Galvanized steel of lock-forming quality with minimum ASTM A653, G90 zinc coating, both sides
in accordance with ASTM A90.
Use for all ductwork systems unless noted otherwise.
Aluminum alloy:
1.
2.
3.
Lock-forming quality complying with ASTM B209, Alloy No. 3003-H-14 minimum, or equivalent.
One side bright finish where exposed to view.
Mill finish where concealed.
23 31 13 - 3
Genesee County CARD
C.
Where stainless steel ductwork is specified, unless noted otherwise:
1.
Exposed to view:
a.
b.
2.
3.
ASTM A480, Type 304 sheet form.
No. 4 finish.
Concealed:
a.
b.
ASTM A480, Type 304 sheet form.
No. 1 finish.
Concealed: Minimum 16 gage, welded carbon steel.
D.
Acceptable fasteners:
1.
Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
2.
Stainless steel.
E.
Tapes:
1.
2.
F.
High pressure rated, non-hardening, water resistant and fire-resistant.
Compatible with duct material.
Sealants:
1.
Fire and smoke hazard rating:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.3
As tested by ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
Not to exceed: Flame spread 25, smoke developed 50.
Exterior mastic sealant: Certified to pass 600 hours QUV; or equivalent weather testing.
Comply with ASTM C731 and D2202.
Specifically formulated for sealing the field joints.
UL listed.
Hardcast, Inc., Sure Grip 404, or Iron Grip 601.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Construct rectangular, round and flat oval ductwork and fittings in accordance with the
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, current edition.
B.
Transitions: Make every change in size or shape of duct with taper not exceeding 20 degrees.
C.
Connections:
1.
2.
3.
Make connections to equipment as indicated on Drawings or called for by these Specifications.
For rectangular connections, crimp fabric to sheet metal and fasten sheet metal to ducts by screws
2-inch on center.
Flexible ductwork connections:
a.
b.
c.
Securely fasten flexible duct to round sheet metal ducts or duct collars with stainless steel or
zinc-coated iron draw bands with worm gear fastener.
Flexible duct 10-inch diameter or less, installed on 1-inch W.G. pressure classification duct
may be attached with nylon cable ties.
Fabric shall not be stressed other than by air pressure.
23 31 13 - 4
Genesee County CARD
D.
Elbows and tees:
1.
2.
Maintain centerline radius of 1-1/2 times duct width in plane of turn.
Provide short radius fittings with a minimum of 2 turning vanes full length of turn or square elbows
with multiple blade airfoil turning vanes set at 45 degree angle.
E.
Turning vanes and distribution devices: Where registers, grilles or diffusers are located less than 5
equivalent duct diameters from the main duct, provide necessary distribution grids or turning vanes to
ensure even distribution of air over the entire face of the outlet.
F.
Obstructions:
1.
2.
3.
Wherever a pipe or other obstruction passes through a duct (this condition is to be avoided if
possible), pass the obstacle through an airfoil sleeve in the duct.
Increase duct area at the obstruction if more than 20% of duct area is displaced by obstruction.
Streamline sleeve to maintain angles at duct size changes at 20 degree angle.
G.
Provide necessary plastering frames and drawbands required.
H.
Mixing boxes:
1.
2.
2.4
Modify, by experimentation if necessary, the return and outdoor air mixing section of duct if nuisance
tripping of freeze-stat occurs due to inadequate mixing of airstreams.
Install sheet metal baffle plates to promote mixing and eliminate stratification.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Flexible duct:
1.
Construction:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
B.
Liner of laminated aluminum foil/fiberglass/aluminated polyester.
Zinc-coated steel helix bonded to liner.
1-inch thick, 1 pound/cubic foot insulation.
Seamless copolymer vapor barrier jacket.
Rated for pressure class of system in which duct is used.
Maximum flexible duct length shall not exceed 5 feet, maximum flex duct turn shall not exceed
45 degrees.
Manufactured ductwork connection systems:
1.
General:
a.
b.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
3.
In lieu of SMACNA Duct Construction Standards, Contractor may use an alternative
engineered connection system such as Ductmate, “Spirosafe” by Lindab; or approved equal.
Designed to provide equivalent reinforcing and pressure characteristics.
Duct, gasket, and fitting providing an airtight outer pressure shell.
The construction shall have mechanical means to maintain positive or negative pressure
requirement, or both, and rigidity equivalent to SMACNA joints and metal gages.
Duct material:
23 31 13 - 5
Genesee County CARD
a.
b.
4.
Outer shell: Galvanized steel.
Metal gage: As required to meet pressure classification indicated.
Fittings:
a.
b.
2.5
As indicated on Drawing and of same Manufacturer as duct section.
Sized to slip fit into the duct sections, without sharp projections for noise and airflow
disturbances.
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
A.
Metal casing housing and plenums for all fans, coils, humidifiers, filter and other equipment shall be in
accordance with SMACNA.
B.
Install 16 gage stainless steel drip pan under cooling coils with proper drains and fitting. Seal water tight.
2.6
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Certified testing:
1.
2.
Suppliers of manufactured round and oval ductwork shall have on file with Engineer certified copies
of test data made by an independent United States laboratory covering pipe and fittings as
manufactured by that Supplier.
Spiral pipe test data:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Cover leakage rate, bursting strength, collapsing strength, seam strength and friction loss.
Friction loss test data shall cover both the duct and the assembled coupling joints.
This friction loss data shall be equal to or less than the friction loss data used in the design of
this system.
The fitting test data shall cover the friction loss tests of all fittings used on the project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Install ductwork and accessories to provide a system free from buckling, warping, breathing,
vibration, rattling, or whistling.
Lap ducts in direction of air flow with longitudinal seams locked and hammered tight.
Provide flat "S" cleats on all exposed traverse duct connections in finished areas.
Install ducts straight with building walls where possible and exposed duct tight against roof or walls
where possible.
Ducts shall be air-tight, rigid, securely hung or bracketed in position.
At the end of an uninsulated section or run, where internally insulated duct connects to uninsulated
spiral duct or fitting, fire damper or flex, install an insulation end fitting to bring the outer shell down
to nominal size.
Install screws and rivets of such length that they do not interfere with the operation of manual or
automatic dampers.
Provide 1-inch long metal nosing around entire duct perimeter at all exposed and leading edges of
internal acoustic ductwork lining.
Protection of system:
23 31 13 - 6
Genesee County CARD
1.
2.
C.
Allow swing in long direction of duct for movement.
Double nut hanger rods.
Duct anchoring:
1.
2.
E.
Cap the ends of sheet metal ductwork, including the roof openings, registers and diffuser openings
with temporary sheet metal caps during all stages of construction in order to keep system clean.
If permanent heating and cooling equipment is used prior to Substantial Completion, protection of
ductwork systems shall comply with Division 15 Section “General Mechanical Provisions.”
Hanging duct:
1.
2.
D.
Galvanized sheet metal hanger straps attached to construction.
Angle metal screwed to the ductwork.
Joint sealing of duct systems:
1.
Except where using gasketed duct connection systems, seal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA
Class A:
a.
b.
Seal ductwork including supply, return, mixed, outdoor, and exhaust air systems.
For round and flat oval ductwork:
1)
2)
3)
4)
c.
d.
e.
2.
Apply approved sealant to the male end of the couplings and fittings.
After the joint is slipped together, place sheet metal screws 1/2-inch from the joint bead
for mechanical strength.
Apply sealer to the outside of joints including longitudinal joints, extending 1-inch on
each side of the joint.
Cover screw heads.
For rectangular ductwork:
1)
2)
Apply approved sealant to transverse and longitudinal joints.
Extend sealant a minimum of 1-inch on each side of joint.
Follow sealant Manufacturer’s directions for application, storage and cure time.
Ductwork located outside shall be air and watertight.
Manufactured connection systems:
a.
b.
F.
Acceptable in accordance with Paragraph 2.1.
Seal flanged joints with neoprene rubber gaskets.
Appearance: Where exposed ducts pass through walls or floors: Refer to Division 15 Section “Mechanical
Penetrations.”
23 31 13 - 7
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 23 31 20 – DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS - SHEET METAL DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the furnishing and installation of duct hangers, supports, anchors and related
appurtenances.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Division 15 Section “Sheet Metal Ductwork.”
A.
1.4
Comply with the requirements of Division 15 Section “Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control for
vibration isolation of ductwork.
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
SMACNA: HVAC Duct Standards, Metal and Flexible current edition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Hangers:
1.
2.
B.
Wall supports:
1.
2.
C.
Galvanized steel band iron.
Rolled angle and 3/8-inch minimum galvanized steel rod.
Galvanized steel band iron.
Fabricated angle bracket.
Vertical supports at floors:
1.
2.
Rolled steel angle 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 1/8 minimum.
Mechanically attached to duct.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
All ducts:
DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS – SHEET METAL DUCTWORK
23 31 20 - 1
Genesee County CARD
1.
2.
Support in a secure manner.
Subject to Engineer's approval.
B.
In accordance with Section IV of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
C.
Do not support ductwork from metal roof deck.
D.
Ductwork shall be supported off joist upper panel point.
E.
Unacceptable work shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to Owner.
DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS – SHEET METAL DUCTWORK
23 31 20 - 2
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 23 33 00 – DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes, but is not limited to, the furnishing and installation of the major items listed below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.
C.
Air flow regulating dampers.
Duct access doors and panels.
Gravity backdraft dampers.
Control dampers.
Division of Work:
1.
2.
the Subcontractors and Suppliers and for delineating the Work to be performed by specific trades.
the Work:
a.
1)
2)
3)
b.
Temperature Control Subcontractor:
1)
2)
1.3
Install control dampers.
Provide manual dampers and gravity backdraft dampers.
Provide access hatches required for mechanical equipment.
Furnish control dampers, linkages and operators unless specifically noted otherwise on
Drawings.
Install linkages and operators on dampers.
REFERENCES
A.
Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the Work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1.
2.
3.
NFPA 90A - Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
SMACNA Publications: HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
ASTM:
a.
b.
E84 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
E477 - Test Method for Measuring Acoustical and Airflow Performance of Duct Liner
Materials and Prefabricated Silencers.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00 - 1
Genesee County CARD
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
2.
B.
1.
Installation and materials shall be in accordance with:
a.
b.
C.
Operation and maintenance manuals for each type of damper:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.6
Owner's insurer.
Equipment function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions.
Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment and checking instructions.
Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operating, regulation and control, and
shutdown and emergency conditions.
Lubrication and maintenance instructions.
Guide to “troubleshooting”.
A.
Installation of control components at the Manufacturer’s factory or in the field is optional only to the extent
that schedule is not adversely affected.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
AIRFLOW REGULATING DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Dampers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Regulators:
a.
b.
B.
American Warming and Ventilating, Inc.
Ruskin.
Louvers and Dampers, Inc.
Greenheck.
Duro-Dyne.
Ventlok.
Provide accessible, manually operable dampers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
At branch duct take-offs.
At diffuser run-out take-offs.
Downstream of duct coils.
As indicated on the Drawings by the manual balancing damper "B.D." symbol.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00 - 2
Genesee County CARD
C.
Dampers for round duct:
1.
2.
For 8-inch and smaller, premanufactured dampers equal to Hart & Cooley 608/66 series.
Field fabricate dampers:
a.
Blade:
1)
2)
b.
D.
Pivot rod continuous, 3/8-inch minimum for 12 inches and larger, 1/4-inch for under 12-inch
size.
Field fabricate single blade dampers:
a.
Blade:
1)
2)
3)
b.
2.
3/8-inch pins up to 18-inch wide.
1/2-inch continuous rod over 18-inch wide.
Dampers with vertical dimension over 12-inches:
a.
b.
Use opposed blade type.
Blade:
1)
2)
3)
18-gage minimum galvanized steel.
12-inch maximum blade height.
Hardware.
Regulator:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Galvanized steel.
Two gages heavier than duct in which installed.
12-inch maximum height.
Pivot rod:
1)
2)
F.
Galvanized steel.
Two gages heavier than duct in which installed.
Dampers for rectangular duct:
1.
E.
Quadrant type with handle and wingnut.
Provide with integral insulation flange or standoff for installations on insulated ductwork.
Provide end bearing.
Dampers upstream of coils: Opposed blade type.
DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Prefco.
Ruskin.
Ventfabrics, “Ventlock”.
Greenheck.
Provide in ductwork:
DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00 - 3
Genesee County CARD
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Wherever necessary for proper access to instruments, controls, fire dampers, motorized dampers,
coils and equipment.
For convenient inspection, maintenance and replacement.
Reinforce openings on sides with material or ductwork in which doors are installed.
Construction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Two-piece 22 gage minimum pan construction, consisting of outer side crimped over inner dished
side.
Continuous piano hinge and not less than 2 heavy cam latches. A removable type door is acceptable
only where there is inadequate clearance for a hinged door.
Contact surfaces of doors covered with heavy dense felt securely fastened in place to make doors air
tight.
Insulated or soundproofed with same material as ducts or casings where located.
Ruskin ADH22 or ADC22; or equal.
GRAVITY BACKDRAFT DAMPER
A.
Manufacturer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.4
American Warming & Ventilation, Inc.
Louvers & Dampers, Inc.
Ruskin.
Greenheck.
0.070-inch extruded aluminum blades.
0.125-inch extruded aluminum frame.
Adjustable counterbalanced blades.
Mill finish.
Low leakage.
Operable down to 0.02-inch WG.
Based on Ruskin Model CBD-6.
AUTOMATIC CONTROL DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturer:
1.
Dampers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Operators - Electric:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Ruskin.
Greenheck.
Louvers & Dampers, Inc.
Johnson.
Honeywell.
Belimo.
Johnson.
Honeywell.
Alternates only with prior approval.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00 - 4
Genesee County CARD
B.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Provide single, multiple, parallel, or opposed blade as required.
Parallel blade design for mixing applications, opposed blade for throttling application.
Orient mixing dampers to converge the 2 airstreams.
Where not indicated on the Drawings, damper construction shall be as follows:
a.
b.
c.
C.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Construct damper frames of minimum 16 gage galvanized sheet metal, with flanges for duct
mounting with corner brackets to provide rigid frame.
Damper blades shall not exceed 6 inches in width.
Blades shall be galvanized steel with 1/2-inch minimum 16 gage plated tube or solid axle keyed into
12-gage pivot arms.
The bearings shall be synthetic sleeve type.
Blade sealing:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
6.
7.
Provide replaceable neoprene or PVC coated fabric seals.
Install seals along the top, bottom and sides of the frame and along each blade edge.
Seal shall provide a tight closing low leakage damper.
Leakage shall not exceed 10 CFM/SF at 4-inch W.G. for a 24-inch x 24-inch damper.
Provide flexible stainless steel jamb seal.
Damper blade interlock linkages shall drive the shaft of each blade, not the blade edge.
Ruskin Model CD36; or equal.
Damper operators:
1.
General:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Sized for ample power to overcome friction of damper linkage and air pressure acting on the
blades.
Capable of operating at varying rates of speed to correspond to the dictates of the controllers
and variable load requirements.
The operator linkage arrangement shall be such as to permit normally open or normally closed
positions of the dampers as required.
Electronic damper actuators:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.5
Use standard dampers (as described below) for all other applications.
Use low leakage dampers whenever damper is used to isolate outside or contaminated air from
a ducted airstream or air handling unit or wherever velocity exceeds 1500 fpm.
Use insulating dampers wherever damper is used to isolate outside or contaminated air directly
from an occupied space or plenum (unducted).
Standard construction:
1.
D.
Direct coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full stroke cycles at rated torque.
Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
Overload protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry.
Fail safe operation: Mechanical, spring return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear
release on non-spring return actuators.
Temperature rating: -22 to +122 degrees F.
INSTRUMENT TEST HOLES
A.
Manufacturer: Ventlock model 699; or equal.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00 - 5
Genesee County CARD
B.
Provide at control points including but not necessarily limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Air temperature controller sensors.
Pressure sensors.
Temperature limit devices.
Locations determined by Test and Balance Engineers.
Compatible with duct external insulation thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
Install duct accessories in conformance with:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
The Shop Drawings reviewed by Engineer.
These specifications where different from SMACNA.
Manufacturer's written instructions.
Locate branch dampers used for air flow regulation as close as possible to main trunks.
Dampers shall not rattle or generate airborne noise of any kind regardless of damper position.
Dampers located upstream of coils shall not interfere with uniform velocity profile at coil face.
Locate and orient duct accessories according to Manufacturer's instructions relative to nearby fittings,
elbows, and fans.
Verify that dampers move freely through their entire stroke without binding.
Access:
1.
2.
3.
Concealed duct accessories requiring inspection, service or maintenance shall be accessible.
Provide acceptable means of access.
Ensure that damper operator handles are not covered by insulation.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00 - 6
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 23 34 00 – HVAC FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all power ventilators.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Division 15 Section “Motors.”
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
AMCA (Air Movement and Control Association) Standards:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
UL:
a.
b.
3.
1.4
99 - Fabrication Standards.
210 - Laboratory Method for Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating.
261 - Directory of Products Licensed to Use the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.
705 - Power Ventilators.
762 - Power Roof Ventilators for Restaurant Exhaust Appliances.
NFPA: 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
All power ventilators shall be selected as indicated on the Drawings:
1.
2.
Airflow and static pressure indicated are minimums.
Fan speed, brake horsepower (BHP) and sound ratings are maximum.
B.
Manufacturer name and model number information given in equipment schedules represent quality and
performance standards for that equipment.
C.
Unless stated otherwise, all fans shall be provided with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Compatible curb or mounting hardware.
Factory installed disconnect switch.
Bird screen.
OSHA approved beltguard.
POWER VENTILATORS
23 34 00 - 1
Genesee County CARD
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
2.
B.
1.
2.
C.
Owner's insurer.
Quality assurance:
1.
2.
AMCA ratings program certified and bearing AMCA air and sound seals.
UL listed electrical components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Greenheck.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
The equipment shall be factory built and factory tested.
B.
The Manufacturer shall repair or replace any items which fail to obtain specified performance.
C.
All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and tested.
2.3
CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATOR
A.
Housing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Fan wheel:
1.
2.
C.
Low silhouette, weatherproof, heavy gage spun aluminum housing, self-supporting, enclosing
venturi- orifice and fan inlet and wheel and overlapping fan curb.
With rain and snow weather guard.
Baked enamel finish, color as selected by Engineer.
Aluminum bird screen in discharge outlet.
All aluminum key locked to drive shaft, backward inclined, quiet nonoverlapping centrifugal fan
wheel statically and dynamically balanced.
Permanently lubricated fan bearing.
Motor and drive:
1.
2.
Comply with the requirements of Division 15 Section “Motors.”
Standard NEMA motors built-in overload constant speed.
POWER VENTILATORS
23 34 00 - 2
Genesee County CARD
3.
4.
5.
Resilient mounted outside of air stream, inside weatherproof housing.
Disconnect switch mounted inside housing, with factory wiring to motor.
Adjustable V-belt drive with 1.3 service factor.
D.
Roof curb: Comply with the requirements of Division 15 Section “Mechanical Penetrations.”
E.
Dampers:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Multi-leaf, felt edged.
Aluminum back draft type.
Furnished with factory installed linkage and motor.
CEILING CABINET FANS
A.
General:
1.
2.
B.
Quality Assurance:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Designed for ceiling or wall mounting, cabinet mounted centrifugal fan and motor.
Cook #GC as scheduled; or approved equal.
Bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for Sound and Air Performance.
Fan wheel balanced per AMCA Standard 204-96.
Listed by UL under UL-705.
Manufactured in an ISO 9001 certified facility.
Housing:
1.
Constructed as one-piece injection molded.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Material shall exceed UL requirements for smoke and heat generation.
Fan inlet box of minimum 22 gauge galvanized steel.
Inlet grille of white color, high impact resistant, injection-molded styrene.
Integral outlet duct connection with aluminum backdraft damper with continuous aluminum hinge
rod.
Adjustable, pre-punched mounting bracket to accommodate different ceiling thicknesses.
Designed for field conversion from ceiling to inline mounting style.
Fan and motor:
1.
2.
3.
Direct drive centrifugal fan with permanently lubricated bearings.
Fan wheel: forward curved design constructed of injection molded polypropylene.
Motor:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Open drip proof design of voltage scheduled.
Internal impedance or thermal overload protection.
Permanently lubricated bearings.
Isolation mounted to a one-piece integral motor-mount of stamped galvanized steel.
Disconnect plug to field wiring compartment in the housing.
Suitable for variable speed operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
POWER VENTILATORS
23 34 00 - 3
Genesee County CARD
3.1
REQUIREMENTS
A.
Verify that openings and adjacent areas are free of obstructions, and ready to receive fans.
B.
Begin installation of fans only when openings conform to Specification requirements.
C.
Install fan(s) and accessories in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Secure components to openings and to each other.
E.
Adjust fan, belts and components as necessary for:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
3.2
Smooth operation.
Proper running amperage.
Minimum vibration.
Correct rotation.
Replace components found out of alignment and balance.
EXHAUST FANS CONTROL
A.
General:
1.
B.
The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for controls and control wiring for exhaust fans.
Control Sequence:
1.
Individual programmable electronic time clocks shall cycle the following EF’s on as scheduled.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Individual line voltage electric cooling thermostats shall cycle the following EF’s on through the fan
speed controller as required:
a.
b.
c.
3.
REF-1: CR Toilets.
REF-2: Gym and Public Toilets and Locker Rooms.
REF-7: Business Toilet Rooms.
CEF-3: Elevator Equipment.
CEF-5: Mail/Copy Room.
CEF-6: Telecom Room.
A manually operated fan speed controller shall control the CEF-4: Receiving Room.
POWER VENTILATORS
23 34 00 - 4
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 23 37 13 – AIR INLETS/OUTLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all air inlet and outlet devices.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Division 9 Section “Painting.”
REFERENCES
A.
following:
1.
1.4
AMCA Publications: Standard 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
REGISTERS, GRILLES, DIFFUSERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Diffusers, registers and grilles:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Titus.
Tuttle and Bailey.
Anemostat.
Price.
General construction features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Refer to the Drawings for styles, types and design and materials.
Return registers and grilles shall have fixed fins.
Provide opposed blade, key operated dampers with registers.
Provide sponge rubber gaskets at mounting flanges.
AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS
23 37 13 - 1
Genesee County CARD
5.
6.
Fit units with concealed mounting screws.
Frame:
a.
b.
C.
2.2
Manufacturer's standard paint; color selected by Architect.
Anodized acceptable where standard for specific item.
Off-white color for suspended ceiling installations, except where noted as black.
Accessories:
1.
2.
E.
Provide factory manufactured frame to allow proper mounting to surface in which installed,
i.e., plaster, concrete, T-bar, splined ceiling, etc.
Coordinate each case with architectural Drawings.
Finish:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Provide where indicated or required.
Equalizing grid.
Manufacturer/model numbers are scheduled on Drawings to indicate performance criteria, appearance style
and quality of materials.
DROP DIFFUSERS
A.
Provide factory fabricated drop diffusers with the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Double deflection supply drum louvers: 6 per unit, U.O.N. (based on Titus High Capacity Long
Throw Model DL), to provide both vertical and horizontal adjustment with individually adjustable
blades.
Baffled quadrants with turning vanes in each quadrant.
Standard S type, drive, or TDC duct connections.
Threaded inserts for mounting.
22 gage galvanized steel construction, G90, LFQ, CQ.
Factory assembled welded construction.
1-inch duct liner per Specifications.
Available performance data, including throw, pressure drop, and NC.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Follow Manufacturer's instructions, subject to Engineer's approval.
B.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles only after finish painting has been completed.
C.
Install fixed vane return and exhaust grilles with angle of vanes perpendicular to normal line-of-sight.
D.
Locate outdoor air intakes a minimum of 10'-0" from plumbing and gas fired appliance vents and exhaust
fan discharges.
3.2
ADJUSTING
A.
Set pattern controllers on slot diffusers and set vanes on adjustable diffusers to provide air flow patterns as
indicated on the Drawings.
23 37 13 - 2
Genesee County CARD
3.3
PAINTING
A.
Unlined ductwork:
1.
2.
Where visible behind diffusers, registers, and grilles.
Apply flat black paint:
a.
b.
2 coats.
In accordance with Division 9 Section “Painting.”
23 37 13 - 3
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 237413 – PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the installation of packaged rooftop air handling units.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Major components include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
1.4
Factory assembled packaged unit suitable for roof (or curb) mounting and outdoor installation.
All components functionally joined on a common base.
Complete in every way, ready for electrical, ductwork, piping and control connections
Gas heating section.
Filter module.
Supply fan.
Economizer section.
Compressor/condenser system with direct expansion evaporator coil.
Factory-mounted controls.
Prefabricated support curb.
Design and performance requirements as indicated on the Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
2.
B.
Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed shop drawings.
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
237413 - 1
Genesee County CARD
2.1
PACKAGED GAS-ELECTRIC ROOFTOP UNITS
A.
General
1.
2.
3.
B.
Quality Assurance
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Design with exterior for curb/base mounting and bottom duct connections.
Construct cabinet cabinet of 18 gauge G90 galvanized sheet steel with exterior of 18 gauge or heavier
with fasteners of aluminum or stainless steel.
Crossbreak or slope roof for drainage.
Provide side service doors for access to all interior components.
Design doors with hinges and quarter-turn toolless latches, rain break overhangs, and full perimeter
gasket on air side doors.
Provide flanges upturned 1/2” minimum around each opening in base.
Provide cabinet subject to supply fan downstream pressure as separate from unit cabinet and design
to hold 12” SP.
Construct interior air side of cabinet as single wall design with 1” thick, 1.5 pcf density foam
insulation.
Finish cabinet exterior by priming and coating with polyurethane paint system suitable for a 2000
hour salt spray test per ASTM B-117-95.
Provide labels/decals indicating rigging points, service and hazardous areas.
Units shall be completely factory assembled, piped, wired, and shipped in one piece.
Blowers and Drives
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Cooling capacities per ARI 210/240-89 or 360-85.
Wiring, motors, controls and devices per NEC and UL.
Filters and liner per NFPA 90A and UL Class I.
Energy Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, “Energy Efficient
Design of New Buildings Except Low Rise Residential Buildings.”
Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, “Safety Code for Mechanical
Refrigeration”.
The rooftop units shall be certified in accordance with UL standard 1995 and ANSI standard Z21.47.
The rooftop units shall be safety certified by an accredited testing laboratory and the nameplate shall
carry the label of the certification agency.
Cabinet
1.
2.
D.
Designed for outdoor application.
Factory assembled, piped, wired, tested and shipped as one assembly (when feasible).
Factory mounted and wired unit control devices.
Factory balance fans, drives and motors statically and dynamically.
Design direct drive blowers as centrifugal with forward curved blades.
Design belt drive blowers as centrifugal with backward inclined airfoil blades.
Select belts for 140% minimum of motor nameplate brake horsepower when adjustable pulley is at
minimum rpm.
Mount blower assemblies resiliently on a base which slides out of the cabinet for access.
Construct motors as open, drip proof, 1800 rpm, 1.15 service factor, ball bearings.
Refrigeration System
1.
2.
Direct expansion type fully charged with refrigerant and oil.
Use R410A refrigerant unless noted otherwise.
237413 - 2
Genesee County CARD
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
F.
Coils of plate-fin design constructed of seamless copper tubing mechanically expanded into
aluminum fins, circuited for row split where supplied by multiple compressors, extended into
equalizing type vertical tube distributors with a top suction connection, mounted in casings of
galvanized steel.
Provide insulated drain pan below coil pitched to a threaded drain connection.
Mount condenser coil at 30-degrees from vertical to prevent weather damage.
Design compressors as hermetic scroll type with internal thermal overloads, crankcase heaters and oil
failure protection, resiliently mounted in an isolated compartment to allow unit operation while
servicing.
Provide an independent refrigerant circuit for each compressor.
Provide schraeder fittings on both high and low pressure sides, auto reset low pressure switch,
manual reset high pressure switch, liquid line filter-drier, and 5-minute anti-short cycle timer on each
circuit.
Provide hot gas bypass on single compressor units unless noted otherwise.
On multiple compressor units, provide 20-second delay between compressor starts and hot gas bypass
on lead compressor.
On multiple compressor units, provide 20-second delay between compressor starts and hot gas bypass
on lead compressor.
Design condenser fans as upblast propeller style with direct drive, weatherproof motors having
aluminum heat sinks designed to provide 55 F. cooler motor operating temperature than standard.
Provide five year extended warranty on compressors.
Gas Heating Section
1.
2.
3.
Design the heat exchanger as an indirect fired tubular style gas furnace with automatic spark ignition
and induced draft combustion system.
Construct burner and heat exchanger of aluminized steel unless other materials are indicated on the
Drawings.
Gas controls:
a.
b.
c.
d.
G.
Pilot valve and automatic combination gas valve and pressure regulator.
Combination fan cycle thermostat.
Ventor motor protection switches.
High limit thermostat, flame sensor and automatic relight system.
Electrical
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
H.
Label all electrical components per the wiring diagram and number code all wiring.
Provide laminated wiring diagram mounted inside the control cabinet.
Provide service and maintenance manuals in a metal pocket inside the control cabinet.
Provide disconnect switch factory mounted and wired and with fusing mounted in unit interior, two
factory mounted and wired 24-volt control transformers (one transformer for CO2 detector as
scheduled) each with control circuit fuse, 13A-115/60/1 ground fault service receptacle on unit
interior fed from a source ahead of the unit disconnect switch.
Provide automatic reset phase and brown-out protection to shut down all motors if phases exceed
10% out of balance or if voltage drops by more than 10% below design.
Provide additional contacts as required to shut the unit down if smoke is detected in the ductwork
(see Drawings).
Mixed Air Section
1.
Filters
a.
b.
Provide in cooling coil entering mixed airstream.
Design as 2“ thick 30% efficient throwaway type.
237413 - 3
Genesee County CARD
c.
2.
b.
b.
0-100% modulating motorized outdoor air damper with spring return, louvered outdoor intake
grille, controller.
Exhaust fan designed as centrifugal, plenum style with constant or variable speed drive as
scheduled.
Roof Curbs and Supports
1.
General
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Design as weatherproof full perimeter style with cross structural support.
Minimum 18” high or as required to provide 12” minimum vertical surface between top of roof
insulation and bottom rail of rooftop unit for roofer’s flashing.
Provide pitched curb as required to install unit level.
Construct curbs and supports of galvanized steel.
Continuous gasket between the curb and unit.
Neoprene coated fiberglass liner with galvanized steel inner liner where required to prevent any
contact between the building airstreams and the liner.
Wolmanized wood nailer.
Side-Connection curbs:
a.
b.
c.
J.
Construct same as outdoor air dampers except without seals.
Mechanically interlock with outdoor air dampers.
Economizers
a.
I.
Design outdoor air dampers as opposed blade style rated for 25 cfm leakage maximum at 2”
W.c.
Construct with hollow airfoil blades of extruded aluminum, synthetic edge seals, metallic end
seals, gear driven linkage, Belimo electric actuator.
Return Air Dampers
a.
b.
4.
Provide in the building return air entering the ERW (unless return air filters are otherwise
provided upstream from the ERW).
Outdoor Air Dampers
a.
3.
Provide where required for horizontal supply and/or return air duct connection.
Provide height adequate for duct sizes shown.
Provide and mount on base curb between roof and side connection curb. (Height as required by
roofer.)
Controls
1.
Thermostat
a.
b.
2.
Provide Honeywell T7350 programmable thermostat.
Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for thermostat installation and wiring.
CO2 sensor
a.
Provide return air CO2 sensor where schedules to override OA damper position to scheduled
maximum position when return air CO2 levels are 800ppm (adjustable). CO2 sensors to be
field installed and wired by mechanical contractor.
237413 - 4
Genesee County CARD
K.
Approved Manufacturers: Aaon #RN; approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that the roof is ready to receive work, that all auxillary support steel is in place and opening
dimensions are as required by the unit Manufacturer.
B.
Verify that the proper power supply is available.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
This Contractor shall provide roof deck closure steel (22 gage) where distance between roof deck opening
and ductwork exceeds 1-inch such that a maximum 1-inch clearance is maintained.
C.
Verify that shimmed wood blocking is level and square prior to installing the roof curb.
D.
Install curbs so curb top is level. Verify that there are no excessive weld fillets in the curb corners. Roof
penetrations and flashings shall be constructed to ensure the maintenance of the roofing warranty.
E.
Install gasketing material furnished by the rooftop unit Manufacturer along full curb perimeter and all
around supply and return air openings.
F.
Lift units using spreader bars to avoid damage to unit casings and set on curbs with equal overhang on all
four sides.
G.
Provide installation accessories as detailed, including p-traps on all cooling units. Provide plastic piping for
cooling coil drains.
3.3
START-UP
A.
All startup functions shall be performed by the Contractor.
1.
2.
3.
Manufacturer’s startup shall be required prior to operating any portion of the equipment, even for
temporary construction use.
Any damage attributed to improper or lack of startup will be the Contractor’s responsibility.
Complete the attached startup forms and return to Owner.
237413 - 5
Genesee County CARD
HVAC EQUIPMENT START-UP PROCEDURES
START-UP RECORD
Summary Sheet/per Unit (To be completed from information on all other sheets for this unit)
RTU No. __________
Date ______________
Contractor’s Name: ___________________
Time of Day: __________ a.m.____ p.m. _____
Full Address:
____________________
City & Zip:
____________________
Outdoor Temperature:
WB _________________
Indoor Temperature:
WB _________________
Telephone:
____________________
DB _________________
DB _________________
Technician Name: ___________________
Heating Capacity: ____________________
Input:
___________________
Output:
___________________
Brand:
____________________
Model No.:
____________________
Serial No.
____________________
Cooling Category: ____________________
NAMEPLATE
____________
L.1
_____
L.2
_____
L.3
_____
ACTUAL
____________
Compressor Volts:
____________
____________
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
____________
____________
Compressor Amps:
____________
____________
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
____________
____________
Condenser Fan Amps
____________
____________
____________
____________
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
____________
____________
____________
____________
Evaporate Blower Amps
____________
_____
_____
____________
Line Voltage
Fuel Size: Actual __________ amps,
Crankcase
Compressor
Discharge Temperature
Suction Temperature
Oil Level
Evaporator Super Heat
Evaporator Air In
Evaporator Air Out
Control Setpoints
Sealing
Fan Switch
Limit
#1 __________
#2 __________
_________°° F
_________ °F
_________
_________°F
_________°F.DB
_________°F .WB
_________°F.DB
_________
__________
__________
_____
Nameplate __________ amps
Head Pressure
Heater Amps
__________
__________
Suction Pressure
(PSIG)
(PSIG)
__________
__________
Condenser Air Temperature In
____ °F
Condenser Air Temperature Out
_____°F
Liquid Line Temperature at Condensers ____°F
Condenser
_____°F
Furnace Air Temperature In
____°F
Furnace Air Temperature Out
____°F
Gas Pressure (Inches of water)
____°F.WB
Enthalpy/ LP Cutout __________
H P Cutout
__________
237413 - 6
Genesee County CARD
PRE START CHECKLIST
CHECK WHEN
COMPLETED
G1.
Are all necessary accessories installed?
(Check Manufacturers shop drawings and literature)
__________
G2.
Is relief damper operating freely and not binding?
__________
G3.
Are all bearing lubricated per factory recommendations?
__________
G4.
Is condensate drain properly installed and trapped?
__________
G5.
Are all pipe and conduit penetrations sealed and weather tight?
__________
EC1.
Are conductors of adequate size to assure full voltage at unit?
__________
EC2.
Is electrical disconnect of proper size?
__________
EC3.
Are fuses properly sized and do they match nameplate rating?
(Amps on summary sheet)
__________
EC4.
Is sensor properly installed and connected?
__________
EC5.
Are all controls set per manufacturer’s recommendations?
(Settings on summary sheet)
__________
EC6.
Has crankcase heater been activated for a sufficient amount of time to drive
the liquid refrigerant out of the crankcase oil before compressor start?
__________
ES1.
Have proper belts been provided and is tension correct?
___________
ES2.
Are sheaves properly aligned?
__________
ES3.
Have all set screws and other fastening devices been tightened?
__________
ES4.
Have shipping blocks on evaporator blower and other areas been removed?
__________
R1.
Is oil level in compressor correct?
__________
R2.
Have compressor tie downs been removed?
__________
R3.
Is expansion valve bulb located properly and right?
__________
R4.
Has unit been check for refrigerant leak?
__________
R5.
Are piping, capillary tubing, etc., secure and clear of wear pints?
__________
GS.1
Does manifold gas pressure fall within nameplate construction documents?
__________
Explanation/Comments:
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
________Technician_____________________________________________________Date____________________
237413 - 7
Genesee County CARD
PRE START CHECKLIST
PG1.
Do all accessories and economizer operate properly?
Do economizer gears properly mesh throughout operation?
CHECK WHEN COMPLETED
__________
PG2.
Have all documents necessary for the operation and services of the
equipment been placed inside the control panel?
__________
PG3.
Is unit operation beyond operation limits?
(If yes, Explain in Explanations/Comments below)
__________
PG4.
Are CO2 sensors calibrated and operating properly?
__________
PEC1.
Do all motors operate properly? (Check rotation)
a)
Exhaust fan(s)
b)
Condenser fan(s)
c)
Evaporator blower
d)
Compressor(s)
e)
Damper(s)
__________
PEC2.
Do all operational controls function properly?
__________
PES1.
Is evaporator blower rotation correct?
__________
PES2.
Are there any leaks through cabinet, baffles, ducts, etc?
__________
PES3.
Does condensate drain operate properly?
__________
PR1.
Do compressor suction and discharge pressure fall within manufacturers’
guidelines?
__________
PR2.
Does suction line temperature at evaporator outlet fall within recommended
guidelines?
__________
PR3.
Does liquid line temperature at condenser outlet fall within recommended
guidelines?
__________
PGS1.
Is fan control adjusted for proper blower operation?
__________
PGS2.
Does burner ignite smooth and quietly?
__________
P1.
Has Owner’s Property Management and Services Representative
Mechanic been instructed on operation and care of unit?
__________
Owner’s Representative _____________________________________________________
Signature and Print
Explanation/Comments:
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
________Technician_____________________________________________________Date____________________
237413 - 8
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 237423 – PACKAGED OUTDOOR HEATING ONLY MAKEUP-AIR UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the installation of packaged outdoor heating make-up air units.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
General:
1.
Factory assembled packaged unit suitable for roof (or curb) mounting and outdoor installation.
2.
All components functionally joined on a common base.
3.
Complete in every way, ready for electrical, ductwork, piping and control connections
B.
Major components include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Gas heating section.
2.
Filter module.
3.
Supply fan.
4.
Economizer section.
5.
Compressor/condenser system with direct expansion evaporator coil.
6.
Factory-mounted controls.
7.
Prefabricated support curb.
C.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
2.
B.
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HEATING ONLY MAKEUP-AIR UNITS
A.
General
1.
Designed for direct fired for outdoor application.
2.
Factory assembled, piped, wired, tested and shipped as one assembly.
3.
237423 - 1
Genesee County CARD
B.
Quality Assurance
1.
2.
Filters and liner per NFPA 90A and UL Class I.
3.
The rooftop units shall be certified in accordance with UL standard 1995 and ANSI standard
Z83.4a-2001/CSA 3.7a-2001.
4.
Fans balanced per AMCA 204-96.
5.
The makeup-air units shall be safety certified by ETL and the nameplate shall carry the label of
the certification agency.
C.
Cabinet
1.
Design with exterior for curb/base mounting and bottom or end duct connections.
2.
Construct cabinet of 20 gauge G90 galvanized sheet steel with exterior of 18 gauge or heavier
with fasteners of aluminum or stainless steel.
3.
Form wall and roof panels with double-standing self-locking seams
4.
Caulk floor and wall panels airtight with silicone caulk.
5.
Attach panels with removable screws for access to all interior components.
6.
Provide vestibule full size door for access to controls and gas train components.
a.
Design burner vestibule as an integral part of the unit and not extending outside the unit
exterior casing and not exposed to the main airstream.
7.
Provide cabinet subject to supply fan downstream pressure as separate from unit cabinet and
design to hold 12” SP.
8.
Construct interior air side of cabinet as single wall design with 1-1/2” thick, 1.5 pcf density foil
faced insulation on roof, walls and base.
9.
Provide a port on the cabinet exterior for observation of the main and pilot flames.
10. Finish cabinet exterior by priming and coating with polyurethane paint system suitable for a
2000 hour salt spray test per ASTM B-117-95.
11. Provide labels/decals indicating rigging points, service and hazardous areas.
12. Units shall be completely factory assembled, piped, wired, and shipped in one piece.
D.
Blowers and Drives
1.
Design belt drive blowers as centrifugal with forward curved blades, Class I or 2 as required,
double width, double inlet.
2.
Factory balance fans, drives and motors statically and dynamically.
3.
Construct fans of G90 galvanized steel.
4.
Design bearings for L50 life of 200,000 hours minimum life, heavy duty, pre-lubricated.
5.
Shafts: precision ground and polished.
6.
Belts
a.
Design for 140% minimum of motor nameplate brake horsepower when adjustable pulley
is at minimum rpm.
b.
Construct as oil and heat resistant, non-static, grip-notch type
7.
Construct drives of cast iron, precision machined and keyed, secured to the shaft.
8.
Mount blower assemblies resiliently on a base which slides out of the cabinet for access.
9.
Construct motors as open, drip proof, 1800 rpm, 1.15 service factor, ball bearings.
E.
Gas Heating Section
1.
Design the heat exchanger as a direct fired draw-thru style firing over its entire length at all times
when the system is operating, and capable of heating the entire air supply volume.
2.
The burner shall be capable of 92% combustion efficiency and have a maximum turndown ratio
of up to 30 to 1.
3.
Provide burner with non-clogging 4302B stainless steel combustion baffles attached to a ductile
aluminum section having no moving parts.
4.
Provide self-adjustable burner profile plates to operate across the full cfm range of the model.
5.
Pilot assembly
a.
Design so pilot lights the burner with instantaneous ignition.
b.
Include flame rod, spark rod, and pilot automatically ignited by ignition transformer.
c.
A flame rod rectification system shall prove main and pilot flame.
237423 - 2
Genesee County CARD
6.
Controls:
a.
Pilot shut-off valve, gas regulator and main valve.
b.
Main gas shutoff valve, regulator, two solenoid valves, modulating valve.
c.
Airflow safety switch.
d.
High limit thermostat, flame sensor and automatic relight system.
e.
Electronic flame safety relay.
f.
Adjustable burner on-off inlet air duct thermostat to shut off burner when outdoor air is
warm enough to maintain space temperature.
g.
Motor starter with adjustable overloads.
h.
Non-fused disconnect switch.
F.
Electrical
1.
2.
3.
Provide service and maintenance manuals in a metal pocket inside the control cabinet.
G.
Options
1.
Filters
a.
Design as 2“ thick aluminum mesh type.
b.
Support the filters on the air leaving side by a metal grid.
2.
Outdoor Air Dampers
a.
Design outdoor air dampers rated for 25 cfm leakage maximum at 2” W.c.
b.
Construct with 6” blades of 16-gauge G90 galvanized steel, synthetic edge seals, metallic
end seals, gear driven linkage, two-position electric actuator.
c.
Provide internal end switch to energize the blower starter circuit when the damper is 80%
open.
3.
Outdoor Inlet Hood
a.
Construct of G90 galvanized steel with birscreen.
4.
Temperature Control System
a.
Design to maintain a constant supplt air discharge air temperature.
b.
A discharge air thermostat modulates the burner modulating gas valve as required.
c.
A manual Summer-Off-Winter selector switch and exhaust system interlock shall control
the heater and blower operation.
d.
Mount the selector switch and the tempereature selector dial on a remote panel mounted in
the space.
e.
Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for thermostat installation and wiring.
H.
Roof Curbs and Supports
1.
General
a.
Design as weatherproof partial perimeter style with cross structural support.
b.
Minimum 18” high or as required to provide 12” minimum vertical surface between top of
roof insulation and bottom rail of rooftop unit for roofer’s flashing.
c.
Provide pitched curb as required to install unit level.
d.
Construct curbs and supports of galvanized steel.
e.
Continuous gasket between the curb and unit.
f.
Neoprene coated fiberglass liner with galvanized steel inner liner where required to
prevent any contact between the building airstreams and the liner.
g.
Wolmanized wood nailer.
I.
Approved Manufacturers: Captiveaire #AD as scheduled; approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
237423 - 3
Genesee County CARD
A.
Verify that the roof is ready to receive work, that all auxillary support steel is in place and opening
dimensions are as required by the unit Manufacturer.
B.
Verify that the proper power supply is available.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
This Contractor shall provide roof deck closure steel (22 gage) where distance between roof deck
opening and ductwork exceeds 1-inch such that a maximum 1-inch clearance is maintained.
C.
Verify that shimmed wood blocking is level and square prior to installing the roof curb.
D.
Install curbs so curb top is level. Verify that there are no excessive weld fillets in the curb corners.
Roof penetrations and flashings shall be constructed to ensure the maintenance of the roofing warranty.
E.
Install gasketing material furnished by the rooftop unit Manufacturer along full curb perimeter and all
around supply and return air openings.
F.
Lift units using spreader bars to avoid damage to unit casings and set on curbs with equal overhang on
all four sides.
G.
Provide installation accessories as detailed, including p-traps on all cooling units. Provide plastic
piping for cooling coil drains.
3.3
START-UP
A.
1.
2.
3.
Complete the attached startup forms and return to Owner.
237423 - 4
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 238326 – GAS-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the installation of gas fired radiant heaters..
B.
1.
1.3
Division 23 Section “Facility Natural Gas Piping.”
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
General:
1.
2.
B.
1.4
Gas fired radiant tube heater designed for indoor installation.
Complete in every way, ready for electrical, piping and control connections
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
2.
B.
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GAS FIRED RADIANT TUBE HEATERS
A.
General
1.
2.
3.
B.
Designed for indoor application.
Factory assembled, piped, wired, tested and shipped for field connection of radiant tubes and
reflectors.
Quality Assurance
1.
2.
3.
Design Certified by CSA.
Comply with OSHA requirements.
GAS-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS
238326 - 1
Genesee County CARD
C.
Cabinet
1.
Design with separate control and fan compartments by using an individual air and gas burner
chamber.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Main burner:
a.
b.
2.
3.
5.
6.
Construct of 16 gauge titanium stabilized aluminized steel or aluminized steel, 4-inch O.D.
Finish with a high emissivity rated, corrosion resistant coating.
Radiant emitter tube:
a.
b.
4.
Design for two-stage operation with an input differential of at least 30-percent between
stages.
Construct the main burner assembly of stainless steel.
Combustion chamber:
a.
b.
Construct of 16-gauge aluminized steel, 4-inch O.D.
Finish with a high emissivity rated, corrosion resistant coating.
Design connection between combustion chamber and emitter tube as slip-fit with upstream tube
sliding into downstream and secured by a bolted clamp.
Design igniter as direct silicon carbide type, serviceable without the use of tools.
Provide sight glass allowing visual inspection of the igniter and burner operation from the floor.
Unit controls:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
F.
Design as multi-faceted type rotatable from 0 to 45-degrees above the emitter tube.
Design support hanger system to allow for thermal expansion with minimal noise.
Construct of 0.025-inch polished aluminum.
Provide for tool-less installation
Burner unit
1.
E.
Control compartment accessible without use of tools while unit is operating.
Secure the control panel to the control chassis by a hinged swing joint so the panel may be
below the chassis.
Construct cabinet of galvanized sheet steel having enamel finish.
Construct the cabinet top cover of ABS plastic designed as a rain guard.
Provide 4-inch diameter duct connection for combustion air.
Reflectors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
Safety differential pressure switch to monitor combustion airflow and to shut burner down if
airflow is inadequate.
Automatically shut down gas flow to main burner on an interruption to either gas or power.
Shut down heater blower and burner on circuit control lockout.
Provide firing sequence auto restart on power failure.
Provide combustion chamber pre-purge (45 seconds) and post-purge (90 seconds).
Flame sensing via an independent rod and circuit.
Provide a self-diagnostic module which includes staging indicator lights.
Provide two-stage 24-volt thermostat per heater.
Electrical
1.
2.
238326 - 2
Genesee County CARD
3.
G.
Provide service and maintenance manuals.
Approved Manufacturers: Re-Verber-Ray #HL3 series; approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that the facility is ready to receive the radiant units and rough ins are as required by the unit
Manufacturer.
B.
Verify that the proper power supply and gas pressure is available.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Provide installation accessories as detailed, including flexible gas connectors.
3.3
START-UP
A.
1.
2.
3.4
WARRANTY
A.
Provide the manufacturer’s written warranty:
1.
2.
3.
Stainless steel burner for 10 years.
Combustion chamber and emitter tube for 5 years.
All other components in the heater control assembly for 1 year.
238326 - 3
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 26 05 00 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTIONS INCLUDED
A.
1.2
C.
Attention is directed to the conditions of the contract and to Division 1, General
Requirements, which are hereby made a part of this Division.
DESIGN INTENT
A.
Contract documents indicate and specify the electrical design intent. The contract drawings
are schematic and diagrammatic and are not intended to indicate construction details and
routing unless specifically indicated. The specifications establish minimum performance,
product and installation requirements.
B.
In addition to the specified and indicated performance and quality requirements, furnish
products and perform installation work consistent with the design intent as necessary to effect
complete operating electrical systems.
Specific description of system and detail requirement are specified under the following Sections:
Section 260500 - Common Work Results For Electrical
Section 260519 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables
Section 260526 - Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems
Section 260529 - Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems
Section 260533 - Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems
Section 260553 - Identification For Electrical Systems
Section 262400 - Distribution Equipment
Section 262726 - Wiring Devices
Section 265100 - Lighting
Section 265200 - Lighting Control Equipment
Section 270529 - Telecommunications General
Section 280513 - Security System
Section 283111 - Fire Alarm System
1.3
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C2 - Electrical Safety Code
B.
National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) - Standard of Installation
C.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - 70 - National Electrical Code
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Provide all items, articles, materials, operations or methods listed, mentioned or scheduled on
Drawings and/or herein, including all labor, materials equipment and incidentals necessary
and required for their completion.
B.
These specifications and the accompanying Drawings contemplate the furnishing and
installation of all materials, equipment, supplies, labor and supervision required for the
complete performance of all operations relating to the Electrical work.
C.
The work shall be done in accordance with best practice so as to contribute to efficiency of
operation and minimum maintenance and shall be installed with proper accessibility. The
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 05 00 - 1
Genesee County CARD
materials and equipment, including all necessary accessories, shall be put into proper
adjustment so that the component parts function together as a workable system. The Electrical
Contractor shall provide all equipment, materials and operations as indicated either on the
Drawings or contained herein or as may be reasonably implied by either to accomplish a
complete electrical system.
D.
Work included shall be complete with all accessories and incidental work required, which
shall include, but is not necessarily limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
1.5
E.
Work not included:
1.
2.
3.
Provision and installation of electric motors.
Provision, installation, and connection of temperature controls.
Provision and installation of starters and integral controls on package self-contained
equipment.
ELECTRICAL SERVICE
A.
Existing secondary electrical services are 120/240 volts, single phase, three wire, 60 Hertz
and 480 volts, three phase, three wire, 60 Hertz.
B.
Secondary service shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
1.6
Provision and installation of all steel supports for conduits, panels, starters, switches,
and light fixtures as indicated or as required for a complete installation.
Provision, installation, and connection of all electrical outlets and wiring devices.
Provision, installation, and connection of secondary feeders as indicated on the
Drawings.
Provision, installation, and connection of lighting and power branch circuit wiring.
Provision, installation, and connection of distribution, lighting and receptacle panels.
Provision, installation, and connection of a lighting system complete with fixtures,
lamps, occupancy sensors, etc.
Provision, installation, and connection of an emergency lighting system, wiring, and
lamps.
Provision, installation, and connection complete of all separate motor starters,
pushbuttons, pilot lights and selector switches.
Provision, and installation of thermal overloads in motor starters furnished by
Mechanical Trades.
Provision, installation, and connection of a grounding system complete in all
respects.
Provision, installation, and extension of new Fire Alarm System, complete with
control panel, remote annunciator, devices, conduit and wiring.
Provision, installation of empty conduits and outlet boxes for Telecommunications
and Security systems.
Provision and installation of Clock System.
Fluorescent and HID lighting shall be 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hertz unless noted
otherwise.
Motors 1/2 HP and larger shall be 480 volts, three phase, 60 Hertz unless noted
otherwise.
Motors less than 1/2 HP shall be 120 volts or 240 volts single phase, 60 Hertz.
CODES, PERMITS AND FEES
A.
Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses, inspections, approvals and fees required and insure
that the entire electrical installation conforms to codes and regulations required by authority
26 05 00 - 2
Genesee County CARD
or agency having jurisdiction over the installation, alteration or construction of work included.
All fees and costs shall be included in the Base Proposal.
1.7
B.
Wherever the requirements of these specifications and drawings exceed the requirements of
governing codes, laws, regulations and ordinances, these Specifications and Drawings shall
govern.
C.
Conform to all Federal, State, and Local ordinances and codes, latest NEC. requirements.
CHASES AND RECESSES
A.
1.8
1.9
Architectural Trades shall provide chases and recesses and this trade shall be responsible for
payment and their accurate location.
COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A.
Before proceeding with installation of electrical work, the Electrical Trades shall consult the
Architects and Engineers Drawings covering the various other trades, the field layouts of the
trades and their shop drawings. He shall be governed accordingly in the layout of this work.
Access to these Drawings, and layouts can be obtained in the field by applying to the Job
Superintendent.
B.
The Electrical Trades shall coordinate with all other Trades to avoid interference in the work
and to avoid delays in the construction.
C.
Interference, which occurs as a result of poor cooperation and coordination, shall be resolved
by the Architect. Such changes will not be considered as extras and shall be done at the
expense of the responsible trades.
D.
All concealed and exposed conduit, etc. shall be installed in neat and straight lines and shall
be installed parallel to walls, mechanical piping, etc. It is imperative that all mechanical
piping and electrical conduits run parallel to one another for appearance in exposed areas.
E.
Each trade shall be responsible for removing and relocating their piping, conduit, etc., which
is not run parallel to one another for a neat installed appearance in exposed areas.
F.
Discrepancies discovered between Architectural, Mechanical, or Electrical drawings or details
shall be brought to the attention of the Architect in writing prior to bidding for interpretation
and clarification. Thereafter, interpretation of the Architect or Engineer shall prevail.
DEMOLITION
A.
The Electrical Contractor shall remove all equipment to the extent required for installation of
new work and shall be governed by field conditions.
B.
Demolition work includes, but not limited to, removal of light fixtures, power distribution
equipment, conduits, boxes, wiring, devices, motor starters, etc.
C.
All electrical equipment and materials removed on the project shall remain the property of the
Owner if so desired and shall be stored in a location on the property designated by the Owner.
If the Owner refuses to accept any or all of the demolition items, the Electrical Contractor
shall be responsible to dispose of same.
D.
The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for demolition of the electrical work and
equipment and shall coordinate such work with all other contractors.
26 05 00 - 3
Genesee County CARD
1.10
TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
A.
The Electrical Contractor shall provide, install and maintain all facilities required for
temporary lighting and power as required for construction.
B.
The Electrical shall perform such work in accordance with any applicable safety laws, rules or
regulations of the State of Michigan.
C.
Temporary Wiring System:
1.
2.
3.
1.11
1.13
Every precaution shall be taken to make any necessary temporary open wiring
inaccessible to unqualified personnel. Rooms containing electrical equipment with
energized parts shall be locked.
All temporary work shall be furnished and installed in conformity with the National
Electrical Code and in accordance with requirements of OSHA, MIOSHA, and local
ordinances.
All temporary wiring shall be maintained throughout construction period and shall be
removed when no longer needed.
CUTTING, PATCHING, AND DAMAGE TO OTHER WORK
A.
1.12
Electrical Trades shall pay for and be responsible for, any cutting, fitting and patching that
may be required to receive his work, but shall be done by the Architectural Trades.
EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS
A.
All floor mounted electrical equipment shall require foundations by Architectural Trades.
B.
For equipment suspended from ceilings or walls, furnish and install all inserts, rods, structural
steel frames, brackets and platforms required, but do not support from metal deck. See Section
16190, Supporting Devices.
TESTING
A.
When the systems are completed, the Contractor shall operate the equipment as directed by
the Architect and/or Engineer. Replace all faulty equipment. Make necessary adjustments
before final acceptance. Upon final acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall give the
Owner a written guarantee that he will make good, any defects in materials or workmanship
which may develop within one (1) year from date of final acceptance, at no cost to the Owner.
B.
Test shall include service equipment, distribution and lighting panels, feeder cables, branch
circuits, lighting fixtures, receptacles, etc. Tests shall be performed to detect any ground faults
and short circuits, meggering of feeders, automatic operation of equipment, voltage check at
terminals of equipment, balancing of single phase loads on panels and feeders and grounding
resistance valve. Provide reports for all tests indicating results obtained. Forms for reports
shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Testing Association (NETA) outlines.
C.
Perform all tests required by State, City, County, and/or other agencies having jurisdiction.
D.
Provide all materials, equipment, etc., and labor required for tests.
E.
Provide two complete operating instructions, operating manuals and repair parts lists for the
Owner's personnel. Instruct Owner's personnel in the operation of all systems.
F.
All permanently installed lighting fixtures used for temporary lighting during construction
shall be cleaned and re-lamped at completion of project.
26 05 00 - 4
Genesee County CARD
1.14
ACCEPTANCE
A.
1.15
1.16
1.17
The Engineer shall determine from the forms provided when testing is satisfactory and ready
for acceptance.
DRAWINGS AND MEASUREMENTS
A.
The Drawings show the location and general arrangement of all equipment and shall be
followed as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will permit.
Investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting work and arrange work accordingly.
B.
Field measurements: Verify the dimensions governing the work at the building site.
C.
The Architectural Drawings take precedence in all matters pertaining to the building structure;
Mechanical Drawings in all matters pertaining to Mechanical Trades installation; Electrical
Drawings in all matters pertaining to Electrical Trades installation. However, where there are
conflicts or differences between the Drawings for the various trades, report such conflicts or
differences to the Architect who shall determine the course of action to be taken.
D.
All light and receptacle outlets are lettered and numbered; the letter indicates the panel from
which the circuit is to be controlled. All outlets bearing the same letter and number shall be
connected to the same circuit. Provide junction boxes as required.
MATERIALS LIST
A.
Submit to the Engineer, a complete list of all materials, including manufacturer's names, to be
furnished and installed under this portion of the work.
B.
No lead or asbestos is allowed to be used in any material including paint.
EQUIPMENT PRODUCT DATA
A.
Submit complete equipment product data to the Architect and Engineer for approval.
B.
The following product data shall be submitted:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.18
Distribution equipment: disconnect switches, fuses, lighting and receptacle panels,
etc.
Lighting fixtures, including all emergency units.
Wiring devices.
Starters, contactors, all electrical equipment, wiring and devices and diagrams, etc.
Fire Alarm System. (Equipment cuts and drawings).
Sound Reinforcement System (Equipment cuts and drawings).
Clocks, (Equipment cuts).
Occupancy Sensors
PROTECTION AND HANDLING OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A.
Be responsible for the care and protection of equipment until it has been fully tested and
accepted.
B.
Protect equipment and materials against theft, injury or damage during construction.
C.
Protect materials with permanent factory finish from damage by covering.
26 05 00 - 5
Genesee County CARD
1.19
1.20
D.
Protect conduit openings with temporary plugs or caps.
E.
Provide adequate storage space for all electrical equipment conduit and materials delivered to
the Job Site under weather protected enclosure. The Owner’s Field Representative will
designate location of the space. Equipment set in place in unprotected areas must be provided
with temporary protection.
MATERIALS
A.
All materials shall be UL approved, new and the best of their respective kinds, shall conform
to all standards or requirements governing the same and shall be approved by the Engineer
before being installed. Conform to the latest applicable ANSI, NEC, IEEE Standards, and
OSHA regulations.
B.
Where a specific manufacturer or trade name is mentioned in the Specifications, it is to
establish a standard of quality. Substitution of other makes shall be in accordance with the
requirements of these Specifications.
C.
The Engineer reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit samples of any or all
articles or materials to be provided and installed under these specifications.
PARTS RECEIPT
A.
1.21
The guarantee for all work performed under this Division of the Specifications shall comply
with the requirements of the Contract conditions, except the period of guarantee shall be for
one (1) year.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
1.24
Upon completion of the Building, provide Architect with Certificate of Approval from local
Electrical Inspection Authority.
GUARANTEE
A.
1.23
Retain all portable and detachable portions of the installation such as keys, tools, manuals,
etc., until the completion of the work and then turn them over to the Owner and obtain
itemized receipt. This receipt shall be attached to the "Final Application" for payment.
CERTIFICATE OF APPROVAL
A.
1.22
Read and be bound by the requirements of the Special Requirements and/or General
Conditions for Temporary Facilities.
ALTERNATES
A.
Submit a proposal for each alternate as required under Division 1, stating the amount to be
added or deducted from the Base Proposal for the work outlined.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Furnish products by one of the equipment manufacturers shown. When given, furnish the
specified product model or brand for the selected manufacturer.
B.
Provide products, for which quantities of two or more are to be furnished from the same
26 05 00 - 6
Genesee County CARD
manufacturer and of the same product or model series.
C.
2.2
Furnish product components designed to be used together and which are physically and
electrically compatible.
EQUIPMENT SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Certain types of equipment and kinds of materials are described in these specifications by
means of trade names, catalog numbers or manufacturer’s names. This is not intended to
exclude from consideration other items, which may be capable of accomplishing purpose
indicated. Bidders may submit for consideration, substitutions for specified equipment, and
materials provided:
B.
Bid shall be as per Drawings and Specifications.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.3
PRODUCT LISTING AND LABELING
A.
2.4
Provide listed and labeled product for which listings and labeling exist by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. (UL), factory mutual (FM), or similar independent testing organizations
recognized by the authorities having jurisdiction. For products for which there are no such
listings and labeling, provide listed and labeled components of those products for which
component listing and labeling exist.
CONDUIT SLEEVES
A.
2.5
They name the substitute on bid, with the add or deduct from their bid, provided such
substitute is approved by the Engineer.
Complete specifications and descriptions of the substitutions shall be submitted to
the Engineer seven days prior to the award of the Contract.
Provide same guarantee for substitute item as for product or method specified.
Coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, to include building
modifications if necessary, making such changes as may be required for Work to be
complete in all respects.
He waives all claims for additional costs or time related to substitution, which
subsequently become apparent.
No substitutions will be allowed after the award of the Contract, except with the
approval of the Engineer.
Sleeves shall be galvanized or black enameled rigid steel conduit or schedule 40 black steel
pipe. Aluminum conduit shall not be used. Where specific sizes are not indicated on the
drawings, sleeves shall be sized to provide one half-inch (1/2") clearance around the outside
surface of the item for which they are installed. They shall be cut flush with wall surfaces, and
shall extend as directed, above finished floor levels. The space between conduit, and sleeves
shall be packed with fiberglass or other approved non-combustible packing material to
prevent passage of air liquid and at least equal in fire resistance to the construction being
penetrated. Sealant shall be equal to Johns Manville "Duxseal" or General Electric.
PCB CONTENT
A.
Provide products, which do not contain any amounts of polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB)
compounds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
26 05 00 - 7
Genesee County CARD
3.1
3.2
SITE CONDITIONS
A.
The Electrical Contractor shall familiarize with all conditions, which will affect the work he is
to perform. No allowance shall be made for extra expense incurred due to failure or neglect to
recognize such conditions.
B.
Where active electric or other services are encountered during the performance of the work,
the Electrical Contractor shall protect, brace and support them as required. Do not prevent,
interrupt or disturb operation of existing services that are to remain.
VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
A.
3.3
3.7
3.8
Provide products as appropriate for wet, damp or dry locations as defined by NFPA 70.
FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIER PENETRATIONS
A.
3.6
Install wiring for control systems, power feeder and branch circuits, lighting branch circuits,
communication and auxiliary systems such as fire alarm and security, in separate raceways
WET, DAMP OR DRY LOCATION WORK
A.
3.5
Examine work in place on which work in Division 26 is dependent. Correct defects, which
may influence satisfactory completion and performance of Division 26, work in accordance
with the requirements of the applicable Section of work prior to commencement of the work.
Construe commencement as work in place being acceptable for satisfying the requirements of
this Division's work.
WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
3.4
Install raceways and electrical equipment, which penetrates fire-rated or smoke barrier
surfaces, in a manner, which maintains the integrity of the rating of the surface or barrier.
FIELD PAINTING
A.
Refer to Section "Painting" for Prime and Finish Field Painting requirements.
B.
In a manner satisfactory to the Owner, touch-up or refinish factory-applied paints or finishes
which are chipped, defaced, scratched or in any other way disturbed due to handling,
installation or general construction work.
FIELD TESTS
A.
Permit Architect to observe field test. Provide Architect with minimum three working days
notice of field test.
B.
Schedule tests in coordination with other contract work. Schedule no more than one
equipment or system field test per day.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A.
Connections to equipment, motors, fixtures, etc., shall be made in accordance with the shop
drawings and rough-in measurements furnished by the manufacturers of the particular
equipment furnished. Any and all additional connections not shown on the Drawings, but
called for by the equipment manufacturer's shop drawings or required for the successful
operation of the particular equipment furnished shall be installed by the Contractor as part of
26 05 00 - 8
Genesee County CARD
his contract with no additional charge.
3.09
CONDUITS
A.
3.10
EXPANSION FITTINGS
A.
3.11
3.13
3.14
3.15
Expansion fittings shall be provided in all conduit runs, etc., that cross building expansion
joints, both in concrete slabs and where exposed.
LOAD BALANCING
A.
3.12
All work shall be concealed in walls and above ceilings and all outlets recessed in newfinished areas. Exposed work in Mechanical Equipment rooms to be installed perpendicular or
parallel to wall, ceilings or structural members and coordinated with mechanical piping.
Connect single phase loads to feeders or panels to give a resultant load on same as nearly
balanced as practicable.
GROUNDING
A.
All metal non-current carrying parts of electrical equipment, enclosures, transformers, bases,
frames, lighting fixtures, wireways, lighting switches, receptacles and supports shall be
grounded using an insulated grounding conductor (green conductor).
B.
Provide any special grounds required by NEC, local codes and as recommended by
manufacturers.
DIRECTORIES
A.
All panels shall have typed directories. Directories shall indicate their name and voltage such
as LP-A, 120/240V-1PH-3W.
B.
Loadcenters shall include a typed directory, same as a panel, and fastened to the inner door.
NAMEPLATES
A.
Provide nameplates with 3/16" high black letters scribed into 1/2" high white laminated
plastic for all disconnect switches involved in this project. Clearly define the load served.
B.
Nameplates shall be anchored with metal screws to equipment.
OWNERS OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A.
Provide shop drawings for Engineer review and acceptance.
B.
Assemble all information into a hard cover book with the following section identification
tabs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Index.
Name and telephone numbers of all subcontractors and equipment manufacturer
representatives.
Permits, tests and approvals.
Equipment/Materials guarantees and warranties
Contractor's guarantee.
Equipment check, test and start data.
Equipment and material manufacturer's shop drawings and maintenance data.
26 05 00 - 9
Genesee County CARD
END OF SECTION260500
26 05 00 - 10
Genesee County CARD
Project No. 260519
SECTION 26 05 19 – LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTIONS INCLUDED
A.
1.2
DESCRIPTION
A.
This work consists of furnishing all labor, materials and equipment required and of furnishing
and installing all wire and cable, rated 600 volts and less, including wire connectors and
accessories.
B.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
National Electrical Manufacturers Associates (NEMA)
1.
2.
3.
B.
C.
WC5 - Thermoplastic insulated wire and cable for the transmission and distribution
of electrical energy.
WC7 - Cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene insulated wire and cable for the
transmission and distribution of electrical energy.
WC30 - Color coding of wires and cables.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
All Sections of Division 26 - Electrical
44 - Rubber insulated wires and cables.
83 - Thermoplastic insulated wires and cables.
486A - Wire connectors and soldering lugs for use with copper conductors.
486C - Splicing wire connectors.
Applicable provisions of the Insulated Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA).
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of wire, cable and accessory
specified and indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
American Insulated Wire Corp.
Carol Cable Co., Inc.
Cablec Co., Inc.
Southwire Company
Triangle PWC Inc.
All conductors shall be of 98% conductivity copper, with minimum 600 volt insulation.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - 1
Genesee County CARD
Project No. 260519
Minimum wire size shall be No. 12AWG unless noted otherwise.
C.
2.2
2.3
All cable and wire shall have factory applied identification markings.
BUILDING WIRE
A.
Conductor wire shall be type "THHN/THWN" or "XHHW-2", 90 C degrees or type
“THWN”, 75 C degrees, 600 volts insulation, stranded copper. Use type “THWN”, 75 C
degrees, 600 volts insulation for wiring in PVC conduits run underground and wet locations.
B.
Conductors used for wiring from outlet boxes to lighting fixtures, provide flexible stranded
copper wire with type "THHN" insulation for temperatures up to 90 C degrees and silicone
rubber and glass braid insulation for temperatures up to 200 C degrees.
C.
Control wiring shall be type "THHN" or "XHHW" 600 volts insulation, stranded copper wire
with minimum size of No. 14AWG.
D.
Each coil shall bear a tag containing the Underwriter's stamp, name of manufacturer, trade
name of wire and month and year when manufactured. Any conductors whose insulation
shows signs of deterioration within one (1) year after final acceptance of the work shall be
replaced by the Electrical Contractor at his own expense.
WIRE AND CABLE ACCESSORIES
A.
Splicing connectors shall be compression type for wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger.
B.
Splicing connector shall be twist-type, insulated spring type, per UL 486C, for wire sizes No.
10 AWG and smaller.
C.
Manufacturers:
1.
3M, Electric Products Div., ScotchLock, Ideal Industries, Inc., Wire-Nut.
D.
Terminal blocks shall be tubular screw type with pressure plate rated 600 volt.
E.
Terminations shall be nylon insulated, ring tongue or spade tongue terminals on control
wiring to device and equipment not equipped with tubular screw terminal blocks.
Circumferential compression, long barrel, NEMA two-hole terminal lugs and splice
connectors.
F.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
Burndy Corp.: Hydent
Thomas & Betts Corp.: Sta-Kon
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SPLICES, TAPS AND TERMINATIONS
A.
Provide minimum number of conductor splices.
B.
Install splices, which maintain or exceed the mechanical strength and electrical insulation
ratings of the wire and cable.
C.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
manufacturer's published torque tightening values or, when manufacturer does not indicate
26 05 19 - 2
Genesee County CARD
Project No. 260519
torquing requirements, per UL 486A.
3.2
3.3
3.4
PULLING
A.
Pull wire and cable simultaneously where more than one is being installed in the same
raceway.
B.
Use pulling water based compound or lubricant as required to comply with cable
manufacturer's maximum allowable pulling tensions.
C.
Use pulling water based compounds recommended by the cable manufacturer for the cable
type being installed. Do not use petroleum-based lubricants and lubricants which may
damage PVC conduit.
D.
Use pulling methods of which will not damage cables or raceways. If damage does occur,
remove and replace damaged wire and cable section.
TAPES
A.
All joints in outlet or junction boxes shall be taped in such a manner and thickness that the
insulating value of the joint or splice will be at least equal to the insulating value of the
conductor to which it is applied. The tape used for power and lighting circuits shall be
"Scotch No. 88" Electrical Tape or approved equal.
B.
In high temperature areas, use electrical tape over varnished cambric tape for all circuits.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Provide color coding system throughout on feeders and branch circuits as follows:
120/240V-1PH-3W
Black
Red
White
Green
B.
3.5
3.6
120/208V-3PH-4W
Black
Red
Blue
White
Green
277/480V-3PH-4W
Brown
Orange
Yellow
Grey
Green
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Neutral
Ground
Wiring shall be identified at pull boxes, junction boxes, enclosures, terminations and other
accessible locations.
PHASING
A.
Connect phase conductors to equipment, such as panelboards, in A, B, C sequence; either top
to bottom, left to right, or front to back. View left-to-right sequence as from the front or
operating side; not viewed from a rear access terminal space.
B.
Connect power outlets so that like phases are connected to the same post on all receptacles
and that the phase rotation on three phase outlets is identical for all outlets.
C.
Make connection revisions as required to achieve correct rotation of motors at the motor
leads; not at starters or disconnects.
A.
Perform insulation resistance test on each feeder. Test with feed end of cable connected to
open feeder disconnect device and load end of cable disconnected from the load.
26 05 19 - 3
Genesee County CARD
Project No. 260519
B.
Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards.
C.
Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage.
D.
Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer’s recommended values.
26 05 19 - 4
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTIONS INCLUDED
A.
1.2
DESCRIPTION
A.
The grounding system shall be in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.
B.
The grounding system shall consist of system and equipment grounding as indicated and
specified.
C.
Miscellaneous and special systems shall be properly grounded in accordance with the
requirements of each system.
D.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
GENERAL
A.
1.4
Common Work Results For Electrical, Section 260500.
Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems, Section 260533.
Wiring Devices, Section 262726
Lighting, Section 265100.
All service equipment distribution and ground systems shall be grounded in accordance with
the applicable requirements of the 2011 National Electrical Code, NEMA, ASA and IEEE and
Local and State Requirements and Standards.
EQUIPMENT GROUND
A.
Equipment grounds shall provide a permanent and continuous bonding of conductor
enclosures, equipment frames, conduit, steel structures, switches and receptacles and other
non-current carrying parts of the system to form a low impedance path to ground.
B.
Size of equipment ground conductors shall be in accordance with the 2011 National Electrical
Code.
C.
Equipment ground conductors shall be insulated with green color.
D.
Each electrical expansion fitting shall be furnished with a bonding jumper.
E.
Continuity between all metallic and non-metallic raceway systems and equipment shall be
maintained.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Mechanical clamps shall be Burndy; Thomas and Betts, or as approved.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 1
Genesee County CARD
2.2
GROUNDING MATERIAL
A.
Ground conductor - Size as per 2011 National Electrical Code requirements. Bare stranded,
soft drawn or soft annealed, copper wire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
All equipment, whether furnished by this Division or by Others, shall be grounded.
B.
All electrical enclosures and secondary neutrals shall be grounded to an approved cold water
pipe, steel structure, and to ground bus connected building ground.
C.
Where flexible steel conduit is used, an additional stranded conductor shall be installed inside
of the flexible conduit as a ground connection. This conductor shall be connected to a locking
type grounding bushing at each end of the conduit.
D.
Where fluorescent light fixtures are suspended by means of conduit, or rods with hook
fittings, the fixture shall be grounded with a separate ground conductor in the cord
connection.
E.
Grounding connections at panelboards and other non-permanently fixed equipment shall be
by means of lugs bolted to the equipment.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 2
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 26 05 29 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTIONS INCLUDED
A.
1.2
DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide supports anchors, sleeves, concrete equipment pads, seals and other related
supporting devices and methods as specified and indicated.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
1.4
All Sections of Division 26 - Electrical
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications:
B.
Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of supporting devices, of types, sizes and ratings
required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3
years.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Structural Requirements:
1.
Provide support systems adequate for the weight of equipment and conduit,
including wiring, which they carry.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
U-CHANNEL STRUT SYSTEMS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B-Line Systems, Inc.
Midland-Ross Corp.
Unistrut Corp.
B.
No. 12 gauge, hot-dipped galvanized steel with 9/16" diameter holes, 8" on center on top
surface, with manufacturer's standard, green enamel finish.
C.
Provide corrosion resistant fittings, which mate and match the U-channel.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 - 1
Genesee County CARD
2.2
WALL AND FLOOR CONDUIT SEALS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.3
Provide factory assembled, watertight wall and floor seals, of types and sizes required,
suitable for sealing around conduit, pipe or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls.
C.
Construct seals with steel sleeves, malleable iron body, neoprene-sealing grommets and rings,
metal pressure rings, pressure clamps and cap screws.
CONDUIT STRAPS
Galvanized steel with 1/2" diameter hole for round steel rod.
C-CLAMPS
A.
2.6
Galvanized steel.
CLEVIS HANGERS
A.
2.5
O.Z./Gedney Co., Unit of General Signal Corp.
B.
A.
2.4
Black malleable iron, 1/2" rod size, and approximately 70 pounds per 100 units.
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES AND HARDWARE
A.
Corrosion resistant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Use clamps for making attachments to structural steel for installation purposes wherever
possible. Welding will only be permitted for structural load requirements and if approved by
the Architect.
B.
Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment or conduit.
C.
Do not drill into building structural steel members.
D.
Sleeve Seals:
1.
2.
E.
Torque sleeve seal nuts, complying with manufacturers recommended values.
Ensure that sealing grommets expand to form a watertight seal.
Field Fabricated Supports:
1.
2.
Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to
present a neat, workmanlike appearance.
Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts.
26 05 29 - 2
Genesee County CARD
F.
Anchoring Methods:
1.
Provide anchoring methods for fastening and supporting equipment as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts or spider type expansion anchors.
Solid Masonry: Lead expansion anchors or preset inserts.
Metal Surface: Machine screws, bolts or welded studs.
Wood Surfaces: Wood screws.
Concrete Surfaces: Self-drilling anchors or power driven studs.
Waterproof Walls: Set anchors in waterproof cement.
26 05 29 - 3
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 26 05 33 – RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTIONS INCLUDED
A.
1.2
DESCRIPTION
A.
This work consists of furnishing all labor, materials and equipment required to install all
Electrical Raceways, including supports, fittings, and hardware, complete with accessories
and incidentals in accordance with the Drawings and these Specifications.
B.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1.
2.
B.
C.
QQ-P-416C - Plating, cadmium (electrodeposited).
W-C-1094A - Conduit and conduit fittings, plastic, rigid.
National Electrical Manufacturers Associates (NEMA)
1.
2.
D.
C80.1 - Rigid steel conduit, zinc coated.
C80.3 - Electrical metallic tubing, zinc coated.
Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.)
1.
2.
TC2 - Electrical plastic tubing (EPT) and conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).
TC3 - PVC fittings for use with rigid PVC conduit and tubing.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.4
Electrical General Requirements - Section 16010.
Boxes - Section 16130.
Supporting Devices - Section 16190.
1 - Flexible metal electrical conduit.
6 - Rigid metal electrical conduit.
360 - Electrical liquid-tight flexible steel conduit.
514B - Fittings for conduit and outlet boxes.
651 - Schedule 40 and 80 PVC conduit.
797 - Electrical metallic tubing.
870 - Electrical wireways, auxiliary gutters and associated fittings.
514A Electric metallic outlet boxes.
514B Fittings for conduit and outlet boxes.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Protect all raceways and accessories from harmful elements when stored at the job site. Store
above ground on platforms, pallets or other supports. Keep all raceways free of dirt and other
foreign matter.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 1
Genesee County CARD
B.
Conduit shall be delivered at the building in not less than ten (10) foot lengths; each length of
conduit to have approved label of the Underwriters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.2
Allied Tube and Conduit Corp.
Midwest Electric Division, Cooper Industries, Inc.
Triangle PWC, Inc.
Wheatland Tube Company.
Appleton Electric, Subsidiary of Emerson Electric Company.
Thomas and Betts Corp.
Raco, Inc., Subsidiary of Harvey Hubbell, Inc.
O.Z./Gedney Unit, General Signal.
B.
Rigid steel conduit shall be heavy wall, hot dipped galvanized steel threaded type as per UL 6
and ANSI 1.
C.
Electric metallic tubing shall be galvanized steel as per UL 797 and ANSI C80.3.
D.
Conduit fittings shall be zinc or cadmium plated steel, setscrew type. Indenture types are not
acceptable. Fittings for galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be cast or malleable iron, with
threaded hubs.
E.
Locknuts shall be steel or malleable iron and shall be zinc or cadmium-plated.
F.
Bushings for conduit sizes one inch and smaller shall be flame-retardant, insulating and
grounding type. For sizes greater than one inch, provide steel or malleable iron, zinc or
cadmium plated, grounding type with insulating insert, unit shall be molded and locked into
bushing edge.
G.
Expansion fittings shall be cast or malleable iron, zinc or cadmium, with threaded hubs with
metallic pressure packing and copper ground strap. Fittings shall allow a minimum of two
inches of conduit movement.
LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Anamet, Inc., Sealtite
Electri-Flex Company
AFC Div., Nortek, Inc.
B.
Liquid-tight flexible steel conduit shall be a continuous, spirally wound, interlocked zinccoated strip steel with liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride as per UL 360.
C.
Fittings shall be steel or malleable iron, zinc or cadmium plated with compression type steel
ferrule and neoprene gasket sealing rings with insulated throat. Connections shall be liquidtight.
26 05 33 - 2
Genesee County CARD
2.3
CONDUIT BODIES
A.
2.4
Conduit bodies shall be galvanized; cast metal, threaded conduit entrance ends with
removable cast or galvanized steel covers and corrosion resistance screws.
OUTLET BOXES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.5
Steel City Products, Midland-Ross Corporation.
National Electric Products
Harvey Hubbell Inc.
B.
Boxes shall be galvanized steel, minimum No. 14 gauge, a minimum of 1-1/2" deep and
sufficient size to accommodate the devices shown, according to NEC requirements for
volume based on the number and size of wires and devices in the box; fixture stud as required.
Provide plaster rings where required. Provide multi-gang boxes where switches are ganged
together, mount switches and receptacles in a common box where they are shown adjacent to
each other in storage rooms, janitor's closets, etc. Provide partition for voltage separation
where required.
C.
All boxes, where exposed to damp or wet locations shall be cast type aluminum without
knockouts, with tapered threaded hubs and gaskets.
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.6
Crouse Hinds Div., Cooper Industries, Inc.
National Electric Products
Appleton Electric Company
Hoffman Engineering Company
Pull boxes for all conduit runs for all systems shall be provided at intervals indicated on
Drawings or required by code.
WIREWAYS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Square D
Hoffman
B-Line
B.
Wireways: General indoor purpose, NEMA Type 1, without knockouts UL listed, size as
indicated on the Drawings and as required. Raintight wireways, for outdoor purpose, NEMA
Type 3R.
C.
Finish: ANSI-49 gray epoxy paint.
D.
Fittings: galvanized steel with ANSI-49 gray epoxy paint and type as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
26 05 33 - 3
Genesee County CARD
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS
A.
Install and connect conduit sized as shown on Drawings and as per NFPA 70 requirements.
Minimum size conduit shall be 3/4 inch, unless shown otherwise. All conduit shall run
concealed.
B.
Where underground conduit is used, the Electrical Contractor shall provide and install conduit
buried directly in the earth, for underground wiring. Underground conduits shall be a
minimum of 1" PVC, unless noted otherwise, Schedule 40 buried a minimum of 2'-0" below
finished grade. Where conduits are laid in the same trench with others, they shall be separated
not less than two inches (2") one from the other. Whenever entering or exiting a building, and
5' beyond the building, rigid galvanized conduit shall be used.
C.
Install conduit with a minimum of 12" of free air space between conduits and steam and hot
water pipes and a minimum of 3" of free air space from all other mechanical piping. Cut ends
of conduit shall be square and reamed. Conduit shall not be supported from pipe, hangers or
extension of installation of other building trades.
D.
Wherever conduit crosses building expansion joints, the Electrical Contractor shall provide
and install conduit expansion fittings.
E.
All ends of conduits 1-1/4" and larger shall be provided with an insulated bushing, except at
couplings of threaded type outlets. All insulated bushings shall have metal body with molded
phenolic insulation. All connections between conduits and steel boxes shall be made with
double locknuts.
F.
Do not install conduit across pipe shafts, vent duct openings, hatchways and other openings.
Install conduit to avoid conflicts with mechanical ductwork and piping.
G.
Install conduit so as not to damage or run through structural members. Provide sleeves for
conduit runs through structural walls.
H.
Maintain integrity of fire rating when conduit crosses fire rated partitions, walls, floors, etc.
Each conduit shall be caulked with fireproofing material suitable not to harm cables.
I.
If structural steel is used for support, beam clamps on steel shall be allowed. Patch up any
field-applied fireproofing damaged during conduit installation.
J.
Provide gasketed, heavy cast construction fittings outdoors and in wet or damp locations.
CONDUIT TYPE
A.
Install galvanized rigid steel conduit where subject to physical abuse, in and under concrete
slabs, exposed to weather and wet interior locations, unless otherwise indicated or specified.
B.
Install galvanized Electrical Metallic Tubing where protected from physical abuse, concealed
dry interior locations.
C.
Install flexible steel conduit in dry locations, for connections to lighting fixtures.
D.
Install liquid-tight, flexible steel conduit for any applications in connection to dry-type
distribution transformers, motors, air handling units, wet or damp locations, where subjected
to water, oil or other liquids.
26 05 33 - 4
Genesee County CARD
3.3
3.4
3.5
EXPOSED CONDUIT
A.
Install conduit so as not to damage or run through structural members.
B.
Install exposed conduits in neat symmetrical lines parallel to the centerlines of the building
construction.
C.
Install horizontal runs above bottom of joists or similar structural members.
D.
Install conduits entering surface mounted equipment offset to parallel the wall as required for
the equipment served.
E.
Install vertical and horizontal runs of conduits in groups on common supports, whenever
possible.
CONCEALED CONDUIT
A.
Install concealed conduit in finished areas either above ceilings or in walls. Do not install
concealed conduit in floors except to serve floor boxes.
B.
Install concealed conduit above hung ceilings in accordance with exposed conduit
requirements.
SUPPORTING AND HANGING CONDUIT
A.
Do not support conduit from pipes, hangers, or extension of installation work of other
building trades.
B.
Support horizontal runs of conduit on the following maximum centers:
1.
2.
C.
One inch size and smaller conduit support at 6ft.-0in.
Greater than one inch size conduit support at 8ft.-0in.
Support vertical runs of conduit on the following maximum centers:
1.
3.6
1/2 inch size and greater conduit support at 8ft.-0in.
D.
Support single conduit runs with galvanized ring bolt type hangers with specialty spring clips.
Do not use plumbers perforated straps or malleable galvanized iron straps.
E.
Support multiple conduit runs with trapeze-type, hot-dipped galvanized steel hangers,
galvanized steel conduit straps and minimum 1/2 inch galvanized threaded support rods.
Provide 20% spare capacity.
F.
Install conduit to prevent sagging and formation of water traps.
G.
Support conduits on both sides of bends.
CONNECTIONS, FITTINGS AND COUPLINGS
A.
Provide expansion fittings in conduit runs which, cross building expansion joints, are
mechanically attached to separate structures, or have lengths exceeding 200 feet.
B.
Fasten conduit terminations in sheet metal enclosures by two locknuts and terminate with
bushing. Install locknuts inside and outside enclosure.
26 05 33 - 5
Genesee County CARD
3.7
3.8
C.
Where conduit joints occur in concrete slabs, damp or wet locations or exposed to weather,
ensure that joints are mechanically tight and sealed against the entrance of water by using a
coating of thread lubricant.
D.
Provide solvent-welded joints for plastic conduit.
SLEEVES AND OPENINGS
A.
Apply grout around conduit, which passes through openings, cut through wall and floors of
masonry or concrete.
B.
Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls and floors, provide mechanical fire-stop material
and fittings with UL listed fire-rating equal to wall or floor rating.
C.
Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible otherwise route
through roof opening with pitch pocket.
CLEANING CONDUITS
A.
3.9
3.10
3.11
Clean conduits thoroughly and dry inner surfaces before wires and cables are installed. Clean
or replace conduits found to be plugged or dirty.
CUTTING AND BENDING CONDUITS
A.
Cut conduits square, properly ream and cut threads for rigid steel conduit deep and clean.
B.
Running threads are not permitted.
C.
Field bend conduit with benders designed for the purpose so as not to distort or vary internal
diameter. Minimum bends shall have a minimum radius of not less than ten (10) times the
outside diameter of the cable specified. Use factory bends for conduits 3" and larger.
D.
Apply a suitable protective coating where conduits protective galvanized coating has been
destroyed or damaged by cutting or threading.
SPARE CONDUITS
A.
Provide nylon pulling rope, minimum 1/8 inch diameter, in conduits indicated or specified as
spare or empty. Provide three feet of slack, in addition to rope the length of each conduit.
B.
Seal spare and empty conduits with a conduit cap or plug to which the pulling rope is
attached.
INSTALLATION OF BOXES
A.
Pull boxes and junction boxes for the pulling, nesting or concealment of wires or cables shall
be provided where indicated on the Drawings and also where required though not indicated.
B.
Each feeder in box shall be tagged or designated in an approved manner.
C.
Boxes shall be of adequate size to facilitate wiring.
D.
Cable type entries shall be sealed with O-Z/Gedney Company watertight cable fittings. Where
cables are shown running through junction boxes with conduit stubs for future connection,
loop a minimum of 2'-0" of excess cable in junction box to allow for future connections.
26 05 33 - 6
Genesee County CARD
3.12
3.13
E.
Pull boxes shall be provided on all conduit runs exceeding three (3) bends between outlets.
F.
Conduits shall be fastened to outlet boxes with locknuts inside and out and bushings. All
unused knockouts shall be left unsealed. There must be supplied in all boxes, sufficient room
for insulating joints, wires and bushings per NEC requirements.
G.
Provide die-cast outlet boxes for surface mounted, and wet conditions.
H.
Use outlet boxes not less than 1-1/2" deep.
I.
Avoid installation of outlet boxes in unsuitable locations, such as a molding or a break in wall
finish.
J.
Install recessed outlet boxes in finished walls to bring box edge flush with or not more than
1/4 inch back of finished surface.
K.
Locate outlet boxes as indicated on Drawings.
L.
Offset outlet boxes, indicated on Drawings as back-to-back on a common wall, horizontally
so as to maintain acoustical isolation between adjacent rooms. Install a 2"x4" stud between
boxes in drywalls.
M.
Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes. Mortar boxes in place.
N.
Use multiple-gang boxes where more than one device are mounted together; do not use
sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems.
FASTENING OF BOXES
A.
Fasten outlet boxes in furred ceiling rigidly to the supporting structure.
B.
Install boxes plumb and square with building lines.
C.
Install boxes independent of conduit.
INSTALLATION OF WIREWAYS
A.
Bolt indoor wireways to wall using two-piece hangers. Install level. Mount rain-tight
wireways in horizontal position only.
B.
All knockouts shall be field cut into the wireways with approved hole saws or punches. Close
all unused openings with approved plugs.
26 05 33 - 7
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 26 05 53 – IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDED
A.
1.2
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.3
1.4
1.5
The requirements of the "General Conditions" and the "Supplementary Conditions", and
Division 1" Sections of this specification, shall apply to this section of the Division.
Provide identification of electrical product as specified and indicated.
REFERENCES
A.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
B.
2011 National Electrical Code.
C.
D.
969 - Marking and labeling systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit identification method, mounting location and nomenclature for each item of
equipment and system with the respective equipment and system submittals.
B.
Submit manufacturer's technical product data on each type of identification product.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
2.
1.6
Comply with the identification requirements of NFPA 70.
Comply with the identification requirements of UL 969.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Manufacturer's Nameplates:
1.
B.
Provide manufacturer's standard equipment nameplates, permanently affixed,
indicating manufacturer's product data information, including model and serial
number information, electrical ratings and information required by the various
independent testing organizations, such as Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and
Industry Standards Organizations, such as the National Electrical Manufacturer's
Association.
Equipment and System Identification:
1.
In addition to the manufacturer's nameplates, provide identification
system equipment as specified and indicated.
2.
Provide the identification background colors for the following systems:
a.
b.
of
electrical
Black: General power systems unless specified otherwise.
Red: Control wiring.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53 - 1
Genesee County CARD
c.
Blue: Fire alarm system equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE NAMEPLATES
A.
Provide engraving stock, white melamine plastic laminate face color and black core plies
(letter color).
B.
Provide 3/16" high lettering with lines of information as specified.
C.
Punch label for mechanical fastening and provide self-tapping stainless steel screws, except
where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate.
CONDUIT MARKERS
A.
Provide pre-printed, flexible or semi-rigid, permanent, plastic-sheet conduit markers designed
to extend 360 degrees around conduit.
B.
Provide attachment by one of the following means
1.
2.
3.
C.
Provide 8" minimum length for 2" and smaller conduit and 12" minimum length for conduit
larger than 2".
D.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Adhesive lap joint of marker.
Matching adhesive plastic tape at each end or marker.
Pretension snap-on.
Electromark Company, Div. of Permar Systems, Inc.
Ideal Industries, Inc.
Seton Name Plate Corp.
CABLE/CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION BANDS
A.
Provide vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive marker band of wrap-around type, either pre-numbered
plastic coated type, or with-on type with clears plastic self-adhesive cover flaps.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
2.4
PLASTIC SIGNS
A.
2.5
W.H. Brady Corp.
Raychem Corp.
Provide self-adhesive or pressure sensitive, pre-printed, flexible vinyl signs for operational
instruction or warnings of sizes suitable for application areas and adequate for visibility.
PLASTIC TAPE
A.
Provide self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than three mils thick by 1/2" wide with color as
specified.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
3M Co.
26 05 53 - 2
Genesee County CARD
2.
W.H. Brady Co.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to equipment and system specification sections for specific identification installation
requirements.
B.
Thoroughly clean surface to which identification material will be affixed.
C.
Plastic-Laminate Sign Installation:
1.
2.
Securely fasten to equipment utilizing screws or contact-type adhesive for equipment
conditions, which should not or cannot penetrate the equipment.
Mount signs on equipment front exteriors to be easily viewed. Mount signs for
different but adjacent equipment and for common equipment lineups at the same
height above finished floor.
26 05 53 - 3
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 26 24 00 - DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
1.2
DESCRIPTION
A.
This work consists of furnishing all labor, materials and equipment required in connection
with the distribution system, complete with accessories and incidentals in accordance with the
Drawings and Specifications.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
1.4
1.5
Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables, Section 260519.
Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems, Section 260529.
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI - American National Standards Institute
B.
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
C.
IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
D.
NEC – 2011 National Electrical Code
E.
NEMA - National Electrical Manufactures Association
F.
UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All equipment and parts specified herein shall bear the “UL” Approved label.
B.
All enclosures shall be in accordance with the 2011 National Electrical Code.
A.
All distribution equipment, panelboards, and switches shall be crated, shipped and delivered
to the job site in a manner as to protect all equipment in place against damage of any kind.
Damaged materials shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DISTRIBUTION, LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE PANELS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Panels shall be dead-front safety type with thermal magnetic molded case breakers or fused
switch units as scheduled.
DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
26 24 00 - 1
Genesee County CARD
2.2
B.
Panel busses and main lugs or main breakers shall have current ratings and voltage
characteristics as scheduled and shall be all copper construction.
C.
Panels, as a complete unit shall have a rating equal to or greater than any of the integrated
equipment.
D.
Terminals shall be UL listed for type of wire specified.
E.
Voltage, phases and ampacity shall be as scheduled.
F.
All panels shall have a 100% neutral bus and a 100% ground bus.
G.
Spare positions, when scheduled, shall be complete with protective device for future wiring.
Space positions, when scheduled, shall be completely bussed ready for insertion of protective
devices.
LIGHTING AND POWER PANELS WITH BREAKERS, 120/240V-1PH-3W
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.3
Square D, Type NQ.
B.
Boxes shall be code gauge galvanized steel with proper gutter space for all wiring and
connections. Fronts shall have concealed trim clamps, concealed hinges and flush stainless
steel lock. All panels shall be keyed alike.
C.
Breakers for panelboards shall be quick-make, quick-break, trip indicating, with common trip
on all multi-pole breakers, thermal magnetic action, including temperature compensation,
with toggle switching action to be independent of tripping action. Breakers shall be plug-on
type with an interrupting rating of 10,000 RMS amperes symmetrical at 120/240 volts.
D.
Panelboard circuit directories shall be typed in upper case letters to indicate electrical loads.
Directories shall indicate panelboard name, voltage, phase, wire, and branch circuits.
Panelboard interiors shall be cleaned of dust and debris.
E.
Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes of panelboards.
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Square D, Type QMB.
B.
Furnish and install distribution panelboards as indicated on the Drawings.
C.
Panelboard assembly shall be a totally enclosed cubicle. Shall be fabricated from die formed
12 gauge minimum steel with rolled edges. Size of wiring gutters shall be in accordance with
UL Standard 67. Finish shall consist of a rust inhibiting phosphate treatment with one coat of
hot spray alkyd base blue gray lacquer or baked enamel. Complete panelboard shall be listed
by Underwriters Laboratories and shall bear the UL label.
D.
Fusible disconnect switches, quick-make, quick-break type, with full cover interlock and
Class R fuse clips. Panelboard switches shall be identified neatly to indicate loads served. All
bus and load side connections are to be accessible from the front and shall be removable from
the front.
26 24 00 - 2
Genesee County CARD
2.4
DISCONECT SWITCHES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.5
Square D, Type "Heavy Duty".
B.
Disconnect switches shall be provided where indicated or required except when integrally
mounted on items of equipment provided by other trades.
C.
Disconnect switches shall be fusible or non-fusible as indicated in a NEMA Type 1 or Type
3R housing as required by the location.
D.
Switches shall be quick-make, quick-break with dual horsepower ratings. Switch handles shall
physically indicate "ON" and "OFF" position. Handles shall be capable of accepting three
padlocks having heavy-duty industrial type shackles. Covers shall be interlocked with the
switch handles to prevent opening in the "ON" position. A bypass means shall be provided to
allow authorized personnel to release the interlocking for inspection purposes when a switch
is "on". Switches shall meet IIT requirements. Switches shall contain Class R fuse clips.
MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.6
Square D, Class 2510.
Single-phase manual starters shall be toggle type without pilot light for 120 or 240
volt motors with one or two thermal overload elements as required.
Where manual starters are flush mounted, provide a stainless steel plate; all other
enclosures shall be NEMA 1. The enclosure shall be standard factory gray paint.
FUSES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Bussmann
B.
Fuses rated 600 amps and below shall be dual element cartridge type and shall have a short
circuit rating of 200,000 rms amps. Fuses shall be Bussmann “Low-Peak”, Type RK1 as
indicated on the Drawings, for all fusible equipment with rejection type fuse clips.
C.
Fuses for all circuits, motors, and other equipment shall be selected in accordance with the
2002 National Electrical Code, to provide a coordinated system of over-current protection.
Thus, in case of a fault or overload, only the fuses nearest the fault or overload shall open.
Fuses selected for branch circuit protection of motors with other thermal overload protection
shall be not rated greater than 150% of full load motor current.
D.
The Electrical Contractor shall install all required fusing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
All electrical distribution equipment shall be set plumb and square with building lines. Panels,
in general, shall be installed with tops 6'-0" above finish floor.
B.
The secondary power and lighting feeders shall be provide impedance as per ANSI, provided,
installed, and connected as shown complete.
26 24 00 - 3
Genesee County CARD
C.
All feeders shall be installed in conduit and shall be concealed or exposed as indicated, of size
as shown on the Drawings. Pull boxes of ample size shall be installed as indicated and/or
required to facilitate pulling of cables.
D.
Provide and install all fittings, hangers, supports, and junction boxes and make all connections
for the complete installation as indicated on the drawings.
E.
Branch feeders shall be provided and installed in conduit as indicated on Drawings or as
required. Refer to Electrical Requirements for wire and conduit requirements.
F.
Connecting conduits shall not be used to support the panels.
G.
Unused openings in panels shall be plugged.
H.
Provide 10% of each size and type of fuses rated at 600 volts or less, but in no case less than
one set of three.
26 24 00 - 4
Genesee County CARD
SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTIONS INCLUDED
A.
1.2
DESCRIPTION
A.
This work consists of furnishing all labor, materials and equipment required to install all
switches and receptacles, complete with accessories and incidentals in accordance with the
Drawings and Specifications.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
1.
B.
2.
3.
C.
FB11 - Plugs, receptacles and connector of the pin and sleeve type for hazardous
locations.
WD1 - General - Purpose wiring devices.
WD6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
5- Surface metal electrical raceways and fittings.
20 - General - Use snap switches.
498 -Electrical attachment plugs and receptacles.
943 -Ground - Fault circuit interrupters.
1054 - Special - Use switches.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
WC596F - General specification for electrical power connector.
National Electrical Manufacturers Associates (NEMA):
1.
1.4
Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables, Section 260519.
Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems, Section 260529.
Lighting, Section 265100.
Submit manufacturer's technical product data on wiring devices and equipment specified and
indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
A firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of wiring devices and equipment of type and size
specified and indicated, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar services for not
less than five years.
B.
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 1
Genesee County CARD
1.
2.
3.
1.6
Provide wiring devices per NEMA WD1 and WD6.
Provide wiring devices per UL 20 and 498.
Provide wiring devices per Fed. Spec. WD596F.
A.
Protect all switches and receptacles from harmful elements when stored at the job site. Store
aboveground and in dry places. Keep all devices free of dirt and other foreign matter.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WIRING DEVICES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
2.2
Hubbell, Inc.
Pass & Seymour, Inc.
MATERIALS
A.
All colors of devices and plates shall be verified and approved by the Architect/Engineer prior to
installation.
B.
Switches:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Receptacles:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Heavy duty construction, totally enclosed construction base and cover, quiet type
phenolic toggle type, Specification Grade, rated 120/277 volts AC and 20 amperes, silver
alloy contacts, equipped with insulated mounting yoke, plaster ears, side and rear wiring
terminals and ground wire terminal, Hubbell HBL1220BK Series.
Provide single pole, double pole, three-way and four-way switches as indicated.
Provide black colored wiring devices unless otherwise indicated or specified.
Single gang size, Specification Grade, polarized, duplex, parallel blade, U-grounding slot
with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, ground terminals and poles internally
connected to mounting yoke.
Provide back wiring by a screw actuated clamp and side-wiring screw terminals.
Provide black colored wiring devices unless otherwise directed by the
Architect/Engineer.
Provide 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire rating with NEMA 5-20R configuration,
Hubbell HBL5362BK.
Where indicated, provide receptacles with ground fault circuit interrupter. Outlets shall
have feed-thru design to protect all outlets on the line side of the circuit GFCI NEMA 520R, Hubbell GFTR20BK.
Weatherproof duplex receptacles shall have ground fault circuit interrupter, Hubbell,
GFTR20BK.
Isolated ground receptacles for computer, data processing equipment, and other electronic
equipment shall be, Hubbell CR5352IGBK. Run green insulated, copper equipment
ground wire from receptacle(s) back to panelboard.
Wiring Device Plates:
1.
WIRING DEVICES
Provide wall plates for single and combination wiring devices, of types, sizes, ganging
and cutouts as required for associated wiring devices.
26 27 26 - 2
Genesee County CARD
2.
3.
4.
Provide plates, wh

project manual - Genesee County

Transcription

Similar documents

Atlantis Energy Systems Inc.

Pharmaceutical Facility Process Piping Installation

The Brimi Cuisine Education Office is a joint effort

Kitchens with the Puustelli group - Piri-Piri

Product sheet BBPE050.4A

welcome to 68 duggan avenue

1335BT - ADP Lemco

Pegasus final w industries

Rear Fold, Rear Braced, Bent Mast

Pegasus Summary offset copy